General Specification Road and Bridges Rv-2016

GOVERNMENT OF THE FEDERAL REPUBLIC OF NIGERIA
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
(ROADS AND BRIDGES)
VOLUME II
REVISED 2016
THE DIRECTOR OF FEDERAL HIGHWAYS

FEDERAL M INISTRY OF POW ER, W ORKS
& HOUSING
HEADQUARTERS
ABUJA, NIGERIA
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (ROADS AND BRIDGES)
SECTION VI: ROADW ORKS

CLAUSES
6000 GENERAL............................................................................................................................ m
V
PART (A) - DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS
6001 HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT.........................................................................................................................I ll
6002 VERTICAL ALIGNMENT................................................................................................................................112
6003 ROLL-OVER.......................................................................................................................................................113
6004 CONTRACTOR TO CALCULATE LEVELS......................... 113
6005 CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS.................................................................................................................. 113
(CLAUSES 6006 - 6099 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)
. PART (B) - EARTHW ORKS, DRAINAGE, ETC.

(1) MATERIAL
6100 GENERAL...........................................................................................................................................................115
6101 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL............................. ............................................................ ;................................115
6102 FILLING MATERIAL.......................................................... -...................... .................................... -............. 115
6103 SELECTED LATERITIC MATERIAL...........................................................................................................115
6105 RUBBLE AND PITCHING STONES.................................................................................................... 115
(CLAUSES 6 1 0 6 -6 1 1 9 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)
(II) W ORKM ANSHIP

6120 SITE CLEARANCE.................................... :•.......................... ............... ......................................................... 116
6121 SCARIFYING EXISTING SURFACE..................................................................................-............. ： ........ 118
6122 EARTHWORKS................................................................................................................................................. 118
6123 PAYMENT FOR EARTHWORKS.............................................................................. —.120
6X24 SELECTION OF SOIL FOR FILL....................................................................................................................121
6125 COMPACTION................................................................................................................... 122
6126 BORROW P I T S -...................... —.......................-..........................-........................................................... 124
6127 SAND FILL—....... .......................... ........ ......... -................................•:........................................... —.125
6128 EXCAVATION TO BE KEPT FREE FROM WATER........................................................... 126
6X29 ............................... ................................... ：
SLIPS...-■■一— ..................-................... .........................—............. .. 126
6130 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL BELOW FORMATION LEVEL..................... 126
6131 SWAMP AREAS .......... —____ . . . . . . . . . .................... .................................... ......... .................................126
6132 FORMATION LEVEL ..... ...... .................. 128
必於： P R E P A R E 。即 F FQRMATI祕一 • 丄二 ..... ........... ............ ..... ................ ： ........... .................， 128
6 i3 4 TRIMMING 蚀 SLOPES;—"’" " : . : ................................ 128
* ' . ^ ' • '• •
BACKFILLING 0 F B ^ S T 0 ^ B€^R(>W P i m :……：,................ :••二............ ..... ...............—

- . . . . . 129
6137 EMBANKMENT IN B A D .G R O U ^ .•••"••_ :_ • • • • :........... .......129
BACKFILLBSp..::..—…."......:二乙 ….… ......................... .............................. ...........................,...129
6139 GRASSING OF EMBANKMENTS, CUTTINGS, VERGES, ETC........................................................... 130
6140^ ROADSIDE DRAINAGE DITCHING........................ 130
614t CONCRETE DRySNSl .... .....二…二l i " . ................. ........................ ............................. ........ !•......... .."•••;〇〇
6142 SUB-SOIL DRAINS-................ .； :.................... ： ................. ............................................................ ............. 131
6143 CUT-OFF DITCHING........ ............................. ..........................................................：......................................13 J
6144 EXCAVATION FOR CULVEltTS...： ............... .........:............... ................................................ ......................131
6145 DEMOLITION OF EXISTING CULVERTS................................................................................. -...........132
6146 廳 — 奢丄 …___.................. 133
S ,■ r.
6147 EXTENSION OF EXISTING PIPE CULVERS......................... .........................................................135

6148 ACCESS CULVERTS.......................................................... ........................................................................... 135
6149 BOX CULVERTS.................................................................................. ."..........................................................135
6150 EXTENSIONS TO EXISTING BOX CULVERTS....................................................................... ............ 135
6151 CORRUGATED METAL "ARMCO” CULVERTS ................................................................................ 】 35
6152 INLETS AND OUTLETS OF CULVERTS........................................................... ..................... ............... 136
6153 CLEARING DRAINS AND CULVERTS..................................................................................... ............... 137
6154 PITCHING................................................................................-...................................................... - 1 3 7
6155 APPROVAL OF METHOD............................................................ -....................................................... - 1 3 7
6156 PREVENTION OF DAMAGE TO COMPLETED PAVEMENT.............................................. - 1 3 7
6157 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION............................................................-..........- ....................................138
6158 ROLLERS....................................................................................... .•••_•................. -............ -..............................138
6159 VIBRATORY COMPACTORS ........................................................ -.................... . 138
6160 TRENCH EXCAVATION FOR WIDENING OF EXISTING PAVEMENT..........................................138
6161 PREPARATION OF SUB-GRADE ........................ .--••••__..-............................................................. _•••_138
6162 COMPLETION AND SHAPING OF SUB-GRADE.......... .................................. .................................... 139
6163 COMPLETION OF VERGES AND MEDIANS ................................-................................................139
6164 STRIPPING TOPSOIL........................ -............................................................ - ........ ............ ••-.................139
6165 CATCHPITS AND CASCADES.................................................... ..... .- - ■ - - ............. .............................. 140
_ TESTS
6180 TESTS FOR THE SELECTION OF FILLING MATERIAL...................................................................140
6181 TESTS FOR THE CLASSIFICATION AND CONTROL OF
COMPACTED SUB-GRADE AND FILLING................................................ ................................••••...“••■••...140
6182 TRIAL SECTIONS TO DETERMINE TECHNIQUE....................-................................... -..................141
PART (C) - SUB-BASE, BASE COURSE, ETC.

(I) LATERITE
6200 GENERAL ...... ....... ...... ...............................................................一. . ........— —.141

6201 MATERIALS FOR COMPACTED SUB-BASE COURSE AND BASE COURSE............................. 141
6202 ROCK LATERITE FOR SUB-BASE COURSE AND BASE COURSE...............................................143
WORKMANSHIP
6205 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS.................................................................................. ..... ................ ........... 143
6206 BORROW PITS FOR SUB-BASE, BASE COURSE AND
HARD-SHOULDER MATERIALS ...................................................................-........................................ 143
6207 COMPLETION OF SUB-BASE C O U R S E .................................................................... ............... — 144
6208 COMPLETION OF BASE COURSE.............................................................. ................................... ...........144
6209 ROCK LATERITE FOR BASE COURSE.........................................-............. - ................ - 1 4 5
6210 SURFACING OF BASE COURSE........ .......................................................................—_____ ________145
6211 PREPARATION OF BASE COURSE TO RECEIVE BITUMEN......................... ................................. 145
TESTS
6215 TESTS FOR THE SELECTION OF LATERITE SUB-BASE
COURSE AND BASE COURSE MATERIALS...........-....................................-.............. -........................M5
6216 TESTS FOR CLASSIFICATION AND CONTROL OF COMPACTED LATERITIC
SUB-BASE COURSE AND BASE COURSE.......................................................................................—146
6217 TRIAL SECTIONS OF LATERITE SUB-BASE COURSE AND BASE COURSE............................ 147
(II) SOIL CEMENT SPECIFICATION

6220 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................... ...................... ....... —
.............. .147
6221 MATERIALS FOR SOIL CEMENT STABILIZATION................. 147
6222 APPROVAL.................................................................................. .150
6223 GENERAL METHOD OF SAMPLING OF MATERIALS: ................................................................... 150
6224 SAMPLING OF MATERIALS TO BE STABILIZED BORROW PITS................................................ 150
6225 SAMPLING OF MATERIALS - STOCKPILES -......................................................................................150
6226 SAMPLING OF MATERIALS - EXISTING MATERIAL ALREADY IN PLACE............................150
6227 TESTS FOR THE SELECTION ON SOIL TO BE STABILISED............................................................150
6228 DESIGN CRITERIA...................................................................................... 150
6229 PROCEDURE FOR ESTIMATION OF CEMENT CONTENT................................................................151
6230 CONSTRUCTION.......................................................................................... 152
6231 MULTIPASS - MIX-IN-PLACE METHOD.......... -••••■_._-........................................... 152
6232 TRAVELLING MIXING MACHINE METHOD............................................................................. —. ........153
6233 COMPACTION............................................................... - ............................................................................ 153
6234 GENERAL REQUIREMENT FOR PLANT MIX PROCESS ..................................................................153
6235 BATCH M IX IN G ..................................................................... 153
6236 WEIGHT PROPORTIONING-............................. -....................................... -................-....................... - 1 5 4
6237 VOLUMETRIC PROPORTIONING...................... —.154
6238 CONTINUOUS M IX IN G ........................... 154
6239 SPREADING-....................................................................................-................................................................ J54
6240 COMPACTION.............. 155
6241 FINISHINGS .................................................... - - ................................................... ................................156
6242 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS....................................... -•••••-............................................................................ 156
6243 CURING....................................... -..........-............................ -............... ............................................. .............156
6244 FIELD CONTROL TESTS-.................................-..................................... -................... - ........................- . 1 5 6
6245 TEST RECORDS .................................................................. JI57
6246 ADDITIONAL CONSTRUCTION RECORDS...........................................................................................157
6247 SUPERVISION........... - ............................................................... -.................................. - ............................. 158
(III) CRUSHED STONE

6250 GENERAL.................................................................................................................. 158
6251 MATERIALS.............................................................................. -........-.............................................................158
6252 GRADING OF CRUSHED STONE............. ........................................-....................................................._.J59
6253 PREPARATION OF SUB-GRADE ............................ 160
6254 FORMS ............. —.................................. - .......................... .................................................... .................... - . 1 6 0
6255 CRUSHED STONE TO BE LAID AND COMPACTED IN LAYERS................................... .160
6256 LAYING A N D COMPACTING CRUSHED STONE-DRY PROCESS...................................................161

6257 C A S H E D STONE BA SE COURSE LAID BY THE WET PROCESS.................. 161
6258 PREPARATION OF CRUSHED STONE BASE COURSE TO
RECEIVE BITUM INOUS SURFACING................................................................................... .....................162
6259 COM PACTION........ .......................................................................... 162
(H 〇 CONCRETE CARRIAGEWAY CONSTRUCTION

6260 GENERAL...................—............................................................................................................162
M ATERIALS
6261 C E M E N T -............................................................ .................... -................................. -.............-••••_.-........— 162
6262 AGGREGATE .................. .................................................. .............................................................-......................162
6263 REINFORCING ST E E L ......................................................................................................... 162
6264 DOWEL BARS A N D TIE B A R S ...................... - ............................. ..................................... ......................... 162
6265 SIDE F O R M S ................... 162
6266 RAILS FOR M ACHINE FINISHED CONCRETE CARRIAGEWAY....................................................162
6267 PREFORMED JOINT FILLER............. -........-....................- ..................... ................ ..................................162
6268 JOINT PRIMER-............ -........................................................................................ -........................................... .163
6269 JOINT SEALING COM POUND..................................-................. -.....-............................................................ 163
W O R K M A N SH IP
6270 G E N E R A L............................................................. -............................................ ...................................................163
6271 THICKNESS OF S L A B S .............................................. ............. -............-..................- .............................. .-163
6272 CONCRETE D IST R IB U T O R ........................................... ••••■-...................................................... ....................163
6273 COMPACTING A N D FINISHING M A C H IN E ............................................................................................ 163
6274 WATERPROOF UNDERLAY ...................... 164
6275 SETTING, CHECKING A N D STRIKING OF SIDE F O R M S ......................... 164
6276 SETTING CHECKING AN D STRIKING OF RAILS FOR
M ACHINE-LAID C O N C R ETE ............................. - - ................................... .............................—............... 164
6277 QUANTITY A N D DISTRIBUTION OF STEEL REINFORCEMENTS................................................ 165
6278 PLACING OF STEEL REINFORCEMENT FOR CARRIAGEWAY....................................................... 165
6279 TREATMENT AT M ANHOLES ................................................................................— -••••.165
6280 JOINTS IN CONCRETE CARRIAGEWAYS GENERAL REQUIREM ENTS.................................... 165
6281 TRANSVERSE JOINTS......................... ............................. ................. ....................... ：
......................... 166
6282 LONGITUDINAL JOINTS............................................................................... 166
6283 SAWING AT JOINTS........................................................... 166
6284 SEALING OF JO IN T S ............................ -................................. -.......................................-.............................. 167
6285 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE.......................:..........................-....................................... 167
6286 TRIAL MIXES A N D TRIAL SLABS......... ................ ....................;............................................ .._ ..._ 1 6 7
6287 PLACING CONCRETE.......................................................................... 168
6288 SPREADING A N D COMPACTION WITH A FINISHING
MACHINE OF REINFORCED CONCRETE ROAD S L A B S .........-............................ ......... -............... 168
6289 SPREADING A N D COMPACTION WITH A VIBRATING
SCREED OF REINFORCED CONCRETE ROAD S L A B S ....................................-................................168
!SSSS!!S!!!!!!!!!S9!!BSBS!!S!!S!!SBSS!SSSS5BjB!S5SSSS55S5l
6290 SPREADING A N D COMPACTION WITH A FINISHING MACHINE OR

VIBRATING SCREED ON CONCRETE SLABS OR HAUNCHES USED AS
ROAD B A SE S............................................................................................................................................... 169
6291 CURING C O N C R ETE............................................................................................................................... 169
6292 ACCURACY OF CONCRETE SURFACE USING FINISHING OR
VIBRATING SC R EED .....................................-.....................................................................................169
6293 TRAFFIC OVER FINISHED W O R K .................................................. ..................................................170
TESTS
6294 SELECTION A N D CONTROL TESTS...................................................................-...............................170
6295 TRIAL SECTIONS............................................................................................-.......................................... 170
PART (D): SURFACING

(I) TWO COAT BITUM INOUS SURFACE DRESSING
6300 GENERAL..... ............................................................... —
.............. ................................ ......................................n o
MATERIALS
6301 MATERIALS FOR SURFACE DRESSING............................................................................................170
6302 BITUM INOUS EM ULSION.............................................. -.......................................................................171
(CLAUSES 6303 - 6309 INCLUSIVE NOT U SED)
WORKMANSHIP
6310 HEATING OF CUT-BACK BITUMEN.................................................................................................... 171
6311 CUT-BACK BITUM EN PRIME COAT-......................................................…
-........................................ 172
6312 SPRAYING OF CUT-BACK BITUMEN PRIME COAT......................................................... 172
6313 FIRST COAT SURFACE DRESSING..................................................................... 173
6314 FINAL SURFACE OF CARRIAGEWAY....................................... 174
6315 WET WEATHER.................................................................................... 174
6316 REGULATION OF TRAFFIC OVER SURFACE D RESSING .,.......................................................174
(CLAUSES 6 3 1 7 - 6 3 1 9 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)
TESTS
6320 TESTS FOR B IT U M E N ..................................... 174
6321 TESTS FOR AGGREGATES, ROADSTONE A N D CHIPPINGS....................................................174
6322 TESTS FOR BINDER DISTRIBUTORS - - .......................................................................................... 175
6323 TESTS FOR RATE OF APPLICATION.................................................. 175
(II) BITUMINOUS MACADAM SURFACINGS

6330 G ENERAL........................... 175
MATERIALS
6331 BITUMEN MACADAM GENERAL ..................................................................................................... 175
6332 BITUM EN MACADAM MATERIALS............................................................................ 175
6333 BITUMEN MACADAM APPROVAL OF M ATERIALS......................... - .................175
6334 BITUMEN MACADAM COMPOSITION OF MIXES........................................................................175
W O R K M A N SH IP
6340 MACADAM MIXING PLANT............................................... .............................................i 76
6341 BITUMEN M ACADAM M IXING.................................................................................. 176
6342 BITUM EN M ACADAM TRANSPORTING M IXED MATERIAL................................................ 177
6343 BITUM EN M ACADAM PREPARATION OF SURFACE PRIOR TO L A Y IN G ...................... 177
6344 BITUM EN M ACADAM LAYING............................................................................................................177
6345 BITUM EN M ACADAM SPREADER OR FINISHER................. —177
6346 HAND SPREADING NOT ALLOW ED......................................-................ -....................... -— ........177
6347 BITUM EN M ACADAM ROLLING......................................................................................... —........... 178
6348 FIELD DENSITY OF COMPACTED BITUM EN MACADAM ............................................. ..178
6349 TRIAL A R E A S........................................................... -......... -........................................... ......................179
6350 BITUM EN M ACADAM FINISHED LEVELS....................... -..179
6351 BITUM EN M ACADAM JOINTS.............................................................. 179
6352 BITUM EN M ACADAM DAM AGED W O RK .......................... ....................................................... _..l 80
TESTS
6360 BITUM EN M ACADAM TESTS.......................... -......... -• ••-......................................................... — 180
6361 FREQUENCY OF TESTS: BITUMEN M A C A D A M ........................... 180
6362 INDEPENDENT TESTS: BITUM EN M A C A D A M ................ -........................................................180
6363 M A N U FA C T U R E R S CERTIFICATE FOR BITUMEN.^............... ............................... ................. 180
6364 CONTRACTOR TO TEST MATERIALS: BITUM EN M ACADAM ：..."...:................... 181
6365 NOTICE OF TESTS: BITUM EN M ACADAM ............................. ig i
6366 SAMPLES TO BE IN DUPLICATE....................... -.................................................................... ............181
6367 COST OF TESTS BITUMEN M A C A D A M ...-..............................- ................... .......... ................. 181
(in) ASPHALTIC CONCRETE

6370 GENERAL........................................................ .............................................................181
6371 MATERIAL.......................................................... “ ..."… ________ 1.181
一
6372 APPROVAL OF M A T E R I A L S :...........................................................，“. . . . ...............,..--183

6373 SAMPLINQ........................ .................... -183'
6374 GOMJÔSITION OF MIXES. . .一 ‘ :<_.1 8 §
、 . . . ..■••':.二,_:’
6375 PREPARATION … .......-•••…..."•••••":•

TRANSPORTING MIXED MATERIALS
.6 3 7 7 PREPARATION OP AREA TO BE PAVED —，路7
地 '
6m / TRIAL'AREAS........... ...... .................... .
6379 ' COMPACTION.............. ................... -
6380 - J O I N T S ............... .. . . " ............... — .......
6381 FIELD DENSITY OF ROLLED ASPHALT :.................... ............•••“........................... … :'19>: ■
6382 FINISHED LEVELS................................................................... .••••"..:________ … •■却、
6383 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MIXING PLA N T ：
.............................：_ …l f e ,
…
6384 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVERS...............................................-.............. ................... ......... ..
6385 INSPECTION A N D CONTROL.OF. ASPHALT M IX IN G ,PLA N T-
PART (E): MISCELLANEOUS

6400 KILOMETRE POSTS ......................................................................................................... 200
6401 CULVERT B E A C O N S ................................................................................................................................. 201
6402 ROAD WARNING S IG N S ............................................................. 201
6403 ADVANCE DIRECTION SIGNS ............................................................................................................ 201
6404 CARRIAGEWAY MARKINGS...................................................................................................... 202
6405 PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS ............... -.................................................. .....................................：...2〇2
6406 PRECAST CONCRETE EDGING BLOCKS ..................... 203
6407 PRECAST CONCRETE PAVING SL A B S.......................................... .203
6408 GULLEY K E R B S .......................................................................................................................................... 203
6409 GULLEY PIPES.......................................................................................................... -................................ -203
6410 PRECAST CONCRETE C H A N N E L S.................................................................................................... 204
6411 CAT’S EYES................ 204
6412 STREET LIGHTING.....................................................................................................................................204
6413 TRAFFIC LIGHTS.........................................................................................................................................204
6414 ILLUMINATED GUARD P O S T S .........................................-................................................................. 204
6415 GUARD RAILS DRAW INGS.................................................................................................................... 205
6416 DELINEATORS..............................................................................................................................................206
6417 TELEPHONE P O L E S....................................................................................................-............................ 208
ANNEXURE TO THE GENERAL SPECIFICATION

(Road and Bridges)
PENETRATION (GROUTED) MACADAM
6500 G ENERAL............................................................................................ -......................................................... 209
6501 MATERIALS ............................................................................................ -.................................... ...............209
6502 W ORKM ANSHIP.......................................................................................................................................... 210
6503 TRIAL SECTIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 211
6504 TESTS................................................................................................................................................................ 211
=xv
§ GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (ROADS AND BRIDGES)
FEDERAL MINISTRY OF POWER^ WORKS & HOUSING

疆 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (ROADS AND BRIDGES)
INDEX TO SPECIFICATION
Pages
CLAUSES: INDEX.................................................................................................... i - xvi
SPECIFICATIONS:-
SECTION I GENERAL............................................................................... 1 - 2 2
SECTION II CONCRETE: MASS AND REINFORCED.......................... 2 3 -5 3
SECTION m PRESTRESSED CONCRETE................................................ 5 4 - 7 0
SECTION IV PILING......................................................................................7 1 - 8 4
SECTION V BRIDGEWORKS..................................................................... 85 - 108
SECTION VI ROADWORKS........................................................................ 109-211

SE C T IO N I - G E N E R A L
PART (A) ADMINISTRATION
CLAUSES Pages
1001 PRELIMINARY.................................................................................................................................................... 2
1002 DEFINITIONS....................................................................................................................................................... 2
1003 DESCRIPTION OF WORKS AND SCOPE OF CONTRACT................................................. 3
1004 LIAISON WITH ADJACENT WORKS............................................................................................................3
1005 AVOIDANCE OF DAMAGE TO W ORKS......................................................................................................3
1006 DATUM................................................................................................................................................................... 3
1007 SURVEYS AND LEVELS TO BE AS AGREED AS BASIS FOR M EASUREM ENT.......................... 3
1008 DIMENSIONS AND LEVELS...........................................................................................................................4
1009 PARTICULARS OF EXISTING W O R K S.......................................................................................................4
1010 WORKING DRAWINGS.................................................................................................................................... 4
1011 ALTERNATIONS OF DRAWINGS...................................................................................................................4
1012 DRAWINGS OF TEMPORARY WORKS TO BE SUBMITTED.............................................................. 4
1013 SETTING O U T ..................................................................................................................................................... 5
1014 NOTICE OF OPERATIONS........................................................................................................................... ...5
1015 EXISTING SERVICES ....................................................................................................................................... 5
1016 DAMAGE TO SERVICES.................................................................................................................................. 6
1017 FILLING HOLES AND TRENCHES .............................................................................................................. 6
1018 JOINT MEASUREMENT OF EXTRAS ......................................................................................................... 6
1019 PROTECTION FROM WEATHER................................................................................................................... 6
1020 WORKS TO BE KEPT FREE FROM WATER ........................................ 6
1021 STAFF ACCOMMODATION ETC.................................................................................................................. 6
1022 SUPPLY OF WATER AND ELECTRICITY..................................................................................................7
1023 RETURNS OF L A B O U R .................................................................................................................................. 7
1024 PHOTOGRAPHS.................................................................................................................................................7
1025 REPORTS OF ACCIDENTS OR UNUSUAL OCCURRENCE................................................................ 7
1026 MAINTENANCE OF W O R K S........................................................................................................................ 7
1027 AS-MADE DRAW INGS.................................................................................................................................... 8
1028 TRAFFIC ROUTES TO BE MAINTAINED AND WORKS TRAFFIC CONTROLLED.................... 8
1029 BARRICADES, WARNING AND DEVIATIONSIGNS.............................................................................. 9
1030 WEATHER CONDITIONS................................................................................................................................ 9
1031 OTHER WORKS AND SERVICES ................................................................................................................. 9
CLAUSES 1032 - 1039 NOT USED
PART (B) - MATERIALS AND TESTING

1040 MATERIALS TESTING LABORATORIES AND STAFF..........................................................................10
1041 TESTING OF MATERIALS............................................................................................................................ 11
1042 INDEPENDENT TESTS................................................................................................................................... 12
1043 INSPECTION ENGINEER...............................................................................................................................12
1044 MATERIALS SPECIFIED TO B.S..................................................................................................................14
1045 APPARATUS REQUIRED FOR TESTING...................................................................................................14
1046 NOTICE OF T E S T S ........................................................................................................................................ ,14
1047 SAM PLING ........................................................................................................................................................ 14
1048 SAMPLING OF MATERIALS FROM BORROW PITS ........................................................................... 14
1049 SAMPLING OF MATERIALS FROM STOCKPILES.................................................. 15
1050 TESTS TO BE CARRIED O U T ..................................................................................................................... 15
1051 UNSATISFACTORY TEST RESULTS........................................................................................................18

1052 TRIAL SECTIONS OF R O A D ..................................................................................................................... 18
1953 HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS....................................................................................... 20
PART (C) - MISCELLANEOUS

1060 ASSISTANCE FOR ENGINEER’S REPRESENTATIVE........................................................................20
1061 OFFICE ACCOMMODATION.................................... 21
1062 FENCING................................... 22
1063 COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS OF THE NIGERIAN RAILWAY
CORPORATION AND GOVERNMENT INSPECTOR OF RAILWAYS........................................... 22
1064 COMPLIANCE WITH THE REGULATIONS OF THE NIGERIAN PORT AUTHORITY...............22
1065 TAKING OVER OF SITE BY CONTRACTORS...................................................................................... 22
SECTION II
CONCRETE: MASS AND REINFORCED
2000 GENERAL.................................................................................................................................................... 25
PART ( A ) - MATERIALS
2001 CEMENT ......................................................................................................................................................... 25
2002 WATER ............................................................................................................................................................. 27
2003 AGGREGATES............................................................................................................................................... 27
2004 FINE AGGREGATES.................................................................................................................................... 30
2005 COARSE AGGREGATES .............................................................................................................................31
2006 STEEL REINFORCEMENT......................................................................................................................... 31
2007 WATERPROOF BUILDING PAPER........................................................................................................... 32
2008 JOINT SEALING COMPOUND AND PRIMER...................................................................................... 32
PART (B) - WORKMANSHIP

2009 PROPORTIONS OF CONCRETE MIXES................................................................................................. 32
2010 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN...........................................................................................................................33
2011 TRIAL MIXES .................................................... ......... , .................... •、..........................................................33
2012 MIXING OF CONCRETE.................................... 35
2013 QUALITY CONTROL OF CONCRETE.................................................................................................... 35
2014 TRANSPORTATION OF CONCRETE................ 40
2015 PLACING AND COMPACTION OF CONCRETE............................. 40
' 2016 CONCRETE PLACED UNDER WATER......................................................................... ...41
2017 PROTECTION AGAINST CHEMICAL ACTION..................................................................... .42
2018 ATTENDANCE OF JOINER AND STEEL FIXER.................................................................... 42
2019 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS............................ 42
2020 JOINTS TO PREVENT BONDING OF ADJACENT SURFACES....................................... 43
2021 SURFACE FINISHES........................................................................................... 43
2022 CURING OF CONCRETE................................ 43
2023 FORMWORK....................................................................................... :..........................................................44
2024 . REINFORCEMENT SCHEDULES ................................................... .47
2025 BENDING AND FIXING OF REINFORCEMENT ....... .............•.… ............................……47
PART (C) - PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS

2026 PRECAST CONCRETE U N IT S................................................................................................................ 49
PART (D) - CEMENT MORTARS AND GROUTS

2027 CEMENT MORTARS AND GROUTS...................................................................................................... 50
2028 BUILDING IN OF FOUNDATION BOLTS, FITTINGS, KERBS, ETC.........................................51
2029 EMPLOYMENT OF CONCRETE, MORTARS A N D G R O U T ........................................................52
2030 CEM ENT...........................................................................................................................................................52
2031 AGGREGATES................................................................................................................................................ 52
2032 GRANOLITHIC T O PPIN G .........................................................................................................................52
2033 THE SUB-FLOOR.......................................................................................................................................... 52
2034 L A Y IN G ............................................................................................................................................................52
2035 C U R IN G .................................................................................................................. 53
2036 RETARDATION OF DUSTING..................................................................................................................53
2037 CARBORUNDUM FIN ISH .........................................................................................................................53
2038 GRANOLITHIC MONOLITHIC TOPPING.......................................................................................... 53
2039 DAM P PRO O FING ........................................................................................................................................53
SECTION III
PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE SPECIFICATION
3000 G ENERAL........................................................................................................................................................ 56
PART (A) - MATERIALS

3001 CEM ENT...........................................................................................................................................................57
3002 AGGREGATES................................................................................................................................................ 57
3003 W ATER.............................................................................................................................................................. 58
3004 UNTENSIONED REINFORCEMENT..................................................................................................... 58
3005 PRESTRESSING STEEL............................................................................................................................. 58
3006 SHEATHING....................................................................................................................................................60
PART (B) - WORKMANSHIP

3007 CONCRETE PROPORTIONS............................. ....... .61
3008 FIELD TESTS............. ...................................................... .. 62
3009 BATCHING A N D M IX IN G ................ :.......... ........................................ .62
3010 PLACING OF CO NCRETE............... :........... ................................... .63
3011 CURING............................. ..................……. •63
3012 FORMWORK................................ ... .64
3013 SURFACE FINISH ............................. .......... ； ........... .64
3014 TO LERANCE.............................. ............... ......................... “…二……■ •64
3015 PRE-STRESSING ......... ........................ ...................................... .64
3016 ADDITIONAL REQUIREM ENTS..... .................................... ….… •69
3017 LIFTING A N D H A N D L IN G .......... ............... ........... ............................ •69
3018 QUANTITY A N D PAYMENT......... ........... ............... .......................... .70
j\y
S E C T IO N IV - P IL IN G
CLA U SES
4000 G E N E R A L ........................................................................................................................................................ 73
PART (A) - G EN ER A L
4001 TYPES OF P IL E S ........................................................................................................................................... 73
4002 APPROVAL OF TYPE OF PILES.............................................................................................................. 73
4003 CONTRACTOR TO DRIVE OR BORE P IL E S ....................................................... 73
4004 SUB-CONTRACTOR .................................................................................................................................. 73
4005 MANUFACTURE OF REINFORCED A N D PRESTRESSED, CONCRETE PILES.................73
4006 C E M E N T .......................................................................................................................................................... 73
4007 SETTING OUT OF P IL E S ........................................ 73
4008 ALIGNM ENT................................................................................................................................................... 73
4009 DRIVING WITH DROP HAMMERS OR SINGLE ACTING
STEAM H A M M E R S..................................................................................................................................... 74
4010 DRIVING WITH DOUBLE ACTION STEAM HAMMERS ............................................................ 74
4011 PROTECTION OF PILE B U T T S............................................................................................................... 74
4012 LEADS A N D F R A M E S .................................................................................................... 74
4013 DRIVING TO BE CONTINUOUS TO FINAL SET OR LEVEL...................................................... 74
4014 JETTING............................................................................................................................................................74
4015 DRIVING TO FINAL SET AND RECORD OF DRIVING ................................................................ 74
4016 RE-DRIVING HEAVED PILES..................................................................................................................74
4017 DAM AGED A N D MIS-DRIVEN PILES................................................................................................. 75
4018 OBSTRUCTIO NS........................................................................................................................................... 75
4019 CUTTING OFF PILES HEADS ETC........................................................................................................ 75
4020 BORED PILES OR C A S IN G S.................................................................................................................... 75
4021 PA Y M E N T ........................................................................................................................................................ 75
PART (B) - T E ST D R IV IN G A N D T E ST L O A D IN G O F PILES

4030 G E N E R A L ........................................................................................................................................................ 75
4031 RECORDING OF TEST RESULTS ..........................................................................................................75
4032 PROCEDURE FOR TESTING PILES OF TYRES A , B, C AND D ................................................ 76
4033 PROCEDURE FOR TESTING PILES OF TYPES “E” A N D “ F” .................................................... 76
4034 LATERAL DISPLACEM ENT TESTS ..................................................................................................... 76
4035 ASSESSM ENT OF RESULTS OF PILE LOADING A N D DRIVING TEST.................................76
4036 PAYMENT FOR TEST PILES AN D LOAD T E S T S ............................................................................ 77
(CLAUSES 4037 - 4049 INCLUSIVE NOT USED
PART (C) - P R E C A ST R EIN FO R C E D C O N C R E T E BEA R IN G

A N D SH EET PILES -TY PE WA W4
4050 G E N E R A L ........................................................................................................................................................ 77
4051 MOULDS A N D C O N C R E T IN G ............................................................................................................... 77
4052 STRIPPING AN D H A NDLING ....................................................................................... 77
4053 LENGTHENING OF P IL E S........................................................................................................................78
4054 STRIPPING HEADS OF P IL E S .................................................................................................................78
4055 PAYMENT FOR PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BERRING AN D SHEET PILES...78
PART (D) - CAST-IN-PLACE REINFORCED CONCRETE

PILES TYPES “B” AND “C”
4060 CAST-IN-PLACE REINFORCED CONCRETE PILES TYPE “ B” ................................................ 78

4061 CAST-IN-PLACE REINFORCED CONCRETE PILES TYPE “ C” ................................................ 79
4062 EQUIPM ENT....................................................................................................................................................79
4063 CONTROL OF INTERNAL PRESSURES............................................................................................... 79
4064 C O N C R E T E ..................................................................................... 79
4065 STEEL REINFORCEM ENT........................................................................................................................79
4066 PAYMENT FOR CAST-IN-PLACE REINFORCED CONCRETE
PILES TYPES “B ” A N D “C ，
，...................................................................................................................... 80
PART (E) - C A ST-IN -PLA C E R E IN FO R C E D C O N C R ETE PILES TYPE “D ”

4070 G EN ER A L........................................................................................................................................................ 80
4071 DETAILED METHOD OF CO NSTRUCTIO N......................................................................................80
4072 PAYMENT FOR CAST-IN-PLACE REINFORCED CONCRETE
PILES OF TYPE “D ” .....................................................................................................................................80
PART (F) - PR E ST R E SSE D C O N C R E T E C Y L IN D E R PILES TY PE “E ”

4080 G EN ER A L........................................................................................................................................................ 80
4081 M A N U FA C T U R E .......................................................................................................................................... 80
4082 HANDLING .....................................................................................................................................................81
4083 EQ UIPM ENT....................................................................................................................................................81
4084 REINFORCING S T E E L ................................................................................ 81
4085 CONCRETE....................................... 81
4086 C A S T IN G ..........................................................................................................................................................81
4087 C U R IN G ............................................................................................................................................................81
4088 METHOD OF HANDLING ........................................................................................................................81
4089 ASSEM BLY OF SECTIONS ...................................................................................................................... 81
4090 STRESSING OF PIL E S................................................................................................................................. 81
4091 GROUTING OF C A B L E S ........................................................................................................................... 82
4092 DRIVING RESISTANCE..............................................................................................................................82
4093 TENSION FORCES DURING D R IV IN G ............................................................................................... 82
4094 CONTROL OF INTERNAL PR ESSU R ES.............................................................................................. 82
4095 PRE-EXCAVATION.......................................................................................................................................82
4096 TO LER A N C E.................................................................................................................................................. 82
4097 C U T -O FF....................................................................................................................................... ..82
4098 PILE SPLICES OF BUILD UPS ............................................................................................................. _.82
4099 DEFECTIVE PILES ......................................................................................................................................82
4100 PAYM ENT ...................................................................................................................................................... 82
PART (G) - PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES OF TYPE “E”

4110 G EN ER A L.......................................................................................................................................................... 83
4111 METHOD OF MANUFACTURE ETC...........................................................................................................83
4112 PAYMENT .......................................................................................................................................................... 83
(CLAUSES 4 1 1 3 - 4 1 1 9 INCLUSIVE NOT USED
PART (H) - STEEL SHEET PILES

4120 STEEL SHEET PILES...................................................................................................................................... 83
4121 WELDING ELECTRODES ............................................................................................................................ 84
4122 PROTECTIVE PAINTING.............................................................................................................................. 84
4123 DRIVING ETC....................................................................................................................................................84
4124 THE RODS AND ROPES ............................................................................................................................... 84
4125 PAYMENT.......................................................................................................................................................... 84
SECTION V: BRIDGEWORKS
5000 GENERAL.......................................................................................................................................................... 87
PART (A) - PRELIMINARIES, EXCAVATIONS, FOUNDATIONS,

DEMOLITIONS, TEST LOAD ETC.
5001 GENERAL.......................................................................................................................................................... 87
5002 TRAFFIC DIVERSIONS .................................................................................................................................87
5003 CLEARING OF THE SITE ........................................................................................................................87
5004 WATER TRAINING AND PROTECTION WORKS..................................................................................87
5005 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING...........................................................................................................87
5006 PAYMENT FOR EXCAVATIONS FOR FOUNDATIONS........................................................................89
5007 EXCAVATION FOR FOUNDATION BELOW WATER LEV EL............................................................89
5008 PREPARATION FOR FOUNDATIONS: NORM AL..................................................................................90
5009 REMOVAL OF EXISTING STRUCTURES: GENERAL.........................................................................90
5010 EXPLOSIVES.....................................................................................................................................................91
5011 REMOVAL OF EXISTING SUPERSTRUCTURES AND
SUBSTRUCTURES: STEEL AND CONCRETE....................................................................................... 91
5012 REMOVAL OF EXISTING SUPERSTRUCTURE AND SUBSTRUCTURE: ALL TIMBER.........93
5013 TOTAL DEMOLITION OF EXISTING ABUTMENTS, PIERS AND LANDINGS........................... 93
5014 PARTIAL DEMOLITION OF EXISTING ABUTMENTS, PIERS AND LANDINGS........................93
5015 DISPOSAL AND RE-USE OF RUBBLE RESULTING FROM DEMOLITION..................................94
5016 PREPARATION OF SURFACES OF EXISTING ABUTMENTS,
PIERS, ETC., PRIOR TO PLACING CONCRETE IN CONTACT.........................................................94
5017 PREPARATION OF SURFACES OF EXISTING ABUTMENTS,
P正 RS, ETC.， PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION OF NON-BONDING JOINT.......................................94
5018 TESTS ON COMPLETED STRUCTURES................................................................................................. 94
5019 LOADING OF STRUCTURES: CONSTRUCTIONS, BACKFILLING, TRAFFIC, ETC...............95
5020 AS-MADE DRAWINGS...................................................................................................................................96
5021 SETTLEMENT OF BRIDGE AND APPROACHES..................................................................................96
5022 BEARINGS......................................................................................................................................................... 96
5023 ELASTOMERIC BEARING PADS................................................................................................................ 96
vii
：
PART (B) - STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

5030 GENERAL: MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP ................................................................................ 98
5031 WORKING DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................................ 98
5032 SCHEDULE OF PARTS ................................................................................................................................. 98
5033 MILD STEEL FOR STRUCTURAL MEMBERS ETC............................................................................ 98
5034 ROLLED STEEL PINS, KNUCKLE PINS, ROLLERS ................................................. .......................... 98
5035 STEEL CASTINGS FOR BEARINGS ......................................................................................................... 98
5036 PATTERNS OF CASTINGS ............................................................................................................................ 98
5037 GUNMETAL FOR BEARINGS ..................................................................................................................... 98
5038 FORGINGS .................................................................................................................................... :.................. 98
5039 RIVETS............................................................................................................................................................... 99
5040 BOLTS................................ 99
5041 HAND RAILING AND GUARD RAILING.............-................- ......... ........................... ............. .— 99
5042 HIGH TENSILE STEEL FOR WELDING..................................................................................... ........:"••••• 99
5043 HIGH TENSILE STEEL NOT TO BE W ELDED .........-............ .........................-...................................... 99
5044 HIGH TENSILE STEEL MARKING..........................................-................................................................ 99
5045 CAST STEEL............................................................. .......................... -.......................................................... 100
5046 CAST IRON— ................ -.......................................... ................................................................................ 100
5047 ELECTRODES........ ............................................................. -........ ..............-..........................-..................... 100
5048 GREASE FOR BEARINGS...................... .： ................ ............................ ......................... ............... ............ 100
5049 PAINT AND PAINTING............................ -...................................................... ................. - ........-................100
5050 INTERCHANGEABILITY OF PARTS.......................... 101
5051 PREPARATION EDGES AND E N D S ................................................................. 101
5052 HOLES FOR BOLTS AND RIVETS.............. ........................ 101
5053 RIVETS AND RIVETING............ ..-................................................................... ................................. .........-.101
5054 WASHERS...... .................................................................................... 102
5055 WELDING....................-............................................................................................................................... - 1 0 2
5056 JOINTS............................................................................ -.......................... - .............— ..........—.. . . . . . - 1 0 2
5057 NOTCHING OF FLANGES AND W EBS................................-................................................................. 102
5058 BENDING AND PRESSING..................... l 〇2
5059 SHOP ASSEMBLY............................................. 102
5060 MACHINING................................................................. .................................. ..-............-...................... ........ 103
5061 ERECTION AT MANUFACTURERS WORKS AND MARKING
UP FOR RE-ERECTION................................................................................... .................. -..............-••••102
5062 SHOP PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS............................. -................................................ 103
5063 GALVANIZING...................................................................................................................................... -.........103
5064 DRIFTS, SPANNERS ETC........................................................ 104
5065 NUMBERS OF SITE RIVETS, BOLTS, NUTS, SERVICE BOLTS, ETC ...•••........................................104
5066 MEASUREMENT FOR PAYMENT OF S T E E L W O R K -..................................................................... 105
5067 PACKING AND MARKING FOR SHIPMENT.................... .....................................： ...............................l 〇5
5068 ERECTION AT SITE............................................................................ ...................................— _ ■ 1 0 5
5069 SITE PAINTING ........................ ] 〇6
5070 ADDITIONAL STEELWORX INVOLVED IN THE
STRENGTHENING OF EXISTING BRIDGES.............................................. :•........................................ 106
5071 RE-USE OF GIRDERS, JOINTS, ETC., OBTAINED FROM
DISMANTLED STRUCTURES............................................................ —— ，
..................... -.................. — 107
5072 GROUTING BASE PLATES, ETC., OF BEARING............................................ 107
5073 EXPANSION JOINTS........................................................... 108
FEDERA1 riNISTOY OF POWER, WORKS & HOUSING

1
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
PART (A): ADMINISTRATION ETC.
PRELIMINARY 1001. The conditions of contract and the drawings shall be read in conjunction
with this specification and matters referred to, shown or described in any one of them are
not necessarily repeated in the other; two.
The drawings and specifications are intended to complement and supplement

each other. Any work required by either of them and not by the other shall be performed as
if denoted by each. Should any work be required which is not denoted in the specifications
or on the drawing because of an inadvertent obvious omission, but which is nevertheless
necessary for the proper performance of the project, such work shall be performed as if it
were described and delineated subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor
shall call the attention of the Engineer's Representative, to any perceived errors or
omissions that occur on the drawings and/or specifications.
On the drawings, figured dimensions shall govern in case of discrepancy between

sealed and figured dimensions. If any discrepancy be found between the drawings and
specifications, in so far as dimensions are concerned, the requirements of the drawing
shall govern if there be a discrepancy between the General Specifications and the
Supplementary specifications, the requirements of the latter shall govern. The Engineer
shall have the right to correct apparent errors and omissions in the drawings and
specifications and to make such interpretation as he deemed necessary for the proper
implementation of the intent and purpose of the drawings and specifications.
DEFINITIONS 1002. The term “Approved” ，“Directed” and “Required” shall mean to the approval,
direction or requirement of the Engineer or his duly authorised representative.
The letters B.S refer to the latest British Standards published by The British
Standards Institution. The British Standard mentioned in the specification are
particularly described in schedule VII of Volume III of these Specifications bound
together by the Bills of Quantities.
Where no particular direction is given, the letters B.S refer to the latest British Standards
including any amendments in force at the tune of the tendering. Materials specified to be
in accordance with the British Standards are to be branded or a certificate provided where
and as described in the particular Standard.
Where applicable the abbreviations used in the Specification and Bill of

Quantities arc in accordance with the recommendations contained in B.S. 1991, parts 1
and 4, are as follows:
“A.A.S.H.T.O.” or “A.A.S.I.T.O..” refer to the Specifications used by the

American Association of State Highway & Transportation Officials, current
edition.
“A. S.T.M.” refer to the American Society of Testing Materials.
“C.P.” or “B.S.C.P.” refer to the latest (unless otherwise stated) British Standard
Code of Practice including any amendments.
“DOE” refer to Department of Environment, United Kingdom

“F.M.W.” refer to The Federal Ministry of Works of the Government of the

Federal Republic of Nigeria.
“NIS” refer to the Nigerian Industrial Standards
“SON” refer to the Standard Organization ofNigeria
^WAS-C.55refer to the West African Standard Compaction.
DESCRIPTION 1003 The works comprised in this Contract are described in Schedule V of Volume III
OF WORKS of these specifications bound together with the Bills of Quantities.
A N D SCOPE OF
CONTRACT
The drawing showing the dimensions and layouts of the works are listed in
Schedule IV appended to volume III of these specifications bound together with the Bills
of Quantities.
The scope of the contract covers the supply of materials, plant, equipment, labour
and supervision necessary for the complete works all as specified together with all
temporary works and traffic inversions required during the construction of the works.
Where called for, the contract also includes the maintenance of a diversion for
traffic during construction, and the maintenance of the works in terms of Clause 49 of the
conditions of contract for a period after completion as stated in the appendix to Tender.
LIAISON WITH 1004 In the event of other works being in progress concurrently with and adjacent to the
ADJACENT work specified in the contract, liaison shall be maintained with such other works to
WORKS ensure that the several works been undertaken shall not cause any mutual interference
with progress and shall culminate in the integrated improvement as a whole. If so required
by the Engineer, the Contractor shall vary his programme of works in accordance with
clauses 14 and 90 of the Conditions of Contract, to coordinate the works with any other
works on or adjacent to the site of the works, whether being carried out by contract or by
direct labour of the Ministry.
AVOIDANCE OF 1005. The Contractor shall arrange his programme of works and control of traffic in
D ^M .G E TO such a way as to avoid damage to the works at any stage of their construction.
DATUM 1006. The datum to which the various level have been reduced for the purpose of the
'• *•
；*• ~ *r
stated on the respective drawings. Where these datum ajre likiely tobe
eev^redby the new works, the Contractor shall transfer the level to such fixed>points:!br
人， •
.力
'■ ：：
beacons, to be provided by the Contractor at his own cost, as shall be required and
“n ，、 •二
specified by the Engineer's Representative. The positions of such transferred datum shall
' y :.
be accurately surveyed and shown on the working and as-made drawings.
-• - -cv
. H 么：巧:：
笤.
n tlT O E Y S A 渺 IOD7； Before the works or any part thereof are begun the C ontract^ anH the'
-^LEVELS'TO BE Engineer's Representative shall together survey and take levels of the site of the works
泠ORBED
- BAÎS FOR
arid agree all particulars on which measurements of works are to be based. Su^h survey “
MEASUREMENT- shall be recorded and signed as agreed by the Engineer's Representative and the
Contractor and shall form basis of the measurements for the Engineers Certificates.
.V,
Failmg ^ h Surveys and agreement being signed by the Contractor the suiê^. of th^ x
.妒
Engineer's Representative shall be final and binding on the Contractor.
AND LEVELS l 〇〇8. The dimension and levels shown on the drawings are believed to be correct but the
Contractor must verify the same on the ground, as well as all other particular of the
contract and he will be held responsible for the consequences of any error therein or
omission there from. Levels on existing roads will depend on the amount of wear and
maintenance which has taken place between the time of survey and the time of
construction and similarly the levels of the river beds and banks will be affected by the
amount of erosion and repair which has taken place in the same interval. Should any
discrepancy be discovered between the levels shown on the drawings and those found on
the site, which may affect the levels and dimensions of any part of the works, the
Contractor shall notify the Engineer's Representative in sufficient time to enable the
Engineer to prepare drawings showing the amended levels and dimensions. The attention
of the Contractor in this respect is particularly directed to the extent of wing walls (also
see Clause 1010).
PARTICULARS 1009 Such information as may be given on the drawings in the specification or in the
OF EXISTING Bill of Quantities as to the present condition, character, position and size of existing
WORKS structures, roadways, rivers, pipes, cables and other services are given without guarantee
of accuracy or completeness, and neither the employer nor the Engineer will be liable for
the consequences of any discrepancy therein or omission there from. Where existing
works are required to be removed completely or in part or otherwise modified, it will be
the responsibility of the Contractor to satisfy himself absolutely in all respects in all
matters pertaining to the carrying out and completion of the works and the rates given in
the priced Bill of Quantities for the carrying out and completion of the work shall be
deemed to be fUlly inclusive and no extras will be allowed to the Contractor on the said
rates.
WORKING 1010 Before any part of the works is put in hand the Contractor must prepare and submit
DRAWINGS for the approval of the Engineer's Representative copies in duplicate (in the first instance)
of any further detailed working drawings which may be required for that part of the work
and at the same time call the attention of the Engineer's Representative to any differences
between these and the contract drawings. The Engineer's Representative will, after the
Contractor has made any alterations which he may require, record on the copies, as
amended, his approval and will return one copy to the Contractor who shall carry out the
work in accordance there-with. The Contractor shall forward to the Engineer's
Representative four additional copies of the working drawings as approved. In addition,
working drawings are also to be submitted (the same procedure being followed as above
described) in respect of any work proposed to be executed by Sub-Contractors, the
distribution of drawings being as directed by the Engineer's Representative. The approval
by the Engineer's Representative of all or any of the di*awing$ shill relieve the Contractor
of his responsibility. - ,• -
v“：，
"L* •'
:. ‘
^ - - •
r
-*» ■> • . • . - '' ' . . •' y' f
•. .. , ' - ~ ■v.'i'A...?：'
ALTERATIONS 1011 In all cases where drawings are êcified or required to be" siippHed by the
OF DRAWINGS Contractor for the approval of th& Engineer ai受神碎每 i drawjligs, which the
Engineer may require shall be made by the ContraQtor'without extrd charge：. -
- 、 \ ，r
PRAWINGS OF The Contractor shall submirto the-Engiiieer's^Representative f〇4r his approval,
TEMPORARY complete drawings df all tempora令碱 ot|s,V 逆紐 for 感 # ing out the
WORKS TO BE work, together with the calculations relatirigto^heir strength, arid antieipateH deflections.
SUBMITTED The drawings shall show the method proposed for the* ereetion o f the various parts of the
temporary works and their application to the carrying out of the permanent works. All
temporary works shall be properly, designed and substantially constructed to carry the
loads to which they will be subje^t^4 气nd a|l thereto
shall be forwarded to the ;in advance of the
■丨顆丨■m -丨 _ ■
"
intention to proceed as will allow for their proper study and the incorporation of any
modification which the Engineer's Representative may require notwithstanding the
approval or modification by the Engineer's Representative of any submitted design for
any of the temporary works, stagings, etc., the Contractor shall remain wholly and
entirely responsible until the removal of such works for their efficiency security and
maintenance and for all obligations and risks in regard to such works specified or implied
in the contract and he shall reinstate the same at his own entire cost should an mishap or
accident occur causing damage or injury thereto subject however to such provisions of
the conditions of contract as may be applicable in the case of such damage or injury.
Two copies of each drawing shall be submitted to the Engineer's Representative in

the first instance and he will record on these copies, amended and modified as required,
his approval and will return one copy to the Contractor who may then proceed in
accordance therewith. The Contractor shall forward to the Engineer's Representative four
additional copies of the drawings as approved.
The cost of complying with all the requirements of this clause shall be borne by
the Contractor.
SETTING-OUT The attention of the Contractor is directed to Clause 17 of the Conditions of

Contract. The Contractor shall give the Engineer' Representative not less than 24 hours'
notice of his intention to set out or give levels for any part of the work in order that
arrangements maybe made for checking.
To enable the Engineers Representative to check the accuracy of the Contractor's

setting-out, the Contractor shall provide for the use of the Engineers Representative
approved theodolites, levels, staves, bands, pegs, labour and all things necessary as
maybe particularly specified in the respective clause. Any approval or collaboration in
respect of setting-out by the Engineer's Representative shall not in any way affect the
Contractor's sole responsibility for the accuracy of the setting-oat and the consequent
construction.
NOTICE OF No important operation and, in particular, no blocking or cutting of any road,

OPFR ATTOM9 water pipe or other service shall be carried out without the consent in writing of the
Engineer's Representative nor without full and complete notice being given to him also in
writing sufficiently in advance of the time of the operation and will enable him to make
such arrangements as may be deemed necessary for its inspection and the provision of all
relevant safety precautions.
EXISTING 1015 The Contractor shall satisfy himself entirely as to the location of all existing
SERVICES drains, pipes, cables and similar services whether above or below ground level. Drains,
pipes, cables and similar services encountered in the course of the works shall be guarded
from injury by the Contractor at his own cost so that they may continue in full and
unintemipted use to the satisfaction of the owners thereof and the Contractor shall not
store materials or otherwise occupy any part of the site in a manner likely to hinder the
operations of such owners. If the interests of the work shall in the opinion of the Engineer
so require, the Contractor shall on his direction arrange for the construction by the
respective departments, bodies, corporations or authorities of permanent protective
works or permanent or temporary diversions of the said drains etc., (afterwards
reinstating if temporary) and the cost of such works or diversions including reinstatement
shall be charged against the appropriate provisional sum provided in the Bill of
Quantities. The Contractor shall be at liberty subject to the approval of the owners and the
requirements of Clause 90 of the Conditions of Contract to make any further diversions he
may consider necessary. The cost of these additional diversions including the cost of
reinstatement shall be borne by the Contractor. No services may be tampered with by the
Contractor and all works in connection with any services shall be carried out by their
respective owners.
..霸
DAMAGE TO 1016 The Contractor shall be held liable for damage and, interference to mains and
SERVICES pipes, to electric cables or services of any kind. The Contractor will be deemed to have
provided for these contingencies in fixing the rates, etc, inserted in kind either above or
below ground caused by him or his Sub-contractors in the execution of the works. Should
any damage be done to mains, pipes, wires, telecommunications or electrical apparatus or
any other service, whether shown on the drawings or not, the Contractor must make good
the same without delay and do any further work considered necessary by the Engineer or
the owners all at his own cost or pay the costs to the owner in so doing. The contractor will
be deemed to have provided for these contingencies in fixing the rates, etc inserted in the
Bill of Quantities.
FILLING IN 1017 The Contractor shall take all precautions and provide any temporary fences
HOLES AND necessary to protect the public from accidents, which may be caused by the presence of
TRENCHES any excavations, mounds, heaps or earth or any other materials or stores connected with
the works. The Contractor shall, at his own expense and immediately upon completion of
any part of the work, fill up all holes and trenches and level all mounds and heaps of earth,
which have been excavated or made in connection with the works. The Contractor shall
bear and pay all costs, charges, damages and expenses incurred or sustained on account of
or in consequence of any accident which may happen by reason of holes and trenches
being dug and left unprotected, or materials being left or placed in unprotected or
improper situations.
JOINT 1018 In the event of the Contractor having to execute any work or provide any material
MEASUREMENT regard to which he may propose to claim extras, he shall first obtain a written order
in
OF EXTRAS from the Engineer's Representative and shall at once make arrangements to take the
measurements of the said work or materials with the Engineer's Representative. If these
measurements are not taken jointly and booked and agreed at the time the work is being
executed the Contractor's measurements will not afterwards be recognized by the
Engineer. The fact of such joint measurements having being made will in no way commit
the Engineer to a recognition of the claim if he considers such a claim without foundation.
The Engineer's Representative shall at all time, have full access to the Contractor's time
book and may daily check the time of any extra works with the Contractor's time-keeper
or otherwise, but the fact of his agreeing upon any time shall in no way bind the Engineer
to value the work other than by measurement if he thinks fit so to do.
PROTECTION 1019. All materials shall be stored on the site in a manner approved by the Engineer and
FROM the Contractor shall carefully protect from weather all work and materials which may be
WEATHER affected thereby. •
WORKS TO BE 1020. All those parts of the works required to be carried out in the dry, whether within
KEPT FREE any part specified to the enclosed or not, shall be kept free at all times from water from
FROM WATER
whatever source it may come to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative. The
costs of complying with the provisions of this clause shall be borne by the Contractor.
STAFF 1021. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, provide for himself Suitable
ACCOMO offices and housing for his staff and labour. If required by the Engineer, the
DATION ETC
Contractor shall supply, erect and maintain suitable furnished offices and Residential
quarters for the Engineer's Representative and his assistants, inspectors and staff on a site
or sites to be selected, together with all proper lighting, heating. Water, sanitary
arrangements and attendance.
SUPPLY OF 1022. The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the provision of water
WATER AND and electricity, whether for use in the execution and construction of pennanent works or
ELECTRICITY
otherwise. In the event of the source of water being from any existing piped supply, the
Contractor shall comply with any regulation laid down by the water authority and shall
pay for such supply, stand pipes, connections, metre rent and all other charges as required
all at his own expense. The some conditions apply for the temporary supply of electrical
power.
RETURNS OF 1023 Every working day, the Contractor shall supply the Engineers Representative
LABOUR with a return of the men employed the previous day and of the work on which they were
engaged, specifying also the number employed in each trade. He shall also supply any
other returns, which may be required from time to time, as to the number of men and plant
employed and the nature, quality and quantity of the work done.
PHOTOGRAPHS 1024 The Contractor, shall, if required, supply to the Engineer monthly, or at such other
periods as he may direct, well executed and mounted photographs showing the progress
of the works and also such particular sections of the works, site, plant, machinery or
materials as the Engineer may direct.
The cost of such photographs will be charged against the appropriate provisional
sum. The copyright of the photographs shall be held by the Employers. The Contractor
shall provide the Engineer's Representative (within 5 days of the photographs having
been taken) with the negative and three prints of each photograph, which shall be ISO.
Standard size A4 or a minimum of200mm x 300mm. On the reverse side of each print the
following information shall be shown:
(1) Date photograph was taken.

(2) A brief description of the location illustrated or the name of the structure.
(3) The negative number of the photograph.
(4) The name and address of the photographer.
The prints of each approved photograph shall be signed and dated by the
Contractor and the Engineer's Representative.
REPORTS OF 1025. Notwithstanding the submission of the nonnal and regular monthly progress
ACCIDENTS OR reports the Contractor shall report to the Engineer's Representative promptly and in
UNUSUAL writing the particulars of any accident or unusual or unforeseen occurrence on the site
OCCURRENCE whether likely to affect the progress of the work or not-stating also the steps he has taken
or is arranging to take in the matter.
MAINTENANCE 1026. (A) During the period of maintenance as defined in Clause 48 and 49 of the
OF WORKS Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall maintain the works, or such part of the works
as are involved, for the period named in the tender to the entire satisfaction of the
Engineer. Such maintenance shall include repairs to the superstructures and sub
structures of the bridges; defects in the sub-grade, base-course and bituminous surfacing
of the roadways; landslips and failures of culverts, but shall not include grass cutting
brushing or the cleaning of drains.
(B) The Contractor will be responsible for the maintenance other than grass
cutting, o f all v erges, m argins, and sid e-slo p es, in clu d in g ston e p itch in g, for the period o f
maintenance and shall make good all erosions during such period whether attributable to
defects in workmanship or not.
(C) Before the commencement of the period of maintenance the Contractor

shall remove all his buildings and plant from the whole of the site and shall clear and
regrade the areas to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
AS-MADE 1027. On completion of the works the Contractor shall prepare as-made drawings
DRAWINGS giving complete details of the entire works as constructed, including all work carried out
by Sub-Contractors. The as-made drawings shall be prepared in accordance with the
requirements of the respective clauses in the specifications and all costs arising out of
their preparation, supply and distribution etc., shall be deemed to be included in the
tendered rates for the work to which they refer.
TRAFFICROUTES 1028. There shall be no unnecessary obstruction of roads, railways, footpaths,

TOJBEMA^TAINEDwaterways, electrical installations, etc. during the course of the work, and in no
AND WORKS circumstances shall closure, in whole or in part, of these or any other 'Right of Way' be
TRAFFIC permitted except with the prior permission of the Engineer in writing. Before granting
CONTROLLED
such permission the Engineer shall consult with the authorities, government departments
and/or persons concerned and when desirable shall publish due notice of the proposed
action in the government gazette. The Contractor shall maintain adequate through safe
traffic routes for vehicles and pedestrians throughout the whole length of the public
highways within and adjacent to the site of the works, including such diversion of
highways as may be required, and make arrangements for watching, signalling and
control of traffic by day and by night and for adequate lighting all to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. The Contractor shall without extra charge if instructed to do so by the Engineer
install, make use of, adequately maintain automatic c£Stop and Go55signals, traffic lights
or other special method or methods of traffic control and direction as the Engineer may
consider necessary, and the Contractor shall carry out all such instructions to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
Where directed by the Engineer, temporary single or double tracks shall be

constructed and maintained in a safe and satisfactory condition for the use of all traffic
during the construction of the works. The temporary tracks shall be removed and all
reinstatement made to the satisfaction of the Engineer when no longer required.
The Contractor shall, at his own expense, and during the period of this Contract,
maintain in a safe condition and adequately protect any work executed by him, which is
exposed to traffic. The Contractor shall supply adequate advance warning signs of
reflecting type with letters not less than 150mm high and such warning signs shall be
plated in, positions approved by the Engineer and shall be left in such positions as long as
traffic is still utilizing any such temporary running surface.
The Contractor shall make arrangements and cooperate with all other contractors
working in the area for directing, routing, marshalling, controlling and circulating the
traffic connected with the works under this contract in accordance with the Engineer's
Requirements, in order that the flow of all traffic may be facilitated, that all obstruction,
inconvenience and delay may be minimized, and that the interests of all concerned,
including the general public, maybe protected.
The Contractor shall allow in his tender for complying with the requirements of
this clause and for any directions in connection therewith which the Engineer may issue,
from lime to time. The Contractor will be deemed to have allowed for additional expense
he may incur on account of extra running or kilometre covered by his vehicle or labour or
material involved in compliance with these requirements.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the highways in the vicinity
of the works are kept clean of mud and other debris falling from vehicles connected with
the works or spreading on to the highways as a result of the works in any way.
r iii i _..... . w j i 'ihli ~i ii.11 1凸…「丄

BARRICADES, 1029. The Contractor will at all times during the contract, provide, erect and maintain
WARNING AND such barricades, warning lights, dangers signals, reflectors, signs and watchmen as may
DEVIATION be necessary to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative. Any such warning signs
SIGNS etc., shall be left in position as long as traffic is utilizing any temporary running surface
and/or until such time as their removal is sanctioned by the Engineer's Representative.
Barricades and signs shall be constructed and used in accordance with the
requirements of the Engineer's Representative. All barricades, obstructions and such
other conveniences as are necessary to protect the travelling public, or as required by the
Engineer's Representative shall be illuminated at night by reflectors or red lanterns.
The cost of barricades, danger, warning and deviation signs and providing
watchmen, shall be deemed to be included in the tendered rates and prices.
WEATHER 1030. The Contractors shall be deemed to have taken all possible weather conditions
CONDITIONS into account when preparing their tender and they shall not be entitled to extra payment by
reason of the occurrence or effect of high winds, tornadoes, excessive rainfall,
temperature or humidity or any other meteorological phenomena.
OTHER WORKS 1031. During the continuance of the contract the employer may cause other works such
AND SERVICES as the installation of services to be carried out on, through or adjacent to the site.
The Contractor shall at all times comply with the requirements of the general
conditions of contract in respect of these and any other works not included in the Contract
and shall allow reasonable access as approved by the Engineer on and through the site of
the works to any other Contractors or workmen who maybe working on or near the site.
The Contractor shall make adequate arrangements to the satisfaction of the

Engineer's Representative for the disposal of all sewage, mbbish and all other waste
materials arising from or connected with the execution of the works.
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for and shall provide any
service (including telephone and radio communications), which he may require in
addition to the foregoing.
In the programme and particulars required under Clause 14 of the Conditions of

Contract the Contractor shall:
(i) Provide details of the sequence he proposes for carrying out the works,
(ii) State and allow a reasonable margin of time for contingencies and
(iii) State his intentions regarding shift work.
The Contractor's programme shall make due allowance for requirements

specified in all clauses of the Specification.
The Contractor shall report monthly progress to the Engineer on charts submitted
in triplicate and showing actual work done superimposed upon copies of the programme.
He shall furnish an explanation of any deviation from the programme and shall state
proposals for improving progress should this be lacking in any respect.
(CLAUSES 1032-1039 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)

PART (B): MATERIALS AND TESTING
MATERIAL 1040. The Contractor shall provide and maintain materials laboratories, equipment and
TESTING staff as directed by Engineer and more particularly described in Schedule No. VI of the
LABORATORIES Bills of Quantities.
AND STAFF
The Contractor laboratories at Contract. The shall provide, maintain and staff his
own expense throughout the said laboratories shall be: in a waterproof building or, rooms
designated and used exclusively for the purpose and shall be maintained in a clean and
tidy fashion to the satisfaction of the Engineers Representative. The laboratories shall
have an adequate water and electricity supply. The laboratories shall be staffed with
Engineers well experienced in material testing and approved by the Engineer. The
laboratories shall be located within 50 km. of all works in the field requiring sampling and
testing. Work will not be permitted to begin until laboratories and staff have been
provided within this distance.
The Contractor shall provide all the testing equipment, tools etc, and shall carry
out test on materials as directed and shall supply the Engineer's Representative with two
copies of the results of each test on approved printed forms. A third copy of the results
shall be retained in the laboratories.
Without limiting the Contractor's responsibility as stipulated above, the facilities

of the laboratories shall be available for the use of the Engineer's Representative and his
assistants to perform control tests on workmanship and materials as provided for in the
Specification.
Notwithstanding the results of tests carried out by the Contractor approval of

workmanship and materials shall be based on the results of these control tests.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to notify the Engineer's Representative

when any items of the works scheduled below are completed and ready for approval and
the Contractor shall give sufficient notice to allow control tests to be performed.
Generally the time required to perform control tests by the Engineer's Representative
after the receipt of the Contractor's notification shall be as follows:
All filling and subgrade 3 days

Unstabilized sub-base and base course 3 days
Crushed stone base 3 days
Surfacing materials 7 days
Structural concrete 30 days
Asphalt concrete 10 days
Note: Where construction is carried out in arid region where moisture of finished
fill, sub base or stone base can dry out from the surface rapidly, the time of notification
may be reduced at the request of the Contractor making representation to the Engineer's
Representative on same.
Unless otherwise specified, the cost of carrying out all tests shall be deemed to be
included in the tendered rates and prices and the Contractor shall be deemed to have
allowed for the costs of providing all facilities necessary. No claim for delay of any kind
shall he entertained by the Engineer in this respect if the stipulations of the foregoing have
not been observed.
All samples and records shall be preserved as long as the Engineer's

Representative may direct and they shall be kept and labelled in an orderly fashion. The
laboratories equipment, all records and samples shall be open to inspection and use by the
Engineer or his Representative during all normal work hours.
The laboratory building shall be in accordance with the standards specified for the
office of the Engineer's Representative. Concrete floors shall be provided throughout.
The Contractor also shall provide air conditioning tliroughout the laboratory and shall
service, clean and light the building to the standards specified for the Office of the
Engineer's Representative.
As specified elsewhere in the Contract documents, the Contractor shall supply

suitable vehicles equipped and reserved exclusively for the use at all times of the
laboratory staff to permit the carrying out of control tests in the field.
Where directed by the Engineer the Contractor shall remove and dispose of the
building and unserviceable vehicles make good any damage to the site and leave it clean
and neat.
The facilities of the testing laboratory shall be made available for use by the
Engineer's Representative at all times for the purpose of the works.
TESTING OF 1041. The Contractor shall arrange for the testing of all materials used throughout the
MATERIALS contract, to ensure that they are up to the standards specified.
The Contractor shall carry out such laboratory and field tests (including tests to
check the accuracy of testing equipment and methods but excluding tests specified to be
carried out in an independent testing laboratory) as specified and as may be necessary to
ensure and satisfy the Engineer that the requirements of the Specifications are met. The
type and frequency of testing shall be in accordance with the relevant Nigerian Industrial
Standards or British Standards except as otherwise specified herein or directed by the
Engineer.
The frequency of testing specified in the relevant clauses are intended to represent
only a general guide. The Engineer's Representative shall be empowered to vary the
frequencies at which tests are conducted should he deem this necessary for the proper
control of the quality of the Works. Should the Engineer's Representative vary the
frequencies, stated in the relevant clauses of the Specification, the Contractor will not be
entitled to extra payment.
Unless otherwise agreed or directed by the Engineer, methods of sampling and

test procedures shall be in accordance with the relevant Nigerian Industrial Standards/
British Standards, British Standard Codes of Practice, Standard Methods of the Institute
of Petroleum and the American Society for Testing Materials, the Asphalt Institute,
Building Research Station Digests and published recommendations of the Transport and
Road Research Laboratory. Samples will be selected by the Engineer's Representative.
. Where tests are specified or directed by the Engineer's Representative to be

carried out in an independent testing laboratory, the Contractor shall supply and deliver
the sample and shall arrange for the relevant tests to be carried out. The independent
testing laboratory shall be nominated by the Contractor and shall be acceptable to the
Engineer's Representative. Unless otherwise specified the Contractor shall arrange for
one copy of the independent testing laboratory's certificates to be delivered to the
Engineer's Representative not less than 7 working days before the materials covered by
the relevant test certificate are incorporated in the Works. Each test certificate shall be
relatable to the materials from which the sample was taken.
When any material or article is required to comply with a British Standard or any
other Standard specified herein such material or article or its container shall bear the
stamp of the registered certificate trade mark of the British Standards Institution or the
certification of the applicable standard. Alternatively, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer certified test certificates furnished by the supplier or manufacturer of the
material or article indicating compliance with the relevant British Standards or a copy of
the manufacturer's or supplier's test certificate showing that the material has been tested
and found to comply in all respects with the relevant standard. Notwithstanding the
above, the Engineer's Representative may require additional tests to be carried out by an
approved local testing establishment and the material shall be supplied by the Contractor.
In such cases a copy of the test result shall be submitted to the Engineer's Representative
in lieu of the Manufacturer's/Supplier's certificate. All testing carried out by the
Contractor shall be undertaken by approved qualified staff who shall be nominated by the
Contractor and sufficient notice of the intention to carry out such tests shall be given to the
Engineer's Representative to enable him to be present during the tests should he so desire.
The Contractor shall arrange and the Engineer shall have power to send inspectors
to the premises of the manufacturers and suppliers to inspect the manufacture and testing
of the materials intended for use in the works. Materials tested before leaving the
manufacturer's or supplier's premises may be tested again after delivery at the site, at the
discretion of the Engineer's Representative.
Notwithstanding the results of the tests at the supplier's or manufacturer's

premises, the production of a test certificate or the results of any tests carried out by an
approved testing establishment, or by the Contractor, the Engineer's Representative shall
have power to reject after delivery at the site any materials found to be not in accordmice
with the requirements of this specification.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in his tendered rates and prices
all costs arising out of compliance with the requirements of this clause.
INDEPENDENT 1042. Notwithstanding successful test results being submitted for any material, and in
TESTS addition to the tests required under other clauses of this specification, the Engineer may
order further tests of any material to be carried out by his own central laboratory or by an
independent tester at such places as he may determine. The Contractor shall provide the
samples for such tests free of charge, but payment for the tests shall be the employer's
responsibility and charged against the appropriate provisional sum except as detailed in
Clause 36 (4) of the Conditions of Contract.
1043. For the purpose of this contract and in accordance with Clause 36 of t
bNLrlNbhK. Conditions of Contract, the Engineer may appoint one or more Inspection Engineers for
all imported materials to be used in connection with the contract.
If any Inspection Engineer is to be appointed for the inspection of imported

materials the Engineer shall select the Inspection Engineer and inform the Contractor
accordingly.
For all materials of Nigerian origin the Inspection Engineer shall be the
Engineer's duly Authorized Representative inNigeria.
Where an Inspection Engineer has been appointed for imported materials the Contractor
shall before he enters into any arrangement for the supply or manufacture of materials,
submit for the approval of the Inspection Engineer, the names of the manufacturers or
merchants he proposes to employ. Should the Inspection Engineer at any time be
dissatisfied with any of the materials or operations canied out at the manufacturer's works
or place of business, he shall be empowered to cancel his previous consent for materials to
be obtained from such manufacturer's or merchant. Should the Contractor fail to submit
for the approval of the Inspection Engineer samples of material of satisfactory quality or
workmanship, the Inspection Engineer shall have the power to specify any particular
Manufacturer or merchant for the supply of the materials and the Contractor shall obtain
such materials from the said manufacturer or merchants without additional charge.
The Inspection Engineer shall examine and test and if necessary analyse all
materials and test the fabrication of any structures or structural components to be used in
the permanent works. The Inspection Engineer and his representatives shall have free
access at all reasonable times to the manufacturer's or merchant's premises and shall be
afforded every facility for making inspections and for taking of samples for testing and
analyses.
The manufacturer's or merchant's shall provide free of charge and to the

satisfaction of the Inspection Engineer all appliances required for the testing of the
materials at the manufacturer's or merchant premises and they shall supply samples and
meet the costs of transport thereof to enable tests and analyses to be made at a laboratory if
and when directed by the Inspection Engineer.
All materials to be provided by the Contractor shall be submitted for the approval
of the Inspection Engineer before removal from the place of manufacture and under no
circumstances shall materials be shipped without the approval certificate issued by the
Inspection Engineer. The Contractor shall give twenty-one days' notice in writing to the
Inspection Engineer of his intention to remove materials from the place of manufacture or
fabrication.
If in the opinion of the Inspection Engineer the despatch of any materials or things
have been unduly delayed after they have been inspected and approval certificates issued
the Inspection Engineer may issue an order in writing that the materials or things shall be
reinspected.
Invoices or shipping lists in triplicate showing in detail the net weights and
quantities of all materials for the permanent work despatched to the site shall be
forwarded to the Inspection Engineer directly when the materials are despatched. In the
case of steel and iron work such invoices or shipping lists shall show separately the net
weight of articles under each item in the schedule of prices included in the invoice or
shipping lists.
All material and any iron or steel articles supplied by the Contractor for use in the
permanent works or any materials for fabricating permanent steel or iron structures and
other articles shall be subjected from time to time before the issue of the approval
certificate to such tests and Inspection Engineer.
All the tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Inspection Engineer or his
Representative and shall be performed in such a manner and by such processes at such
premises and at such times as he may consider desirable.
Notwithstanding any examination or tests that the Inspection Engineer may wish
to be carried out on any perishable materials prior to their despatch to the site, the
Engineer shall be at liberty to carry out any further tests that he may consider desirable
i fter delivery of such perishable materials at the site and to reject such materials which
fail to comply with the required quality or conditions, notwithstanding any provisional
appi aval before despatch to the site. The Engineer shall arrange for the inspection on site
of all materials and fabricated components to ascertain whether these materials and
fabricated components have in any way become damaged in transit to site.
The Engineer and the Inspection Engineer shall be kept properly infonned as to
the progress of any work in hand or materials being prepared and supplied by the
Contractor in order that they shall be able to make such arrangements for examination,
testing and analysis as they may desire.
The Contractor shall weigh without any extra charge any materials, articles or
things supplied for the execution of the permanent work that the Engineer or the
Inspection Engineer may require and such weighing shall be carried out in their presence
or in the presence of their representatives.
When the Inspection Engineer is satisfied in all respects with the inspection,
regarding samples and test results of materials and fabrication of structures, he shall issue
to the Contractor an approval certificate thereof.
Where the Contractor/Manufacturer could not agree with the Inspection Engineer
the Contractor may request with the permission of the Engineer that such materials be
tested by an independent testing body as may be agreed by both parties in dispute and cost
of such test shall be borne by the Contractor.
MATERIALS 1044. As provided in Clause 36 of the General Condition of Contract and in accordance
SPECIFIED TO with the B.S. Standard Organization of Nigeria or British Standard Specifications quoted
B.S. for any materials used on the works of this Contract, tests may be called for by the
Engineer to be carried out at the place of manufacture, fabrication, on the site, or at any of
such places.
The Contractor shall arrange for the testing of all materials used throughout the
contract to ensure that they are up to the standard specified, i.e ：aggregates, sand, cement,
water, reinforcement, concrete, blinding materials as specified or decided by the
Engineer.
The tests to be carried out on any material except as detailed hereafter, shall be
those specified, implied or intended in the appropriate N.I.S. orB.S.
APPARATUS 1045. Notwithstanding that any test, piece of equipment or apparatus is not specifically
REQUIRED mentioned or described in the various pages hereof, nevertheless if directed by the
FORTESTING Engineer the Contractor is to supply at his own expense all apparatus and equipment of
whatever kind necessary to carry out any test mentioned in or required by the provisions
of the various clauses in this specification and the British Standard Specifications
incorporated in this Specification.
The Engineer shall be the final arbitrator on which tests are necessary for the
proper execution of the works.
NOTICE OF 1046. Where the Contractor is responsible for the cairying out of any control test, he
TESTS shall first give notice of his intention to carry out such a test to the Engineer's
Representative to enable him to be present during the test. Where the Engineer or his
Representative conducts any control test, he shall give the Contractor sufficient notice to
enable him, should he so wish, to be present during the test. Should the Contractor not
wish to witness any control tests conducted by the Engineer or his Representative, the
C ontractor shall be d eem ed to accept the valid ity of the results of su ch tests.
SAMPLING 1047. All samples of materials to be tested shall be selected according to the method laid
down in the appropriate Nigerian Industrial Standards or British Standard Specification
or where there is no such standard it shall be by the method to be mutually agreed between
the Engineer's Representative and the Contractor in so far as the selection has not been
prescribed below.
SAMPLING OF 1048. Trial pits in proposed borrow pit areas shall be dug from original ground level.
MATERIALS Trial pits shall be at least one metre by one metre in size, dug to such a depth that the full
FROM BORROW extent of the material intended for incorporation in the works is exposed.
PIT
Materials for testing shall not be taken from the spoil of the trial pit but shall be
made up of increments taken from each face of the pit, each increment to be a
representative sample of the entire depth of a horizon. The four increments shall be mixed
three times and quartered or riffled down to the size required for testing. Visual
examination will be made to ensure that sampling more than one horizon in any sample is
avoided.
SAMPLING OF 1049. The surface material of a stock pile shall be removed before sampling. At least
MATERIALS twelve samples shall be taken from different parts of a stockpile, avoiding segregated
FROM STOCK material, and thoroughly mixed by hand before quartering down to required size.
PILES
TEST TO BE 1050. In addition to the specific requirement of the various clauses of this specification,
CARRIED OUT the engineer may direct that any or all of the following procedures and tests be carried out.
(A) The following tests and procedures as described in B.S.1377 (1975) “Methods of
Tests for Soils for Civil Engineering Purposes”：
Item 1.5 Preparation of disturbed soil samples for testing.
Test 1 (A) Item 2.1.1 Determination of moisture content (Standard Method)
Test 2 (A) Item 2.2.1 Determination of Liquid Limit (CONE Penetrometre

method)
Test 2(B) Item 2.2.2 Casagrande apparatus method
Item2.3 Test3 Determination of Plastic Limit, using the following

modifications.
(1) Materials for testing shall be moisturized, mixed for 15 minutes and sealed
in an approved air-tight container for a minimum period or 24 hours before
testing.
(2) After the above period of curing, the material hall be removed from the
container and remixed with 10mm spatula for an exact period of fifteen
minutes.
(3) For the method of determining the liquid limit as laid down in B.S. 1377 at
least five points in the range 10-60 blows, evenly distributed when plotted
on a logarithm scale, shall be made. Consecutive tests with respect to
moisture content shall form a wetting and not a drying curve.
(4) Alternatively the one point method of determining the liquid limit may be
used.
LL=W(N/25)tanB LL=W (N/25)0.10
Where W is the moisture content %, N number of blows and tan 13= 0.10 this is the
slope of the calculated flow line. The value of N shall lie in range 20-30. The liquid limit
shall be taken as the mean of at least two such tests.
(5) The plastic limit of material shall be taken as the mean of at least three
tests.
2.6.1 Test6 (A) Determination of the specific gravity of soil

particles suitable for fine, medium and coarse
grained soils.
15
2.6.2 Test 6(B) Suitable for fine grained soils
2.7.1 Test 7 (A) Determination of particle size distribution in soils, using

the wet method with following modifications.
WET SIEVE ANALYSIS
All materials passing 5mm sieve shall be sampled for moisture to determine the
natural moisture content of the sample for wet sieving. For different sizes of material the
weight of soil sample to be used is as listed in Table 1-1.
TABLE 1-1 WEIGHT OF SAMPLE FOR WET SIEVING
Maximum Size of Particle present in Minimum weight of Sample to be

substantial proportion (more thamlO%) taken for testing
retained on Standard Test Sieves kg
mm
63 50
50 35
37.5 15
28 5
20 2
14 1
10 0.5
6.3 0.2
Passing 2 mm to 63 fi m 0.1
(A) All material passing the 5mm sieve shall be sampled for moisture content,
weighted, wet sieved through the No.75 |a m sieve oven dried, and sieved
through the full nest of sieves. The portion retained on each sieve shall be
weighed. The weight of the original sample shall be adjusted for moisture
content.
(B) Material retained on the 5mm sieve if it is porous or tends to retain fine
particles on the surface shall be wet sieved as described in the paragraph
above full allowance being made for the air dry moisture content.
(C) If the material retained on the 5mm sieve is clean of clay and contains no
pores or adhesions, the coarse fraction m a y b e dty sieved .
(D) Pre-treatment and the analysis of the fraction passing 75^1 m sieve may be
omitted.
Item4.1 12: Determination of Density/ Moisture Content relation of

Soil (B.S. Compaction Test)
Item 4.4.1,4.4.2, Field Density by Sand & Replacement Method.

4.4.3:15.A,B&C
Item 15D Determination of Dry Density by Core-Cutter Method (for

fine-grained soils).
(B) THE WEST AFRICAN COMPACTION TEST:
This test is identical with Test 13 in B.S. 1377, (1975) except as follows:
(I) The size of the mould shall be, 150mm internal diameter, and 125 mm
internal effective height and a volume of 2210 cm3.
(II) The weight of the metal rammer shall be 4,5 kg instead of 2.5kg (the
diameter of bottom face remaining at 50mm.
(III) The drop of the rammer shall be 450mm instead of300mm.
(IV) The moist soil shall be compacted in the mould in five equal layers each
layer being given twenty-five blows.
(V) The percentage moistxire content corresponding to the maximum density

on the moisture content dry soil density curve shall be reported as the
optimum moisture content for West African Compaction.
(VI) Separate materials shall be used for each compaction point, i.e. materials
only air dried previously and not oven dried, mixed with water and
allowed to moisturize for 12 hours before compaction.
(C) THE MODIFIED A.A.S.H.O. (AMERICAN

ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY OFFICIALS) COMPACTION TEST.
This test is identical with Test 13 inB.S. 1377, except as follows:
(I) The size of the mould shall be 150mm internal diameter, and 125mm
internal effective height and a volume of 2210 cm2.
(II) The weight of the metal rammer shall be 4.5 kg instead of 2.5 kg (the
diameter of bottom face remaining at 50 mm).
(III) The drop of the rammer shall be 450mm instead o f300 ram.
(IV) The moist soil shall be compacted in the mould in 5 equal layers, each
* layer being given 61 blows from the rammer dropped from a height of
450mm above the soil.
(V) The percentage moisture content corresponding to the maximum density

on the moisture content dry soil density curve shall be reported as the
''Optimum Moisture Content for Modified A.A.S.H.O. Compaction.
(VI) Separate materials shall be used for each compaction point, i.e. materials
only air dried previously and not oven dried, mixed with water and
allowed to moisturize for 12 hours before compaction.
(D) LABORATORY C.B.R. TEST : To be carried out in accordance with the

method laid down by tcThe Materials Testing Conference, February 1961,,as follows:
(I) Different samples of materials shall be used for each point in the
compaction for C.B.R. Test.
(II) The materials for testing shall be moisturized and sealed in an airtight
container for a minimum period of 12 hours before testing.
(HI) The standards Compaction used for C.B.R. Tests shall be as follows:
(a) Sub Grade Materials and all Filings -The British Standard Compaction.
(b) Sub Base Course Material: The West African Standard Compaction.
(c) Base Course Material: The West African Standard or Mod. A.A.S.H.O.
Standard as directed by the Engineer may be used for latcrite, stone or
mechanically stabilized Base Course and the B.S. Compaction for
Cement Stabilized Base Course. For other type of Base-Course
Compaction shall be decided by the Engineer.
(E) SAMPLING AND AGGREGATES TESTNG OF MINERAL
The following procedures and tests shall be as described in B.S. 812 u Sampling and
Testing of Mineral Aggregates, Sands and F illers' -•
Section One: Sampling and submission of Samples.

Section Three: Determination of Particle Size and Shape.
Section Four: Determination of Specific Gravity, Density, Voids and
Absorption.
Section Five: Organic Impurities.
(F) METHOD OF TESTING CONCRETE
The following procedures and tests as described in B.S. 1881. “Method of Testing
Concrete.
Part 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete in the Field.

Part 2. Slump Test.
Part. 3. Compacting Factor Test
Part. 6. Making and Curing of Compression Cubes in the Laboratory.
Part 7. Making and Curing of Compression Cubes in the Field.
UNSATISFACTORY 1051. Should in the opinion of the Engineer's Representative any of the results of the
TEST RESULTS specified tests on materials be unsatisfactory, the Engineer's Representative may order
the work to be stopped pending his further instruction. Executed work for which test
results are unsatisfactory shall be liable to be rejected, and, if so directed by the Engineer,
the work represented by the tests shall be cut out and re-executed at Contractor's Expense.
The cost of all such cutting, preparation of specimens, testing, and of making
good the portions of the works affected shall be borne by the Contractor.
TR IA L 1052. One or m ore trial stretches as directed by the Engineer's Representative shall be
SECTIONS OF constructed with the proposed materials prior to the start of the main construction to
ROAD determine the most efficient compaction teclmique, the suitability of the proposed
materials and of the plant. Each of these trial sections shall be at least 30 metres in length,
at a site and in the alignment as directed by the Engineer's Representative. The results
obtained from these trial rolling stretches shall be used as guide and complement with
laboratory test results for subsequent construction and control.
It is likely that these stretches will be incorporated in the works. Should one or all
of these stretches or a part thereof be rejected the Contractor will be reimbursed for the
rejected work in accordance with the rates at which the relevant items have been priced in
the Bill of Quantities.
ROLLING TEST
1052 A. DEFINITION
Rolling Test shall be used to establish the optimum moisture and maximum dry
density of the proposed plant for a particular type of soil material. In addition it shall be
used to determine the economic number of passes of the plant that may be required to
achieve the maximum dry density at a known moisture. This test is a corollary to
laboratory tests already carried out using CBR mould and specified compactive effort.
1052B. TEST PROCEDURE
(a) Prepare a formation of a reasonable length (about 48m) adequately compacted

to serve as a good platform for the rolling test.
(b) Spread the loose material on the prepared platform to a desired loose depth.
(Between 200mm to 300mm for laterite)
© Divide the test section into at least five bays (each bay not less than 8m) and
leaving a gap of two metres between bays to avoid intermixing of materials from adjacent
bays. Determine the moisture of the material in each bay. This may be done by using the
speedy method and sampling in various points, taking the mean result of four as the
moisture content.
(d) Adjust the moisture content in each bay with a view to straddling the optimum
moisture content. This could be achieved by progressively increasing the passes of the
water tank in different bays as shown in the Table 1.2.
TABLE 1-2: SHOWING THE NUM BER OF PASSES OF WATER TANK
Bay 1 Bay 2 Bay 3 Bay 4 Bay 5

4 passes 6 passes 8 passes 10 passes 12 passes
(e) Mix the loose soil and water to ensure tlirough moisturization using either
hand, pulvimixer or rotovator. (To ensure uniform moisturization the watered material
could be left over night before mixing).
(f) Compact to refusal the loose material whose OMC and MDD is required with
the available plant. For practical purposes fifteen to twenty passes of a 10-15 tonnes of a
three-wheel roller or ten or fifteen passes of a vibrating roller will be adequate for a
lateritic material. For the three-wheel roller the rear wheel is the compacting wheel while
the front is the compacting wheel for the vibrating roller.
(g) Determine the insitu dry density and moisture content of each bay based on the
mean of four tests. Concentrating the measurement of the wheel path of the rear or front
w heel as the case may be.
(h) Plot results of the dry density and moisture content and determine the
optimum moisture content and dry density appropriate to the plant.
1052C. DETERMINATION OF ECONOMIC PASSES
(a) Prepare another test section as in clause 1052B and bring the m oisture content
to the optimum moisture content earlier determined.
(b) Divide the section into bays and vary the number of passes of the roller on each
bay as shown in Table 1.3
19
TABLE 1-3 NUMBER OFPASSES QFTHE ROLLER

Bay 1 Bay 2 Bay 3 Bay 4 Bay 5
4 passes 6 passes 8 passes 10 passes 12 passes
(c) After rolling determine the dry density of each bay (based on mean of four
tests).
(d) Plot the dry density and number of passes relationship to determine the
minimum number of passes that will achieve the maximum density.
TABLE 1-4 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN COMPACTION PLANT AND

LABORATORYTEST: MDD AND OMC
SOIL TYPE
COMPACTION Heavy Clay Silty Clay Gravelly
Sandy Clay Sand
Sandy Clay
MDD OMC MDD OMC MDD OMC MDD OMC MDD OMC
B.S. 2.5 Kg 1554 26 1666 21 1842 14 1938 11 2067 9
B.S. (heavy)
1810 17 1922 14 2051 11 2083 9 2211 7
4.5 Kg
2800 kg
1522 21 1762 17 1826 16 2034 10 2147 8
S.W.Roller
8000 kg
1666 20 1778 16 1858 14 2115 8 2211 7
S.W. Roller
Pneumatic
1570 25 1666 20 1730 19 2034 11 2018 7
Tyred Roller
Sheepsfoot
1714 15 1842 14 1927 12 2051 5
(tapper-foot) Roller
HANDLING 1053. All materials to be used in the works shall be handled with due care and whenever
AND STORAGE not in immediate use shall be adequately stored and protected having particular regard in
OF MATERIALS all cases and throughout to the nature of the material and its susceptibility to damage,
breakage, deterioration, attack by weather or any act of abus'e.
(CLAUSES 1054-1059 NOT USED)
PART © MISCELLANEOUS:
ASSISTANCE 1060. The Contractor shall provide at all times during the during the continuance of the
FOR ENGINEER’S contract all equipment and instruments for the exclusive use of the Engineer's
REPRESENTATIVE Representative on the scale as set out in detail in Schedule No. VI. The Contractor shall be
solely responsible for all such instruments and shall ensure that they are at all times in
good repair and adjustment.
The Contractor also shall supply such workmen as may be deemed necessary by
the Engineer's Representative, from time to time during the continuance of the contract,
to assist the Engineer's Representative in carrying out his duties. These workmen shall be
selected for their intelligence and knowledge of the English language, and where possible
the same men shall be provided throughout the period of the Contract.
隱 GENERAL SPECMCATIONS (ROADS AND BRIDGES)
Payment for furnishing workmen and instruments, etc. to assist the Engineer's
Representative shall be charged against provisional sum item 4<Payment of Wages to
Engineer's Daily Paid Staff5. All instruments and equipment so famished become the
property of the Federal Ministry of Works on the completion of the Works.
OFFICE 1061. The Contractor shall provide air-conditioned office accommodation and
ACCOMMOD- equipment for the sole use of the Engineer's Representative and his assistants. The extent
ATION of the office accommodation and equipment to be provided as set down below unless
specified in Schedule No. VI.
The offices shall be 28.95 metres long by 5.55 metres wide with 2.45 metres
headroom all measured internally complete with ceiling and smooth concrete or wooden
floor, and a 2.02 metres wide covered veranda on all sides. The office shall be divided into
three rooms each 3.6 metres long. The rooms shall be adequately ventilated and lighted
and through ventilation shall be provided in the roof space. The walls must be constructed
of either prefabricated timber sections or sand-cement blocks. All doors and windows
shall be arranged so that they can be securely fastened on the inside. All doors shall be
provided with cylinder locks with two keys.
The following furnishings shall be supplied for each site office:
6 Desks 1.5 metres x 0.75 metres with 2 chests of drawers

6 Chairs with arms 1 Table 1.5 metres x 0.75 metres with two drawers and chairs
1 Typist's table with one chest of drawers and chair
1 Typewriter, standard office size 3 Draughtsman's tables and stools
3 Sets of Normal Equipment for a Draughtsman
1 Six-drawer steel filing cabinet
3 Four-drawer steel filing cabinets
2 Clipboards 2.0 x 1•0 x 0.5 metres with 4 shelves
2 Clerk's tables 1.2 m x 0.75 m with 12 chairs
2 Pairs of set squares 60° and 45°
2 Planim etres
3 Sets of Engineer's scales, metric
1 Set of shelves and hooks as required
2 Stainless steel straight edges -1 metre long
1 Refrigerator
1 Conference Table with 8 chair
3 Small Table with 8 chairs
1 Set o f A p p lica b le B ritish Standards, Current E dition
1 Copy of AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Materials and Method
of Sampling and Testing Volumes I & II, Current Edition.
1 Civil Engineer's Radius Guide
1 Set of transparent plastic railroad curves
1 Electronic calculator
1 Electric adding machine
1 Electric erasing machine
1 P h o to co p y m achine w ith a ccesso ries and supplies.
Adjacent to the two ends of the building the Contractor shall erect a board 750mm
x 600mm bearing the following inscriptions
Principal Resident's Engineer's Office
(Project Designation)
se' 21
Section No. or Description
In addition each door of the building shall be lettered in accordance with the
instructions of the Engineer's Representative. These building(s) shall be erected at
locations as directed by the Engineer's Representative.
The Offices shall be separate from those of the Contractor and shall be fenced off
and provided with separate entrance.
The Contractor shall provide two water closets and two wash hand basins with
mirrors in rooms attached to the use of the Engineer's Representative. The Contractor
shall keep clean and maintain this lavatory accommodation.
He shall also provide soap, towels and all necessary fittings and cleaning
materials.
The Contractor shall arrange for the offices to be connected to a water and
electricity supply.
The Contractor shall provide a roofed shelter for six cars, which shall be built
adjoining the offices.
The cost of providing the offices, water, electricity supply and maintenance
during the whole period of the contract shall be deemed to be included in the price
inserted under the appropriate item in the Bill of Quantities. The buildings and equipment
shall be for the sole use of the Engineer's Representative during the period of the Contract
and shall remain the property of the Employer after the completion of the
Contract.
FENCING 1062. The Contractor shall provide and erect fencing or walls complete with access
gates along the land acquisition boundaries during the period of construction as and
where directed by the Engineer's Representative.
Payment for fencing and walling will be made from the appropriate item in the
Bill of Quantities.
No payment will be made for fencing or walls erected by the Contractor for the
purpose of making secure his own working areas, yards, stores, as this will be deemed
included in this pricing.
COMPLIANCE WTTH
THE REGULATIONS OF 1063. Where the works abut, enter into or pass over property or properties belonging to
THE NIGERIARAILWAY the Nigerian, Railway Corporation the Contractor shall comply with all the regulations
CORP. AND GOVT laid down and give all notices required by the Nigerian Railway Corporation and the
INSPECTOR OF Government Inspector of Rail ways.
RAILWAYS
COMPLIANCE WITH 1064. Where the works arc sited in, or operations connected with the w orks in any way
THE REGULATIONS whatsoever pass through, waters controlled by the Nigerian Ports Authority the
OF THE NIGERIAN Contractor shall abide by all the regulations laid down, and g iv e all notices required, by
PORTS AUTHORITY the Nigerian Ports Authority.
TAKING OVER 1065. The site shall be handed over to the Contractor in minimum lengths of sixteen
OF SITE BY kilometres. The date on which each portion is taken over shall be recorded and certified in
CONTRACTOR writing by both the Engineer's Representative and the Contractor's Agent and from the
date on which each portion is taken over the Contractor shall be responsible for
maintaining that portion of road in good condition and for repairing damage of any kind
to the road culverts or bridges arising from whatever cause save and except the excepted
risks as defined in Clause 25 of the “Standard Conditions of Contract”.
(CLAUSE 1006-1099 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)
FEDERAL MINISTRY OF POWHER,,WORKS

...... — .. ■
& HOUSING
■
. _
'
SECTION II
MASS AND REINFORCED CONCRETE
GENERAL 2000. In addition to any other relevant clause of this specifications the following shall
be deemed to apply in particular to mass and reinforced concrete work and shall be read in
conjunction with all other relevant clauses of the conditions of contract and this
specification
PARTA-MATERIALS
CEMENT 2001. (1) GENERAL
The cement shall be ordinary or rapid hardening Portland cement and shall
conform to the requirements of B .S.S. 12 Portland cement (ordinary and rapid hardening)
and shall be supplied by manufacturers of good repute to be approved by the Engineer.
(2) SULPHATE RESISTING CEMENT
Where the use of a sulphate resisting cement is indicated as specified or in the bills
it shall be a sulphate resisting Portland cement of approved type and manufacture
complying with B.S.S. 12.
(3) COLOURED CEMENT
White or coloured cement shall be of approved quality and chemical composition

and shall comply with the physical requirements of B.S.S. 12.
(4) BLENDING
There shall be no blending or mixing of cements ancUhe use of any air-entraining，

wetting agents or accelerators such as calcium chloride will only be permitted if called for
by the Engineer.
(5) EXTRAPAYMENT
The Contractor shall not receive extra payment for using rapid hardening Portland
cement unless they do so under the specific instructions of the Engineer.
(6) TEST CERTIFICATE FOR CEMENT
Each consignment of cement intended for use in the works shall be accompanied
by a manufacturer's test certificate showing that the cement offered has been tested and
an alysed , the date and results o f su ch tests and an alyses and that the cement conforms in
all respects w ithN IS 11 orB .S.12.
Where such a certificate is not available due to exceptional circumstances which,

in the opinion of the Engineer are acceptable, then the Contractor shall arrange for each
consignment of cement to be tested and analysed strictly in accordance with NI 11 or
B.S. 12 by a tester to be selected by the Engineer and the tester shall supply a certificate
satisfying all the requirements laid down for the manufacturer's test certificate.
Irrespective of the results of these tests, the Contractor shall bear all costs in connection
with or arising out of them.
(7) INDEPENDENT TESTS ON CEMENT
In addition to any tests mentioned elsewhere in this specification, the Engineer's

Representative may require cement to be sampled at the manufacturer's works and
subsequently tested by an independent tester. No cement shall be despatched until the
results of such tests and analyses are known and have been approved in writing by the
Engineer's Representative. Payment for these tests shall be the employer's responsibility
and charged against the appropriate provisional sum, except as detailed in Clause 36 (4)
of the Conditions of Contract.
(8) PACKING AND MARKING OF BAGS FOR CEMENT
After each consignment of cement has been tested and approved as complying
with B.S. No. 12 and unless approval is given by the Engineer's Representative for the
handling of cement in bulk, all cement shall be packed into bags of an approved type. The
bags of each consignment shall be given a distinctive mark, to be agreed between the
Contractor and the Engineer's Representative, also a consignment number, so that each
consignment can be easily identified on being delivered to the site and when being used
subsequently in the works.
(9) NOTICE OF DESPATCH AND DELIVERY OF CEMENT

Before ordering the despatch from the manufacturer a consignment of cement for
use in the works, the Contractor shall give notice in writing to the Engineer's
Representative the number of the consignment, the name of the manufacturer and the
number of tonnes in the consignment.
When each consignment is delivered to the site, the Contractor shall issue to the
Engineer's Representative a written statement showing the number of the consignment，
the name of the manufacturer, the number of tonnes in the consignment, the number of
bags and enclosing the respective test certificates. The statement shall also show where
the consignment is stored. Cement may be shipped in bulk or in 50 kg bags subject to
approval of the Engineer and subject to such requirements as he may deem necessary.
Railroad cars or trucks in which cement is shipped shall be loaded under the supervision
of and sealed by the Engineer. Cars or trucks with broken seals may be unloaded, but the
cement shall not be used until retested and approved.
(10) STORAGE OF CEMENT ON SITE
On delivery at the Site, the cement shall be stored in suitable, thoroughly dry and
well-ventilated lock-up sheds to be erected by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer's Representative. Great care must be taken to provide a perfectly dry floor of
timber or concrete for each shed so as to prevent damp rising to the cement. Small
quantities left at the site shall be stored on suitable platforms and piptected with
waterproof covering to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Each consignment, brand and type of cement shall be kept separate in the sheds
and suitable labels are to be provided for each consignment, brand and type, on. which
shall be entered the consignment number, date of despatch, date of delivery as the site, the
number of bags, the date when using commenced and the date when using finished. All
these labels shall be handed to the Engineer's Representative when the cement has been
used and will be retained by him.
No cement shall be used without the permission of the Engineer's Representative

and each consignment must be used singly and in order of delivery at the site, or as may be
directed by the Engineer's Representative.
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (ROADS AND BRE)GES)
(11) STOCK OF CEMENT AND MONTHLY RETURNS

The Contractor shall at all times maintain at the site such a stock of cement as will
ensure due and proper progress of the works. .
Each month, on the date corresponding to the interim certificate date, the
Contractor shall forward to the Engineer's Representative, a return of the various
consignments in store, giving the total tonnage at site, the quantity received during the
month, from whom it was obtained and in what sheds it has been deposited.
Also the quantity issued during the month, from what consignment and sheds it
was issued and in what portion of the works it was used.
(12) TESTS ON CEMENT AFTER DELIVERY
After delivery on the site the Engineer's Representative may require each
consignment of cement to be subjected to any or all of the tests and analysed required by
B.S.12.
Payment for these tests shall be the Contractor's responsibility and deemed to be
included in the tendered rates and prices.
(13) REJUNCTION OF CEMENT
Notwithstanding the production of test certificates whether from manufacturer

tester or independent tester, the Engineer's Representative shall reject any cement found
not to comply with this specification, at any time. He shall also reject any cement which
has been damaged or which has deteriorated owing to inadequate protection during
storage or transport or any other cause. Cement containing lumps of hardened cement or
which has been stored for more than 6 months shall not be used.
The Contractor shall remove all rejected cement from the site without delay and at
his own expense.
(14) ADMIXTURES
Admixtures for accelerating or retarding the setting of the cement, etc., shall not
be used in any circumstances except with the written permission of the Engineer. When
such permission is sought, the Contractor must supply full details of the admixture he
wishes to use.
WATER 2002. Water used for mixing and curing concrete shall be clean, fresh water from an
approved source and it shall be free from injurious oils, chemicals, vegetable matter,
organic and other impurities and shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 3148.
The Contractor shall ensure that all pipes, tanks and other receptacles for the
storage of water intended for use in the makings of concrete are kept in a clean condition.
AGGREGATES 2003. (1) GENERAL
The aggregate (fine, coarse and all-in) for all grades of concrete and mortar shall
comply in all respects with B.S. 882 (1973) and the Contractor shall test all samples as
described therein and in B.S. 812 (1967) as often as Engineer's Representative may
require, to ensure that they arc continuously up to these standards. All aggregates shall be
hard, strong, durable, perfectly clean and free from organic matter and deleterious coating
such as clay. They shall contain no harmful material in such quantities as to affect
adversely the strength or durability of the concrete, or attack the reinforcement as
ascertained by tests on concrete cubes as described hereafter and by tests as described in
B.S. 882 (1973).
(2) THE SOURCES OF ALL AGGREGATES SHALL BE APPROVED BY

THE ENGINEER'S REPRESENTATIVE
All aggregates whether fine or coarse if considered unsuitable by the Engineer's

Representative shall be removed from the site by the Contractor at his own expense.
(3) TESTING
As soon as possible after receiving the Engineer's Authority to commence the

works (and before commencing any concreting) the Contractor shall have delivered upon
the site sample loads of aggregate representative, of those proposed for the works and
shall forward samples prepared in accordance with the method laid down in B.S. 812. The
moisture content of aggregate shall be determined using the siphon - can procedure
notwithstanding the foregoing, Speedy Moisture Content Apparatus may be used for
measuring the water content of fine aggregates. Each sample shall consist of not less than
45 kg weight of fine aggregate and 90 kg of coarse aggregate in accordance with the
specification. No aggregate shall be used in the works until results of these tests shall have
been submitted to the Engineer's Representative and his approval in writing obtained.
The minimum frequency of testing at each concrete mixing plant shall not be less
that the following:
(I) TEST OF COARSE AGGREGATES
(I) Sieve analysis 7 weeks
(ii) Determination o f clay, fine silt and fine

dust (Method B - Determination o f amount
o f aggregate passing a 75 microns 3 days
(iii) Determination o f flakiness index 2 weeks

(iv) Moisture Content immediately prior to commencement
o f mixing o f concrete for each cast
and hereafter every half hour during
which concrete is being mixed
(iv)Determination of “ten per cent fine value” 2 weeks
(II) TEST OF FINE AGGREGATES
(I) Sieve analysis 2 weeks

(n) Determination o f fine silt and fine dust
(Method C - Field setting test 3 days
(m) Estimation o f organic impurities 3 days

(iv) Moisture content immediately prior to commencement
o f mixing concrete for each cast
thereafter every half hour during
which concrete is being mixed
(III) TESTING DRYING SHRINKAGE
(I) Drying shrinkage 8 weeks
Notwithstanding the foregoing additional tests shall be carried out as and when
directed by the Engineer's Representative
28
(4) WASHING
Washing of aggregate may only be carried out using clean fresh water obtained
from an approved source. The Contractor is to provide adequate storage facilities and
arrange to obtain this water at times chosen so as to cause the minimum of inconvenience
to other consumers.
(5) STORAGE OF AGGREGATES

The Contractor shall provide proper means of storing the aggregates at each point
where concrete is made and in such a maimer that there is no possibility of the various
aggregates mixing one with the other. Effective precautions shall be taken to prevent the
aggregates segregating in the storage heaps and from being contaminated by the gi*ound
and other foreign matter.
Storage heaps shall be capable of draining freely. Wet aggregates shall not be used
until, in the Engineer's Representative opinion, they have completely drained. Where
aggregates are damp, the Contractor must measure the moisture contents of the
aggregates continuously and adjust the amounts of aggregates and added water in each
batch of concrete mixed to allow for the water contained in the aggregates. If necessary, to
meet the requirements of this Clause, the Contractor shall protect the heaps of aggregates
from inclement weather.
(6) METHOD OF CALIBRATING SPEEDY MOISTURE TESTER
(a) Procedure
Sufficient fine aggregate passing sieve 1.25 mm and retained on pan shall be
prepared and dried to constant weight. Weight kg to make 20 separate number of
specimen.
(b) Air-tight moisture content tins shall be weighed empty and to each shall be
placed 200g of the dried soil and weighed again.
© Varying quantity of water as indicated in the table below shall be added to each
pair of container and allowed self moisturization for 24 hours and weighed hereafter
before placing in the oven or for speedy tester method.
TABLE II - 1 OVEN METHOD
Tin Number a b c d e
No. o f specim en 2 2 2 2 2
W eight o f dry soil
200 200 200 200 200
" g
Volume o f water cq 20 24 28 32 40
Note.: ajfter weighing, place all oven method tins into a standard oven with temperature
riot greater than 105°C and diy the specimen to coustant weight and thereafter determine the
moisture contents.
TABLE I I - 1A SPEEDY TESTER METHOD

Tin Number a b c d e
No. of specimen 2 2 2 2 2
Weight of dry soil 200
200 200 200 200
g
Volume of water cc 20 24 28 32 40
29
Note: for the speedy tester, use the apparatus to determine the moisture content of
each pair of specimen to constant moisture reading. The average reading of each pair shall
be the moisture of the specimen. Same holds for the oven method.
(d) Calibration
Plot a straight line graph of oven moisture against speedy tester results. By using the
plotted graph, speedy test results can be converted to oven method results.
FINE 2004. (1) GENERAL

AGGREGATES
Fine aggregates shall either comprise natural quartz sand or be obtained by crushing clean
granite or shall consist of naturally occurring sand obtained from fresh water river
deposits or a combination thereof and shall comply with Grading Zone 1 or Grading Zone
2 of B.S.882 or such other grading as may be approved by the Engineer (see Table II-2).
(2) FINE DUST
The total quantity of fine dust passing through a 75 )〇.m mesh sieve in fine
aggregate derive by efushing rock shall be determined by the method described in B.S.
812 and shall not exceed 8% by weight.
(3) QUANTITY OF CLAY AND SILT
The total quantity of clay and silt in natural sand shall not exceed 4% by weight
when determined by the field settling test decantation method described in B.S. 812. The
quantity of organic impurities present in natural sand shall not be such as to produce a
reaction as dark as the standard solution when the organic impurities are determined by
the method described in B.S.812(1975).
TABLE II - 2
FINE AGGREGATE GRADING ENVELOPES
B S410 Percentage by w eight passing B.S. sieves
Grading Grading Grading Grading

Test sieve
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
10.00m m 100 100 100 100
5.00m m 9 0 -1 0 0 9 0 -1 0 0 9 0 -1 0 0 95 - 100
2.36m m 6 0 -9 5 75 - 100 8 5 -1 0 0 95 - 1 0 0
1.18m m 30-70 55-90 75-100 90-100
600 fim 15-34 35-59 60-79 80-100
300 抖m 5-20 8-30 12-40 15-50
150 |^m 0 -1 0 0 -1 0 0 -1 0 0-15

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (ROADS AND BRTDGES)
For crushed stone sands, the permissible limit is increased to 20% because of its non clay
nature of the fine materials. The 5% tolerance permitted may be applied to the
percentages. In the last three sets of sieves, it can be applied as follows: 1% on the first of
the three sieves and 2% on the others or 4% on one sieve and 1% on others. The
application of tolerances will depend upon the shape of the grading graph.
COARSE 2005. (1) GENERAL
AGGREGATES
Coarse Aggregate shall comprise natural gravel or crushed gi*anite obtained by
crushing sound hard granite taken from a source approved by the Engineer's
Representative and shall contain no harmful material in sufficient quantity to adversely
affect the strength or durability of the concrete or in the case of reinforced concrete to
attack the reinforcement. All coarse aggregate shall be washed after crushing if necessary
to comply with the specification. The flakiness index when determined by the method
described in B.S. 812 (1975) shall not exceed 30 per cent. The individual pieces shall be
roughly cubical or spherical in shape and have neither glassy nor powdery surfaces..
(2) CRUSHINGYALUE
The aggregate crushing value of coarse aggregate shall not exceed 45 per cent
when determined by the method described in B.S. 812.
(3) THE GRADING

The grading of coarse aggregate particles is required to satisfy strictly the
percentage stated for 20 mm to 5 mm nominal sizes stated in the B.S. 882 with a content
not exceeding 1% passing the B.S. 2.4mm sieve size. The percentage passing through
75jim sieve shall be determined by the method described in B.S. 812. Sieve shall comply
to the requirements of B .S .410.
STEEL 2006. (1) GENERAL

REINFORCE The reinforcement shall be one of the following:
MENT
(1) Rolled steel bars or hard drawn steel wire complying with the
requirements of B.S. 78 ''Rolled steel bars and hard drawn steel wire for concrete
reinforcement” and B.S. 4449 (1969). Hot-rolled steel bars for the reinforcement of
Concrete.
(II) Cold twisted steel bars complying with the requirement of B.S. 114 6£Cold
twisted steel bar for concrete reinforcement and B.S. 4461 (1969). Cold works steel bars
for the reinforcement concrete.
(III) Such other reinforcement as may be suitable having regard to the yield
stress, ductility tension strength and other essential properties.
(2) D IA M E T E R OF B A R
The diameter of any Bar for the purpose of this code should be taken as that of a
circle having an area equal to the cross-section area of the bar.
At the option of the Contractor, the reinforcing bars can be purchased from the
manufacturer using metric units provided that the area of required steel will not be
rounded downwards.
Wlien the diameters of the reinforcing bars are given in one system on the contract
drawings and they do not have exact equivalent of the bar in another system, the basic
dimension must be converted to the nearest higher cross section area. The cost arising
from additional weight of the reinforcing steel shall be borne by the Contractor.
(3) TEST CERTIFICATES
For each consignment of steel reinforcement used in the works, the Contractor
shall supply a certificate giving the ultimate strength, yield stress, elongation and result of
the cold bend test described in B.S. 4449 and B.S. 4461. The Engineer's Representative
shall have power to select pieces of steel for testing if no test data are supplied by the
Contractor and the costs arising out of such tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
Reinforcement obtained from re-rolling scrap metal shall not be used.
(4) DELIVERY
When each consignment is delivered to the site, the Contractor shall issue to the
Engineer's Representative a written statement showing the number of the consignment,
the name of the manufacturer, the number of tonnes in the consignment.
(5) STORAGE
Reinforcement shall be stored on site in racks off the ground and shall be
protected from rusting, damage, oil or other deleterious matter and shall be clean and free
from all such matter before concrete is placed.
(6) MEASUREMENT AND PRICES FOR STEEL REINFORCEMENT
The prices inserted in the Bill of Quantities for steel reinforcement shall include
for supplying, handling, bending, wiring, placing, cutting, cleaning, supporting and every
other expenses necessary to complete the works as shown on the drawings or as may be
directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be paid for the net calculated weight of
reinforcement, excluding binding wire used in the work, in accordance with the drawings
or as may be directed by the Engineer's Representative and no allowance will be made for
margins or otherwise.
WATERPROOF 2007. Wateiproof Building Paper used as an underlay to concrete to prevent the loss of
BUILDING cement or as a means of providing a non-bonding j oint between two parts of any structure
PAPER shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 1521 (1949) with the extra provision that the
material shall not become sticky in the roll under any of the climatic conditions
encountered in Nigeria.
JOINT SEALING 2008. (1) JOINT COMPOUND

COMPOUND
AND PRIMER The joint sealing compound shall be hot poured material approved by the
Engineer. The material shall adhere readily to the concrete and to the primer. It shall be
ductile, not excessively soft or tacky at a temperature of 82°C nor brittle at a temperature
of2°C.
(2) PRIMING PAINT
A priming paint suitable for the joint scaling compound used, shall be applied to
the concrete surfaces prior to the pouring of the sealing compound with the object of
improving the adhesion.
PART B - WORKMANSHIP
PROPORTION 2009. Concrete to be used in the works shall be a mixture of cement, fine aggregate,
OF CONCRETE coarse aggregate and water and the various grades of concrete to be used shall be in
MIXES accordance with Table II - 3.
iM M E P
CONCRETE 2010. At the commencement of the works, the Contractor shall indicate the type of
MIX DESIGN compaction which he intends to use in the various parts of the works and obtain the
approval of the Engineer's representative, thereto. The Contractor shall then design mixes
for as concrete of grade as required, each design fulfilling the following requirements:
(A) The cement, the aggregates and the water shall all comply with the
appropriate clauses of this specifications.
(B) The cement shall not be less than that shown in Table II - 3 of this
specification
(C) The water content for each mix shall be in accordance with Clause 2013
(2) of this specification and shall be such as to give the required compacting factor and/or
slump: where different methods of compaction are to be employed for the same grade of
concrete， involving different compacting factors and/or slump, then a separate design
mix shall be prepared for each case to satisfy the requirements of the appropriate clause of
this specification.
TRIAL MIXES 2011. Following the Engineer's Representative's approval of the mix designs, the
Contractor shall prepare, in the presence of the Engineer's Representative, a trial mix of
each design grade of concrete. The mixes shall be prepared as follows.
Before mixing, a sieve analysis of the aggregate shall be made by the method
described in B.S. 812 /1975) and the weight and volume of the cement, fine aggregate,
coarse aggregate and water comprising the mix carefully determined. Each trial mix shall
be not less than half a cubic meter in bulk before mixing and shall be mixed as specified in
Clause 2012 of this specification in a mechanical mixer of the type approved for use in the
works.
The compacting factor and slump of each trial mix shall be determined
immediately after mixing as directed in NIS 12 B.S. 1881 (1970) and shall not exceed the
maximum value obtained in the mix design.
Each trial mix shall be handled and compacted by the methods which the
Contractor proposes to use for that mix in the works, and the mixes shall show no
tendency of inadequate compaction by the methods proposed.
Six cubes of 150 ram compression test cubes shall be made from each trial mix.
The cubes shall be made, cured, stored and tested in accordance with the requirements of
B.S. 1881 (1971).
CEMENT
Hardening
Ordinary
Portland
Portland
卜
cement
cement
Rapid
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH IN
M
o
WORKS TEST MINIMUM

Il
O to 〇 o
P
u
in 寸 m CN
a
〇
〇
H
ls
N/nim2
z
ou
CO
1 S 3M
c? 〇 ^ 〇
Q 寸 m CN 卜卜
卜
30
QZVsaHnlunHls HOi
CEMENT
0.35-0.45
0.35-0.45
0.55-0.65
0.65-0.75
0.45-0.55
0.45-0.55
0.35-0.45
0.45-0.55
0.45-0.55
0.55-0.65
WATER
RATIO
wo
CONCRETE
MINIMUM
PERM3 OF
CONTENT
FINISHED
CEMENT
M13 3zou o S
寸〇〇 o vn
O m s §
… 寸寸 cn (N
!c5
AGGREGATE
MAXIMUM
c!s
SIZE OF
E o o o 〇
u. B
HM3
g3 s
CONCRETE
GRADE OF
cs! r<i
£ O 〇 wn V) CN CZ5
cy e cn _沄
3
c:
£ ll
丨 a
PRESTRESSED
REINFORCED
l v
CONCRETE
CONCRETE
CONCRETE
CONCRETE
BLINDING
PURPOSE
MASS
i
CQ 4 o
4 4
l
Three cubes shall be tested 7 days after manufacture and three 28 days after
manufacture. The strength requirements of the cubes at each age shall be considered to be
satisfied if none of the strengths of the three cubes tested each age falls below the
appropriate design strength or if the average strength of the three cubes is not less than the
strength and the difference between the greatest and least strengths is not more than 20 per
cent of that average.
Failing this, the Contractor shall re-design the mix and make such further trial
mixes and test such further cubes as the Engineer's Representative may direct until the
requirements of this specification are satisfied.
The design mixes which fulfil the requirements of this specification for a
particular grade of concrete shall be called the approved mixes for that grade of concrete
and the Contractor shall only use the approved mixes where that grade of concrete is
specified and shall not depart therefrom without the written permission of the Engineer's
Representative. The Engineer's Representative may require further trial mixes and
further cube tests to be made before such pemiission is given.
The Contractor shall allow ample time in his programme for designing and
making trial tests mixes and for the preparation and testing of compression test cubes
obtained therefrom. Should any design mix fail to satisfy the requirements of this
specification and should the Engineer consider that it is essential to commence the
production of that grade of concrete before the results of the cube tests of a further design
mix are available, he will consult with the Contractor and decide on an interim mix for use
until such time as the results of the cube tests have become known, any extra cost involved
being borne by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself that the materials on
which he has quoted will produce a concrete which, with the specified nominal
proportions and subsequent adjustments as indicated by trial mixes, will develop the cube
strengths specified and at same time have the desired workability in the work itself.
The cost of all trial mixes, test cubes and their testing shall be deemed to be
included in the tendered rates for concrete.
MIXING OF 2012. (1) GENERAL

CONCRETE
Concrete shall be mixed in mechanical mixers of the weigh-batch type as stated in
the Contractor's mix design proposal, complying with the requirements of B.S. 1305
(1967) and fitted with an approved weight measuring device. No hand-mixing will be
permitted. Mixing shall continue until there is a through distribution of the materials and
the mass is of uniform colour and consistency. The period of mixing, judged from the time
that all materials including the water are in mixer, shall be not less than that or should not
be more than 2 minutes per m 3 or as recommended by the manufacturer. The concrete
mixer shall revolve at the speed recommended by the manufacturer, or as ordered by the
Engineer's Representative. The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before
materials for the next batch are fed in. Should there, for any reason, be a stoppage greater
than 30 minutes duration, the drum of the mixer shall be thoroughly washed out with
clean fresh water before mixing is resumed. Stationaiy mixers shall be equipped with an
acceptable timing device that will not permit the batch to be discharged until the specified
mixing time has elapsed.
(2) RE-MIXING OF CONCRETE
No partly set concrete shall be placed in the works. Concrete which has
commenced to set shall not be remixed either with or without additional water and in no
case shall such concrete be used in the works.
QUALITY 2013. (1) APPROVAL OF MATERIALS ETC.

OF CONCRETE
Before their use in the works, the Contractor shall show, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer's Representative that all materials and methods of storage and mixing to be
employed in the production of concrete, conform in every way with the requirements of
this specification.
Such deliveries of materials to the site as the Engineer's representative may

designate shall be tested and analysed to ensure that they do so comply and the tests shall
be carried out sufficiently in advance of their intended use in the works to allow the results
to be studied and the materials approved, modified or rejected by the engineer's
Representative as the case may be. The Contractor shall remove all rejected materials
from the site without delay and at his own cost. Permission to use any material shall not be
constmed as an approval of its source nor any acceptance as continued acceptance.
(2) COMPACTING FACTOR
Workability of concrete shall be measured by compacting factor. The Contractor

shall provide a compacting factor apparatus conveniently accessible to each concrete
mixer and shall measure the compacting factor by the method described in B.S. 1881 at
frequent intervals or as frequently as the Engineer's Representative may direct, but in any
case, tests shall be carried out at least once every half-anhour during which concrete is
being mixed. Whenever the compacting factor varies from that of the approved mix the
quantity of water added to the mix shall be immediately adjusted to counteract the
variation. The successive values of the compacting factor and the quality control chart,
which shall be kept near the mixer and submitted to the Engineer's Representative for his
inspection as he may direct. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the "V-B" consistometer test
may be used in place of the compacting factor test and in such cases tests shall be carried
out in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the “V-B”
Consistometer, seeB.S. 882part 19.
The Contractor shall ensure that all their concrete mixer operators are aware of the
importance of maintaining uniform controlled quality of the concrete and that they are
experienced in detecting variations in concrete quality and workability and in rapidly
correcting the same.
(4) TESTS ON AGGREGATES
In addition to the tests mentioned above, as frequently as the Engineer's

Representative may decide and at least once each day when concreting is in progress, the
Contractor shall sample and test the aggregates due shortly for incorporation into the
works as follows: the tests being carried out in accordance with B.S. 812 (1975).
(I) SIEVE ANALYSIS OF BOTH COARSE AND FINE AGGREGATE
The gradings of all aggregates must be within the respective limited specified in
Clause 2004; failing which the Engineer or his Representative shall instruct the
Contractor to make such modifications to the proportions of aggregate in the mix as will
allow for such difference and the Contractor shall immediately do so.
(II) D ETERM IN A TION OF CLAY, FIN E SILT A ND FINE D UST IN THE

F IN E A G G R E G A T E -F IE L D SETTLIN G TEST
Should the amount of clay, fine silt and fine dust exceed 4% by volume, then the
Contractor shall refrain from using the aggregate until he satisfies the Engineer's
Representative of its suitability for making concrete of the quality required.
(IV) DETERMINATION OF ORGANIC IMPURITIES
Should the colour produced by the test be as dark as the standard solution, the
aggregate shall not be used until further comparative compression tests specified in
B.S. 882 (1973) have been carried out and given satisfactory results.
(5) PROTECTION OF CEMENT
During windy weather, effective precautions shall be taken to prevent the cement
from being blown away during the process of apportioning and mixing. One method of
checking this is by use of wide planks as wind breakers in the directions of the wind.
During wet weather both cement and concrete shall be adequately protected either by
covering with polythene or tarpaulin.
(6) PRELIMINARY CUBE STRENGTH TESTS (I)
Prior to the commencement of any concreting work and subsequently whenever a

change is intended in the materials or the proportions of the materials to be used,
preliminary cube strength tests shall be made in accordance with B.S. 1881, ''Methods of
Testing Concrete,,5to establish that the mean strength of the mix conforms with the design
requirement. Reliance shall not be placed on the strength obtained from only one set of
three test specimens, but separate samples of the material to be used, taken on three
occasions at intervals of not less than one day, shall be forwarded to the testing authority
for preliminary cube strength tests. From each sample of material, six cubes shall be
made, three for test at seven days and three for test at twenty-eight days.
(II) WORKS CUBE STRENGTH TESTS
Works Cubes, whether requked for the normal method or for the special method
of quality control described respectively hereunder shall be made and cured in manner
described in B.S. 1881. Where the concrete is vibrated, the cubes shall be compacted by
similar means in such a way that full compaction of the concrete with neither segregation
nor excessive latex is obtained. Samples of concrete from which works test cubes shall be
made shall be taken in accordance with B.S. 1881 and in particular at the time and place of
deposition of the concrete and at such other times and places as the Engineer's
Representative will direct.
(III) The frequency of sampling for each concrete mixing plant used for the
Contract shall be as follows:
(1) when each mix is first made for use in the works, batches shall be sampled
at the rate of 8 batches per day for the first 5 days of using that mix or at such other times as
directed by the Engineer's Representative until a total of 40 batches have been sampled,
with a minimum requirement that:
(1) One batch shall be sampled each day particularly when any concrete of a
particular mix is made
(ii) One batch shall be sampled for each cast of concrete to be post tensioned.
(2) Thereafter one sample shall be taken on each day any grade of concrete is
made.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, additional samples shall be taken by the

Contractor as and when directed by the Engineer's Representative.
From each sample of concrete and at the place where the sample was taken six test
cubes shall be made; 3 shall be tested at an age of 7 days and 3 at an age of 28 days. The test
cubes shall be made cured and tested in accordance with B.S. 1881. If cured at a mid-point
temperature of 27° C, then the 20° C strengths will be assumed to be 0.80 times the 27° C
strength.
For the strength of concrete to be acceptable to the Engineer, the following shall
be achieved:
(1) Each test cube shall have compressive strength of not less than that
specified on the drawings
(2) Notwithstanding the provision of sub-clause (1) above, should the 20°
compressive strength of a test cube or cubes tested at an age of 7 days be below the
minimum specified strength, then if the other test cubes of the set tested at 28 days comply
with the Specification, the concrete shall be deemed to have passed the tests.
(3) Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of the Clause, the quality

control exercised at each mixing plant and for each mix shall be such that the overall
average 20°C compressive strength achieved (measured in N/mm2) minus 1.64
multiplied by the standard deviation achieved (measured in N/mm2) shall be more that or
equal to the specified minimum 28 days 20°c compressive strength.
Overall average compressive strength and standard deviation shall be calculated

from the results obtained from the latest forty consecutive sets of 3 test cubes of any one
mix and from any one mixing plant.
(x
N
5= U )2 -
N -i
where N = Number of cubes tested

x = 28 day compressive strength
of 150 mm cube in N/MM2
S = Standard deviation in N/MM2
Notwithstanding the foregoing, the standard deviation shall not be calculated for a
mix until there are at least 40 sets of 3 test cube results available.
Test reports shall include the following information:
(1) Reference number of test cubes

(2) Class of concrete
(3) Location of concrete in works from which the sample was taken
(4) Time and date test cubes were taken
(5) Age of test cubes at test and curing conditions
(6) Workability
(7) Cement/fine aggregate/coarse aggregate ratio by weight
(8) Water/cement ratio by weight
(9) Individual and average compression strengths of the 3 test cubes and assumed
20°C values if different
(10) Individual and average densities of the 3 test cubes
(11) Average compressive strength and standard deviation for which the mix has
been designed
(12) Overall average 20°C compressive strength and standard deviation achieved
using the results obtained from the latest forty consecutive sets of 3 test cubes
made from the same mix and the same mixing plant.
(13) Overall average compressive strength from (12) Minus 1.64 multiplied by
deviation from (12)
If results of the cube tests do not comply with the Specification and/or if the figure
from item (13) of the test report is less that the specified minimum 28 day compressive
strength, then either the quality control at the relevant mixing plant shall be improved to
the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative or the mix shall be redesigned to the
satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative. If directed by the Engineer, redesign of the
mix shall include carrying out further preliminary laboratory tests in accordance with the
Specification with the redesigned mix.
(IV) INDEPENDENT CUBES
The Contractor shall arrange for the Engineer's representative to be present during the
sampling of the concrete and the manufacture, storing and curing of the cubes to ensure
that there is complete agreement between himself and the Engineer's Representative that
the said cubes are entirely acceptable as test cubes. Should the Contractor fail to arrange
for the Engineer's Representative to be present when required or decline to do so, the
cubes so manufactured will not be accepted as test cubes.
Should the Contractor wish to make independent test cubes he may do so at his
own expense, but the results will not be valid unless the cubes are manufactured in the
presence of the Engineer's Representative and tested by an approved Agency, all in
accordance with B.S. 1881. The approved form, giving the reference number of the cube,
its size and weight, the grade of concrete from which it was made, the compaction factor,
the date on which it was made, the date on which it was tested, the total load in kN at which
it failed, the stress in N/mm2 and the location of structure at which the sample of concrete
was taken. Two copies of each test certificate, containing all the information mentioned
above, shall be forwarded to the Engineer's Representative for his retention and a third
copy retained in the Contractor's laboratory. •
(V) FAILURE OF TEST CUBES FOR STRENGTH REQUIREMENT
Should either the test cubes crushed at 7 days or those crushed at 28 days or both,
fail to satisfy to specified requirements, the Contractor shall, on the Engineer's
Representative instructions, take one or more of the following steps:
(A) He shall alter the design of the mix to increase its average compressive
strength
(B) He shall alter the method of making the concrete and controlling its
quality to reduce the variability of the concrete
(C) He shall cut out and replace concrete placed in the works on any day in
which a cube was made and failed it, in the opinion of the Engineer's
Representative, such concrete is likely to be incapable of fulfilling its
purpose. The Engineer may require the Contractor to cut out defective
rriK a.
concrete from the works even though test cubes made from that concrete have not failed.
This may arise if the concrete failed to meet other salient features and quality standard
like the following:
(i) Honey Combing

(ii) Cold Joint
(7) CORRELATION OF TESTS
Tests on concrete materials and concrete shall be made as often as directed by the
Engineer's Representative and at instances such that the test results can be directly
correlated to the works tests cubes for a particular batch of concrete.
(8) COST OF TESTS
The Contractor shall bear the cost of carrying out and supplying all labour,
materials and equipment for the sieve, silt, organic impurities, bulking, compacting factor
and slump tests mentioned above and any other tests required by the Engineer or the
Engineer's Representative to ensure proper quality control of the concrete. He shall also
• bear the cost of supplying all labour, materials and equipment necessary for the
preparation of the compression test cubes and their subsequent storing, curing, packing,
transportation and testing. All costs arising out of modification to the concrete mixes,
cutting out and replacing of defective concrete and all other work carried out in
accordance with this Clause shall be borne by the Contractor.
TRANSPORTATION 2014. Concrete shall be taken from the place of mixing to the place of deposition by
OF CONCRETE methods which will prevent the drying out and consolidation of the concrete, the
segregation and loss of the ingredients, and which are sufficiently rapid to ensure that the
concrete does not commeacc to set before it is finally compacted in position. During
transportation, the concrete shall be protected from all adverse effects of sun, wind and
rain. The concrete shall be deposited by means of chutes through a depth exceeding 3
meters. All mixers, barrows, spades and other mixing and distributing equipment will be
thoroughly clean before commencing each period of use and shall be kept free of partly
set concrete which shall not be used in the works. No concrete shall be transported over or
near to new work that has insufficiently hardened, in order to prevent harmfiil vibration of
the new work and no planks or ways for skips, etc. shall be supported on either formwork
or reinforcement for the same reason.
PLACING AND 2015. No concrete shall be placed in any part of the works until written permission to do
COMPACTION so has been obtained from the Engineer's Representative. Well in advance of the intention
to place concrete, the Contractor shall forward to the Engineer's Representative for his
approval full information about the order in which he proposes to place concrete in the
various parts of the works, the height of each lift of concrete, details of the shuttering
which he proposes to employ with relevant calculations and positions of all construction
joints.
All construction joints shall be formed as specified in Clause 2019 and there shall
be no stoppage of the placing of concrete except at such proper construction joints.
The Contractor will be required to furnish the Engineer's Representative with

satisfactory evidence that all preparation, precautions and provisions have been made to
ensure that the concrete shall be placed and compacted in accordance with this
specification before the Engineer's Representative will give his permission for concreting
to proceed.
For members involving “vertical” placing of the concrete (e.g. piers) each lift
shall be deposited in layers extending for the fall width between shuttering and of such
depth that each layer can be easily and effectively incorporated with the layer below by
the means of compaction being employed. The layers shall be placed horizontally,
sloping beds not being permitted unless particularly so specified.
For members involving “horizontal” placing of the concrete (e.g. deck slabs)， the
concrete shall be placed along the line of the starting point, in such quantities as will allow
the member to cast to its full depth along the full width between side shutter and then
gradually brought towards the finishing point along entire front, parallel to the starting
line, the tampers for giving required surface and compaction following as closely behind
practicable.
All members shall be concreted at such a rate as eliminate any possibility of fresh
batches of concrete be deposited immediately adjacent to batches which have been
commenced to set and all members shall be poured in one continue operation until
completed, no interval being allowed to lapse with the work is in hand.
Care shall be taken to ensure that the process of placing concrete does not cause
any harmful vibration to adjacent work that has insufficiently hardened.
Should any unforeseen occurrence result in a stoppage of concreting for such a

time as might allow the concrete already placed to begin to set before the next batches can
be compacted into place, the Contractor shall immediately insert, at his own cost, a proper
end-shutter to form a proper tongue and groove construction joint as specified in Clause
2019 normal to the work at that point which will ensure that the section already cast is
formed complete in accordance with this specification. Any additional reinforcement
required as a result of the joint shall be provided by the Contractor at his own expense.
No concrete for work which will present a large exposed surface (e.g. deck slab)
shall be placed in the direct rays of the sun and the Contractor shall erect shades to protect
such work therefrom.
Compaction of the concrete shall be effected by either hand or mechanical means

and all compacting tools must be approved by the Engineer's Representative before being
used in the works. The concrete shall be worked well up against whatever surface it
adjoins and compacted to such a degree that it reaches its maximum density as a
homogeneous mass, free from air and water holes, and penetrates to all comers of the
moulds and shuttering and completely surrounds the reinforcement. Care shall be taken
to ensure that neither hand pounders nor mechanical vibrators come into contact with the
formwork, reinforcement or any embedded fittings and to prevent the operation of
compaction from transmitting any harmful vibration or shocks to concrete which has not
y et hardened su fficiently.
Compliance with the conditions of this clause may require working longer than
usual and the Contractor must allow for this in his schemes for concreting and in the rates
for the work inserted by him in the B ill of Quantities.
CONCRETE 2016. Concrete shall be placed under water only where particularly so specified and
PLACED aPPro v ed by the Engineer’s Representative. The quantity of cement in any concrete
UNDER WATER placed under water shall be increased by at least 25 per cent above the cement content of
the appropriate approved mix. Concrete shall be placed in still water only and every
precautions shall be taken to prevent the cement and fine materials from being washed out
of the concrete. Concrete shall be placed either with a tremie or a bottom opening box of a
type approved by the Engineer's Representative. Bottom opening boxes shall not be
opened until they are resting on the w ork and the low er ends of tremie pipes shall always
be kept below the surface of the wet concrete already deposited. No concrete shall be
allowed to fall through water at any time. Concrete shall be place evenly over the whole
area enclosed by the shuttering and must not be raked over, only the minimum of
screeding being allowed once the concrete has been replaced.
Concrete under water shall be placed in accordance with the provisions of the
British Standards Code ofPractice 2004 (8.2.2.3.3 or 8.2.2.3.4).
PROTECTION 2017. In cases where concrete is to be deposited against ground known or suspected to
AGAINST contain sulphate salts or other deleterious chemical agents, sulphate resisting Portland
CHEMICAL cement shall used instead of ordinary Portland cement. The sulphate resisting Portland
ACTION cement shall be of approved manufacture and in accordance with B.S. 12 (1958) and in
such situations where its use is required, particular care shall be taken to keep the ground
water level below the level of concrete being placed until that concrete has hardened and
has been cured as specified in Clause 2022.
ATTENDANCE 2018. During all concreting operations, the Contractor that a competent joiner and a
OF JOINER AND competent shall ensure steel fixer (in the case of reinforced work most especially in work
STEEL FIXER in which fittings are embedded) are in attendance on each concreting operation. It shall be
their duty to ensure that the formwork is maintained in accordance with the specification,
temporary construction joints inserted as necessary, and reinforcement and fittings
maintained in place as the work proceeds.
CONSTRUCTION 2019. All construction joints in all classes of work shall be formed by inserting stopping
JOINTS off boards normal to the work to forai a tongue and groove joint as detailed on the
drawings and against which the concrete can be properly compacted. They shall be
foraacd in the position shown on the drawings or as directed and approved by the
iingineer's Representative. There shall be no construction joints in precast members nor
in the reinforced concrete deck slabs of minor spans. In the case of tee beams the rib and
slab shall be cast together in one continuous operation. In other work, construction joints
shall be located at points where shear stresses or tensile concrete stresses are a minimum
and at place where they will least effect the appearance and properties of the finished
works, but no construction joint may be inserted without the written approval of the
Engineer's Representative. All reinforcem ent required by the Engineer's Representative
as a consequence of the position selected for any proposed construction joint shall be
provided by the Contractor at his own cost, unless, in the opinion of the Engineer's
Representative, the joint is absolutely necessary and there is no alternative position for
such joint.
When work is resumed against a horizontal surface which has hardened or

recently set, the surface of the concrete shall be roughened by hacking and all laitance,
loose and porous material and poorly compacted concrete shall be removed from it. When
reinforcement or fittings project from the older concrete, these shall be carefully cleaned,
utmost care being taken not to break the bond and freed from all adherent coatings of
concrete and other matter likely to reduce the bond between the steel and the concrete
about to be poured. The surface of the concrete (and steel if applicable) shall then be
swept clean, brushed with a steel wire brush to remove all loose material, saturated with
water, thoroughly cleaned and all surplus water removed. A 12ram layer of stiff, freshly
mixed mortar containing the same proportions of cement and fine aggregates as the grade
of concrete immediately before concreting commences and the fresh concrete carefully
pounded into it without delay.
When work is to be resumed against a vertical face which has hardened or recently
set, the surface of the concrete (and projecting steel and fittings if any) shall be treated
.exactly as described above for horizontal surfaces, but the application of the 12mm layer
or mortar shall be omitted and the fresh concrete shall be thoroughly compacted against
the damp vertical surfaces after the final saturation with water and the final through
cleaning.
All costs incurred in complying with the requirements of this clause shall be
deemed to be included in the tendered rates for concrete.
JOINTS TO 2020. Where it is specified on the drawings that a joint is too inserted to prevent bonding
PREVENT between two adjacent parts of the structure, the Contractor shall insert two layers of
BONDING OF approved building paper between those parts as specified. The paper shall be tailored to fit
ADJACENT the surfaces of the structure in the positions accurately without any folding or wrinkling
SURFACES and cut overlapping edges shall be covered with adhesive tape to prevent any turning or
movement during concreting operations. Throughout the area of the joint, there must be
not less than two thicknesses of approved waterproof building paper. Concreting
operations and pounding etc. shall be carried out carefully to ensure that no damage shall
be done to the paper.
SURFACE 2021. All concrete surfaces not requiring shuttering shall be smooth finished with
FINISHES approval floats to give a dense surface with a minimum of cement and fine materials
being brought to the surface. The top surface of deck slabs shall be tamped to a smooth
finish, aided by floats if necessary, to the levels, falls and cambers shown on the drawings
or as instructed. The tamping shall not be done to the extent of bringing an excess of fine
materials to the surface.
Shuttered surfaces of work in mass concrete which will always be in contact with
the ground and more than 0.5 meters below finished ground level on the external surfaces
of abutments and piers may be cast against sawn timber shuttering. All other surfaces,
including all reinforced work and all precast and prestressed, shall be cast against steel or
planed timber formwork. Any surfaces, irrespective of the shuttering employed, which
show honeycombing or voids shell be made good by cutting back the concrete to behind
the reinforcement in the case of reinforced work or to such depth as the Engineer's
Representative may specify in the case of mass work, and in either case to sufficient depth
to remove all defective concrete, but no repair work shall be started until after the
defective surfaces have been inspected by the Engineer's Representative. The cut shall be
slightly belled to ensure that the new surface will be keyed to the sound concrete and the
new surface will be cast in accordance with the requirements of this specification and
against shuttering which has been carefully aligned with the sound concrete in either side
and tightly secured in position by wedging etc.
All exposed concrete surfaces shall be fair finished to the entire satisfaction of the
Engineer's Representative. All concrete surfaces shall be protected from damage and
disfigurement due to the subsequent pouring of concrete or the carrying out of other work
in the vicinity or any cause w hatsoever, and the Contractor shall rem ove all blemishes and
repair all such damage to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative.
All costs for making good honeycombed and defective concrete and repairing
damages surfaces shall be deemed to be included in the rates for concrete and shuttering
inserted in the Bill of Quantities.
CURING OF 2022. (1) GENERAL

CONCRETE
During curing of the concrete, all precautions shall be taken to ensure a slow heat
evolution and the absence of cracks. The temperature of the hotcorlcretfe'Surfaces should
not be subjected to sudden changes by spraying of cold water and the concrete must be
protected from sunshine and wind. Freshly placed concrete must be protected from rain.
If low heat Portland cement is preferred, the cement shall conform to the requirements of
B.S. 1370.
(2) WATER CURING
Very great importance is attached to the proper curing of the freshly placed
concrete and the Contractor must ensure that is effectively done. All newly placed
concrete shall be protected from the effects of rain, drying winds and the sun by suitable
screens of damp hessian or damp sand after the concrete has hardened sufficiently to
support them directly without marking. The ends and sides of the screens shall be held
down at the edges to prevent draughts from getting underneath. As soon as the concrete
has hardened sufficiently to support the coverings without marking, it shall be covered
with clean sacks, Hessians or a 50mm thick layer of clean sand or other approved material
which shall be kept continuously in a wet condition by frequent spraying with fresh clean
water. Where the concrete to be cured is enclosed by shuttering, the shuttering shall be
covered with clean sacks or hessian which must be kept continuously in a wet condition.
When the shuttering is removed, the damp hessian or sacks shall be hung directly around
the concrete member and kept continuously wet by spraying with clean fresh water.
Providing that the shuttering has been covered with approved mould oil which will
prevent the timber from absorbing water from the concrete, the time that the concrete
remains in formwork under the conditions herein specified shall count a s part of the
curing period. Curing of all concrete shall continue for at least 7 days or as directed by the
Engineer's Representative or as otherwise specified. On no account must the surrounding
sacks, hessian, etc. be allowed to dry out during the curing period. The cost of curing shall
be deemed to be included in he tendered rates for concrete.
(3) RESINOUS CURING
As an alternative method of curing, the surface may be protected, where approved

by the Engineer's Representative by treating with an approved resinous curing
compound, mechanically sprayed on the surface of the finished concrete at a rate
approved by the Engineer's Representative as soon as it is possible to produce a
membrane of uniform thickness. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer's
Representative, the compound shall be applied immediately after completion of the
laying and finishing of the concrete. Any groove over a joint shall be protected from the
entry of curing liquid.
FORMWORK 2023. (1) GENERAL
All formwork shall be adapted in every respect to the structure and to the required
surface finish for the concrete. It shall be fixed in perfect alignment and securely propped
and braced so as to withstand without displacement, distortion or movement of any kind
the weight of construction and the movement of persons, materials and plant.
It shall be sufficiently watertight to prevent any loss of liquid from the concrete
and shall be capable of being removed without shock, vibration or damage to the
concrete.
Where wroth shuttering is specified, the faces to be in contact with the concrete
shall be planed perfectly smooth an<^; true, to form in all the surface, curves or shapes
specified and joints shall be planed and perfectly watertight.
Where rough shuttering is specified the faces to be in contact with concrete shall
be planed smooth and true to form. All joints must be true and p erfectly tight.
All formwork for new lifts of concrete shall be tightly and accurately fitted
against the concrete already cast to ensure that the surface of the new work will be quite
flush and in line with that of the old.
Wedges and clamps shall he used wherever practicable instead of nails and where
it is proposed to employ mechanical vibration the formwork shall be strengthened
accordingly by increasing the number of bracing and props, nailing wedges in position
and using screws instead of nails where necessary. Particular care shall be taken to ensure
that joints remain tight during the process of vibration.
All forms for beams and kindred members shall be designed and constructed so
that the sides may be removed without disturbing the bottom boards or supports thereto.
The bottom of each fomi shall be set with a camber of 1/3 00th of the span or as otherwise
specified or required according to the dimensions of the beams. The supporting struts
shall be adjusted and securely fixed in position by approved means.
Formwork for encasing steel joints shall be suspended from the joints to relieve
the concrete of dead-load stresses. /
Unless otherwise specified, fillet strips shall be fixed in the shuttering to form a
chamber 12mm by 12mm on all external comers of the finished work.
Should the Contractor wish to erect the fomiwork by passing ties through the
work or embedding bolts therein, he must first obtain the approval of the Engineer's
Representative and when seeking such approval, shall forward full details of the type of
fitting proposed for use and show how it will be employed in the work. No type of fitting
will be permitted which cannot be removed easily after use or which does not allow easy
and effective making good of the concrete surface. The use of wires, etc. requiring
subsequent cutting into, and plastering over, of the concrete will not be permitted.
Where steel shuttering is to be used, it shall be of approved manufacture and

panels shall fit tightly and accurately to form a true surface and joints which will not allow
the escape of liquid from the concrete. All rivet and bolt heads must be countersunk on the
inside face and finished flush so as to leave no mark on the resulting concrete surface. The
provisions for timber shuttering specified above shall also apply to steel shuttering as
applicable.
If metal forms are used, the m etal shall conform to the provisions of the B.S. 4360.
For prestressed units the additional 10KN/M2 shall be added to the weight of the wet
concrete in the design of horizontal areas of the fomiwork.
All side forms for the prestressed units shall be eased as early as possible and the
soffit forms shall permit deformation of the member when the prestressed is applied.
The formwork should be designed to withstand the additional forces due to the
vibrations during concrete placing. The soffit shutter should be adequately supported to
prevent any settlement which might cause cracking of the concrete. On the soffit shutter,
provision should be made for the elastic shortening of the concrete under prestressed.
GHNERAL SPECIFICATIONS (ROADS AND BRIDGES)
An upward camber shall be given to ensure that the girders do not sag under
working loads. The Contractor shall make measurement before and after concreting each
section, and submit the results to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in advance of the time he proposes any
adjustments to the forms prior to concreting next section, should any adjustments be
needed.
All surfaces of the formwork which will come into contact with the wet concrete
shall be painted with an approved non-staining mould oil, to prevent adhesion between
concrete and formwork. The mould oil shall be insoluble in water, unharmflil to the
concrete, non-flaking and shall not be removable by rain or wash-water. The Contractor
shall ensure that the oil shall be kept from contact with the reinforcement or embedded
fittings.
Before placing any concrete, all shavings, loose binding wires, soil, rubbish and
all foreign matter shall be removed from the fonnwork and the formwork shall be
carefully and thoroughly washed with water. Loose planks shall be incorporated in the
bottom of panels of shuttering to facilitate the removal of rubbish from the section to be
concreting, as necessary.
No concrete shall be placed until the Engineer's Representative has inspected the
formwork and props and given his approval to do so.
(2) STRIPPING
No formwork shall be removed without the prior approval of the Engineer's

Representative and in no case shall any shuttering or props be removed before the periods
mentioned in Table II - 4 have elapsed after placing the concrete.
TABLE II - 4 FORMWORK MINIMUM STRIPPING TIME
TYPE OF PART OF ORDINARY PORTLAND 1

WORK WORK CEMENT CONCRETE
SLABS SOFFIT BO ARDS
5 DAYS
PROPS 14 D A Y S
BEAM S SIDE BO ARD 3 DAYS
BOTTOM BO A R D S
14 D A Y S
PROPS 28 D A Y S
COLUM NS 7 DAYS
W ALLS, M ASS CONCRETE 3 D A Y S
PIERS A N D REINFORCED 7 DAYS
ABUTM ENTS CONCRETE
Wliile props are to be left in position under slabs and beams the formwork shall
have been made in such a fashion that it can be removed without disturbing the props in
any way, otherwise it must be left in position for the full period that the props are left in
position.
The formwork shall be removed by gradual easing without jarring and only under
competent supervision. Before removal of the shuttering, the concrete shall be examined
and removal shall only be proceeded with if the concrete has attained sufficient strength
or sustain all the loads to which it will be subjected. The Contractor shall be responsible
for any injury or damage to the work caused by or arising out of the removal of formwork
and props and any advice peraiission or approval given by the Engineer's Representative,
relative to the removal of formwork an J props shall not relieve the Contractor of this
responsibility.
(3) M EA SU REM EN T AND PRICES FO R FO R M W O RK
All timber or metal moulds inclusive of all necessary supports and stagings
(unless billed separately), bolts, nuts, straps, clamps, wedges and other fixings also all
cutting and waste and cost of all labour and materials in making, erecting and removing
the formwork and for any other work required to construct the forms to shapes and
dimensions shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer, shall be included in the
rate for formwork.
Formwork shall be measured as the net area in contact with the finished concrete
surface. No measurement will be allowed for formwork for temporary construction or
day-workjoints.
REINFORCEMENT 2024. Schedules of steel reinforcement giving the location, bending, diameter, length
SCHEDULES and number of the various bars may be incorporated in the drawings or prepared on
separate sheets. These schedules have been prepared for the convenience of the
Contractor, but their accuracy is not guaranteed. It will be the Contractor's responsibility
to check all the schedules against the drawings and to satisfy himself as to errors,
omissions and all other things regarding their suitability for the work before such work is
put into operation. All discrepancies shall be brought to the notice of the Engineer's
Representative immediately and well in advance of placing the reinforcement in the
works. Where new schedules are required or existing ones require to be amended, the
Contractor shall prepare such new or amended schedules in accordance with B.S. 4466
(1969) and forward three copies of each to the Engineer's Representative well in advance
of placing reinforcement in the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for his own
ordering sheets.
The cost of checking all new and amended schedules as specified above shall be
deemed to be included in the tendered rates for reinforcement.
BENDING 2025. (1) GENERAL

AND FIXING OF
REINFORCEMENT All reinforcing bars shall be carefully bent with an even and gradual motion to the
correct dimensions by experienced steel benders and in a manner which will not injure the
material. In particular, no reinforcement shall be heated before bending. Unless Stated to
be otherwise in the schedules, all bends and bending shall be in accordance with B.S.
4466.
Unless otherwise directed or authorized by the Engineer, the number, size, form
and disposition of all reinforcing bars shall be strictly in accordance with the drawings.
Bars generally must be of the required lengths and lapping and welding of main bars will
not be permitted unless so indicated on the drawings.
All reinforcements shall be rigidly in position. To prevent displacement before

and during concreting the bars shall be bound together at all intersections with annealed
soft black be turned inwards, away from the surface of the member.
>RKS&H
Where necessary, upper layers of reinforcement shall be maintained in position

by “ chairs”made from bars of suitable size and supported on the lower layers of
reinforcement. The chairs shall be securely tied to both upper and lower layers of
reinforcement and shall be of such shape as will produce a frame of sufficient stiffness.
Details of the chairs showing their size, bending and disposition in the work shall
be forwarded to the Engineer's Representative for his approval before incorporation into
the work. The use oftemporary supports will not be permitted.
Any pails of metal supports that are left m place within 5 0 m m of an exposed
surface of the concrete shall be non-rusting metal or coated with non-rusting metal.
Galvanized of such parts will be acceptable provided the weight of the zinc coating per
1000cm2 of actual surface shall average not less than 56 grams and no individual
specimen shall show less than 50 grams.
Splicing ofreinforcement steel, except where shown on the drawings or approved

by the Engineer, will not be permitted. Splices shall have a length sufficient to develop the
full strength in bond of the bar, and shall not be made at points where the section is
insufficient to provide at least 50 m m between the splices and the nearest adjacent bar or
the surface of the concrete. At splices, the bars shall be rigidly clamped or wired together
in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. Where practicable, reinforcement shall be
assembled as rigid cases before placing inthe formwork.
Concrete blocks shall be used to maintain the correct distance between the
reinforcement and the formwork i.e. to maintain the correct concrete cover to the
reinforcement. Such blocks shall not exceed 50 m m in width nor 50 m m in length and
their thickness shall be exactly that required to give the cover specified on the drawings.
Binding wires shall be securely embedded into each block to permit adequate fastening to
the reinforcing bars. The number and location of the blocks used in the work shall be to
the satisfaction ofthe Engineer's Representative.
All reinforcement shall be perfectly clean and free from loose scale, rust, oil,
grease and any other matter which might reduce the bond between the steel and the
concrete. Loose pieces ofbinding wire and other foreign matter shall be removed.
The Contractor shall provide adequate scaffolding, boards, iTinways etc. to ensure
that the reinforcement is not displaced during concreting by being walked upon. No
runways, etc. shall be supported on the reinforcement. The ends ofbars which will project
beyond the limits of the section being concreted shall be adequately supported and
protected to prevent them from being damaged or removed by collision, wind or any other
cause which might result in a reduction of the bond between the steel and concrete or any
movement ofthose portions ofthe bars lying within the freshly poured concrete.
N o concrete shall be poured until the Engineer's Representative has inspected and
approved the reinforcement and the arrangements for placing the concrete and the
Contractor has ensured that competent steel-fixers and carpenters are in attendance. See
Clause 2015.
(2) ELECTRIC A R C W E L D I N G
Electric Arc Welding may be permitted forjoining bars, provided the approval of
the Engineer has been obtained and for work of this type the use of electrodes of the
covered alloy or shielded arc type will be permitted, provided that they conform to the
requirements for Class A electrodes, as described in B.S. 639 'CC ,5 Covered Electrodes for
— 麵明圆 -聊晒画r圓而圓麵仙
Metal Arc Welding Wrought Iron and Mild Steel55.Workmanship shall conform to the
general requirements of B.S. 693 (I960), 1856 (1964) and 2642 (1965) as applied to the
general building construction. All such connections shall be butt-welded with standard
Double V or Double U welds.
PART C - P R E C A S T C O N C R E T E UNITS
(NOT T O B E PRESTRESSED)
PRECAST 2026. G E N E R A L
CONCRETE The requirements of the foregoing clauses for concrete will apply to all precast work
UNITS where applicable and in addition the following special clauses are to be observed. Rapid
hardening Portland cement shall conform to the requirements of B.S. 12 and may only be
used with the approval ofthe Engineer or his Representative.
(1) FORMWORK
All formworks are to be such as to ensure true arris and sound surfaces and metal
lining formwork will generally be required by the Engineer.
(2) DIMENSIONS
Units are to be formed to the dimensions and tolerances shown on the drawings.
(3) MOULDS
Units are to be made in strongly constructed moulds which arc closely jointed,
perfectly smooth and true in alignment. The moulds must be constructed so that no
bulging or distortion can occur during consolidation of the concrete and should be fitted
with suitable fastenings to facilitate easy removal without injury to the units.
(4) MANUFACTURE
The Contractor shall provide facility for the Engineer or his Representative to
carry out any tests or inspection during all stages of manufacture as may be required to
ensure the quality and soundness of the units. The proposed method of manufacture is to
be approved by the Engineer before production of the u n its commences. All u n its sh all
have impressed upon them in some convenient position the date of manufacture and such
distinguishing letters as the Engineer may direct.
(5) CURING
The m oulds will be struck at such a tim e so that the units are not subject to risk or
damage or distortion. All concrete shall be kept damp for seven days and protected from
the direct rays of the sun for a further of 14 days. This can be achieved by covering roof or
tent.
(6 ) C U R I N G A N D LIFTING OFF M O U L D S
C oncrete surfaces and moulds shall be protected during casting and for 14 days
thereafter form the effects of sun, wind and rain etc. and the concrete shall be cured for a
period of 7 days after casting all to the satisfaction of the Engineer’
s Representative. The
striking ofmoulds shall be without damage to or distortion ofthe concrete surfaces.
(7) REJ E C T E D UNITS
Units which show signs ofhoneycombing or are badly pitted on any ofthe faces or
are otherwise defective will be rejected and must be immediately broken up.
(8 ) STAC K I N G
Units are to be stacked to the approval of the Engineer's Representative and

arranged so thatthey are available for use in order ofage.
(9) TRANSPORT A N D DELIVERY
The methods of transporting and delivery of the units to site must be such that the
units are protected from severe shock and any damage whatsoever. The proposed
methods of loading, transporting and offloading must be approved by the Engineer or his
Representative before delivery commences.
(10) STANDARD FOR PRECAST CONCRETE W O R K
Precast concrete goods, whether they have been purchased foruse in the works, or
manufactured by the Contractor shall be in accordance with the requirements of the
following British Standards, as applicable:
B.S. 340: Precast Concrete Kerbs, Channels, Edging and Quadrants
B.S.368: Precast Concrete Flags
B.S. 556: Concrete Cylindrical Pipes and Fittings
B.S. 1194 Concrete Porous Pipes
B.S. 2028 Precast Concrete Blocks
(11) R ECONSTRUCTION OF FAULTY W O R K
Should any portion ofthe work give evidence, in the opinion ofthe Engineer or his
Representative that the concrete is of inferior quality, insufficiently compacted,
segregated or improperly deposited and rammed in the fonns or that any of the
reinforcement or fittings has been omitted, incorrectly placed or subsequently displaced
or that is suffers from any defects, omission or injury form any cause whatsoever which
may adversely affect the strength or durability of the construction, the Contractor shall,
on the written instructions of the Engineer, remove and reconstruct that portion of tlic
work i n such m aim er as the E ngineer shall approve
d i r e c t u i ensure that the
TO
requirements ofthis specification are fulfilled.
N o repairs shall be made to any faulty work until ithas been inspected by the Engineer's
Representative and his permission to proceed obtained. All costs involved in the
reconstruction of faulty work shall be borne by the Contractor.
PART D - C E M E N T M O R T A R S A N D G R O U T S
CEMENT 2027. Mortar and Grouts shall be composed of Portland cement, sand and water
MORTARS satisfying the requirements of this specification and mixed together in the proportions
A N D GROUTS indicated in Tables 11-5 and 11-6. The cement and sand shall be measured by volume in
gauge boxes of approved size. The common size is 0.03m3. The gauge boxes shall be
filled with the respective materials without compaction and struck level, proper
allowance being made for any bulking of the sand due to moisture content. Mixing shall
be done in an approved mechanical mixer, the amount of water added being just
insufficient to give the consistency and workability desired by the Engineer's
Representative for the use to which the mortar is to be put. Mixing shall be earned out as
specified for concrete.
Hand-mixing of mortar will only be permitted where very small quantities are
required and the approval of the Engineer's Representative has been obtained. In such
cases, the dry sand and cement shall first be mixed together by turning over with a clean
shovel or trowel on a clean steel platform or other approved surface until a mixture of
uniform colour has been obtained.
Water shall then be added, a little at a time, the mixture being turned over after
each addition, until a homogeneous paste has been obtained. This process shall be
repeated until the required consistency has been obtained. Only perfectly clean
implements and surfaces shall be used in hand-mixing and care shall be exercised to
ensure thatno cement iswashed away during the addition ofthe mixing water.
All mortar must be in itsfinal position in the works within 30 minutes ofthe initial
mixing together ofthe sand, cement and water.
T A B L E II- 5 M O R T A R - C E M E N T S A N D M I X I N G P R O P O R T I O N S
1 M ORTAR NOM TNALM I PROPORTIONS

Q U A LITY X BY V O LU M E
PO R T L A N D SAND
CEM ENT
1:1 1 1
M1
M2 1:2 1 2
M3 1:3 1 3
M 4 1:4 1 4
Note: Allowance should be made for moisture content of sand
BUILDING IN 2028. All foundations, bolts, fittings, kerbs, etc., are to be built into the work as
FOUNDATION concreting proceeds by supporting them either form the formwork in their correct
p 0 siti〇n or grouted into recesses cast in the work as specified or directed by the Engineer
KERBS. ETC. or his Representative. Recesses to accommodate such item shall be cast against properly
constructed formwork and in no circumstances shall they be formed by cutting out green
concrete. Similarly, no fittings shall be positioned in the works by inserting into concrete
which has commenced to set.
The Contractor shall set the metal work which is to be embedded into position
before concreting. All items shall be carefully cleaned, placed and firmly secured to
ensure that it will not be displaced during concreting operations. Anchor bolts shall be
placed by means of templates supplied by the Contractor. All threads shall be carefully
greased after the bolts are firmly in position, but prior to concreting. The position of all
embedded items shall be carefully observed during and at the completion of concreting
operations to ensure they arc in the proper position upon completion ofthe work.
EMPLOYMENT 2029. The grade of concrete, mortar or g rout to be used in the various parts of the work
OF CONCRETE, shall be as specified on the drawings. Where no specification is given on the drawings as
MORTARS A N D to the grade of concrete, mortar or grout to be used, it shall then be as given in the
GROUTS following Table 11-6 below.
T A B L E II- 6 M O R T A R F O R G R O U T I N G M I X P R O P O R T I O N S
GRADE MIX USE

Ml 1:1
GROUTING IN HOLDING D O W N BOLTS, BEDDING
GIRDER BEARINGS, PACKING B E T W E E N STEEL
JOISTS A N D EXISTING DECKS, M A K I N G G O O D
CON C R E T E SURFACES, PIPE JOINTING ETC.
M3 1:3 BEDDING & JOINTING PRECAST KERBS
M4 STONE PITCHING
1:4
The materials shall be mixed to a consistency suitable for the purpose intended.
All mortar shall be used within 30 minutes after the mixing water has been added.
Admixtures of hydrated lime, fire clay, diatomaceous earth or other approved inert
material may be used in the mortar to facilitate workability ifthe Contractor elects. The
amount of admixture to be added shallbe of the quantity permitted by the Engineer.
PART E - G R A N O L I T H I C C O N C R E T E F L O O R FINISHED
CEMENT 2030. All cement used in the works shall be from an approved source, and shall comply
with the latest appropriate Nigerian Industrial Standards or British Standards. The type of
cement to be used in Portland high alumina cement isto comply with the latestrevision of
B.S. 915. The provisions of foregoing clauses relating to ordinary Portland cement shall
apply to high alumina cement where applicable.
AGGREGATES 2031. Concrete shall be made with specially selected aggregates of a hardness surface
texture and particle shape suitable for use as a wearing finish to floors, allto be to the latest
B.S. 1201.
All aggregates fine and coarse shall comply with the requirements for aggregates for
concrete work and shall be subject to the approval ofthe Engineer's Representative.
GRANOLITHIC 2032. Granolithic Topping shall be composed of Portland high alumina cement, fine
TOPPING aggregate as specified and granite chippings as specified. The water/cement ratio shall not
exceed 0.45 and shall be kept as low as possible compatible with workability.
Typical mixes are: 2 parts of Portland high alumina cem ent to 5 parts o f fine
granite chippings by volum e, graded as to B.S. 1201 (1954) or 1 part o f Portland high
alumina cement to 1 part of sand, to 2 parts of fine aggregate, the aggregate passing a 150
microns ( 1 0 0 mesh) sieve but free from dust.
THE 2033. The Granolithic Topping shall be laid and floated on a new concrete sub-floor
SUB-FLOOR within 1 2 hours of laying the latter. Wliere the sub-floor consists of an existing concrete
surfaces, this shall be hacked, thoroughly cleaned, wetted and brushed over with cement
grout prior to laying granolithic topping.
LAYING 2034. The Contractor shall ensure that successive trowellings are applied at appropriate
times by skilled workmen.
1 i.. ._,ri:il'. 'i'iSs；：;.-?-.■■. 152

The topping shall be rendered with a wood float and struck offwith a steel trowel
after the set has commenced. The topping shall be laid to a thickness of 2 5 m m to 40mm.
Slightly increased thicknesses arc necessary when the topping islaid on matured concrete
sub-floors.
The toppings shall be divided into bays not larger than about 3.5m x 3.5m laid
alternatively or as directed.
CURING 2035. Granolithic topping shall be cured for a period of days after laying all as for
normal concrete, seven
R E T A R D I N G OF 2036. A solution of calcium chloride added integrally or a solution of sodium silicate or

DU S T I N G other surface hardener as approved by the Engineer's Representative shall be used to
retard dusting. The amount of solution added shall be as specified by the respective
manufactures or as directed by the Engineer's Representative.
CARBORUNDUN 2037. For non-slip finish to treads of stairs and to landing surfaces, carborundum thickly
FINISH sprinkled in the proportion of 1.50 kg per square metre ofpaving shall be used, being well
trowelled in before the granolithic sets.
GRANOLITHIC 2038. Where granolithic monolithic topping is ordered, it shall be applied in the
MONOLI T H I C following manners:
TOPPING
Concrete shall be laid to finished level and while it is still wet and soft shall be
sprinkled with a mixture of 1 part of chippings to 1 part of high alumina Portland cement
mixed together in a dry state and applied at a rate of spread of 8kg/m2 of surface. The
chippings shall consist of a suitably graded material 6 m m to dust with not more than 2 0 %
content of fine material.
This mixture shall be tamped-in with a wooden float and twice trowelled with a
steel trowel to a smooth and fmc finish.After the topping is dry itshall be treated with one
application of 1 0 % solution ofsilicate of soda.
DAMP 2039. M I S C E L L A N E O U S
PROOFING The surface to be damp proofed shall be primed and then thoroughly mopped with
waterproofing asphalt.
The mastic asphalt shall be laid in two courses in the manner described in British
Standard Code of Practice CP 144 Part 2. Joints shall be staggered at least 150 m m
between courses.
W hen the first m opping o f asphalt has set sufficiently, the entire surface shall then
be m opped w ith a second coating of hot asphalt. Special care shall be taken to see that
there are no skips in the coatings and that all surfaces are thoroughly covered. The two
sides of all joints shall be intimately bonded. The surfaces of any gullies and other
features with which the waterproofing will be in contact shall be clean and painted with
bitumen.
The cost ofall materials, labour, tools, equipment and incidentals and for doing all
the work involved in ap plying the damp proofing, complete in place as shown on the
drawings or as directly by the Engineer, shall be deemed to be included in the tendered
rates for concrete.
(Clauses 2040 -2999 inclusive not used)
FEDERAL MINISTRY OFPOVBER, W =54

SECTION III - PRESTRESSED CO NCRETE
3000. In addition to any other relevant clause of this Specification, the following shall
be deemed to apply in particular to prestressed concrete work, and shall be read in
conjunction with all other relevant clauses (especially those referring to mass and
reinforced concrete) ofthe conditions of Contract and this Specification.
This work shall consist of pre-stressing pre-cast concrete by furnishing, placing

and tensioning of pre-stressing steel in accordance with details shown on the drawings
and as specified inthe specifications.
This work shall include the furnishing and installation of any appurtenant items
necessary for the particular prestressing system to be used, including but not limited to
sheaths, anchorage assemblies and grout used forpressure grouting sheaths.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval plans and working
drawings. The working drawings, of the pre-stressing system shall contain details and
substantiating calculations of method and materials the Contractor proposes to use, in the
pre-stressing operations including any additions or rearrangement of reinforcing steel
from that shown on the drawings. Such details shall outline the method and sequence of
stressing and shall include complete specifications and details of pre-stressing steel and
anchoring devices, working stresses, anchoring stresses, type of sheaths and all other data
pertaining to the pre-stressing operation, including the proposed arrangement of the pre
stressing steel in the member.
Working drawings shall not exceed 594 m m x 841 m m in size and each drawing
and calculation sheet shall include the job site, name of the structure as shown on the
contact drawings.
Working drawings shall be submitted sufficiently in advance of the start of the

affected work to allow time for review by the Engineer's Representative and correction by
the Contractor of the drawings without delaying the work. In no case shall such time be
less than sixweeks.
Throughout the pre-stressing work the Contractor shall employ on the works at
least one suitably qualified engineer who shall be experienced in the systems of
prestressing being used. His duties shall be as follows:
1) Supervision, ofthe storage and fixing ofpre-stressing components
2) Calibration ofpre-stressing equipment
3) Compilation oftensioning operations
4) Supervision ofgrouting operations
5) Compilation oftensioning records
6) Such other duties as the Engineer's Representative may direct
All personnel operating the stressing equipment shall liave been properly trained
in itsuse. In addition to the normal precautions against accident which should be taken at
alltimes for the whole ofthe Works, special precautions shall be taken w hen w orking with
the tendons which have been tensioned or are inthe process ofbeing tensioned.
The personnel should not stand in line with the tendons, their anchorages or
jacking equipment. Simple protective measure such as stout timber shields sheathed with
steel should be placed in line with tendons and behind the jacks to protect personnel
passing in the usual course oftheirduties, ifapplicable.
PART A - M A T E R I A L S
CEMENT 3001. The Cement shall be rapid-hardening Portland cement in accordance with the
latest B.S. 12 with all latest amendments or Portland blast furnace cem en t con form in g to
the requirements of B.S. 146 with all latest amendments. The use of high alumina cement
will not be permitted.
The cement isto be packed in waterproof bags or steel drums and delivered to the
site in first class condition. Each consignment is to be clearly marked with the date of
manufacture and the date of arrival. The drums of cement are to be lifted and handled with
care so as to avoid damage; and stored in a damp free location ready for use. The
consignment isto be used inthe order ofarrival to the site.
Cement is to be stored on site under cover from the weather and is to be protected
from deterioration. Each drum is to be fully used once opened and no cement is to be
stored in drums, which have previously been opened.
AGGREGATES 3002. All concrete aggregates to be used for prestressed concrete work shall be properly
cleaned and graded strictlyto the requirements of the latest B.S. No. 882 to which end the
Contractor shallprovide washing and grading equipment on the site.
Materials, which are rejected from the grading process, may be used up in 10 N/mm2
grade concrete in other parts of the works at the discretion of the Engineer's
Representative. Any rejected material is to be removed forthwith from the site by the
Contractor athis own expense.
(1) FINEAGGREGATE
Fine Aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring sand obtained from fresh
water river deposits approved by the Engineer's Representative. The grading of sand
particles shall satisfy the percentages stated for Zones 1 or 2 in B.S. 882, and as given in
Table III-I.
(2) COARSEAGGREGATE
Coarse Aggregate shall consist of natural gravel or emshed granite rock obtained
from a source to be approved by the Engineer or his Representative. The grading of coarse
aggregate particles shall strictly satisfy the percentages for 19.0mm- 4.76mm nominal
size stated in B.S. 882 as given in Table III-l with a content not exceeding 1% passing the
2.36mm sieve size.
T A B L E IH -I G R A D IN G O F F IN E AND C O A R S E A G G R E G A T E S
PERCENTAGE PASSING
AGGREGATE SIEVE SIZES
150 300 600 1.2 2.4 4.76 9.5 19.0 38.1
m III m mm mm mm mm mm mm
FINE
AGGREGATE 0-10 5-20 15-34 30-70 60-95 90-100 100 - -
ZONE i
FINE
AGGREGATE 0-10 8-30 35-59 55-90 75-100 90-100 100 - -
ZONE 2
COARSE
AGGREGATE
- - ■ - 0-1 0-10 25-55 95-100 100
^ 麵
(3) TESTS
Samples of the chosen aggregates shall be delivered to site and prepared by the
Contractor at his own expense. Methods of testing shall be in accordance with Clause
203 (3) of these specifications. Samples of each aggregate are to be submitted by the
Contractor to a testing authority approved by the Engineer or his Representative. The
Contractor shall obtain from the Engineer or his Representative written approval of the
tests and types of aggregate chosen, together with the proposed arrangement for use on
the works.
WATER 3003. The Water to be used for concrete manufacture shall be clean water free from
chemical or organic impurities and dissolved salt solutions, which may have a harmful
effect on the concrete. The Ph value shall range from 6 . 8 to 7.5. Periodic test on water
used for concrete should be carried out on site in accordance with B.S. 3148.
UNTENSIONED 3004. Such reinforcement is to be of mild steel or high yield steel, as specified in the
REINFORCEMENT drawings. Mild steel reinforcement shall be rolled mild steel bars as reinforced concrete
works and shall comply in allrespect with the latestB.S. 4449.
Un-tensioned high-tensile steel reinforcement shall be hard drawn pre-stressing

wires as specified hereunder, hot rolled high yield defomied bars complying with B.S.
4449 or cold worked deformed bars complying with B.S. 4461.
PRE- 3005. For the purpose of this specification the term “ Pre-Stressing Tendon”or
STRESSING “Tendons”shall mean a single wire, bar or strand or a number of wires or strands or a
STEEL number ofwires or strands grouped into a cable or a group ofbars.
(1) The pre-stressing steel should be one ofthe following:
(I) Plain hard-drawn steel wire complying with the requirements of

B.S. 2691 "Steel for prestxessed concrete, Part 1 Plain hard-
drawn steelwire55.
(II) Indented or crimped hard-drawn steel wire complying with the

requirements of B.S. 2691 in all respects except that for the bend
test.
(III) High tensile steel bars of open hearth steel with sulphur and
phosphorus contents each below 0.05 per cent.
Bars whether plain or deformed should have a tensile strength ofnot lessthan 926
N / m m 2 with a 0.2 per cent proof stress of not less than 75 per cent or more than 92 per
cent ofthe actualultimate strength. F orm eth od s oftestin g see B.S. 18, 'Tensile testing of
metals” .
(IV) Such other wires, strand, or bars having properties not inferior to
those laid down in B.S. 2691 or sub-Clausc (III) above
respectively.
Seven wire steel strand forprestressed concrete shall complywith B.S. 3617.
Notwithstanding the foregoing stand shall comply with the following:
⑴ Itshall contain no welds

(2) Itshall be atleast low relaxation strands complying with Section 3 or B.S.
3617
TABLE III-2 PH YSIC AL PROPERTIES OF PR E-STR ESSIN G STEEL
MINIMUM
NOMINAL ELONGATION
PRESTRESSED BREAKING LOAD
DIAMETER TO FRACTURE REMARKS
STEEL KN (1000 kgf)
mm IN GAUGE
LENGTH
Wire 65 6.63) to 69 (7.038) 6 %

Tensile Testing is
35 (3.57) to 38 (3.876) 6% to be carried out
as per
25 (2.55) 6%
Strands 8 67 (6.834) 10% BS 5896
10 94 (9.588) 10% Mechanical
13 160 (16.320) 10% Testing of Steel
22 480 (48.960) 10 Wires
Bars 25 650 (66.30) 12% Additional

28 800 (81.60) 12% Mechanical
Properties which
are not specified
in this Table shall
be subject to the
approval of the
Engineer
All bars in any individual member shall be of the same grade. When bars are to be
extended by use of couplers, the assembled units shall have a tensile strength, of not less
than manufacturer's minimum guaranteed ultimate tensile strength, when tested in
accordance with Test Method No. California 641, or equal. Failure of any sample to meet
this requirement will cause for rejection of the heap of bars and lot of couplers. The
location ofcouplers in the member shallbe subject to approval by the Engineer.
(V) The Engineer may permit the use of pre-stressing steel manufactured to
standards equivalent to those mentioned above provided that minimum strength
requirements are complied with as indicated in this specification
(2) CERTIFICATES
Copies of Manufacturer's Test Certificate and stress/strain diagrams shall be

furnished by the Contractor and given to the Engineer or his Representative for each
consignment of pre-stressing steel reinforcement. These Certificates must be submitted
to and approved by the Engineer or his Representative before the pre-stressing steel
reinforcement isused in the works.
(3) DELIVERY
All pre-stressing steel shall be protected against physical damage and mst or other
exposure that will result to corrosion at all times from manufacture, to grouting or
encasing in concrete. Pre-stressing steel that has sustained physical damage at any time
shallbe rejected.
The development of visible rust or other results of corrosion shall be cause for rejection,
when ordered by the Engineer.
5 59
Pre-stressing steel shall be packaged in containers or shipping forms for the

protection of the steel against physical damage and corrosion during shipping and
storage. A corrosion inhibitor which prevents rust or other results of corrosion shall be
placed in the package or form, or shall be incorporated in a corrosion inhibitor, carrier
packaging, material type, or when permitted by the Engineer, may be applied directly to
the steel. The corrosion inhibitor shall have no deleterious effect on the steel or concrete
or bond strength of steel to concrete. Packaging or forms damaged from any cause shall be
immediately replaced or restored to original condition. The shipping packaging and the
form shall be clearly marked with a statement that ''PACKAGE C O N T A I N S HIGH-
S T R E N G T H PRE-STRESSING STEEL, P L E A S E H A N D L E W I T H C A R F ,.The type,
kind and amount of corrosion inhibitor used, including the date when placed, safety
orders and instructions for use shall be indicated.
(4) STORAGE
Coils and bundles ofpre-stressing steel shall be stored flaton a floor raised offthe
ground and under full cover from the weather. They shall be protected from damage, oil,
corrosion or any deleterious matter, and shall not be opened until required. Before being
manufactured into pre-stressing cables, the wire shall be cleaned free from loose rust and
any deleterious matter, and inspected by the Engineer's Representative for approval.
Prestressing steel reinforcement which shows signs of pitting or has any surface defects
such as splits, roughness or necking is not be used, and any lengths of wire or strand so
affected are to be cut out ofthe coil and rejected.
(5) TESTS
Tests on pre-stressing steel in addition to those of the manufacturer may be

required by the Engineer and the Contractor isto make all arrangement to supply samples
fortesting to a nominated testing authority.
SHEATHING 3006. Sheathing to pre-stressing tendons isto be ofcorrugated type such as “ hydrarigid”
or similar, approved by the Engineer. Sheathing enclosures forpre-stressing steel shall be
mortar-tight and accurately placed at the locations shown on the drawings or approved by
the Engineer. All sheathings or anchorage assemblies shall be provided with pipes or
other suitable connections for the injection ofgrout afterpre-stressing, sheathings forpre
stressing steel shall be securely fastened in place to prevent movement.
After installation of the forms, the ends of sheathings shall at all times be covered
as necessaiy to prevent the entry ofwater or debris.
The Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the
sheathings are fiee ofwater and debris immediately prior to installation ofthe steel.
All sheathing for continuous structures shall be vented over each

intermediate support, and atadditional locations as shown on the drawings. Vents shall be
12.5mm minimum diameter standard pipe. Connections to sheathings shall be made with
metallic structural fasteners. The vents shall be mortar-tight, taped as necessary and shall
provide means for injection of grout throughout the vents and for sealing the vents. Ends
of vents shall be removed 25 m m below the roadway surface after grouting has been
completed. Grout vents shall be provided at crests and valleys in the duct profile and at
intervals ofnot more than 15 metres in straight ducts.
All sheathing for continuous structures, except sheathings in bent or pier caps,
shall consist of rigid galvanized ferrous metal. Transition couplings connecting the rigid
sheathings to anchoring devices need not be galvanized. At the Contractor's option, such
rigid sheathings may be used in simple spans prestressed members. Rigid sheathings may
be fabricated with either welded or interlocked seams. Galvanizing of the welded seam
will not be required.
Rigid sheathings shall have sufficient strength to maintain their correct alignment
during placing of concrete. Joints between sections of rigid sheathings shall be positive
metallic connections, which do not result in angle changes at the joints. Waterproof tape
shall be used atthe connections.
Corrugated sheathing is to be delivered to the site coiled on to large diameter

wooden drums, securely fastened and protected from damage, or stored straight in
containers.
Corrugated sheathing is to be stored on site under cover from the weather and shall be
protected from rusting damage, oil or any other deleterious matter and shall be clean and
free from allsuch matter before being used in the works.
PART B - WORKMANSHIP
CONCRETE 3007. (1) P R E L I M I N A R Y TESTS

PROPORTIONS
Preliminary Tests to determine the grade 50 N/mm2, 45 N / m m m 2 concrete mix
proportions for prestressed work shall be undertaken as soon as the sources and qualities
ofcement, water and aggregate have been chosen.
(2) PROPORTIONS
The Contractor shall deliver, to a testing authority to be approved by the Engineer,

sufficient quantity of cement and prepared aggregates to enable concrete cubes to be
made. Such cubes shall be manufactured under laboratory proportions conditions, using
calculated to give dry aggregates and the desired workability and 1 0 % more than the
average 28 days works cube strength given inTable II-3 Clause 2009. At the same time the
contractor shall arrange to make two concrete mixes on siteusing the same proportions of
cement, water and aggregates as used in laboratory tests, with the methods to be adopted
for the whole ofthe works. Six cubes shall be made from the second batch of concrete out
of the mixer and subsequently tested by the approved testing authority. The amount of
water used for mixing under site conditions shall take into account the weight of water
contained in the wet aggregates stored at the mixer and the weights of aggregates used
shallbe adjusted accordingly.
(3) PROCEDURE
The results of these preliminary tests shall give cube strengths o f not less than
10% more than those stated in Table II-3 Clause 2009 in the case of cubes made under,
laboratory and at least the values stated in Table II-3 Clause 2009 in the case of cubes
made under site conditions.
All cubes shall be 15 0 m m x 15 0 m m x 15 0 m m and made in standard steel moulds

according to the procedures described in B.S. 1881 and shall be vibrated. As a result of
these tests, the mix proportions for the prestressed concrete work shall be chosen and
approved by the Engineer. Thereafter these proportions shall be adhered to throughout the
works and may be varied only on instructions given by the Engineer's Representative.
(4) W A T E R C E M E N T RATIO
The Water-Cement Ratio shall be chosen from the laboratory tests, and shall be
taken as the total weight of water added to the mix using completely dry aggregates,
divided by the total weight of cement. The amount of water to be added to each batch of
concrete under site conditions, shall be calculated from the results ofmoisture tests on the
aggregates and the weight of cement used for each batch, using the same total water-
cement ratio as used in the laboratory tests. N o deviation from this water cement ratio
shall be made except with written approval of the Engineer's Representative. Strict
adherence to established water cement ratio can be maintained during the manufacture
and placing ofconcrete by using slump value established during mix design exercise.
FIELD TESTS 3008. The Contractor is to provide the following apparatus on site for the testing of
aggregates and concrete mixes which, where applicable, shall comply with the
requirements ofB.S. 1881 and 812.
1. Sampling pans for aggregate moisture tests.
2. Electric ovens for drying out samples ofwet aggregates.
3. Accurate compensating balance weighing up to 10 kilograms with weights.
4. 12 No. steelmoulds for 150mm cubes, with base plates.
5. Kango hammer vibrator formaking cubes
6 . 2 No. slump cones with base plates and tamping rods.
7. 1 compacting factor apparatus.
8 . Water tank for curing concrete cubes
9. Concrete cube testing apparatus
10. Check weights formixer weigh batchers.
11. Copper sampling tube for extracting cement samples.
12. Apparatus for testing contents of silt,clay, organic impurities in fine aggregates.
13. Airtight tins orjars for dispatch ofcement samples.
14. Two sets ofB .S.410 testsieve listedbelow.
Size
mm
25
12.5
10
5
jj.m
2 .8 îm
1.25|im
600|nm
300|imi
150pm
15. Complete apparatus for gamma-ray inspection of grout in ducts for pre-stressing
tendons.
16. Cover-meter for inspection of concrete cover to reinforcement pre-stressing steel
or ducts.
17. Load cell for directly reading tension inprestressing tendons during stressing.
All the equipment listed as above shall be supplied and maintained in perfect
condition by the Contractor at his own expense for the duration of the works. After
completion ofthe works allequipment shall remain the property ofthe Contractor.
BATCHING 3009. All materials used for concrete manufacture shall be batched by weight.
A N D MIXING
. a5%
pB
Tw
#ewi mi— i n i 丨‘ 丨
!丨圆___»_
■ ■ ■ B S S K 丨
Before the casting of each prestressed beam the quantity of aggregates to be used
shall be separated from the stockpiles atthe mixer and thoroughly turned over by hand, to
produce uniformly moist aggregate. Samples shall then be taken of each aggregate and
moisture contents tests carried out to determine the percentage of water content of each
aggregate by dry weight method.
From these results the weights of wet aggregates and water to be used in mixing
shall be calculated for the chosen quantity of cement to be used for each mix, using the
dry weights proportions detemiined from the preliminary concrete mix design.
During the casting of each beam strict control shall be maintained at the mixer to
ensure that the correct weights of materials are consistently used for each mix of
concrete.
The workability of the concrete shall be frequently checked using the compacting
factor test so that the consistency of the concrete is kept uniform. Mixes, which show
large variation from the workability aimed at, due to varying aggregate conditions or
errors inbatching, will be rejected and the necessary corrections are to be made to the mix
immediately after this is observed. Stockpiles of aggregates at the mixer must always be
maintained so that no fresh aggregates are fed in while casting ofthe beam istaking place.
The mixer and adjacent aggregate stockpiles shall be placed under temporary
roofing so as to be fully protected from the direct rays of the sun and rain. Where
compacting factor test apparatus is not available, slump test may be used to control the
consistency ofthe concrete being produced and placed.
PLACING OF 3010. Casting of prestressed beams shall be carried out on specially prepared casting
CONCRETE beds, which are to be constructed under a temporary roofing so as to be fully protected
especially from the direct rays ofthe sun and rain.
(1) VIBRATION
The methods ofvibration to be used shall be carefully designed to ensure full compaction
of the concrete, thus reducing first class appearance without subsequent patching of
concrete faces. Full details of the Contractor's proposed methods of manufacturing the
beams shallbe submitted to the Engineer's Representative for approval.
(2) P R E L I M I N A R Y TESTS
When a design mix has been approved by the Engineer's Representative, the
Contractor is to allow for a preliminary casting of a short length of beam complete with
pre-stressing cables and reinforcement, using the proposed methods of vibration for the
whole works.
(3) CASTING
Each prestressed component shall be cast in one continuous operation and no

constructionjoints will be allowed.
CURING 3011. Curing of the prestressed components shall ensure a slow heat evolution in the
concrete so that shrinkage cracks may be avoided. Prestressed components shall be
completely covered with hessian, which shall be kept continuously wet for a period of
seven days. If tensioning of the pre-stressing tendons takes place before this time, the
hessian shall be retained in position until the period of seven days has expired. The
prestressed components shall then be cured in air for a flirther period of seven days or
enough time to achieve the necessary strength before being erected into position on the
bridge.
FORMWORK 3012. Fonnwork shall be of purpose made steel moulds or plywood panels, and shall be
rigidly fastened together so thatno displacement can take place during casting. Formwork
shall be designed so that itcan be removed without shock or damage to concrete, and must
be braced and held in position so as to avoid any holes or fastenings through the
prestressed component. Moulds shall be of such a nature as not to allow the concrete
member to deform when the pre-stress is applied. The bottom portions ofthe moulds shall
be prevented from adhering to the concrete.
Subject to the approval of the Engineer's Representative, stripping of side

formwork may take place 24 hours after casting or as soon as is convenient after the
concrete has reached its final set. Stripping of bottom formwork shall not be carried out
until aftertransfer ofpre-stress to the prestressed component.
SURFACE 3013. Prestressed concrete work shall, unless otherwise specified have a smooth finish
FINISH on all surfaces exposed in the completed work. Surfaces which will be in contact with
concrete cat inplace to form a composite any roughening system shall be transverse to the
direction ofstressing.
TOLERANCE 3014. The Contactor shall provide continuous, experienced supervision during all
mould-assembly and concreting operations, in order to ensure that the tolerance in
longitudinal dimensions for allconcrete work shall remain within the following limits:
(1) For Component about 9 m Long ± 6 m m
(2) For Component about 18 m Long 士 10 m m
(3) For Component about 36m Long ± 13 m m
The tolerance for lack of straightness on plan or variation in camber shall also be
ofthe same order as shown above forthe respective lengths ofthe components.
The dimensional tolerances on web steel shall be ofthe order of 3mm.
PRE 3015. (1) GENERAL

STRESSING
Wires shall be straightened ifnecessary to produce equal stress in allwires or wire
groups or parallel lay cables that are to be stressed simultaneously or when necessary to
insure proper positioning in the sheathings.
When wires are to be button-headed, the buttons shall be cold formed

symmetrically about the axes of the wires. The buttons shall develop the minimum
guaranteed ultimate tensile strength of the wire. No cold forming process shall be used
that causes indentations in the wire. At transfer of the pre-stress the concrete shall have a
minimum cube-strength of 30 N / m m 2 .
In Older that any applied force may be maintained after the tensioned tendons
have been anchored, an allowance must be made in assessing the value of the applied
force for loss of stress due to the yield in the anchorages and for slip when the tendon is
wedged after tensioning. At transfer of the re-stress, the concrete shall have the cube
strengths as shown on the drawings, or as specified. These requirements shall be
ascertained from works tests on three cubes manufactured and cured under the same
conditions as the concrete member.
Sufficient cubes shall be made so that ifthe stipulated sti'ength is not achieved,
flirther cubes will be available for such additional testing as may be required. At transfer
of pre-stress, the measured deflection of the beam shall not exceed the limits given on the
drawings, or as specified. ' •"
(I) POSTTENSIONING
(I) The system of pre-stressing and the magnitude of the post tension in a structural
component shall be as shown on the drawings.
(II) M A N U F A C T U R E OF CABLES
Pre-stressing cables shall be pre-asserabled in the factory or manufactured on site

from coils of wires or strands. The cable consisting of a number of high tensile steel wires
or strands shall be formed inthe manner as directed by the Engineer or his Representative.
In estimating the length of all cables, extra allowance must be made for attaching either
one or two tensioning jacks as instructed by the Engineer. The method of measurement
for the purpose of payment shall be the length of the finished cable placed, positioned,
tensioned, anchored, cut and grouted complete as in the finished structure.
(III) SHEATHING
Sheathing shall be carefully examined prior to use and any damaged lengths shall
be cut away and rejected. Joints in corrugated sheathing shall be fonned by the use of
couplers and/or by wrapping the joints with tape. They shall be so designed as to prevent
the ingress of cement, concrete or other material during casting. All joints in sheathing
shallbe approved by the Engineer's Representative.
(IV) P L A C I N G O F PRESTRESSING T E N D O N S A N D S H E A T H I N G
Tendons shall be carefully handled so as to avoid sudden bends or kinks, and

threaded into the flexible sheathing before being placed into the beam formwork. The
sheathing and the prestressing tendon shall be rigidly supported in the exact positions as
shown on the drawings so thatno movement can take place during casting ofthe beams.
(V) PLACING OF A N C H O R A G E S
The anchorages shall be placed accurately in accordance with the drawings and
firmly fixed to resist displacement during vibration of the concrete. The anchorages shall
be fixed so as to be perfectly collinear with the axis of the tendons and to remain so
throughout the casting ofthe component.
(VI) S Y S T E M O F PO S T T E N SIONING
All post-tensioned prestressing steel shall be secured at the ends by means of

approved permanent type anchoring devices.
All anchorage devices for post-tensioning shall hold the prestressing steel at a
load producing a stress of not less than 95 percent of the guarantee minimum tensile
strength of the pre-stressing steel, when tested in accordance with Test Method No.
California 641 or equal.
Wh e n headed wires are used, the outside edge of any hole for prestressing wire
through a stressing washer or through an unthreaded bearing ring or plate shall not be less
than 5 m m from the roofofthe thread ofthe washer or from the edge ofthe ring orplate.
The load from the anchoring device shall be distributed to the concrete be means
ofapproved devices thatwill effectively distribute the load to the concrete.
Such approved devices shall conform to the following requirement:

(a) Bending stresses in the plates or assemblies induced by the pull of the
prestressing steel shallnot exceed the yield point ofthe material or cause visible distortion
in the anchorage plate when 1 0 0 percent of the ultimate load is applied as determined by
the Engineer.
(b) Materials and workmanship shall confonn to the requirements in Section V -

Bridgeworks, Part (B) Structural Steelworks.
(VII) JOINTS
Joints in the spaces between a series of precast elements, which are to be

prestressed together, shall be made precisely in accordance with the requirements shown
on the drawings.
Suitable extensions or connections of the ducts though the gaps shall be provided
and steps taken to ensure that thejointing material does not enter the duct or press against
the prestressing steel. The holes for the prestressing steel shall be accurately made and
meet one another in true alignment at the ends and shall permit unobstructed passage of
the grout.
The stressing operation shall not take place until the fillingmaterial in thejoint has
attained a strength equal to at least 1Vi times the stress attransfer ofprestress. The time lag
isto be established during design process.
(VIII) TENSIO N I N G
(1) No post-tensioning of prestressing tendons shall take place until the concrete
has attained the specified stress as ascertained from tests on cubes cured and hardened
under the same conditions as the concrete of the member. Before the stressing, single
wires or strands, the wires or strands in each cable shall be of equal length in tension.
(2) Tensioning shallbe carried out with the approved type ofjacks.
(3) Before tensioning the anchorages shall be carefully cleaned on all surfaces,
removing heavy dirt.
(4) The amount of tension given to the tendons shall conform to a schedule of
tendon tensions, to be supplied by the Engineer, and will be based on the test data for
prestressing steel.
(5) Measurement ofthe force shall be by an accurate gauge indicating the force on
the hydraulic jack and also by the elongation of the steel after allowing for any initial slip
in the wedges orjaws of the grips. The Engineer may also specify the use of a load cell to
determine the tendon tension directly.
(6 ) A pproval shall be obtained from the Engineer's Representative before

each tendon is anchored. The contractor shall provide printed sheets and supply the
Engineer's Representative with a record of all extension and pressure readings for each
tendon in every prestressed structural component.
(7) No tensioning of tendons can commence until permission isobtained to do

so from the Engineer's Representative.
(8 ) The order and sequence oftensioning shall be as specified on the drawings

or as instructedby the Engineer's Representative.
G E N E R A L S P E C IF IC A T IO N S (R O A D S A N D B R ID G E S )
(9) The prestressing force should be applied from one or both ends as
specified on the drawings.
(10) Each wire, pair of wires, cables, strand, or bar shall be attached in such a
manner as to ensure that the elongation is uniform throughout its length. Should any
tensioned steel or anchorage break or be damaged, it should be replaced if so ordered.
Throughout all tensioning operations a spare jack capable of m aintaining the designated
load should be available.
(11) All tensioning shall be earned out I the order specified or approved. After
tensioning, the wires, strands or bars shallbe secured in position and cut offas directed.
(12) Immediately before tensioning, the Contractor shall prove that alltendons are free
to move between jacking points and that members are free to accommodate the horizontal
and vertical movements due to the application ofprestress.
(13) The Contractor shall establish the datum point for measuring extension and
jack pressure to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer.
(14) The tendons shall be stressed at a gradual and steady rate until they attain the
force described inthe Contract.
(15) The Contractor shall keep full records of all measured tensioning
operations, including the extensions, pressure gauge or load cell readings and the amount
ofpull-in ateach anchorage. Copies ofrecords shall be supplied to the Engineer within 24
hours of each tensioning operation.
(IX) G R O U T I N G
(1) After tendons have been tensioned and anchored they shall be grouted up solid
throughout. Suitable outlet with plugs being provided to prevent air locks unless
otherwise specified. Grouting trials shall be undertaken when required by the Engineer.
The method of mixing and injecting the grout shall be approved by the Engineer
before grouting is commenced. The pressure at which the grout is to be pumped into the
duct shall be approved by the Engineer and shall not normally exceed 552 kN/m2.
(2) Grout shall be either a neat cement grout with a water cement ratio not
exceeding 0.4 or cement mortar (1:1 by weight). An expanding plasticizing admixture
should be used. All ducts and holes shall be thoroughly washed out with water,
immediately before grouting and after the stressing operation has been completed.
Grouting isto be carried out continuously, the discharge from consecutive air holes being
observed throughout. The mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned before grouting is
commended. A complete spare grouting plant for immediate use in case of emergency or
breakdow n on the eq uipm ent operation shall be available.
(3) Care shall be taken to avoid lumps in the cement, and sieving shall be carried
out before mixing the grout. It is essential to mix up a quantity of grout sufficient for a
particular duct immediately prior to itsinjection and to use only this batch on the duct.
(4) During the grouting operation grout shall be continuously added to the
bucket from which the grout is being pumped and the bucket shall not be changed
otherwise airmay enter the sheathing with the grout.
(5) Before the commencement of grouting and after the completion of it,reports shall
be made to the Engineer's Representative in writing. The duct shall be plugged when grout
is issued freely from the outlet end, and once plugged the pressure shall be gradually
reduced to prevent blow backs or air pockets. The Contractor shall keep fall records of
grouting including the date each duct was grouted, the proportion of the gout and any
admixtures used, the pressure, details of any interruption and tapping up required. Copies
of these records shall be supplied to the Engineer within 3 days of grouting. Where
required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide facilities and attendance for the
radio-graphic testing ofducts.
(6 ) The grout mixer shall produce a grout of colloidal consistency. The grout
injection shall be capable of continuous operation with sensibly constant pressure up to
690 kN/m2 and shall include a system of circulating or agitating the grout whilst actual
grouting is not in process. All baffles to the pump shall be fitted with sieve strainers size
1 .2 mm.
(7) The equipment shall be capable of maintaining pressure on completely grouted

ducts. It shall be fitted with a nozzle, which can be locked offwithout loss of pressure in
the duct.
(8 ) The pressure gauges shall be calibrated before they are firstused in the works and
thereafter as required by the Engineer. All equipment shall be thoroughly washed with
clean water at least every 3 hours during the grouting operations and at the end of use for
each day.
(X) FINISHING OFF T E N D O N S
After grouting, the ends of the anchorages and any protecting ends of cut-off
tendons shall be covered over by a 1 : 1 mix mortar packed hard into the recesses on the
beam.
(2) PRE T E N S I O N I N G
(I) In long line beds for pre-tensioning, due consideration shall be given to
the friction caused by the varying shape and number of diaphragms which will affect the
magnitude ofthe applied prestressing force.
(II) In order to obtain concrete ofuniform strength, where members are cast in
a long line bed, the difference in strength attransferbetween components ofthe same type
cast in the same line shall not exceed 15 per cent. The Contractor shall satisfy the
Engineer's Representative by tests on special cubes cured under the same conditions, as
the members that this condition iscomplied with.
(III) With pre-tensioning, the specified force shall be maintained by the use of
approved fixing devices, at the ends of the tensioned steel during concreting and curing,
until the concrete has attained the strength specified. The tensioned steel shall then be
released gradually and uniformly.
(3) T R A N S V E R S E PRESTRESSING
(I) GENERAL
Transverse pre-stress shall be as specified and shown on the drawings.
(II) JOINTING
Joints between precast concrete u nits are to be made in accordance v/ith the
drawings or instmetions from the Engineer's Representative. They shall consist of dry or
wet joints. In the case of dryjoints they shallbe filledwith dry concrete quality 50 N / m m 2
that shall be mechanically rammed into position and in the case ofwet joints they shall be
68
filledwith wet concrete quality 50 N/ m m 2 and fully vibrated into position. In both cases
joints shall be finished flush with, the pre-cast concrete faces. During jointing, protection
and continuation shall be given to the transverse cable holes, using a method to be
approved by the Engineer's Representative.
(Ill) TRANSVERSE CABLES
Transverse pre-stressing tendons, shall be as indicated on the respective drawings

and threaded through the transverse holes after the structural components are in position.
Tensioning will be carried out to a schedule of tendon tensions, to be supplied by the
Engineer, and must be commenced atthe centre working towards the ends symmetrically.
The tendons are to be grouted in the same way as for the longitudinal pre-stressing.
Permission shall be obtained from Engineer's Representative prior to the

commencement of stressing and grouting and the completion of stressing and grouting
shallbe reported to the Engineer's Representative allas forthe longitudinal pre-stressing.
ADDITIONAL 3016. The Following additional requirements shall be complied with: N o cracks will be
REQUIREMENTS permitted due to:
(1) Shrinkage, settlement of formwork, or damage in handling before

application ofpre-stress.
(2) Local weakness of concrete ator immediately following pre-stressing or
(3) Improper handling and transporting application ofpre-stress.
Where grooves are provided in which tendons have been placed, they shall be cleaned
before the mortar is inserted:
Mortar shall consist of one part by weight of cement three parts of sand with a
water-cement ratio not exceeding 0.4 and shall be thoroughly compacted in the grooves,
preferably by the use ofvibrators, and subsequently cured.
Alternatively, mortar comprising one part of cement to one part by weight of sand
together with an approved expanding plasticizing agent and less water may be used.
External cables shall be embedded in mortar of these proportions, an upper cover being
placed over the cables after vibration is completed to ensure that expansion occurs
unifonnly within the original profile.
Any tension and retensioning procedure when allow ed for offsetting losses shall
be strictly in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer's Representative. The
procedure to be adopted for all operations, using large diameter single strands used as
prestressing tendon shall be specially approved by the Engineer.
LIFTING A N D 3017. The Contractor shall flimish the Engineer's Representative with full details of the
HANDLING proposed method of transporting and erecting, prestressed beam for his approval, before
commencing this work. Should any cracking or other damage to components during
transport or erection render the components unfit for use the Contractor shall replace the
same at his own expense. The method of lifting and handling prestressed beams is to
69
ensure that the design dead weight bending moment is not exceeded at any point in the
beam throughout the whole operation. Lifting from casting beds shall not take place until
grouting is completed and at least 24 hours old. Erection of the beams on to the bridge
spans shall not take place until the concrete has attained a cube strength as specified on the
respective drawings. The lifting of the beams shall be made using temporary lifting
devices provided by the Contractor to the Engineer's Representative's approval. Initial
lifting from casting beds and final lowering on to bearings shall be carried out using hand
operated chain blocks so as to avoid sudden shock in the beam.
(2) STORAGE
Beams shall only be stored on specially prepared temporary bearings, which must
be such that the design dead weight bending moment isnot exceeded at any point. Beams
shall only be stored singly and not on tip of each other.
(3) TRANSPORTING OF B E A M S
Transporting of beams from place of storage to point of erection shall be carried

out using a purpose-made conveyance, which will ensure that the design dead weight,
bending moment is not exceeded at any point over the length of the beam. This can be
done by in-built pad into the vehicle, which actually come into contact with and support
the structural units. Frame may be inlToduced into the vehicles to support particular
structural units. All units must be coupled directly to the frame to eliminate movement of
units in transit and shall be designed so as to avoid winching or dragging the beams in a
horizontal direction over rough ground. The transporting of other structural components
shall be as approved by the Engineer.
QUANTITY 3018. N o separate payment will be made for prestressing precast concrete members.
A N D P A Y M E N T Payment for prestressing precast members shall be considered as included in the contract
price for furnishing precast members. The contract lump sum price paid for prestressing
precast members shall include full compensation for furnishing all labour, materials,
tools, equipment and incidentals and for placing and tensioning the prestressing steel in
precast concrete structures, complete in place, as shown on the drawings, as specified in
these and the special provisions and as directed by the Engineer. Full compensation for
furnishing and placing additional deformed bar reinforcing steel required by the
particular system used, ducts, anchoring devices, distribution plates or assemblies and
incidental parts, for furnishing samples for testing, working drawings and microfilms and
for pressure grouting ducts shall be considered as included in the Contract Lump Sum
Price paid for in prestressing cast-in-place concrete or in the contract price for furnishing
precast members and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore.

f GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (ROADS AND BRIDGES)
'
.
： 72
SECTION IV-PILING
GENERAL 4000. In addition to any other relevant clause of this Specification, the following shall
be deemed to apply in particular to prestressed piling works, and shall be read in
conjunction with all other relevant Clauses of the Conditions of Contract and this
Specification.
PA R TA -G EN ER A L
TYPES OF 4001. Piles used in the works shall be one ofthe following types:
PILES (I) Type “ A ”： Precast reinforced concrete bearing and sheetpiles.
(II) Type “B ” Cast-in-place reinforced concrete bearing piles formed by
driving a steel shell, which is filled with concrete and left in place.
(III) Type “C ” Cast-in-place reinforced concrete bearing piles formed by driving a
steel pipe casing, inserting a permanent steel shell, filling it with
concrete and then withdrawing the driving casing.
(IV) Type “ D ” Cast-in-place reinforced concrete bearing piles formed by driving a
heavy steel pipe casing, filling the casing with concrete and
withdrawing the casing during or after concreting.
(V) Type“ E ” Prestressed concrete cylinder bearing piles driven in.
(VI) Type'T55 Prestressed concrete cylinderbearing pilesbored in.
(VII) Type “ G ” Steel sheet piles.
APPROVAL 4002. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval details of all the
OF TYPE types of piles intended for use in the works. These details shall comprise complete
detailed drawings and specifications, a comprehensive list of the equipment to be used
and a full description of the methods to the employed The Contractor's attention is
drawing to the fact that no equipment or material intended for use in the construction or
driving and/or boring ofpiles shallbe imported on to the siteuntil the Engineer's approval
has been obtained.
CONTRACTOR 4003. Should the Contractor elect to carry out the pile drive or boring from his own
TO DRIVE O R resources lie will be required to satisfy the Engineer that the personnel he intends to
BORE PILES employ in the operation have had sufficient experience in similar installations under like
sub-surface conditions.
SUB 4004. Should the Contractor elect to employ a Sub-Contractor for the piling, he shall
CONTRACTOR satisfy the Engineer that the Sub-Contractor is sufficiently experienced in similar
operations under like sub-surface conditions.
MANUFACTURE 4005. In addition to the particular requirements of this part of the specification, all the
OF REINFORCED relevant clauses of the specification shall apply to the manufacture of reinforced or pre
AND PRE-STRESSED
CONCRETE PILES
stressed concrete piles.
CEMENT 4006. The cement used in the manufacture of allreinforced or prestressed concrete piles
shall be sulphate resisting Portland cement in accordance with B.S. 4027 unless
otherwise shown on the drawings.
S ETTING O U T 4007. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct O F PILES location of all piles
OF PILES and the establishment of alllines and levels.
A L IGNMENT 4008. Piles shall be driven or bored as accurately as possible to the vertical or to the
specified batter. Any pile deviating from its proper alignment to such an extent that its
load carrying capacity cannot, in the opinion of the Engineer, be corrected by the
strengthening of the foundations, pile-cap or pile ties, shall be replaced or supplemented
by an additional pile at the Contactor's expense. In general the allowable tolerances will
be in the case ofpiles type “A ”- “D ”within 7 5 m m ofthe position shown on the drawings
and within 1 of the inclination shown on the drawings and in the case of piles type
and 'T55 within 150mm of the position shown on the drawings. No wedging or drawing
into line ofpiles thathave wandered will be allowed.
: 二: 二 !73
DRIVING WITH 4009. Piles shall be driven with a drop hammer or with a single acting steam hammer.
DROP H A M M E R S The weight of the hammer and the drop to be used shall be subject to the approval of the
O R SINGLE Engineer and shall conform to the recommendations of CP 2004 and will depend on the
ACTING STE A M type ofpile to be used. In general the energy per blow will be ofthe order as follows:
HAMMERS (I) For piles types “ A ”，“ B ，，，“
C ”and “ D ”- at least 26,500 Joules or 35,000 Joules
depending upon cross-sectional dimensions of the piles, the lighter hammer being used
up to 300 m m diameter piles and the heavier from 3 0 0 m m diameter to 4 0 0 m m diameter.
(II) For piles of type “

E ”at least 54,300 Joules with a ram weight of not less than
6 ,8 0 0 K g.
DOUBl E \CTTON Double-Acting steam hammers may be used when driving piles to refusal but
STEAM H’AMMFRS 也沾 n〇tbe used for other piles except with specific pemission ofthe 它ngineen
PROTECTION OF 4011. Suitable anvils or cushions, depending on the type of the pile, shall be used to
PILE BUTTS prevent damage to the pile butts.
LEADS A N D 4012. Unless otherwise specified or directed driving shall be done using fixed leads
FRAMES which will hold the pile firmly inposition in axial alignment with the hammer.
Raking piles shall be held in position during driving right down to the level at
which the piles enter reasonably solid ground and to the satisfaction of the Engineer's
Representative.
Piles shall be driven from an approved type frame.
DRIVING T O B E 4013. When the driving ofany pile commences itshall be continued without cessation for
CONT1NOUS TO any avoidable cause until the pile has been driven to the required set or level as directed by
FINAL SET O R the Engineer's Representative. Where levels or sets are indicated on the drawings, these
LEV EL may be varied at the Engineer's discretion, in accordance with the results of test piles
driven inrepresentative areas.
JETTING 4014. Where water or air jetting is contemplated to assist the driving of the piles，the
permission of the Engineer must be obtained. The jetting shall be carried out in a manner
to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer's Representative and must be discontinued when the toe
of the pile is 3 metres short of the estimated final depth of penetration. Driving shall be
completed by hammer only, without jetting, to the required set or as indicated by the
Engineer's Representative. Where itis intended to employ water or airjetting to assistthe
driving of a number ofpiles in a group, thejetting ofpiles in the group must be completed
before the driving ofany pile to itsfinal penetration iscommenced.
DRIVING TO 4015. All piles shall be driven to the specified final set in the presence of Engineer's
FINAL SET A N D Representative.
R E C O R D OF A record of the driving of each pile shall be kept in the form of the ''Daily Pile-
DRIVING Driving Record,5, as set out in the British Standard Code of Practice No. 8004. Four
copies of each ofthese records shall be forwarded to the Engineer's Representative for his
retention.
RE-DRIVING 4016. Observations and measurements shall be made in the field during the process of
H E A V E D PILES driving piles, by any suitable method satisfactory to both the Contractor and the Engineer
to determine whether a driven pile has been lifted from its original seat during the
operation of driving adjacent piles. The Contractor shall provide the necessary tools such
as tell-talepipes and instruments, to make these measurements. Such measurements shall
be properly corrected for any temperature variations that might exist in the case ofthe pile
shell or instrumentation.
Where such observations or measurements indicated that a pile has been

unseated, itshall be driven to the resistance specified.
D A M A G E D A N D 4017. Broken or shattered piles will not be accepted. Should any pile be damaged by
MIS-DRIVEN over-driving or not confomi to the tolerances of the specification, an extra pile or piles
PILES shall be driven in its place, at the Contractor's expense unless in the opinion of the
Engineer the pile isout ofplace or plumb as the result of an underground obstruction.
Piles rejected after driving may remain in the ground at the discretion of the
Engineer, in case of shell piles the shell shall be filled with concrete, and be cut off as
directed. When rejected piling iswithdrawn, the space, ifanother pile isnot driven into it,
shall be filled solid with gravel or broken stone without payment thereof.
OBSTRUCTIONS 4018. Where boulders or other obstructions make it impossible to driving certain piles
in the location shown and to the proper bearing strata, the Contractor shall resort to all
usual methods to install the pile or steel pipes as required, including spudding, jetting, or
other feasible means. If, in the judgement of the Engineer, the Contractor is unable to
complete the pile driving properly by resorting to such methods, the Engineer may order
an additional pile or piles driven for which the Conlxactor will be paid in accordance with
the tendered rates. Piles abandoned because of obstructions encountered before reaching
the accepted bearing strata shall be left in position or shells filled with concrete and be
paid for as a complete pile for the length driven.
Where directed by the Engineer, excavation operations shall be earned out to

remove obstructions and the Contractor shall be reimbursed for such operations at rates
and prices to be agreed between the Contractor and the Engineer.
CUTTING 4019. The tops of piles shall be cut offtrue and level at the elevations indicated on the
OFF PILE drawings, all to be satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative. All portions, which are
H E A D S ETC. battered, split, wrapped or buckled, or damaged or imperfect in any way shall be
removed.
Shells and casing shall have sufficient excess length to allow the complete
removal ofworking tops.
B O R E D PILES 4020. The method of boring steel casing or pipes into the ground shall be subject to the
O R CASINGS approval ofthe Engineer.
PAYMENT 4021. Payment for piling shall be made as detailed hereunder in the parts of this section of
the specification dealing with the particulartypes ofpiles.
(CLAUSES 4022 - 4029 INCLUSIVE N O T USED.)
PART (B) - TEST DRIVING AND TEST LO A D IN G OF PILES
GENERAL 4030. (I) Test piles shall be driven or bored as appropriate and loaded in the manner
detailed hereunder in the number and locations indicated on the drawings and/or in the
contract documents and/or as directed by the Engineer.
(li) Unless otherwise directed, the test piles shall remain as working piles
under the completed foundations.
(ill) Test piles shall be driven or bored using the equipment and methods
approved by the Engineer for the remaining working piles.
(iv) Before any load test is made, the proposed apparatus, structure and
method to be used, in making the load test, shall be approved by the Engineer. All load
tests shall be made under the supervision ofthe Engineer's Representative.
RECORDING OF 4031. The results of all piles loading tests shall be set out in a report, the form of which
TESTS RESULT sliall be as directed by the Engineer. This report shall include a description of the pile and
its driving record; type and size of hammer used, a tabulation of the load time, settlement
and rebound data; and remarks concerning unusual circumstances during the driving or
boring or loading of the pile and any other information which the Engineer or his
Representative may require.
^ ... .....— ....7 5

PROCEDURE FOR 4 0 3 2 . T he fo llo w in g procedure shall be adopted for the testing o f p iles referred to above
TESTING 1)1L£S OF as types “A ，，，“
B ”“ C ”and “D”
TYPES A,B,C'ANDD ..
Piles shall be load tested to twice the design load with the test load applied in
seven increments equal to 0.5,0.75,1.0,1.25,1.5,1.75 and 2.0 times the design load with
a minimum of two hours between the ddition of load increments. Increments shall not be
added until the rate of settlement is less than .25mm per hour, or if each increment
thereafter for the test load shall remain in place until there is no settlement in a 2 -lii'
period.
(I) Ifthe fulltest load can be applied without failure of the pile, this load shall
remain on the pile for 48 hours, after which the test load shall be removed in four equal
decrements with a minimum ofone hour between decrements.
(ii) Readings of settlements and rebounds shall be made with a minimum of
two dial gauges mounted on an independent framework and positioned on opposite
comers of the test plate. Readings shall be recorded to the nearest 250|im and shall be
made every 30 minutes during the loading cycle and every hour during tlie application of
the fulltest load. Readings of rebound shall be made before and after each decrement and
24 hours afterthe entire load has been removed.
(iii) The load test shall be considered satisfactory provided that the net
settlement (afterrebound) does not exceed 1 0 % ofthe pile diameter.
(iv) Piles to be load tested will be contract piles driven in theirproper location.
During the load testing of piles, the driving of contract piles may be continued at the
Contractor's option provided the testingprocess isnot affected by the pile driving. Should
the results of the load test indicate that longer piles arc necessary, the Contractor will be
required to further drive piles driven during the load testing operation without additional
cost to the owner except for the added pile length. Piles driven during the testing
operation shall not be filled with concrete until the required length and/or resistance has
been determined by load test.
PROCEDURES FOR 4033. The following procedure shall be adopted for the piles referred to above as types
TESTING PILES OF “E ”and“ F” .
TYPES “E”A N D F Pile driving or sinking requirements as to depth of embedment and/or requested
final driving resistance shall be determined in each area of similar soil conditions by load
testing at least two piles selected by the Engineer. The total applied load shall equal 150%
ofthe design dead load, plus 200% ofthe design live load. The test load shall be applied in
six increments equal to 25, 40, 55, 70, 85 and 100% of the total test load. Time interval
between increments shall not be less than two hours and increments of load shall not be
added until the rate of settlement has dropped below .25mm per hour. The full load shall
remain on the pile for 48 hours, after which a lest load shall be removed in four equal
decrements allowing one hour between decrements. Readings on settlements and
rebound shall be taken before and after each increment or decrement, every two hours
during the 48 hours the full load is on the pile and 24 hours after the full load is removed
from the pile. The test shall be considered satisfactory if the net settlem ent (after
deduction ofrebound) does not exceed 1 0 % ofthe pile diameter.
LATERAL 4034. The Engineer may order, ifhe so desires, that lateral displacement tests be carried
DISPLACEMENT out by jacking between adjacent piles to a given lateral displacement. The method of
TESTS carrying out lateral displacement tests shall be as directed by the Engineer.
ASSESSMENT OF 4035. The infonnation obtained from the driving of the test piles shall be applied to a
RESULTS OF PILE suitable dynamic pile fonnula or formulae. The formula or formulae to be employed shall
L◦ 八DING A N D be as selected by the Engineer. The results of this application or these applications shall be
DRIVING TEST considered in conjunction with the results obtained from the loading test and lengths of
the remaining piles in a particular area or group shall then be agreed between the
Contractor and the Engineer.
76
PAYMENT FOR 4036. Payment for the fabrication and driving or boring of the testpiles shall be made at
TEST PILES AND the tendered rates and prices for working piles of the same type entered in the bills of
LOAD TESTS quantities.
Payment for the pile load tests shall be made at the unit price quoted for load test on the
particular type of pile in the bills of quantities, except where the Contractor should have
made any kind of guarantee as to safe bearing capacity of any particular type ofpile in any
location, payment for load tests shall only be made for tests which are, in the opinion of
the Engineer, successful.
The price by the Contractor for the carrying out of the load test shall be deemed to be
inclusive of allthe costs involved in the carrying out ofthe load test and also of the cost of
obtaining the stipulated infonnation during the driving ofthe testpile.
(CLAUSES 4037 - 4049 INCLUSIVE N O T USED)
PART ( C) PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BEARING AND SHEET
PILES - TYPE “A”
In addition to any other requirements of other parts of this section of the
specification, the following requirements shall be complied with in respect of precast
reinforced concrete bearing and sheet piles.
GENERAL 4050. The piles shall be manufactured atthe siteofthe work in which they are to be used
and in an area entirely free from the harmful effects of shock and vibration. They shall be
cast in lengths as determined by test.
MOULDS AND 4051. The moulds shall be so supported that the pile is not distorted during or after
CONCRETING casting and shall be such as to ensure that the resulting pile is straight and true on each
face. The sides of the moulds shall be capable of being removed without shock orjarring
of the pile. Shoes, reinforcement, links, toggle-hole tubes and all other fittings shall be
fixed accurately in the positions shown on the drawings. Shoes shall be of the type shown
on the drawings and of approved manufacture. They shallweigh not less than as shown on
the drawing and shall have chilled-hardened cast iron bases and mild steel straps cast in,
i.e. the straps shall run continuously through the cast iron bases. All castings shall be of
clean, grey, tough metal, free from sand, honeycombing, porous places, air holes or other
defects and shall be delivered to the sitewithout being painted, stopped or plugged in any
part, otherwise they will be rejected. Shoes shall be fixed accurately to the piles with the
points truly on the longitudinal axis and the lower ends of the reinforcing bards shall bear
on the top of the shoe. Forks for retaining the longitudinal reinforcing bars in position
shall be ofcast iron on pressed steel and ofapproved shape and length.
Each pile shall be poured in one continuous operation. During concreting and
subsequently, the pile shall be protected from the effects of sun, wind and rainby covering
with screens of clean, damp sacks or hessian, care being taken to prevent contact with the
wet concrete until ithas hardened sufficiently to prevent marking. When so hardened, the
concrete and moulds shall be intimately and completely covered with the damp sacks or
hessian and these shallbe kept in a continuously wet condition for a period o fnot less than
10 days after casting.
STRIPPING 4052. The sides ofthe moulds shall not be removed before two days after casting and the
AND HANDLING piles shall not be disturbed on the bottom boards for at least 10 days after casting. The
piles shall be removed from the bottom boards only by canting sideways and shall be
rolled carefully to the stacking ground for final curing. The runners and other supporters
upon which the piles are canted and rolled shall not be more than 2 metres apart and shall
be perfectly level one with the other so that during the operations of canting and rolling
each pile shall be fully supported at each interval of 2 metres along its length. Each pile
shall have the date of manufacture painted on one side and this date shall determine the
sequence in which the piles are driven. The piles must on no account be lifted at this stage
aiiid, uatif ready for driving, must be adequately supported at each 2 metres interval
throughout their length. The Contractor shall keep the piles in contimiously wet
conditions until a period of atleast 14 days has elapsed since manufacture.
77
Otherwise than as aforesaid, the piles shall not be handled, lifted, slung, pitched or
driven before 6 weeks after manufacture and then shall be slung only from the toggle-
holes provided in the positions shown on the drawings or as approved by the Engineers
Representative.
Should the Contractor wish to use rapid hardening cement he shall firstobtain the
approval of the Engineer's Representative. Where approval has been given, and rapid
hardening cement used in the manufacture ofthe piles, the sides ofthe moulds shall not be
removed earlier than 2 days after casting, and the piles shall not be disturbed on the
bottom boards for at least 4 days after casting. Curing shall continue for the full period of
14 days and the piles shall not be driven before three weeks aftermanufacture.
Notwithstanding the foregoing requirements, the Contractor shall be responsible

for any damage done to the piles due to the sides ofthe moulds being removed too soon or
the piles being moved from the bottom boards too soon or from any other cause and all
piles damaged during manufacture, handling, driving or at any other time shall be
replaced atthe Contractor's expense.
L E N G T H E N I N G 4053. In every case where itis found to be necessary to increase the length of a pile after
OF PILES ithas been driven, the head of the pile shall be cut off to expose the reinforcement for a
length not less than 1.2 metres below the top of the steel reinforcement. The joint shall be
made by butting the lengthening bars to the pile bars with the addition of a supplementary
bar to every pile bar and of equal area. These supplementary bars shall extend at least 1.2
metres on each side of the joint and shall be secured to both pile and lengthening bars by
No. 16 S.W.G. wire, links being provided as directed. The extension shall be carried out
vertically so as to form a true continuation ofthe pile. Butt welding of reinforcement may
be allowed by the Engineer's Representative and where so allowed shall be carried out in
strictcompliance with the instructions ofthe Engineer's Representative.
STRIPPING 4054. After the piles have been driven, the concrete shall be cut away ifrom those
H E A D S OF portions of the piles extending above a level of 7 5 m m minimum above the bottom of the
PILES pile cap, without damaging the reinforcement and leaving exposed a minimum length of
0.90m of the main bars. The binders, links, forks and toggle-hole tubes within this portion
shall be removed and the main bar reinforcement shall be bent into the base of the
foundation as shown on the drawings.
PAYMENT FOR 4055. Payment for precast reinforced concrete bearing and sheet piles shall be made on
PRECAST the basis of the length of the pile per linear metre, measured from the tip to the cut-off
REINFORCED elevation at the tendered rates and prices entered in the bills of quantities for the sheet
CONCRETE pilesparticular type and dimensions ofpile. The tendered rates and prices shall be deemed
to include for all materials, equipment, labour and supervision involved in the completed
pile driven and in place. N o payment shallbe made for withdrawn or ejected piles.
PART D - CAST-IN-PLACE REINFORCED CONCRETE PILES, TYPES “B” AND C”
In addition to any other requirements of any other parts of this section of the
specification the following requirements shall be complied with in respect of cast-inplace
reinforced concrete piles oftypes “B ”and “C” .
CAST-1N-PLACE 4060. These piles shall be formed by driving a shell to the required bearing, leaving the
REINFORCED shell permanently in place, and filling it with concrete. Shells shall have sufficient
CONCRHTE l^JLES strength and rigidity to pennit theirbeing driven and not to be distorted by soil pressure or
1YPE “
B” the driving of adjacent piles；they shall be sufficiently watertight to exclude water during
placing of concrete. No concrete isto be placed until allpiles in a cluster have been driven
and approved.
： 78
CAST-IN-PLACE 4061. These piles shall be placed by driving a heavy steel pipe casing with an interior
REINFORCED core or point to the required depth, removing the core and inserting a permanent steel
CONCRETE TYPE “ C ”shell, filing itconcrete and then withdrawing the driving casing. Shells shall
PILES TYPE “
C ，， have sufficient strength and rigidity not to be distorted by soil pressure or the driving of
adjacent piles and they shall be sufficiently watertight to exclude water during placing of
concrete. Shells shall be cylindrical with a minimum diameter of 315mm. No di'iving
casing shall be withdrawn until all piles within 3 metres centre to centre, have been
driven. Pile shells may be step tapered, cylindrical or a combination of such shapes and
may be plain or corrugated. Plain cylindrical shells and shells driven without an internal
mandrel shall have a minimum top diameter of 2 5 5 m m and a minimum butt diameter of
355mm. For the step taper portion of any pile,the maximum distance between changes of
diameter shall be 3.6 metres for shells driven with an internal mandrel, the Contractor
shall assume responsibility for providing shells of sufficient strength and thickness to
withstand proper driving without injury, to obtain proper penetration and to resistharmful
distortion and/or buckling due to soilpressure.
The lower end of each pile shell shall be closed by a butt steel plate or shoe firmly
welded to the shell.
EQUIPMENT 4062. Pile driver leaders shall be of the rigid or fixed type to ensure accurate alignment
ofthe pile and hammer during driving. The use ofswinging leads will not be permitted.
The cushion block used shall be a one-piece hardwood block with grain parallel to
the pile axis and enclosed in a close fitting steel housing, except that subject to the
approval of the Engineer, a cap-block of other materials may be used provided the
hammer energy transmission characteristics of the proposed capblock are equal to or
greater than the wood capblock specified herein. The use of wood chips, small wood
blocks, rope or other material which permits excessive loss of hammer energy shall not be
permitted. The introduction of fresh capblock material just before or during the final
driving ofthe pile shallnot be permitted.
C O N T R O L OF 4063. Observation shall be made during driving to determine whether or not the soil
INTERNAL and/or water isrising inside the pile. Ifthis occurs to such an extent that soil and/or water
PRESSURE istrapped in the pile under the follower, provision shall be made for the escape or removal
of such soil and/or water before driving iscontinued.
CONCRETE 4064. N o concrete shall be placed in any pile shell until the shell has been inspected and
found to be free ofwater, debris or other foreign matter.
Concrete for cast-in-situ piles shall have an ultimate compressive strength of not
less than 20N/mm2 at the end of 28 days and shall be composed of approved Portland
sulphate resisting cement, clean sharp sand and gravel or crushed stone of maximum
2 5 m m diameter. Care shall be taken to ensure that the concrete is thoroughly compacted
and that the minimum cover of 3 8 m m to the main reinforcing bars is maintained
throughout.
After driven shells have been inspected and found satisfactory, approximately
0.03 cu.m, of 1:2 cement grout shall be deposited in each pile followed by concrete of 100
to 125mm slump deposited in the pile in a continuous operation through a funnel hopper
having a discharge opening not greater than 2 00mm in diameter. Concrete strength shall
be detemiined from Standard Cube Test made from each day's pour as specified for
reinforced concrete.
STEEL REIN- 4065. All Steel Reinforcement shall be in accordance with the drawing prepared by the
FORCEMENT Contractor or the Engineer whichever is applicable. It shall comply with the latest issue
B.S. 785, B.S. 4449 or B.S. 4461, depending on the type specified. All bars bending to be
in accordance with B.S. 1468. Reinforcement shall not be welded except where indicated
on the drawings.
PAYMENT FOR 4066. Payment for Cast-in-Place Reinforced Concrete Piles of Types “B” and “C” shall
CAST-IN-PLACE be made on the basis of the length of the pile per linear metre, from the tip lo the cut - off
REINFORCED elevation at the tendered rates and prices entered in the Bill of Quantities for the
CONCRETE P^LES ^particular type and dimension of pile.
T \P E S B AND C The tendered rates and prices shall be deemed to include for all materials,
equipment, labour and supervision involved in the complete pile driven and in place.
No payment shall be made for withdrawn or rejected piles.
PART (E) - CAST-IN-PLACE REINFORCED CONCRETE PILES TYPE

In addition to the requirements of any other parts of this section of the
specification the following requirements shall be complied with in respect of cast-in
place reinforced concrete piles of type <CD,5.
GENERAL 4070. Cast-in-place reinforced concrete piles of type “D” are formed by the driving of
a heavy steel pipe casing closed at the lower end by a cast steel pointed shoe firmly fitted
to the casing so as to provide a watertight joint. Reinforcement steel is then placed within
the casing and concrete poured, the casing may be removed whilst the concrete is being
poured. Alternatively the casing may be filled with the concrete aggregate mix and
cement-sand grout injected after the casing has been removed.
DETAILED 4071. Where this type of piling is proposed for the works, the Contractor shall submit,
ME丁 H〇 D OF in detail, his proposed method o子 carrying out the piling, to the Engineer for his approval,
CONSTRUCTION and shall carry out the work strictly in accordance with the method as approved by the
Engineer.
PAYMENT FOR 4072. Payment for cast —in —place reinforced concrete pile of type “D” shall be made
CAST-IN-PLACE on the same basis as for piles of types “B” and “C” at the tendered rates and prices.
REINFORCED
CONCRETE PILES (CLAUSES 4073 -4079 INCLUSIVE NOT USED)
OF TYPE “D”
PART (F) - PRESTRESSED CYLINDER PILES TYPE KEMCONCRETE
In addition to any other requirements of any other parts of this section of the
specification, the following requirements shall be complied with in respect of prcstxessed
concrete cylinder piles of types “E” and ‘‘F’’.
GENHRAL 4080. Prestressed concrete cylinder piles of type “E” shall have outside diameter and
minimum dimensions as indicated on the drawings or as approved by the Engineer.
Prestressing cables of the composition, number and type as indicated on the drawings or
approved by the Engineer, shall be uniformly placed in the wall of the piles.
M ANUFACTURE 4081. (I) All materials shall be as stated in the relevant parts of the specification.
(II) Metal forms shall be used and they must be well braced and stiffened
against deformations under pressure of the wet concrete. They shall have smooth joints
and inside surfaces accessible for adequate cleaning. The portions of the form which
form the end surfaces of the pile (or sections) must be a true plane and perpendicular to
the axis of the pile with the following tolerances: Maximum allowable deviation for
abutting end surfaces 3mm, for head ed surfaces, 13mm and for the point end 76mm.
Forming tubes for the longitudinal holes for the prestressing cables shall be
35mm nominal diameter and shall be positioned so that there will be a minimum cover of
38mm to the outside finished surface of the pile, shall be inside the spiral steel
reinforcement and shall be uniformly spaced around the pile circumference.
80
HANDLING 4082. Piles shall not be handled or moved in any manner that would result in cracking or
permanent damage to the concrete or to the grout surrounding the wires.
EQUIPMENT 4083. Piles shall be driven with an approved hammer which shall develop a rated energy
per blow of not less than 54,300 Joules and which shall have a ram weight of not less than
6,800 Kg. Asolid hardwood cushion block, at least 150mm thick, shall be used in the base
of the hammer between the hammer ram and the follower. A laminated ring-shaped
cushion block at least 150mm thick made up of 25mm hardwood boards and cut to fit the
head of the pile, shall be used between the follower and the top of the pile. Both cushion
blocks shall be inspected periodically during driving and blocks that have been unduly
worn and compacted with use shall be replaced before driving is continued.
Piles may be driven without guides or leaders except that the hammer shall be kept in
accurate alignment with the axis of the pile.
REINFORCING 4084. Each pile of pile section shall have a cage of non-prestressed reinforcing steel of
STEEL the size， dimension and arrangement shown on the contract drawings or as approved by
the Engineer. This reinforcing cage shall be securely held in position during the casting
and spinning of the concrete. The spiral steel reinforcement shall have a minimum
concrete cover of 25min to the outside surface of the finished pile.
CONCRETE 4085. Concrete used shall be not leaner than Grade 35N/mm2 or as indicated on the
Contract drawings. The concrete mix shall be such as to give the most uniform possible
distribution of the aggregates across the wall of the pile. The fine and coarse aggregates
shall be as nearly as possible of the same specific gravity.
CASTING 4086. Piles shall be centrifugally cast and shall be convenient sections as approved by
the Engineer, cast in .
CURING 4087. Piles or pile sections may initially be steam cured. After removal of forms,
membrane curing may be applied to all surfaces except abutting end surfaces and core
holes.
METHOD OF 4088. The Method of Handling piles or pile sections shall be such that no permanent
HANDLING damage to the concrete will occur. If piles are made up of sections, any section that has
more than 10% of the end surfaces spalled to a depth of more than 3mm shall be rejected.
ASSEMBLY OF 4089. In making up the full length pile, the abutting surface of each section shall be
SECTIONS covered by a sealing material of sufficient thickness to fill all voids (except at the cable
holes) when the sections are brought together under compression as later specified. This
sealing material must attain a minimum ultimate strength of at least equal to or greater
than that of the concrete and must be as resistant to exposure and weathering as is the
concrete. After the sealing material is applied, the pile sections shall be brought into
contact and held together by a force equivalent to not less than 0.79 N/mm2 on the gross
concrete area while the sealing material sets. The individual sections shall be lined up so
that the maximum deviation in the alignment of the outside surfaces of two adjacent
sections at the joint will not exceed 6mm and the maximum deviation in the alignment of
the prestressing cable holes at the joint will not exceed 6mm.
STRESSING OF 4090. Piles shall not be stressed until the compressive strength of the concrete is at least
PILES 30.0 N/mm2 after the prestressing cables have been threaded through the cable holes to
make up cables of the required number of wires; the cables shall be tensioned to an
average cable unit stress as indicated on the drawings or approved by the Engineer. This
tension shall be measured by the elongation of the wires and checked by the j ack pressure.
The tension in the wire shall be transferred to mechanical end-locks or anchors.
Aggregate stress losses through transfer of the stressing force from the jack to temporary
anchorage shall not exceed an average of 10% on one cable or an average of 5% on all
cables in any one pile.
___________ ________ .—二:二二— ____ 二二J:81

GROUTING OF 4091. All cable holes shall be grouted with a mixture of cement and water in such a
CABLES manner that the interstices are completely filled with the grout material. The cable tension
shall be maintained by the mechanical anchors while the holes are grouted and until the
grout attains sufficient strength to hold permanently the tension in the cables. During this
period, the piles shall not be moved or handled in any manner that would re s u lt in
permanent damage to the grout. The grout curing period must be sufficient to permit the
removal of the temporary anchors without slippage of the wires in the grout except that
the stress loss through transfer shall not exceed an average of 10% on one cable or an
average of 5% on all cables in any one pile. During removal of end anchors, if the wires do
not part under stress with a tcCup and Cone55 fracture, but can be burned completely
through with a cutting torch, no slippage is considered to have occurred.
DRIVING 4092. Piles shall not be driven until the concrete has attained the minimum strength as
RESISTANCE specified on the drawings.
The piles shall be driven to a resistance or tip elevation as determined by load test to be
satisfactory for the required design load, but the final resistance shall not exceed 10 blows
per 25nim with the approved hammer. In no case shall the stroke of the hammer exceed
1200mm.
TENSION FORCES 4093. When the point of the pile is passing through soft soil so that there is little or no
DURING DRIVING resistance to penetration at the botton of the pile, the stroke of the hammer shall be
reduced to approximately 600mm.
CONTROL OF 4094. Observation shall be made during driving to determine whether or not the soil
INTERNAL and/or water is rising inside the pile casing. If this occurs to such an extent that soil and/or
PRESSURE water is trapped in the pile under the follower, provision shall be made for the escape or
removal of such soil and or water before driving is continued.
PRE- 4095. The Contractor may use any combination of driving and drilling approved by the
EXCAVATIOM Engineer to obtain the required pile embedment. Jetting or pre-excavation shall be done
below the pile tip elevation and the final seating of the pile shall be done by driving only
for the last 3 metres.
TOLERANCE 4096. Piles may be driven with the use of template or other method approved by the
Engineer. The top of each pile shall not vary ore than 150mm from the required plan
location.
CUT-OFF 4097. Where piles are required to be cut-off, cuttings may be performed with pneumatic
tools, sawing, or other method approved by the Engineer. In no case shall explosives be
used for cutting off piles.
PILE SPLICES 4098. If pile tops are driven below the established cut-off elevation or if pile tops are
OR BUILD UPS damaged below the cut-off elevation, the pile shall be built up to the required elevation
using a cast-in-place concrete extension of the cylinder or by use of an acceptable length
of cylinder pile section. The pile splice shall consist of a poured plug or reinforced
concrete extending at least 1.4 metres into the original pile and, where possible, the same
length into the added section as detailed on the drawings. This concrete plug may be an
extension of the plug connecting the pile to the cap.
DEFECTIVE 4099. Piles damaged by improper driving or manipulation to force them into proper
PILES position shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Any pile damaged by handling or in transit shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the
Engineer or shall be replaced all at the Contractor's expense.
PAYMENT 4100. Payment for prestressed concrete cylinder piles of type “E” shall be made on the
same basis as for piles of types “D” or “C” at the tendered rates and prices.
82
PART “G” - PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES OF TYPE “F”
In additional to any other requirements of any other parts of this section of the
specification the following requirements shall be complied with in respect of prestressed
concrete cylinder piles of the types “F”
GENERAL 4110. Prestressed concrete cylinder piles of type “F” are formed by the forcing into the
ground of heavy steel casing and the removal of the earth from its inside. After the casing
has been installed to the required depth a precast prestressed concrete cylinder pile is
inserted into the casing either in sections and stressed in situ or as a complete unit. The
space between the steel casing and the prestressed concrete shall be grouted with sand-
cement grout as directed and approved by the Engineer.
M E T H O D OF 4111. Where prestressed concrete cylinder piles of Type “F” are proposed for use in the
M A N U F A C T U R E works, the method of manufacture and construction shall be as approved by the Engineer
and the Contractor shall comply strictly with this approved method.
PAYMENT 4112. The payment for prestressed concrete cylinder piles shall be made on the same
basis as for piles of type “色
PART “H” - STEEL SHEET PILES
STEEL SHEET 4120. All steel sheet piles shall be of an inter-locking section as shown on the drawing
PILES and shall be a type and manufacture approved by the Engineer.
Steel sheet piles, tie rods, rivets and bolts shall conform to the minimum
requirements of B.S. 4360, Parts 1 & 2 and B.S. 449. If cofferdams for foundation
construction are used, the steel sheet piling for the cofferdams shall be carried well below
the bottom of the footings and shall be well braced and as watertight as practicable.
The interior dimensions of cofferdams shall provide sufficient clearance inside the
walls for constructing forms and driving pile and to permit pumping outside the forms.
For purpose of constructing the cofferdam, any enlargement in excess of 50mm

outside the dimensions of the footing as shown on the drawings shall be considered as
being for the sole purpose of expediting the work of the contractor as is of no value to the
F.M.W.H. and quantities of such excavation and backfill will not be included in the
quantities to be paid for.
In tidal waters or in streams at a time of probable flood, cofferdam walls shall be

vented at low water elevation to ensure equal hydrostatic head both inside and outside of
the cofferdam during the period of placing and setting of seals.
No shoring will be permitted in cofferdams, which will induce stress, shock, or

vibration in the permanent structure.
When permitted by the Engineer, cross stmts or bracing may extend through
foundation concrete. Such struts or bracing below low water will be permitted to remain
in place, or when specified in the special provisions or shown on the drawings, to be
removed. Struts or bracing above low water shall be removed and the resulting space
filled with concrete of the same mix as that specified for the suiTounding concrete.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for approval, drawings showing his
proposed method of cofferdam construction and other details left open to his choice or not
fully shown on the drawings. The drawings shall be submitted at least two weeks in
advance of the time the Contractor begins construction of the cofferdams.
S S Q D B S Q D B D D S B IB 8 B B flQ ta P a=!^ a!9aas5ass!5a!aa!s^ B s !s B 8 3
GENERAL SPECIFK'ATIONS (ROADS AND BRIDGES)
After completion of the sub-structure, the cofferdams with all sheeting and
bracing shall be removed at least to 1 metre below the level of the stream bed, by the
contractor at his own expense, and such removal shall be perfomied in a manner that will
not disturb or mar the finished concrete or masonry.
WELDING 4121. Electrodes used for welding shall comply with B.S. 639orB.S. 693 depending on
ELECTRODES the type employed.
PROTECTIVE 4122. Where directed on the drawings or in the specifications, steel sheet piles shall be
PAINTING coated before driving with two coats of an approved bituminous paint, in a manner as
directed by the Engineers Representative.
DRIVING ETC 4123. The piling shall be driven either singly or in pairs vertically and to true lines and
even planes in the position shown on the drawings and to the levels indicated tliereon.
Should there be any defect in the horizontal or vertical alignment of the piling or should a
break, through any cause whatsoever, occur in the continuity of the piling, the Contractor
shall withdraw such defective pile or piles and drive such further piles as may be
necessary to remedy the defect. Should any distortion, fanning or creep occur in the
alignment of the piling the contractor shall immediately take steps to rectify the defect
and shall, where necessary, supply and drive suitable tapered piles to the satisfaction of
the Engineer's Representative. All costs incurred by the Contractor in carrying out the
necessary remedial measures shall be at his own expense.
Should any tapered piling have to be manufactured locally they shall have along
the joint 22mm diameter rivets at 150mm pitch except for a length of 600mm, 150mm at
each end the pitch shall be 75mm. All necessary holes for the tie-rods shall be neatly
drilled and for drains they shall be neatly burnt out, all in the positions shown on the
drawings.
THE RODS 4124. The steel sheet piling shall be connected to the anchor piles by mild steel tie-rods
AND ROPES or ropes as approved by the Engineer. They shall be in lengths as indicated and coupled
together with forged steel coupling boxes or tumbuckles. Each end of each rod shall be
threaded for a distance of 230mm with standard whitworth right and left-handed threads
as the case may be. Mild steel bearing plates and washers of approved sizes shall be
provided for the outer-end of the tie-rods, the washers being tapered.
The tie-rods and ropes coupling boxes or turn-buckles and other fittings shall be
cleaned with wire brush or other approved means to remove all millscale, rust, etc. and
shall then be given one coat of the bituminous solution and the tie-rods and ropes shall,
after fixing in position, be wrapped in approved hessian and, with all fittings, be given a
second coat of the approved solution. Where possible the coupling boxes or tumbuckles
shall also be wrapped in hessian.
PAYMENT 4125. The quantity of sheet piling to be paid for under this item in this section except for
cofferdams, will be the number of square metres of sheet piling placed in its final position.
The unit price bid for this item shall include the cost of furnishing all labour, materials and
equipment necessary to complete the work, including the cost of furnishing and placing,
if necessary removing, all wales and braces. No separate payment will be made for
providing cofferdams unless it is called for on the drawings.
When Cofferdams are called for on the drawings they shall be paid for at the
contract lump sum price bid for the item in the proposal. This price shall constitute full
compensation for constructing cofferdams, controlling, removing water from
excavation, all labour, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals.
(CLAUSES4126-4999 INCLUSIVE NOTUSED)
84
FEDERAL MHSISTRY OF POWER, WORKS

■. .
'
■ ■
'
■ ■
SECTION V- BRIDGE WORKS

be deemed to apply in particular to bridge works, and shall be read in conjunction with all
other relevant Clauses of the Conditions of Contract and this Specification.
PART (A) - PRELIMINARIES, EXCAVATIONS, FOUNDATION,
DEMOLITIONS, TEST LOADS, ETC.
GENERAL 5001. The Contractor shall himself obtain full and accurate information in connection
with the existing structures, traffic, periods of flow and non-flow in the w aterw ays,
normal water levels, whether above or below ground level, flows and frequencies, floods,
nature and condition of soils and sub-soils, etc., and generally acquaint himself with all
factors influencing the construction and maintenance of the works as shown on the
drawings and specified herein, and shall be deemed to have allowed for all such
conditions in the rates inserted by him in the bill of quantities.
TRAFFIC 5002. Before commencing any operation of construction, the Contractor shall forward
DIVERSION to the Engineer's Representative, and obtain his approval of, his proposals for avoiding
interference with the existing traffic-way, rail road and water, and for providing, and
maintaining alternative ways for all such traffic. All diversions shall be of dimension,
capacity and standard at least equal to those of the traffic-ways, which they replace when
such traffic-ways are maintained in a good condition and they shall be maintained
continuously to this standard during the period they arc in use.
Where the use of temporary bridge spans is involved, the Contractor shall submit
complete and detailed drawings and calculations for the scheme to the Engineer's
Representative. Tlie Engineer's decision on whether such methods may be adopted or not
shall be absolutely final.
Notwithstanding the approval or modification by the Engineer's Representative

of any schemes, drawings or calculations, the Contractor shall remain wholly and entirely
responsible for the sufficiency of all traffic diversions and temporary works and for all
obligations and risks in regard to such works specified or implied in the contract and he
shall reinstate the same at his own cost should any mishap or accident occur causing
damage or injury thereto subject to such provisions of the conditions of contract as may be
applicable.
Payment for all such diversions including for temporary bridging or converting as
necessary shall be deemed to be included in the tendered rates and prices unless elsewhere
expressly allowed for.
CLEARING OF 5003. The site of the works shall be cleared completely to the satisfaction of the
THE SITE Engineer's Representative. Generally, the waterway shall be cleared of all obstructions to
the flow of water. All fallen trees, bushes and accumulations of debris shall be removed
and deposited as directed.
Trees, which are to be retained, shall be indicated by the Engineer's Representative.
WATER 5004. Such details of training works and protective works to the banks and protection
丁 RAINING AND beds waterways as may be shown on the contract drawings are schematic only. Exact
PROTFrTl/)TvJ details of the training and protective works shall be supplied by the Engineer's
1 Representative after consideration of the final disposition of the works, local site
WORKS conditions, etc.
EXCAVATION 5005. (A) GENERAL

AND BACK
FILLING Excavations shall be of the widths and lengths necessary for the construction of
the works and shall be taken down to the depths shown on the drawings, or as otherwise
specified hereafter or to such other depths as the Engineer's Representative may require.
When the final level of the excavation has been reached, the Contractor shall so inform
the Engineer's Representative, and together they shall inspect, measure and agree in
writing all particulars on which measurements of the works are to be based. No back
filling or construction shall be undertaken until after the final levels and dimensions of the
excavation have been surveyed and agreed. Failing such surveys and agreements being
signed by the Contractor, the surveys of the Engineer's Representative, shall be final and
binding on the Contractor.
Any obstacle encountered in the course of excavations shall be reported to the

Engineer's Representative and dealt with as directed by him. Excavations shall, where
necessary, be properly shored and supported, and the Contractor shall provide pumps,
cofferdams, sheet piling etc., as necessary to ensure that all construction is carried out in
the dry. Should any slips or falls result from the omission by the Contractor of any
precaution, all loose and disturbed material shall be completely removed and the ground
made up at the Contractor's own expense with approved material which shall include
concrete grade 10N/mm2 should the Engineer's Representative so require. Should the
material forming the bottom of any excavation, whilst acceptable at the time of
excavation, become puddle, soft or loose during the progress of the works, the Contractor
shall remove such damaged, softened or loosened materials and replace them with
concrete grade 10 N/mm2 or as directed by the Engineer's Representative, at the
Contractor's own expense. Sumps dug in the bottom of excavations shall be cleaned out,
all soft and puddle material removed, and the hole made up with approved material as
described above. Should excavations be taken to a depth greater than that required by the
Engineer's Representative such extra depth shall be made up at the contractor's expense
with concrete grade 10 N/mm2 or as directed by the Engineer's Representative.
The Contractor shall not leave any item or temporary works in position in the
excavations after back-filling, without the permission of the Engineer's Representative.
Permission will only be given in cases where the Engineer's Representative is satisfied
that no adverse effect will result to the finished works. No payment shall be made to the
Contractor for any item of temporary works so left in position, unless such item was left in
on the explicit instructions of the Engineer's Representative.
Excavations shall be backfilled with approved materials in layers not exceeding

150mm compacted thickness, and shall be thoroughly compacted by approved methods.
Where such material lies below a roadway or will form part of an embarJanent it shall be
selected and compacted entirely in accordance with the requirements of all relevant
clauses of this specification. Back-filling of excavations for reinforced concrete culverts,
open drains and any other structure shall be brought up equally on either side of the
structures to eliminate unbalanced earth pressures.
Earth and other material taken from excavation shall be set aside for selection for
re-use as filling materials, and materials unsuitable for this purpose shall be disposed of
by the Contactor at his own expense, as directed by the Engineer's Representative.
Selected materials shall be free draining material. The material shall have
Plasticity Index (PI) of not more than 5, and shall meet the following gradation
requirements when tested in accordance with B.S. 410:.
Sieve Size Total Per cent Passing

(by weight)
50mm 100
25 mm 60 100
1.1mm 20 100
500 pm 10 70
255 (〇_m 8 40
74 pm 5-10
When tested for bearing capacity, selected material shall have a California Bearing Ratio
(CBR) of not less than 20% when compacted to 95% of maximum density, using BS
compactive effort up to a depth not more than 600mm to formation level; there after
compaction shall be 100% MDD of the material using BS effort.
Free draining shall be defined as a material having coefficient of permeability of not less
than 1 x 1 0 2mm/sec. Before driving piles, the common embankment material shall be
placed and compacted to the top elevation of the prism of selective material.
No payment for placing of selective material will be made, but the cost thereof shall be
included in the price bid for the item "Excavation and Backfiir5scheduled in the proposal.
(B) ROCK
The term “solid rock” shall mean rock found in ledges or masses in its original
position, which would normally be removed by blasting and pneumatic tools or by wedges
and sledge hammers if removed by hand, and all solid boulders or detached pieces of rock
exceeding 0.2 Cubic metres in size trenches and 0.3 Cubic metres in size in general
excavations, to the classification of which the Engineer's Representative is satisfied.
Should any difference of opinion arise between the contractor and the Engineer's
Representative as to whether any material is rock, the Engineer's decision shall be final
and shall be made before the material is disposed of or covered up. Should the Contractor
wish to use explosives for the excavation of rock, he must obtain the permission of the
Engineer's Representative. When permission is granted the Contractor shall proceed as
directed in, and satisfy all the requirements of, clause 99 of the conditions of contract and
clause 5010 of this specification.
PAYMENT FOR 5006. Excavations for foundations shall be paid for on the actual quantities measured on
EXCAVATIONS FOR site by multiplying the horizontal area of the base of the foundations by the mean depth
FOUNDATIONS from surface level, and at the appropriate rates for excavation inserted in the bill of
quantities. The rate shall include for all shoring, pumping, backfilling and compactions
and for all pumping, digging, backfilling of sumps and for all other things necessary to
allow the proper placing of the foundations. No payment shall be made to the contractor
for any item of temporary works left in position unless it has been left on the instruction of
the Engineer's Representative. No item of temporary works shall be left in position
without the approval of the Engineer's Representative.
EXCAVATIONS 5007. Where excavations have to be made and foundations formed below water level,
FOR FOUNDATIONS suitable arrangements shall be made to exclude the water from the site, and the Contractor
BELOW WATER shall, when tendering, submit a full and clear description, supported by drawing and
LEVEL sketches, of the methods he proposed to use in respect of each foundation where these
conditions will be encountered. The methods proposed shall be directed in all cases to
permit the execution of the whole of the work in the dry unless this is shown in the method
statement to be entirely impracticable or uneconomical. The Contractor must satisfy
himself absolutely as to what water levels may be experienced at and during the period of
construction, whether such water levels be above ground level or below and as to what
flows and water levels will be attained during flood and high tide periods and as to the
conditions of soils and sub-soils and all other matters pertaining to the adequacy of the
temporary works and the efficient and proper construction of the works themselves. The
Contractor shall take all precautions to prevent flooding of the works and shall make good
any loss or damage to the temporary works and the works themselves caused thereby at his
own cost and to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative.
If Contractor chooses to use steel cofferdams for the below water level foundation
excavations, the materials shall conform to SECTION IV， clause 4120 “STEEL
SHEETPILES”.
No separate payment for cofferdams will be made, but the payment shall conform
to the applicable portion of the SECTION IV， Clause 4125 “PAYMENT”.
PREPARATION 5008. The depths to which foundations are to be taken, and their dimensions as shown
FOR on the drawings are an indication only of the anticipated requirements. The actual depths
FOUNDATIONS: and consequently the dimensions are to be finally detennined on site by excavating
NORMAL through the various strata until a material is reached, which is capable, in the opinion of
the Engineer's Representative, of safely sustaining the pressure exerted and of providing
complete security against the effects of scour. All excavations shall be taken out as nearly
as possible to exact dimensions to minimize back-filling and in accordance with clause
5005 of this specification. No concrete shall be placed in any foundation until the
Engineer's Representative has inspected and approved the excavation and the
arrangements for transporting and depositing the concrete, and given permission in
writing to proceed. The sides of the excavation shall be such as to eliminate any
possibility of loose material falling into the work as concreting proceeds. The bottom of
the excavation shall be clean and levelled off and free from all loose material. Contractor
shall draw the attention of the Engineer's Representative to any soft spots which may
occur and these shall be cut out as directed, measured in conjunction with the Engineer's
Representative, and afterwards filled with concrete grade 10 N/mm2 . No payment shall
be made for cutting out and filling soft spots, which have not been measured in
conjunction with the Engineer's Representative. When foundations are to rest on rock, all
adherent clay, etc., drummy, soft and loose rock, shall be cut away until the hard solid
rock is exposed and the base left approximately horizontal or to a slight fall or stepped, as
may be directed by the Engineer's Representative.
Immediately before concreting is commenced, the surface of the rock shall be

thoroughly cleaned and wetted and the concrete shall be poured directly on to the rock
and against shaped side-shuttering. The filling of the hollows with rubble, broken rock
etc., will not be permitted.
It is the intention that all concrete shall be placed in the dry, and the Contractor
shall direct all his efforts towards this end.
REMOVAL OF 5009. Before any part of any existing structure is removed removed, the Contractor
EXISTING shall forward to the Engineer's Representative for approval, foil details of the method by
STRUCTURE: which he proposes to dismantle the structure and provide an alternative way for traffic
GENERAL during the subsequent works.
(See also clauses 90 of the conditions of contract and 5002 of this specification). Such
details shall be accompanied by drawings and calculations as required by the Engineer's
Representative showing that no part of the structure which may be required for re-use in
another part of the works or by the Engineer elsewhere under another contract, shall be
over stressed or damaged in any way during the operation. Such details shall be
submitted to the Engineer's Representative sufficiently in advance of the intention to
commence the work as this will allow the proper study of the proposals and the
incorporation of any amendments that the Engineer may require. Notwithstanding the
incorporation of any such amendments or any approval given by the Engineer's
R ep resen tative to any m eth od proposed, the C ontractor shall rem ain w h o lly and entirely
responsible for the safety of the work and for all obligation and risk specified or implied
in the contract and shall make good al his cost any damage resulting from any mishap or
accident arising from the operation, subject to such provisions of the conditions of
contract as may be applicable. The demolitions and dismantling shall be carried out in a
workmanlike manner and the contractor shall observe all rules, regulations and orders
which may have been made or may be made by the government or any other responsible
authority with regard to the safety of all persons, whether employed by him or not during
such operations.
Before removing any superstructure or sub-structure, the Contractor shall bring

to the notice of the Engineer's Representative any existing damage to the structure and
point out any missing parts and the Engineer's Representative and the Contractor shall
together agree in writing that such damage did exist and that such parts were missing
before the commencement of operations by the Contractor. Should the Engineer then
require the Contractor to repair such damage or to replace such missing parts, the
Contractor shall do so as directed and he shall be paid for the work at rates to be mutually
agreed between him and the Engineer. Should the Contractor fail to bring such damage or
missing parts to the notice of the Engineer's Representative, it will be deemed for the
purpose of subsequent payment that the Contractor accepts that the structure is complete
and entirely free from damage before the commencement of dismantling operations.
After dismantling, the Contractor shall spread out all the components and advise the
Engineer's Representative that they are ready for inspection. Any damage or loss
discovered in addition to that previously agreed shall be made good at the Contractor's
own cost and to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative. Parts which have been
lost shall be replaced by entirely new material and members which have been damaged
shall be repaired or completely replaced as required by the Engineer, who shall consider
the degree of damage in relation to the importance of the member, and the Engineer's
decision in these matters shall be final.
EXPLOSIVES 5010. Should the Contractor wish to demolish axiy part of the existing structure by using
explosives, he must first satisfy the Engineer's Representative that this is the most
economical and satisfactory way of performin琴 the work and obtain his permission to
proceed. The Contractor shall provide proper buildings or magazines unsuitable positions
for the storage of the explosives in a manner and in quantities to be approved. He shall also
be responsible for the prevention of any un-authorized issue or improper use of any
explosive brought on to the works, and shall employ experienced and responsible men by
whom only shall explosives for the purpose of the works be handled, all to the satisfaction
of the Engineer's Representative and in conformity with the statutory regulations. During
blasting, the greatest care shall be taken by the Contractor that no injury be done to
persons or property or to any finished work or any work which is to remain untouched.
The shots shall be properly loaded and covered and only moderate charges shall be used,
and where directed by the Engineer's Representative, the Contractor shall provide heavy
mesh blasting nets. Blasting shall be restricted to whatever hours the Engineer's
Representative shall prescribe. If, in the opinion of the Engineer's Representative,
blasting would be dangerous to persons or adjacent structures, or is being carried on in a
reckless manner he may prohibit it, and order that the demolition be carried out by other
means. See also clause 99 of the Conditions of Contract.
REMOVALOF 5011. Existing concrete deck, where required to be removed shall be demolished in a
EXISTING SUPER manner which will ensure that no damage whatever shall be caused to the supporting steel
STRUCTURES AND txoughing joists, trusses, bracing, or any other member of part of the structure. The use of
SUB-STRUCTURES explosive is forbidden.
STEELAND
CONCRETE Before dismantling any part of any structure which is to be re-used either wholly
or in part, either by the Contractor in another part of the works or by the Engineer
elsewhere under another contract, the Contractor shall mark each part of the structure
with a distinguishing mark which shall be assigned to it in a parking plan to be prepared by
him, in figures or letters not less than 50 ram. high and in such a manner that the pieces
may be readily identified and put together again in their proper positions when required.
The figures and letters shall be painted on, in at least two places on each member, and on a
surface which has first been thoroughly cleaned and freed from all mst, loose paint,
grease, dirt and other deleterious coatings and given one coat of protective paint. The
colour of the paint to be used for the letters and figures shall be such as to make them
readily visible against the background of protective paint. Where more than one bridge is
to be marked in any contract, the Contractor shall ensure that no combinalion of figures
and letters employed in the marking of one bridge is repeated in the marking of another.
All markings shall be to the approval of the Engineer's Representative and dismantling of
the structure shall not be proceeded with until the Engineer's Representative has checked
and approved the marking on the structure and compared tlicm with those on the marking
drawings and given his permission to proceed. The drawings showing the markings shall
conform to the requirements of Clause 5020 hereinafter.
The Contractor shall forward to the Engineer's Representative one set of hand
made negatives on best quality linen, one set of velograph negatives on best quality linen
and one set ot prints on linen showing black lines on a white ground, f the marking
drawings and the cost of producing and supplying all these negatives and prints shall be
deemed to be included in the rates for dismantling.
Troughing, joists, trusses, trestle, piers, cylinders, etc., shall be dismantled with
great care, temporary supports, horses, jacks, wedges, stiffening, bracing, etc., being
provided to ensure that there will be no overstraining or buckling of any member or
connection during the operation. Bolts and other fastenings shall be removed without
causing damage to or elongation of the holes from which they are withdrawn.
Where required for re-use by the Engineer under another contract the Contractor
shall, after dismantling and satisfying the requirements of clause 5009, scrape, clean and
free all parts of the dismantled structure from all loose paint, grease and other deleterious
coatings. Areas of rust should be cleaned down to the bare metal and all thick edges, fins,
blistering etc., due to previous coats of paint removed. The surfaces, when thoroughly
dry, shall be given one coat of protective paint, particular attention being given to surfaces
which have been in contract or inaccessible whilst the structure was erected. Care shall be
taken to ensure that the distinguishing marks are not obliterated during this operation.
Surfaces which have been galvanized shall be examined by the Engineer's Representative
who shall direct whether the whole is to be cleaned thoroughly, freed from all deleterious
matter and given one coat of protective paint or whether only the bad spots are to be
touched up with an approved proprietary galvanizing commodity (aluminium paint is not
to be used for this purpose). All bright and machined surfaces shall be cleaned and well
coated with a mixture of white lead and tallow free from acid, or with other approved
coating which will not readily melt when exposed to the sun in the tropics. Exposed
machined surfaces shall be further protected by timber casings or other approved means.
Free ends of members shall be stiffened to prevent distortion during transit, and the ends
of members with turned bolts connections suitably protected. A full set of new bolts, nuts
and washers, rivets and all other fastenings should be supplied together with spares in
accordance with clause 5066 of this specification, and in addition a complete set of
erection tools (drifts spanner, screw-drivers, etc., but not riveting apparatus) in
accordance with clause 5065 of this specification. Turned bolts, nuts and washers shall be
covered with a mixture of white lead and tallow free from acid and black bolts, nuts and
washers, and field rivets shall be thoroughly cleaned, heated to about the melting
temperature of lead and whilst hot dipped into boiled linseed oil.
Straight bars and plates shall be bundled and temporarily bolted together. I f this is not
possible they shall be found in at least three places with annealed steel wire of not less
than 6mm diameter which must be tightly fastened. All rivets, bolts, nuts, washers,
screws, small plates and small articles generally shall be packed in bags. A separate bag
being used for each diam eter and length o f rivet, bolt etc., and each bag having a metal
label wired on indicating its contents. The bags shall be packed into strong wooden cases
or casks w h o se gross w eig h t shall not exceed 300 kilograms. Each case, cask etc., shall be
clearly marked with its weight and an indication of its contents. Bundles shall have a
metal label, stamped with similar information, attached to each end, the label being
secured at each of the ends by a separate wire so that it lies flat with the bundles. All
marking and labelling shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative. All
parts of the structure protected, marked and packed as above specified shall then be
stacked in a position indicated by the Engineer's Representative to await collection by
him and transport to his store, and all operations mentioned in this clause up to and
in clu d in g this fin al stacking shall be deemed to be included in the rates for dismantling the
structure. Should the Engineer require the Contractor to transport the structure to his
store, the Contractor shall do so without delay and payment shall be made in accordance
with the rates in the day work schedule referred to in the bill of quantities or as mutually
agreed before transporting.
Where the structure is to be incorporated elsewhere into the works, either wholly
or in part, the Contractor shall proceed as follows. On the marking drawings specified
above, he shall indicate:
(i) Those parts of the structure which are not required for incorporation into the
worksand which will be stacked in readiness for transport to the Engineer's store, and
(ii) Tliose parts required for works of the structure, which incorporation
elsewhere will into be the Those parts covered by (i) shall be treated entirely as specified
above for structure required for incorporation elsewhere into the works.
Those parts covered by (ii) shall be treated entirely as specified above for
structures required by the Engineer for re-use under another contract, with the following
amendments. After dismantling, the required items shall be spread out and the Contractor
shall inform the Engineer's Representative that they are ready for inspection. The
Engineer's Representative shall then examine the items with respect to length, quality
weight and condition and shall pronounce upon their suitability for incorporation into the
works and shall advise the Contractor as to what cuts etc., should be made to permit their
proper fitting, and they shall together agree as to where such work shall be carried out.
The items shall then be ti ansported to that part of the works unto which they are to be
incorporated and the Contractor shall then proceed as directed in clause 5071 of this
specification.
The cost of all operations involved in complying with these requirements shall be
deemed to be included in the rates for dismantling and re-erection.
All paint and painting shall be in accordance with clause 5049 of this specification.
REMOVAL OF 5012. Existing decks, trestles, mud sills, piles, etc., in timber shall be removed as
EXISTING SUPER carefully as possible. The use of explosives is forbidden. Timber piles shall be withdrawn
STRUCTUREAND completely, or sawn off, as directed by the Engineer. All timber, fastenings, etc., shall be
SUBSTRUCTURE: cleaned and stacked neatly as directed in a place to be indicated by the Engineer's
ALL TIMBER Representative. Unless particularly so mentioned in the drawings no distinguishing
marks, making plans, painting or protective coatings will be required.
TOTAL DEMO- 5013. The demolition of existing abutments, piers and landing will be permitted only
LITION OF after the superstructure has been removed to the satisfaction of the Engineer's
EXISTING ABUT- Representative, the demolition shall be carefully canied out and the use of explosives will
MENT PIERS be subject to the approval of the Engineer's Representative. Generally, abutments and
AND LANDINGS Pêrs are specified in the drawings to be completely removed, shall be completely
removed above the lowest level of the ground in contact with the abutments or piers as
approximately indicated in the drawings and in the bill of quantities, or as directed by the
Engineer's Representative, below this level only so much will be removed as is required
for the proper construction of the new abutments and piers. Reinforced concrete piles
shall be completely withdrawn or cut away above the levels stated in the drawings or as
PARTIAL 5014. Abutments, piers and landings, which are required to be only partially demolished
DHMOLmON OF shall be done in a manner which will ensure that no damage whatsoever will be caused to
EXISTING ABUI- that portion or the structure that will remain. The use of explosives for this work will not
MENTS, PIERS be permitted.
AND LAN DINGS
The demolitions shall be carried out to the lines and levels shown on the drawings or to
such lines and levels as the Engineer's Representative may determine after examination
of the material exposed. The surfaces remaining after demolition shall be freed from all
loose stones, rubble, mortar or other material and left in a perfectly sound conditions, to
the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative. Under no circumstances shall any new
work be constructed upon or against any part of the structure that remains until the
Engineer's Representative has inspected it and given his permission to proceed.
DISPOSAL AND 5015. All concrete and masonry rubble and all other such material resulting from
RE-USE OF demolition shall be tipped as directed. No debris shall be allowed to block, inter fere with
RUBBLE RESUL
TING FROM or hinder the flow of water under the new structure, or along any part of the watercourse or
DEMOLITION through any drain, gully or watercourse, in the vicinity of the work, nor shall any debris be
allowed to obstruct the passage of traffic or cattle or other animals along recognized
paths. The rubble may be re-used as plums in the construction of the new abutments and
piers should these be of mass concrete, at the discretion of the Engineer's Representative.
PREPARATION 5016. After demolition operations have been completed the surfaces of the remaining
OF SURFACE OF portions of the substructures which are to receive new concrete shall be thoroughly.
EXISTING ABUT Hacked and freed from all loose plaster, mortar and other materials and random stones
MENTS, PIERS shall be removed in removed in the case of masonry wall as directed by the Engineer's
ETC., PRIOR TO Representative to provide an efficient key between the new work and the old.
PLACING OF Immediately before concreting begins, the surfaces shall be thoroughly washed with
CONCRETE IN clean fresh water to remove all deleterious matter, all surplus water being then removed.
CONTACT. The wet horizontal surfaces shall be covered with a 12mm layer of stiff, freshly mixed
mortar class M l that shall be poured and carefully pounded into it without delay. The
fresh concrete shall be carefully worked into all comers, crevices and interstices in the
wet vertical surfaces to ensure complete bonding with the old structure.
PREPARATION 5017. Where the drawings require a non-bonding joint or a gap to be left between the
OF SURFACE OF surfaces of the remaining portions of the existing sub-structure and those of the new
EXISTING ABUT- work, the relevant surfaces of the existing structure shall be thoroughly cleaned and freed
MENTS PIERS from all loose material.
ETC PRIOR TO Irregularities in the surfaces shall be filled in with con-Grade 10 N/mm2 or the whole
CONSTRUCTION rendered a minimum 12 mm thickness of plaster of a grade to be approved by the
OF NON- Engineer's Representative, to give a smooth surface over the whole area of the joint. The
RnKTnmr n〇n-bonding joint shall then be constructed as directed by the Engineer's Representative
1 or a gap left as directed in the drawings.
TEST ON 5018. (A) CONCRETE STRUCTURES
COMPLETED
STRUCTURES The Engineer may instruct that a loading test be made on the works or any part
thereof it, in his opinion, such a test is deemed necessary for one or more of the following
reasons:
(a) The site made concrete tests cubes failing to reach the specified strength,
(b) The shuttering being prematurely removed,
(c) Overloading during construction of the works or part thereof,
(d) Concrete improperly cured.
(e) Any other circumstances attributable to alleged negligence on the part of the
Contractor which, in the opinion of the Engineer may result in the works or part
thereof being of less than the expected strength.
(f) Any reason other than the foregoing. If the loading rest be instructed to be made
solely or in part for the reason (a) the test shall be made at the Contractor's own
cost. If the test be instructed to be made for one or more of the reasons (b) to (e)
inclusive, the contractor shall be reimbursed for the cost of the test if the result
thereof is satisfactory. If the test be instructed to be made for the reason (f) the
Contractor shall make the test and shall be reimbursed for all costs relating thereto
unless the result of the test is unsatisfactory in the opinion of the Engineer.
The test load shall not be applied within eighty-four days of the completion of
placing of the concrete in the part of the structure to be tested, and the latter shall not be
supported during the test by the shuttering or other nonpermanent support. Means shall
however be taken to ensure that in the event of failure under the test, temporary support of
the loaded members shall be immediately available. The test shall proceed strictly as
directed by the Engineer.
If the result of the loading test is not satisfactory in the opinion of the Engineer, the
Engineer shall instruct that part of the works be taken down or cut out and reconstructed to
comply with this specification, or that other remedial measures be taken to make the work
secure.
vMTl
All remedial measures shall be carried out expeditiously by the Contractor at his own
expense.
The test load to be applied shall be a series of tractors, lorries, or road rollers equivalent to
the 1.10 times the design load of the particular structure, disposed of in one or more
arrangements so that the maximum bending moments, tlirusts, tensions and shear forces
due to the test load are produced at the critical sections. During the test, record of the
sequence of all cracks and deflections at mid-span will be kept together with any other
observations which the Engineer may elect to record. The residual deflection if any shall
be recorded and if required by the Engineer, the test will be repeated. The period of
loading shall be one hour in any particular case or as otherwise directed by the Engineer.
(B) STEEL STRUCTURES
If, through any negligence or bad workmanship or carelessness or default on the
part of the Contractor or any Sub-Contractor or for any other reason whatsoever, the
Engineer shall deem the strength of any steel span or any part thereof to be adversely
affected, the Engineer shall order such tests to be carried out as shall indicate the real
strength of the structure. The test may follow that specified above for reinforced concrete
structures or any other form that the Engineer may consider desirable.
If in the opinion of the Engineer, the result of the test is not satisfactory the
Engineer shall order such remedial measures to be carried out as may be necessary in his
opinion, and the contractor shall carry out such remedial measure without delay and at his
own expense.
LOADING OF 5019. Under no circumstances shall any part of any structure included in the works be
STRUCTURES: loaded in any way until permission to do so has been obtained in writing from the
CONSTRUCTION, Engineer's Representative.
BACKFILLING
TRAFFIC, ETC The Contractor shall arrange his programme le of construction so that the loads of
subsequent construction shall1not be imposed
_ upon work already completed until, in the
opinion
x presentative, that work has developed sufficient strength to
of the Engineer's Representative
withstand safely tKe resulting stresses. No backfilling of earth against or on top of any part
of any structure shall be commenced until the Contractor has sought and obtained the
written permission of the Engineer's Representative so to do. This will be given after the
Engineer's Representative has inspected and measured the work to be covered and the
Contractor has carried out all repairs, and all other work that the Engineer's
Representative may require to ensure that the work complies with this specilication.
Additionally, no backfilling shall be undertaken until the requirements of tne preceding
paragraph of this clause are satisfied and the following conditions fulfilled:
(i) No earth shall be backfilled against or on top of a mass concrete structure until at
least 14 days have elapsed since the pouring of the last concrete, without the approval of
the Engineer's Representative.
(ii) No earth shall be backfilled against or on top of a reinforced concrete structure
until at least 28 days have elapsed since the pouring of the last concrete and the results of
the 28 days compression cube tests have been studied and proved acceptable.
(iii) No earth shall be backfilled against the walls, nor placed on top of the roof slab, of
a reinforced concrete culvert until at least 28 days have elapsed since the pouring of the
last concrete in the complete structure, including wing-walis should these be monolithic
with the barrel, and the results of the 28 days compression cub tests have been studied and
proved acceptable. No earth shall be placed on to the roof slab unless this is so specified on
the drawings, and then strictly within the limits shown thereon.
(iv) Backfilling of all excavations for abutments, piers, culverts, etc., shall be brought
up equally and simultaneously on all sides to eliminate unbalanced earth pressures, filling
to open-type abutments shall likewise be brought up equally and simultaneously around
supporting columns, walls, etc., to eliminate unbalances earth pressures. All backfill shall
be done in layers not exceeding 150mm compacted thickness, and in accordance with the
requirements of all relevant clauses of this specification. During backfilling operations,

the Contractor shall take every care to ensure that no undue loads shall be imposed upon
the structure and he shall furnish the Engineer's Representative in advance with full
details of his proposed method of performing the task, showing that the structure will not
be overstressed in any way.
In no case shall any structure be used for the passage of constructional traffic,
storage of materials, etc., without the written permission of the Engineer's
Representative, whose decision in these matters shall be final.
AS-MADE 5020. On completion of the work, and after it has been approved by the Engineer's
DRAWINGS Representative, the Contractor shall prepare as-made drawings of each bridge, showing
complet’e, flilly dimensioned details of the foundations， the material on whicii they are
founded, ground levels, road levels, protection works, superstructure and all other work
carried out under the Contract. The drawings shall be originals prepared from records
taken as the work progresses and agreed with the Engineer's Representative, and shall not
be merely amended prints of the contract drawings. Draughtsmanship shall be of a high
standard, to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative. The drawings shall be by
CAD (Computer Aided Design) or handmade drawing ink， on best quality tracing linen
and shall be 594mm b 841mm overall including a margin of 50mm on the left hand side,
and a margin of 10mm on the other three sides and the title box shall follow the form
shown on the contract drawings. These original tracings together with one black and
white print of each, on linen shall be forwarded to the Engineer for his permanent
retention.
The cost of preparing and supplying all these negatives, velographs, prints, etc.,
shall be deemed to be included in the rates for carrying out the works to which they refer.
SETTLEMENT 5021. The Contract shall include:
OF BRIDGE AND . .
APPROACHES (a) The return to site and carrying out of a survey of settlement of bridge and
approaches at a time just prior to the completion of the maintenance period and the
submission of a report of the results of this survey to the Engineer. The cost of this survey
shall be deemed to be included in the tendered rates and prices.
(b) The carrying out of any jacking operation or other remedial works deemed
necessary by the Engineer as a result of this settlement to reestablish the bridge and
approaches to the proper levels. The cost of any such operation shall be deemed to be
included in the tendered rates and prices.
BEARINGS 5022. Bearing devices expansion or fixed, shall be constructed in accordance with the
details shown on the drawings and approved by the Engineer.
Metal bearing shall comply in all respects with requirements of B.S. 5400 and as
specified on drawings, the The masonry plates shall be set level. The expansion devices
shall be set to conform to the temperature at the time of erection or to the setting specified.
When masonry plates are shown on the drawings to be placed (not embedded)
be constructed slig h tly above grade
d irectly o n con crete, the concrete bearing area shall
and shall be finished by grinding or other approved means to a true level plane which
shall not vary perceptibly from straight edge placed in any direction across the area. The
finished plane shall not vary more than 3mm from the elevation shown on the plan.
ELASTOMERIC 5023. Elastomeric bearing pads shall conform to the ments of B.S. 1154 and the
BEARING PADS special provisions, require-Where elastomeric bearing pads are shown on drawings, the
concrete surfaces on which pads or packing are to be placed shall be wood float finished
to a level plane which shall not vary more Ilian 1.5mm from a straight edge placed in any
direction across the area and the finished plane shown on the drawings. Pads 12mm and
less I laminated or all elastomer. In thickness may be either Pads over 12mm in thickness
shall be laminated. Laminated pads shall consist of alternate laminations of elastomers
and metal or elastomer and fabric bonded together.
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (ROADS AND BRJDGES)
The outside laminations shall be metal or fabric. The outside and edges of metal
laminations shall be coated with elastomer not more than 3mm in thickness. Laminations
thickness of elastomer shall be Variation in thickness 12mm of an ±3mm in individual
elastomer lamination shall not exceed 3min within the width or length of a pad and the
variation in thickness of all elastomer laminations within a pad shall be such that each
metal or fabric lamination will not vary by more than 3mm from a plane parallel to the top
or bottom surface of the pad.
The total out to out thickness of pad shall not be less than the thickness shown on
the drawings nor more than 6mm greater than that thickness. Variation of total thickness
within an individual pad shall not exceed 3mm.
The length and width of a pad shall not vary more than 3mm from the dimensions shown
on the drawings.
Pads containing metal laminations shall be fully moulded. Pads of all elastomer or
with fabric laminations may be cut from large sheets. Cutting shall be performed in such a
manner as to avoid heating of the material and to produce a smooth edge with no tears or
other jagged areas and to cause as little damage to the matter as possible.
Comers and edges of moulded pads may be rounded at the option of the Contractor.
Radius at comers shall not exceed 9mm and radius of edges shall not exceed 3mm.
The bond between elastomer and metal or fabric shall be such that, when a sample is tested
for separation, failure shall occur within the elastomer and not between the elastomer and
metal or fabric.
Metal laminations shall be rolled mild steel sheets not less than 1.Omm thick.
Fabric laminations shall be either (1) a long chain synthetic polymer containing at least 85
percent of polyester from ethylene glycol and terephthalic acid or (2) a long chain
synthetic polymeric amide from hexamethylene diamine and adipic acid. Each play of
fabric shall have a breaking strength of not less than 12.5 N/mm2 . Fabric laminations
shall be single ply at top and bottom surfaces of the pad and either double ply or double
strength within the pad.
The sole polymer in the elastomeric compound shall be neoprene and shall be not
less than 60 percent by volume of the total compound.
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer a certification by the manufacturer

that the elastomer, and fabric (if used) in the elastomeric bearing pads to be furnished
conforms to all of the requirements specified in the British Standard. The certification
shall be supported by a certified copy of the results of tests performed by the manufacturer
upon samples of the elastomer and fabric to be used in the pads.
Where elastomeric bearing pads over 12mm in thickness are shown on the
drawings, such pads may be manufactured as a moulded laminated pad, or at the option of
the Contractor, may be made up by stacking individual laminated pads. Individual
laminated pads used for stacking shall be normally 12mm in thickness. When laminated
parts are stacked, their contact surfaces shall be cleaned prior to stacking and a positive
method shall be used to hold the individual parts in the stack in proper aligmnent.
The quantity of Elastomeric Bearing pads for which payment will be made, will be
the number of pads actually constructed and installed as prescribed.
Payment for the Elastomeric Bearings pads shall be made for the quantities as
above determined, at the unit price shown in the Bill of Quantities, which price shall
include the cost of bearing pads, dowels, hardware, setting, all material, equipment,
： GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (ROADS AND BRIDGES)
labour and all else necessary thereof and incidental thereto.
PART (B) - STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
GENERAL: 5030. All materials and workmanship involved in the fabrication of steelwork shall
MATERIALS comply with the requirements of B.S. 5400together with the additional requirements and
AND modifications specified hereinafter. All materials and fittings shall be the best of their
WORKMANSHIP respective kinds and free from defects. Accurate workmanship is essential and all work
shall be neatly finished.
WORKING 5031. Before any part of the work is put in hand, the Contractor shall prepare working
DRAWINGS drawings in accordance with clause 1010 of this specification.
The working drawings shall be submitted as mechanically reproduced prints on medium
weight paper showing either black lines on a white background, or white lines on a blue
background and all costs involved in supplying them shall be deemed to be included in the
rates for steelwork.
SCHEDULE 5032. As soon as possible after the signing of the contract, the Contractor shall prepare
OF PARTS schedules of all parts which go to make up the work, including bought-out material, and
shall forward a copy, to the Engineer's Representative, the duly authorized inspector for
guidance during inspection.
MILD STEEL FOR 5033. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, structural steelwork shall comply with
STRUCTURAL the provisions of B.S. 4360 (1990) t4Weldable Structural Steels75and shall be of the grade
MEMBERS, ETC. indicated on the drawings. All sections shall conform to British Standard dimensions.
ROLLED STEEL 5034. Steel for rolled steel pins, knuckle pins, roller, etc., shall be of the minimum
tensile strength as specified on tlie drawings and finished as indicated. (Not rivet steel)
PINS, ROLLERS
STEEL CASTINGS 5035. Steel casting for bearings shall comply with the requirements for B.S. 3100: and
FOR BEARING shall be Grade A steel except where noted on the drawings.
PATTERNS OF 5036. Patterns of all castings are to be submitted to the Inspection Engineer, and shall be
CASTINGS approved before moulding is commenced and the casting are run. Where this cannot be
done on account of their large size the pattern shall be kept available at the manufacturer's
works for approval by the Inspection Engineer.
Each casting shall be legibly marked with a number or identification mark by which it can
be traced to the cast from which it was made. All castings shall be subject to tensile and
bend tests and wherever possible the test samples shall be attached to the castings. No
casting shall be repaired or welded without the previous sanction of the Engineer's
Representative. If permission be given to effect repair by welding, the Engineer's
Representative shall decide whether further heat treatment is necessary and such
treatment shall be carried out to his satisfaction. All surfaces to be machined shall have
adequate allowance left on to enable the castings to be machined to the plan dimensions
but in no case shall the allowances be less than 3mm. Unless otherwise specified or shown
on the drawings all holes in castings shall be boldly filiated and free of all faults affecting
their strength and value for the service intended.
GUNMETAL 5037. Gunmetal for girder bearing strips, etc., shall be made of the following mixture:
FOR BEARINGS Copper 88 per cent, tin 10 per cent, zinc 2 per cent, and shall show a tensile strength of not
less than 215 N/mm2 with 7.5% elongation on 50mm.
FORGINGS 5038. Forgings shall comply with B.S. 29 and the steel shall have a minimum tensile
strength of430 N/mm2 or as indicated on the drawings.
I GENERAL SPECIFICAHONS (ROADS AND BRIDGES)
RIVETS 5039. Steel for high tensile steel rivets shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 548
“High Tensile Structural Steel for Bridges, etc.， and General Building Construction”，
Amendments CE 52, May 1936; CE 6854 February 1938: CG 715 June 1942 and current
amendments. Steel for mild steel rivets shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 15
1948 “Structural Steel”, Amendment PD 3346, April f 959 or latest edition.
BOLTS 5040. All bolts must comply with the requirements of B.S. 1083: 1965 (Precision
Hexagon Bolts, Screws, Nuts and Plain Washers), and of B.S. 1969: 1963 (Unified
Precision Hexagon Bolts, Screws, Nuts (Unc and Unf Threads) and Plain Washers
Normal Series), Amendment PD 5706 November 1968 and PD 6623 or latest edition.
High strength bolts and nuts washers for high strength bolts shall comply with B.S. 3139
and B.S. 3294, part 1. All galvanized bolts shall conform with requirements of B.S. 729,
Part 1. Minimum zinc coating shall be 90jim.
HANDRAILING
AND GUARD 5041. Hand - Railing and Guard -Railing shall be as shown on the drawings or as
RAILING directed by the Engineer.
HIGH TENSILE 5042. High Tensile Steel to be used for plates and rolled sections that are specified to be
STEEL FOR welded must comply with the requirements of B.S. 4360 with the following additional
WELDING requirements.
(A) The chemical composition shall be as specified in tables 6, 8,11,13 and 16 of

B.S. 4360 and upon request, the supplier shall supply details of the ladle analysis to the
Engineer.
(B) The steel to be used for plates shall be delivered in a normalized condition.
(C) The high tensile steel (welded quality) for plates shall be subjected to the V-
Notch Charpy 2 millimetre impact energy test. The average of three test specimens and
the average impact energy at 0°C shall not be less than 3 5j oules.
(D) As a result of the V-Notch Charpy test the crystalline area in the fractures of
the high tensile steel (welded quality) test pieces shall be measured. In general the average
crystalline area in the fractures of the test pieces shall not be greater than 80 per cent of the
original area of the test piece below the notch.
(E) The high tensile steel (welded quality) for plates shall be subjected to the
Vicker's test for hardness. For the hardness control test of the steel, a single welded bead
shall be deposited on the outer surface on the plate with 4mm diameter welded electrode,
and a cross section of the bead and the plate shall be cut and etched. The hardness in the
heat-affected zone shall be measured by the Vickers method and shall not exceed 350
Vickers.
(F) The frequency of the tests described in (C), (D) and (E) above shall be the same as
those for tests for the control of tensile strength, yield point and elongation as specified in
B.S. 4360.
(G) Should the results of the tests described in (C), (D) and (E) above not reach the
requirements specified then the steel may be re-nomialized and re-submitted for
inspection. The cost o f re-normalizing the steel shall be borne by the manufacturer.
fflGH TENSILE 5043. High Tensile Steel to be used for plates and rolled sections and welding will not be
STEEL: NOT TO peimitted except where shown on the drawings.
BE WELDED
HIGH TENSILE 5044. All High Tensile Steel shall be marked strictly in accordance with the
STEEL: requirements of B.S. 4360. All steel not correctly marked and identified may be rejected
MARKING by the Inspection Engineer.
CAST STEEL 5045. Steel castings are to be true and clean and shall comply as regards quality and tests
with the requirements of steel Castings for General Engineering Purposes, 1967. The
casting shall be thoroughly annealed and stress relieved and tested as per the above for
cracks. They are to be well fettled and dressed where necessary to remove roughness or
inequalities. All holes for bolts shall be drilled on the drawings to be cored.
CAST IRON 5046. Cast Iron shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 1452: (1961) for Grey Iron
Castings. All holes in cast iron for bolts shall be drilled unless shown to be cored.
ELECTRODES 5047. The electrodes to be used for welding steel must be of the best heavily coated type
and of such make as the Inspection Engineer may approve. They shall be kept in a dry
store in unbroken packets and shall be accompanied by the Maker's Certificate of date of
manufacture and guarantee that they fulfil in all respects the requirements of B.S. 639,
B.S. 1856 and B.S. 2642 depending upon the grade o f steel employed in the Contract.
1. Electrodes shall not be used in a damp condition. The Inspection Engineer
shall have access at all times to inspect the store at the works and may reject electrodes
which he considers unsuitable.
2. The Contractor shall submit to the Inspection Engineer the name(s), and
all relevant particulars of the electrodes he proposes to use.
3. The Quality and type of the electrodes to be used for the submerged arc
welding of high tensile steel must be approved by the Inspection Engineer and will
depend on the submerged arc welding process that will be used.
GREASE FOR 5048. Grease for bearings shall be such as will ensure adequate lubrication of the
BEARINGS bearings under tropical conditions.
The following is the approximate analysis of a suitable grease: high-class viscous mineral
oil 78.0 Per cent pure soap (dry) 5.0 Per cent best flake graphite 17.0 Per cent The melting
point of the grease shall be not less than 13 8°C.
The grease shall be packed for shipment in strong airtight metal drums.
PAINT AND 5049. All paint used in the works, whether applied in the ship or in the site shall be the
PAINTING best of its kind and all ingredients used in its manufacture shall comply with the
appropriate British standards. In any paint system (viz: primer, undercoats and finishing
coats) each coat of paint shall be compatible one with the other, and to ensure this, all
paint shall be obtained from the same approved manufacturer with a guarantee of
compatibility. The paints shall be used as specified for the various parts of the work.
PRIMING PAINT: All priming paint shall accordance with B.S. 2523 be in
UNDERCOAT: Exterior quality aluminium paint tinted with sufficient blue
pigment to distinguish if from the finishing coat.
FINISHING CO AT: Exterior quality aluminium paint.
PROTECTIVE PAINT: Where steel is specified to be given one coat of
protective paint, such paint shall be of priming paint, as specified by the Engineer's
Representative. Where the paint has to be applied to a surface already painted with a
bituminous paint, the protective coat shall be of bituminous paint of best approved quality
and colour.
The aluminium content of the paint used for undercoat and finishing coat shall
comply with B.S. 388 and shall constitute not less than 20 per cent by weight of the total
paint. The approved volatile matter of the paint shall not exceed 45 per cent. Tlie paint
shall be of the type in which the aluminium past is mixed with the vehicle immediately
prior to application and the date of the manufacture shall be marked on each container.
Mixing of the paint and its application to the work shall be strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and this specification. During painting, the paint shall be
stirred as necessary to keep the pigment in suspension.
S2100
Prior to shop painting all surfaces of steelwork shall be cleaned and de-sealed to
bare metal by steel grit or sandblasting.
Before the application of any paint, the surfaces to be treated shall be thoroughly
cleaned and freed from all scale, loose paint, grease, rust and other deleterious coatings.
Surfaces shall be protected in accordance with CP 2008. The paint shall not be applied to
any surface which is not thoroughly dry and shall be applied entirely by hand brush and
thoroughly worked into all crevices, comers and splices and around all bolt heads, nuts,
rivets, etc. Successive coats of paint shall differ in colour and each coat shall be
thoroughly dry before the next is applied. All paintings shall be carried out in accordance
with the standards laid down in British Standard Code of Practice C.P. 231 and all testing,
where directed by the Engineer shall comply with B.S. 3900.
Before the application of any paint, the surfaces to be treated shall be thoroughly
cleaned and freed from coatings. The paint shall not be applied to any surface which is not
thoroughly dry and shall be applied entirely by hand brush and thoroughly worked into all
crevices, comers and splices and around all bolt heads, nuts, rivets, etc. Successive coats
of paint shall differ in colour and each coat shall be thoroughly dry before the next is
applied. All painting shall be carried out in accordance with the standards laid down in
British Standard Code of Practice C.P. 231 (1952)
INTERCHANGE 5050. Corresponding parts of each unit should be Interchangeable as far as economic
ABILITY OF manufacturing conditions permit.
PARTS
PREPARATION 5051. When single universal plates are used with their edges flush with heels of angles
OF EDGES AND or channels, as in box girders, end posts, etc., the edges shall be planed. The edges of
ENDS
universal plates shall also be planed when used as web plates of riveted plates girders and
there are flange plates. Where two or more universal plates or flats of the same nominal
width are used in tier (excluding covers to a single plate) the edges shall be machined to
make them straight and flush.
HOLES FOR 5052. All holes for rivets and black bolts shall be 1.5mm larger than the nominal
BOLTS AND diameter of the cold rivet or bolt as Manufacture and all holes shall be drilled, or drilled
RIVETS small and reamed. Punching and sub-punching and reaming shall be permitted only for
floor plates andtroughing and only when these do not exceed 12 millimetre in thickness.
Holes for turned bolts shall first be drilled at least 3.0mm small in diameter and
afterwards when the structure is assembled, they shall be reamed or drilled to the
correctsize through all thicknesses in one operation. Sub-punching will not be permitted.
RIVETS AND 5053. Rivet heads shall be of standard shape, unless otherwise specified, and of uniform
RIVETING size for the same diameter of rivet. They shall be full, neatly made, concentric with rivet
holes, and in full contract with the surface of the member.
Rivets shall be heated uniformly to 'light cherry red colour55and shall be driven
while hot. Any rivet whose point is heated more than the remainder shall not be driven.
When a rivet is ready for driving, it shall be free from slag, scale, and other adliering
matter. Any rivet, which is scaled excessively, will be rejected.
All rivets that are loose, burned, badly formed or otherwise defective shall be
removed and replaced with satisfactory rivets. Any rivet whose head is defective, in size
or whose head is driven off centre will be considered defective and shall be removed.
Where required, rivets shall be cut for examination by the Engineer's Representative and
afterwards replaced free of charge. Stitch rivets that are loosened by driving of adjacent
rivets shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory rivets. Caulking, re-cupping, or
double gunning of rivet heads will not be permitted.
WASHERS 5054. All bolts shall be provided with washers, those for turned bolts being bright
finished. Round washers shall not be less than 6mm thick for turned bolts and not less than
3mm thick for black bolts. Tapered washers of the correct angle shall be provided under
all heads and nuts bearing on bevelled surfaces and where tapered washers are required
for turned bolts, round washers shall also be supplied. Tapered washers shall be not less
than 5mm mean thickness. All washers shall comply with the requirement of B.S. 3410.
WELDING 5055. No welding of any description will be permitted except where shown on the
drawings.
Unless otherwise described in the Contract, metal-arc welding shall comply with
B.S. 1856 and B.S. 2642 as appropriate except for tack welds and temporary attachments
for which the procedures laid down in B .S. 2642 shall be followed.
The temperature of steels welded in accordance with B.S. 2642 shall be not less
than 10°C when welding is commenced.
Electrodes and fluxes shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. The use of welding processes other than those covered by B.S. 1856 and B.S.
2642 shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
The general welding programme for shop and site welds, including particulars of
preparation of fusion faces, the method of pre-heating where required, the methods of
making the welds and the types of electrodes shall be submitted to the Engineer for his
approval before the work is put in hand. No departure from the agreed welding
programme or from the details shown on the drawings shall be made without the
agreement of the Engineer. Electrodes and fluxes shall be so chosen that the properties of
the deposited metal are not inferior to those of the parent metal.
The position of welds required for temporary attacliments shall be agreed by the
Engineer before the work commences.
Where automatic or semi-automatic processes are used back gouging of the

deposited weld will not be required where the Engineer is satisfied that the root is free
from imperfection.
The cost of furnishing materials, labour, equipment and all else necessary thereof and
incidental thereto shall be deemed to be included in the rates for steel work.
JOINTS 5056. Joints shall not be made in any plate or section or in any part of the bridgeworks,
except where shown on the drawings. Abutting joint in compression members and girder
flanges and where shown on the plans shall be faced and brought to an even bearing.
W h e n th e fla n g e s o r w e b s o f a n y m e m b e r h a v e to b e c u t o r n o tc h e d to enable th e
N O T C H IN G O F 5 0 5 7 .
FLANGES A1SD section to be trimmed into another m em b e r, a h o le o f su ita b le d ia m e te r sh all first be
WEBS d rille d th ro u g h th e fla n g e o r w e b so as to lea v e a fille t at th e in te rse c tio n o f th e c u t lin es.
BENDING 5058. Toughing up to 8mm thick may be pressed cold. Over 8 millimetres and up to
AND PRESSING 12mm thick cold pressing shall be subject to the approval of the engineer's
Representative.
SHOP 5059. Members shall not be riveted up until the parts have been thoroughly scraped,
ASSEM BLY cleaned and freed from all scale and other deleterious matter. Thereafter, surfaces which
will be in pemianent contract after shop assembly shall be given one coat of priming paint
on each face and the parts drawn firmly together with bolts whilst the paint is still w | ：t. All
rivet holes shall be thoroughly brushed out and all burrs and exuded paint removed before
. h r 102
rivets inserted and riveting commenced. Surfaces not in contact but which will be
inaccessible after shop assembly shall receive the full protective painting treatment
before assembly viz one coat of priming paint, one undercoat and assembly viz: one coat
of priming paint, one undercoat and one finishing coat. All paint and painting shall be in
accordance with requirements of clause 5049 of this specification. All rcamering of holes
shall be carried out in the manufacturer's works and the edges of all holes on the outside
faces of members shall be slightly arrised.
MACHINING 5060. The bearing surfaces of bearing plates, etc., shall be planed level, the cut being
made in the direction of expansion of the girder. Surfaces, which require machining,
shall be indicated on the drawings.
ERECTION AT 5061. Before being despatched, all bridge spans shall be temporarily erected complete
MANUFACTURERS in the manufacturer's works so that the Inspection Engineer can be satisfied as both the
WORKS AiND alignment and fit of all connections.
MARKING UP FOR
RE-ERECTION After the work has been passed by the Inspection Engineer and before it is
dismantled, each part shall be stamped with the distinguishing mark assigned to it on the
marking drawings, in figures not less than 16mm high, in such a manner that the pieces
may be readily identified on arrival at site and put together in their proper positions. The
marking shall also be stencilled on each part in one or more places after it has received the
coat of paint mentioned in Clause 5062 and a circle of white paint shall be placed round
each stamped erection mark. No marking other than that specified shall be put on the
steelwork.
The drawings showing the markings shall be as set forth in Clause 5020. The
Manufacturer shall forward to the Engineer one set of hand made tracings on best quality
polyester or tracing linen, one set of mechanical copies on tracing linen (e.g. velograph)
and one set of prints showing black lines on white background of the marking drawings.
The cost of producing and supplying all these tracings and prints shall be deemed to be
included in the rates for steel work.
SHOP 5062. After approval by the Inspection Engineer not before, the whole of the work shall
PAINTING AND be thoroughly wire brushed, scraped, cleaned and freed from all scales, grease and
PROTECTIVE coatings. Areas of rust shall be cleaned down to the bare metal. The surfaces shall be
COATINGS thoroughly dried and given one coat of priming paint. All paint and painting shall be in
accordance with requirements of clause 5049 of this specification. See also clause 5059
for the treatment of surfaces that will be in permanent contact or inaccessible after shop
assembly.
All machined surfaces, turned bolts, nuts and washers, and all bright surfaces
shall be well coated with other approved coating which will not readily melt when
exposed to the sun in the tropics. Exposed machined surfaces shall be further protected
by timer casings or other approved means.
Field rivets, black bolts, nuts and washers shall be thoroughly cleaned, heated to
about melting temperature of lead, and whilst hot, dipped in boiled linseed oil.
GALVANIZING 5063. Items which are shown on the drawings to be galvanized shall first be cleaned by
pickling and then galvanized by the hot process. The smelter used in the process shall
comply with B.S. 222 and the manufacturer shall produce evidence to the satisfaction of
the Engineer's Representative that this is so, and at his own cost. In addition, samples of
metal from the batch may be taken by the Inspection Engineer for independent analysis
and if found to contain less than 98.5 percent of pure zinc, the galvanized parts
represented will be rejected. The cost of this independent analysis will be borne
according to clause 36 (4) of the conditions of contract.
The galvanized surfaces shall be evenly covered, clean and free from drops or
spelter, spots and blemishes of every kind. After coating, all traces of flux shall be
removed. The coating shall weigh not less than 34 grams per square metre of surface
treated.
All cutting, holding, threading, etc., shall be carried out before galvanizing.
Cutting, holding, threading etc. after galvanizing will only be pemiitted where the written
approval of the Inspection Engineer has been first obtained. Where such permission has
been given, the cut edges shallbe protected by an approved proprietary galvanizing
commodity, aluminium paint must not be used for this purpose.
All materials shall be stored for a period of 7 days after galvanizing in such a manner that
air comes freely in contact with the surfaces. At the end of this period each article will be
examined by the Inspection Engineer and those showing signs of acid spot, cracks,
blisters or other defects will be rejected.
At the discretion of the Inspection Engineer the quality of the galvanizing may be tested
by the copper sulphate test as described in B.S. 729: 1961 and the ductility and adhesion
of the zinc coating tested by bending or otherwise. For the purpose of these tests more
than 1 percent of the articles will be selected for testing and the cost of the tests and
replacement of the articles thus destroyed shall be borne by the Contractor.
DRIFT, 5064. Drifts for rivets and bolts shall be supplied to the extent of one per cent (with a
SPANNERS minimum of six for each size) of the net number of rivets or turned bolts used in the work.
ETC. Drifts for use with turned bolts shall be turned to suit the holes. Spanner, the handles of
which shall be made in the form of a podger and joggled, shall be supplied in the
proportion of 1 in every 500 or less for each size of bolt and nut. Where necessary, brace
spanners, screw drivers etc., shall also be supplied. The Contractor shall ensure that an
adequate number of all tools necessary for the proper and efficient erection of the work at
site arc provided; the above requirements are regarded as a minimum.
NUMBERS 5065. The full number of rivets, bolts, nuts, washer etc, required to complete the work
OF SITE RIVETS. shall be supplied and in the following spares shall be provided for each span:
NUTS, SERVICE
BOLT ETC. Black bolts, nuts 10 percent of the full
and washers number of each size required
Turned bolts, nuts 10 per cent of the full

and washers number of each size required
Foundation bolts 5 per cent of the full number with

a minimum of 2% of each size
required
Rivets 15 per cent of the flill number of

each size when the number is 250
or less plus 10 per cent of the
num ber of eacli size in excess of
250
Service bolts complete with nuts and washers shall also be supplied equal to 25 per cent of
the net number of site rivets for all girder work and 10 per cent of the net number of site
rivets for trough and plated floors.
] Q/|
There shall be no reduction in any of the above number in the case of multiple spans.
The bolt lists including all lengths of rivets to be provided shall be submitted on
acceptable reproduced prints, and all costs involved in supplying them shall be deemed to
be included in the rates for steelwork.
MEASUREMENT 5066. Payment for steelwork shall normally be made on the computed weight of the
FOR PAYMENT structure as detennined from the dimensions given on the drawings, on the basis given in
OF STEEL WORK B.S. 5400. If however the weight of any materials falls short of the calculated weight by
more than 2X A per cent, but nevertheless be accepted, the actual weight of such material
only shall be paid for. If there is any difficulty in obtaining the B.S. section specified or
shown on the drawings, the nearest B.S. section may be submitted for approval. Should
the weight of the substituted section differ from that of the specified section, the weight to
be taken for the purpose of payment shall be the lighter of the two.
For the purposes of payment and unless otherwise shown on the drawings,
castings, forgings, special alloy steel wrought iron and all structural shapes and plates for
expansion joints, pier protection, access manholes, steel deck drains and other
miscellaneous steel members, shall be considered as structural steelwork, except that
when specific items of the above are called for in the Bill of materials, the weight or unit
of measurement of each selected item as specified therein, will be paid at the respective
contract unit price as named in the bid schedule.
PACKING AND 5067. All works shall be protected from damage in transit allowances being made for
MARKING FOR handling under difficult. Conditions Particular care shall be taken to stiffen free ends and
SHIPMENT to prevent distortion and to adequately protect all machine surfaces, the ends of members
with tumed-bolt connections etc.
Straight bars and plates, when bundled, shall be temporarily bolted together. If
this is not possible they shall be bound in at least three places with annealed steel wire of
not less than 6 millimetre diameter which must be tightly fastened. All rivets, bolts, nuts,
washers, screws, plates and small articles generally shall be packed in bags, a separate
bag being used for each diameter and length of rivet, bolt, etc., and each bag having a
metal label wired on indicating its contents. The bags shall be packed into strong wooden
cases or casks, whose gross weight shall not exceed 300 kilograms.
Each case, cask or drum, shall be clearly marked with the shipping marks
and indication of its contents and its weight. Bundles shall have a metal label, stamped
with similar information, attached to each end, the label being secure at each of its ends by
a separate wire so that the label lies flat with the bundles.
All marking and labelling shall be carried out satisfaction of the Engineer's
Representative:-.
to the
ERECTION AT 5068. The steelwork shall be erected at site in accordance with SITE B.S. 153: with the
SITE following amendments and additional requirements. All lines and levels shall be as
shown on the drawings or as specified by the Engineer's Representative. The Contractor
shall be responsible for all setting out and shall give all necessary assistance and facilities
for checking by the Engineer's Representative (see clause 1013). Any stakes or marks set
out by the Engineer's Representative on site shall be carefully preserved. In addition to the
requirements given under clause 7 of B.S. 153, the Contractor shall comply with the
requirement of clause 1012 of this specification relating to drawings and calculations for
temporary works and stagings etc. The Contractor shall obtain the prior approval from the
Engineer for the method of erection and he shall forward to the Engineer's Representative
complete details, drawings and calculations for the proposed method of erection at the
time of seeking such prior approval.
SITE 5069. Surfaces which will be in permanent contact after site assembly or erection shall
PAINTING be thoroughly clean and freed from all scale, loose paint, grease and other deleterious
coatings. Areas of rust shall be cleaned down to the bare metal. The surfaces shall be
thoroughly dried and one coat of priming paint applied to each face. The parts shall then
be drawn firnily together whilst the paint is still wet. All rivet holes shall be brushed out
and exuded paint removed before the rivets are inserted. Similarly for bolts and bolt holes.
Surfaces which will be inaccessible after site assembly or erection shall be

thoroughly cleaned and freed from all scale, loose paint, grease and other deleterious
coatings. Areas of rust shall be cleaned down to bare metal. The surfaces shall be
thoroughly dried and then given one priming coat, one undercoat and one finishing coat
of paint.
Care shall be taken to ensure that no paint shall be applied to or allowed to foul any
reinforcement or other steelwork which is to be embedded in concrete. In the case of steel
joists which will be so embedded and steel troughing which will be concrete filled, and all
other such surfaces, those sui'faces which will be in contact with the concrete shall be
thoroughly cleaned and freed from all rust, scale, loose paint, grease and other deleterious
coatings before the concrete is poured against them.
Where concreting or any other operation likely to foul the steelwork has to be
carried out (e.g. pouring of concrete deck slabs supported on R.S.Is), preparation and
painting of surfaces shall not be undertaken until such time as the cause of likely fouling
or damage no longer exists.
All paint and painting shall be in accordance with clause 5049 of this
specification.
ADDITIONAL 5070. Before embanking on the strengthening of the bridge, the Contractor shall
STEEL WORK IN forward to the Engineer's Representative for approval full details of the method he
THE STRENGTH proposes to employ to carry out the work. Such details shall be accompanied by drawings
ENING OF and calculations showing that no part of the existing structure shall be overstressed or
EXISTING likely to suffer any damage during the strengthening operations and to ensure that this
BRIDGES will be so, the Contractor shall provide temporary supports, bracing, stmts, etc., as
necessary. In no case shall any part of an existing bridge be removed to facilitate
strengthening until a temporary substitute has been fixed in place to the complete
satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative. The Contractor shall amend his proposals
for undertaking the strengthening of the bridge as required by the Engineer's
Representative and shall not commence the work until the Engineer's Representative has
given his approval to the scheme and his peraiission to proceed.
Before ordering the additional steelwork the Contractor shall completely satisfy
himself in all resp ect as to the dimension and positions of all fastenings and members of
the existing structure and shall be responsible for ensuring that all new plates, joists, etc.,
required for the strengthening shall avoid or accurately pick up all such existing
fastenings and members as the case may require. The Contractor shall also check existing
spans as indicated on the drawings to ensure that the lengths of new joists etc., are
adequate for the work proposed and before ordering any such material shall inform the
Engineer's Representative of the dimensions, weights, etc., which he proposes to obtain
and obtain his approval therefore. Any indications of the sizes or positions of any part of
any existing structure as are shown on the drawings arc of a general nature only and tlic
Contractor must on no account regard such indications as accurate. The Contractor shall
be deemed to have inspected each and every structure and to have taken all necessary
information and measurements required for the proper canying out of the work, and to
have a llo w ed for such in his rates.
106
The additional steelwork shall be manufactured, fabricated, protected, transported,

fixed in position and be in all respects in accordance with requirements of this
specification and the drawings. All fabrication which can be done in the shop shall be
done there and only the absolutely necessary minimum, as approved by the Engineer,
shall be done at the site, where the additional steelwork comes into permanent contact
with the existing steelwork, the contact surfaces of both shall be thoroughly scraped and
cleaned and freed from all loose paint, scale, grease and other deleterious coatings. Areas
of rust shall be cleaned down to the bare metal. The contact surfaces shall then be given
one coat of priming paint and brought together and fastened whilst the paint is still wet.
Surfaces of both existing and additional steelwork which will be inaccessible after
strengthening measures are complete shall be prepared as described above and given the
full protective paint treatment viz:one priming coat, one undercoat and one finishing coat,
before assembly is begun. Where site welding is to be employed, paint and other coatings
shall be removed from the areas to be welded for a suitable extra distance to ensure that
the quality of the welds will not be impaired. When strengthening is complete, the
surfaces of all added steelwork, and those of the existing steelwork that have been
damages during the operation shall be prepared as above and given one coat of priming
paint, one undercoat and one finishing coat. All paint and painting shall be in accordance
with the requirements of clause 5049 of this specification.
The cost of fulfilling all the requirement of this clause shall be deemed to be covered by
the rates for supplying, fixing and painting additional steelwork.
RE-USE OF 5071. Girders, joists, etc., from a dismantled structure which are to bere-used in the
GIRDERS JOIST strengthening or reconstruction of another structure are thus indicated on the drawings.
ETC OBTAINED The Contractor shall check the dimensions of such girders, joists, etc., has been
FROM DISMANTLED completed, and before they are incorporated into the structure, they shall be submitted to
STRUCTURES the Engineer's Representative for approval and when this has been obtained and not
before, the Contractor shall forthwith incorporate them into the works as directed on the
drawings.
The Contractor shall ensure that during fabrication, assembly and subsequent
incorporation into the works, the girders, joists, etc., are given the paint treatment
specified in clause 5069.
GROUTING OF 5072. The base plate etc. shall first be located accurately with, respect to both line and
BASE PLATES ETC. level, by careful tapping levering, wedging, etc., as approved by the Engineer's
OF BEARINGS Representative. Care shall be taken to ensure that the damage is done to any item,
especially machined surfaces. Immediately before the operation of grouting in, the entire
area covered by the bearing, including pockets for holding down bolts, and a sufficient
extra area around to prevent contamination, shall be thoroughly cleaned by washing with
water from hose pipes, compressed air, etc., and all dust, loose and deleterious matter
shall be removed. All surplus matter shall then be dried off by mopping and the use of
compressed air and the surfaces left damp. Freshly mixed mortar, as directed and of
suitable consistency shall then be introduced to fill the pockets for the holding down
bolts, and the space beneath the bearing plates. The mortar shall be well pounded into the
space, working from one side with suitable pounders until the mortar appears on the
opposite side and every care should be taken to ensure that the mortar appears on the
opposite side and every care shall be taken to ensure that the entire void is filled, giving
complete support to the bearing over the entire area, without air holes, etc. To ensure this,
wooden screed shall be introduced around the edges of the grouting space to contain the
mortar during the pounding operations. Any mortar that may foul the threads of bolts, nuts
or affect their bearing on washers and plates shall be carefully removed without
disturbing the mortar already placed, and on completion of the operation, the edges of the
mortar shall be trimmed as shown on the drawings. The whole shall then be covered with
wet sacks or hessian which shall be kept continuously damp for a period of not less than 7
days, after which they shall be removed and all loose, adherent or projecting mortar liable
to reduce the efficiency of the bearings carefully removed. After 28 days all holding down
and other bolts shall be tightened as directed.
EXPANSION 5073. Expansion joints shall be provided where shown on the drawings and be of the
JOINT type specified. Detailed working drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval.
The drawings shall be supplement by the materials specifications not covered in the
GENERAL SPECIFICATION OF THE FEDERAL MINISTRY OF WORKS or
specified on the drawings. Expansion joint sealant as shown on the drawings shall be
produced from neoprene compound and conform with the requirements of ASTM
Specifications D2628-67T, (SEE clause 6269). Expansion joint sealant shall be placed in
correct position. When nosing type construction will be used, the expandite expoform or
equal epoxy resin special mortar shall be used for forming the joint nosing for joint
sealant. The epoxy shall comply with DOE requirements for nosing materials contained
in Technical Memorandum (Bridges) BE3/72. The expansion joint sealant, shall conform
to the following:
Density: 1350kg/m3
Hardness: 50 to 60, Shore A
Tensile strength: 13.8N/mm2 (minimum)
Elongation at break: 250% (minimum)
The size of the gap shall be compatible with the mean bridge temperature at the
time of installation. This temperature shall be determined in accordance with
arrangements agreed with the Engineers.
The position of all bolts cast into concrete and holes drilled in plates shall be
accurately determined from templates. The mixing, application and curing of all
proprietary materials shall comply with the anufacturers requirements.
During the placing and hardening of concrete or mortar under expansion joint
components, relative movement shall be prevented between them and the supports to
which they arc being fixed.
When one half of the joint is being set, the other half shall be completely free from
longitudinal restraint. In particular where strongbacks or templates are used to locate the
two sides of a joint, they shall not be fixed simultaneously to both sides.
Screw threads shall be kept clean and free from rust. Ramps shall be provided and
maintained to protect all expansion joints from vehicular loading. Vehicles shall cross the
joints only by means of the ramps until the Engineer permits their removal.
108
109
. -- ■
'
■
m im stry of pou fr , works & HOI SIM

.......... -110
SECTION V I- ROADWORKS
be deemed to apply in particular to road works, and shall be read in conjunction with all
other relevant Clauses of the Conditions of Contract and this Specification.
PART A-DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS
HORIZONTAL 6001. For new road, the horizontal alignment must be carefully chosen, as this is cost
ALIGNMENT related. A good alignment shall provide good drainage, minimum and balanced
earthworks and must provide good drainage, minimum and balanced earthworks and
must avoid swampy and high water table areas, where this is possible. A good horizontal
alignment allows straight portions of the road on the horizontal plane to be connected
with horizontal curves, which may be circular or transitional.
For the rehabilitation of roads in general, the proposed new alignment shall
follow closely on that of the existing road, except where necessary to effect realignment
to conform with the current standards of the Federal Ministry of Works and Housing or to
effect the most economical sitting of new bridges. It shall consist of a series of straights
joined by circular curves. All gradients, vertical and horizontal curves, sight and passing
distances, rate of super-elevations, etc., shall conform with the accepted standards of the
Ministry for the particular terrain and adopted design speed as follows:
TERRAIN LEVEL ROLLING HILLY

ADOPTED DESIGN SPEED, KM/H 100 80 60
HORIZONTAL CURVES AND SUPER ELEVATION
Radii of horizontal curves and super-elevation rates shall comply with the
following formula:
E=V2/2.25R
Where V = design speed in km/li
R = radius of circular curve in metre
E = super-elevation, this is nomially limited to an absolute maximum of 8%
DEFINITIONS:
(I) TANGENT RUN-OFF 丁 hat distance in which the level of the outer edge
of the pavement is brought to the level of the crown of the road section.
(II) SUPER-ELEVATION RUN-OFF That distance in which the super

elevation is brought from zero to its maximum value. Super-elevation shall be achieved
by rotating the pavement about the profile of the inside edge of the pavement in flat terrain
where the drainage of the inside edge of the curve is likely to present a problem.
In cases where the inside edge of the curve may be easily drained, then the super-elevation
shall be achieved by the rotation of the pavement about the centre-line profile. The
sequence of operations is as follows:
(a) The outer half of the pavement width is brought to the same horizontal plane
with the crown of the cross section. This is done within the distance called the tangent mn-
off.
(b) The outer half of the pavement is then brought to the same inclined plane as
the inner halae of the pavement.
I GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (ROADS AND BRIDGES)
(c) (I) For rotation about the inner edge, the pavementshall then be finally
rotated about its inner edge to the required full super-elevation. N o cut is involved along
the inner edge inthis operation.
(ii) For the rotation about the centre-line, the pavement shall be rotated
about its centre-line to the required full super-elevation. This operation involves
along the inner edge ofthe pavement.
T A B L E VI- D E S I G N SPEED W I T H C O R R E S P O N D I N G SUPER-ELEVATION A N D

M I N I M U M L E N G T H SUPER-ELEVATION R U N O F F
I-----------------------------------------------------------------
D ESIG N SP E E D KM/II IOO SO 60
MAXIMUM GRADIENT OF SUPER

ELEVATION RUN OFF RELATIVE TO 0.45 0.5 0.57
CENTRE-LINE OF ROAD (PERCENT)
MINIMUM LENGTH OF SUPER 55 45 40

ELEVATION RUN-OFF (METRE)
MAXIMUM RATE OF CHANGE OF SUPER 0 .0 5 m / m P E R 3 0

ELEVATION RUN-OFF M ETRE
LENGTH OF SUPER-ELEVATION RUN

OFF WITHIN THE CURVE (CIRCULAR) 20%
The proposed Road shall be constructed in accordance with the horizontal alignment,
formations and levels and other details as in the D R A W I N G S or as directed by the
VERTICAL 6002. The straightportions on the vertical plane that are connected by vertical curves arc
ALIGNMENT called gradients. Two cases of vertical curves occur with gradients either meeting at
summits or meeting at sags. The choice of gradient will affect construction costs, vehicle
operation cost, road capacity and passenger's comfort. With these considerations, the
vertical alignment shall conform with adopted standards of the Ministry. The finished
work shall be to even gradients joined by vertical curves. The lengths of vertical curves
shall be calculated using the formula:
L=K(G1-G2) = K A
Where L = length of vertical curve in metre, recommended minimum value of

10 0 m for allspeeds.
A = (G1-G2) = change in gradient (algebraic difference) percent. The ultimate

sign ofA should be ignored, i.e.Ais always positive.
K = constant for any particular speed
T A B L E VI-2 -DESIGN S P EED F O R V E R T I C A L S U M M I T O F C U R V E S W I T H

CORRESPONDING K VALUES
DESIGN SUMMIT
SPEED VERTICAL S A G VERTICAL
KM/H CURVE
CURVE
1 0 0 80 60 1 0 0 80 60
K 50 26 1 2 35 23 13
The level of any point along the vertical curve shall be equal to the level at the tangent
point plus
G1X/100+AX2/200L
where
X = distance ofthe point from the tangent point in metres
G 1 = gradient ofthe road section (per cent)
A = change in gradient (algebraic difference) i.e.(G1-G2 )per cent.
L = length ofthe vertical curve in metres
A X 2 should be positive for a sag vertical curve and

200 L negative for a summit vertical curve.
ROLL-OVER 6003. Roll-over is the algebraic difference in cross-falls of two adjacent lanes of
pavement area. The Roll-Over shall be in accordance with the details as shown on the
D R A W I N G S or as directedby the Engineer's Representative.
C O N T R A C T O R 6004. The Contractor will be responsible for working out all levels of the pavement,
T O CALCULATE shoulders, ditches, etc., that arc necessary for the setting out of the works and will, if
LEVELS required to do so, furnish the Engineer's Representative with lists of these levels for his
approval prior to setting-out. The Contractor shall locate and preserve where directed all
concrete land markers, beacons, benchmarks, etc.
CONSTRUCTION 6005. The roads shall be constructed to the following standards
STANDARD
(I) W I D T H
The formation width between drains comprising a carriageway, hard-shoulders and soft
shoulders shall be constructed to the dimensions shown on the drawings or as ordered by
the Engineer.
(II)B A S E - C O U R S E
The base course of the carriageway, which may be continued over the hard shoulders or
extended a minimum of 3 0 0 m m at either side of the surfaced width as shown on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer shall be constructed of approved material having
a finished compacted thickness of not less than 150mm and complying in all respects
with this specification.
The base course to the hard shoulders ifdifferent from that of the camageway, shall be
constructed of such other approved material as directed by the Engineer's Representative,
but also having a finished compacted thickness ofnot less than 150mm.
(ITT) SUB-BASE C O U R S E The Sub-base Course of the carriageway, which may be
continuous over the hard shoulders as shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer's Representative, shall be constructed of approved material having a finished
compacted thickness as shown on the drawings, or as directed by the Engineer depending
on the C.B.R. value ofthe sub-base in question.
(IV) GEOMETRY The horizontal and vertical alignments, super-elevations and cambers
of the road shall be constructed in accordance with the D R A W I N G S or as directed by the
Engineer.
(V) B I T U M I N O U S S U R F A C I N G The surfacing of the roadway shall be two-coat

bituminous surface dressing or asphaltic concrete pavement as shown on the
D R A W I N G S or as directed by the Engineer.
(VI) SIDE SLOPES T O E M B A N K M E N T S Side slopes to embankments and cuttings

shall be constructed in accordance with the drawings or directed by the Engineer's
Representative. The co-efficient of resistance of the material shall be the determinant
factor for the embankment slope.
(VII) SIDE D R A I N S Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, the invert of the side
drains shall be not less than 9 0 0 m m below the finished level of the crown of the road. All
side drains shall, where shown, be excavated to the profile and dimensions shown on the
drawings, but the Engineer's Representative may direct thatthe side drains be constructed
to such lesser profiles consistent with drainage capacity as he may think fit due to the
existence of rock or other obstruction. Where the height of the embankment exceeds
9 0 0 m m above the existing ground and the natural gradient of the sun*ounding area is
towards the roadway, then catch-water drains shall be constructed as shown on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer's Representative.
(VIII) C U L V E R T S Generally, culverts shall consist of pre-cast concrete pipes laid either
as single or multiple culverts, and where shown shall be bedded and haunched with a
minimum of 150mm of concrete. In cases where sufficient cover is not available the
Engineer's Representative may direct that culverts be surrounded with a minimum of
15 0 m m ofconcrete.
(IX) J U N C T I O N W I T H R O A D S
A. Minor Roads At alljunctions with minor roads where shown on the D R A W I N G S or
directed by the Engineer's Representative, bell mouth shall be constructed carrying the
construction and drainage to a minimum of 15.0 metres from the edge of the proposed
roadway along the minor road as shown in details on the D R A W I N G S or as directed by
B. Major Roads At junctions with major road culverts shall be constructed as shown on
the D R A W I N G S or as ordered by the Engineer's Representative.
(X) W I D E N I N G O F R O A D W A Y T H R O U G H V I L L A G E S A N D AT
RECOGNIZED L O R R Y HALTS
Where the roadway passes through villages and at recognized lorry halts, the base course
and the asphalt concrete pavement shall be widened. Concrete side drains shall be
constructed, all as shown on the D R A W I N G S or as directed by the Engineer's
Representative.
(XI) H A R D S H O U L D E R S
Surface dressed hard shoulders shall be constructed on both sides of the roadway as
shown on the D R A W I N G S or as directed by the Engineer's Representative.
(XII) SOFT S H O U L D E R S A N D E M B A N K M E N T SLOPES

Soft shoulders and embankment slopes shall be constructed so as to have the top 7 5 m m
consisting of topsoil and shall be grassed throughout unless otherwise directed. At the
discretion of the Engineer's Representative, the top 7 5 m m may consist of a compacted
layer ofapproved lateriticmaterial in lieu oftop soil.
(XIII) S U B - G R A D E
A. Cuts The sub-grade ofthe road shall be shaped to the dimensions, formations and
levels as shown on the drawing or as directed by the Engineer's Representative and the top
15 0 m m sub-grade shall be watered and compacted to 100% B.S. standard compaction at
optimum moisture content (OMC)
B. Embankments The sub-grade of the road shall be shaped to the dimensions,

formations and levels as shown on the D R A W I N G S or as directed by the Engineer's
Representative.
(CLAUSES 6006-6009 INCLUSIVE N O T USED)
ifllM
PART (B) - EARTHW O RK S, DR AIN AG E ETC.
(1) M A T E R I A L
GENERAL 6100. The materials used in the works shall be new and/or of the qualities and kinds
specified, and no materials will be used inthe works unless approved. Materials delivered
to the works shall be equal to the approved samples. Deliveries shall be made sufficiently
in advance of constructional requirements to enable samples to be selected by the
Engineer's Representative fortesting before using the materials inthe works.
Materials failing to comply with the specification shall be immediately

removed from the works atthe Contractor's expense.
These specifications on materials shallbe read in conjunction with latestamended

report of the “ the Lagos materials testing conference” ，a copy of which will be made
available to the Contractor on request.
N o material shall be used until it has been approved by the Engineer or his
Representative. Permission to use any material shall not be construed as an approval of its
source nor any acceptance as continued acceptance.
UNSUITABLE 6101. In no case will material, which contains organic matter or other deleterious
M A TERIAL substance be used.
FILLING 6102. Material for filling in the embankment shall be obtained from sources approved
MATERIAL by the Engineer's Representative and no slurry, mud, soft or otherwise unsuitable
materials shall on no account or under any circumstances be placed in embankments.
Large pieces of rock, or other materials shall be properly broken up and beaten down and
no accumulation at the foot of side slopes of embankments of boulders or lumps having
no cohesion will under any circumstances be permitted. The Engineer's decision
regarding the suitability ofany material shall be final and any material ofwhich more than
35% passes the N o 75]im sieve may be rejected depending on the plasticity characteristics
of this material, provided good quality fill materials are available, otherwise such
material may be modified for use.
The material to be used for the forming of embankments shall generally be

obtained from cuttings, which may be widened as agreed with the Engineer's
Representative. The material shall be spread evenly over the area of embankment and
compacted in uniform layers to the specified density and moisture using B.S. compactive
effort. Each compacted layer shall not be greater tan 150mm.
SELECTED LATER- 6013. Where directed by the Engineer's Representative under the provisions of clause
1TIC MATERIAL 6163 the material selected for the upper 75 m m ofthe soft shoulder shall or preferably be a
FOR SOFT well graded lateritic soil with a Plasticity Index ofnot less than 10 and not more than 20.
SHOULDERS
GRASS OR 6104. The seed, or the grass used for sowing or planting on the verges, the slopes of
G R A S S SEE D embankments and cuttings shall be daub grass (cynoon dactylion) or bahama grass. Tall,
quick-growing or tussock grasses shall not be used without the consent of the Engineer.
The Contractor must anticipate the requirements forthe supply ofsuitable grass.
RUBBLE A N D 6105. Stones for culverts tilling behind retaining walls or walls of shall be angular and
PITCHING graded from 1 2 m m to 7 5 m m with a fine content below 1 2 m m not exceeding 20% stones,
STONES for pitching the inverts and sides of ditches embankment sloes and culvert inlets, and
outlets, shall be of durable natural broken rock of approximate cubical shape 2 2 5 m m x
2 2 5 m m x 2 2 5 m m or 150mm x 150mmx 150mm as appropriate.

d15
GENERAL SPECIFICATfONS (ROADS AND BRIDGES)
(II) W O R K M A N S H I P
SITE 6120. The Contractor shall fell, grub-out roots and clear from the site all trees occurring
CLE A R A N C E within the boundary of the works as directed. In additional bushes, ant hills, ants' nests,
grass, stumps and other vegetation shall be cleared from the site and roots, gmbbed up,
holes made in grubbing up, removing the ant hills, roots, stumps and the like shall be
backfilled and compacted to a density at least equal to that of the surrounding ground
except that all holes, cavities, and wells within the road width shall be backfilled with
approved soil which shall be thoroughly compacted throughout by power rammer to a
density not lessthan the dry density ofthe surrounding ground.
Outside the above limits, on the inside of bends, bushes and trees shall be felled
and their roots grubbed up as directed to give an unobstructed sight distance of 150
metres. For purposes of measurement, the girths ofthe trees shall be taken 9 0 0 m m above
ground level except that where a tree has a buttress the girth shall be taken immediately
above the buttresses. N o economic trees or crops shall be removed prior to their
enumeration and valuation for compensation purposes.
The Contractor shall remove gates, gateposts, manhole covers, kerbs, signs, water
mains and other items to the extent directed by the Engineer's Representative.
Foundations shall be broken up and removed to a depth of 900nim below natural sub
grade level or finished grade level,whichever islower.
Structures to be demolished shall be broken up and removed. Prior to demolition

the Contractor shall ensure that services have been disconnected to the satisfaction of the
appropriate authorities and/or owners. Foundations shall be broken up and removed to a
depth of 900 m m below Natural Sub-grade Level or finished grade level, whichever is
lower.
Pits, tanks, underground chambers and the like shall be demolished to a depth of
9 0 0 m m below Natural Sub-grade Level or finished grade level, whichever is lower and
the remainder shall be properly cleaned out.
Clearing limits for this Contract shall be the entire length of the project within
widths as herein below defined.
I. Buildings, walls and other man-made items

Clear everything within the Right-of-Way limits.
II. Compound walls -reconstruction

Any and all existing compound walls located within the Right-of-Way limits shall
be cleared and removed as part of the appropriate item in the Bill of Quantities. Also
included as part of this item shall be the reconstruction of all such walls, equal to the
removed wall, along the Right-of-Way line connecting to the points atthe start and end of
the removed section. T he co st of such reconstruction shall be considered included in this
item. Reconstruction of compound walls may be required anywhere along the alignment.
III. Wells
Working wells outside the limit of grading shall be maintained in a condition equal
to theirpresent condition.
Working wells within the limits of grading shall be filled as hereinabove required.
Replacement wells equal to the existing wells shall be constructed outside the limits of
grading.
The cost ofallreplacement wells shall be considered as included in Item "Clear Site as
specified... etc.”
Non-working wells within the Right-of-Way lines shall be filled as hereinbefore

required.
IV. Trees and All Other Erosion Resisting Vegetation
All trees shall be cleared within a strip fifty (50) metres wide, (25 metres to each
side of the centre line). To ensure that future falling trees do not clog road side drains, all
trees outside this 50 metre strip whose height is such that, ifthey fell would reach to the
nearest roadside drain, shallbe cleared.
All other erosion resisting vegetation shall be cleared only within the limits of
grading.
Outside the above limits and within the Right-of-Way lines allvegetation shall be
selectivelythinned and/or trimmed.
A. Selective thinning shall include the removal of live and dead trees both
standing and fallen, shrubs, and other vegetation and debris in the areas shown on the
Drawings and designated forremoval by the Engineer.
The trees, shrubs and other vegetation to be removed will be so designated by the
Engineer's Representative. Trees shall be carefully felled to prevent damage to adjacent
vegetation, structures and property. Trees, stumps and all debris shall be removed in a
manner thatwill not compact or disturb the soil adjacent to trees and shrubs to remain.
B. Trimming existing trees shall include the complete removal of all defective or
undesirable limbs and the repair of all injuries or wounds on existing trees as directed by
All diseased, broken and seriously injured branches shall be removed. Healthy
low branches shall not be removed except as otherwise directed by the Engineer's
Representative. All wounds over 2 5 m m diameter shall be painted with tree paint. The
bark around all wounds and other injuries shall be traced and treated in accordance with
approved arboricultural practice and shallbe subject to the approval ofthe Engineer.
All trees to remain within the area designated for selective thinning shall be
trimmed to remove all dead and undesirable limbs up to a height of 5 m above ground. The
Engineer will determine which live limbs are undesirable.
Materials designed for incorporation in the Works shall be removed, marked
where necessary for future identification and stored forre-use.
The Contractor shall load, transport, unload and stock materials designated for
delivery to the owner's thereof.
Other materials resulting from clearing operations shall become the property of
the Contractor as soon as he takes possession of the land for the Works. The Contractor
shall remove and dispose of such materials.
Clear material shall be burnt or disposed of as directed by the Engineer's

Representative. Trees to be cut down shall have all lightbranches trimmed offand burned
and useful trimmer shall be cut in suitable lengths and stacked at the roadside ready for
removal as directedby the Engineer's Representative.
Payment will be made under this for the net areas cleared and shall include for the
satisfactory removal of anthills and ants' nests and for any backfilling and compacting
required and for disposal of material, but shall not include any areas of grass on the road
vergers or o th erw ise, w h ich is subjected to p eriod ic cutting and m aintenance.
SCARIFYING 6121. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer's Representa tive, the existing road
EXISTING shall be scarified, shaped to required formation level, and compacted as specified, where
SURFACE the average difference between the proposed formation levels and the existing ground
levels does not exceed 75mm. Payment shall be made once only under the appropriate
item in the Bills of Quantities and shall include for all operations required to bring the
existing road to the required formation levels. Where ordered in writing by the Engineer's
Representative, existing bituminous surfaces shall be scarified, re-shaped and
compacted, as specified and all surplus material shall be disposed of as directed by the
Engineer's Representative. .Payment shall be made under the appropriate item, in the Bill
ofQuantities and shall include for alloperations as required herein.
Except as provided above, the removal of existing bituminous surfacing by

scarifying and roughening of existing unsealed roads and vergers, etc., shallbe deemed to
be included in the tendered rtes and prices for earthworks.
EARTHWORKS 6122. In the Contract the following words and expressions shall have the meanings
hereby assigned to them, except where the context otherwise requires:
(1) “Existing Ground Level”means the ground level shown on the drawings as
existing atthe startofthe Works.
(2) “Finished Ground Level”means the ground.level after the completion of the
Works.
(3) “Natural Sub-grade Level”means the level at the completion of excavation for
roadworks.
(4) “Formation Level”means the level at the completion of earthworks for road
works prior to top soiling.
(5) “Stripped Ground Levels”means the ground levels after the completion of
clearing operations.
(6 ) “Specified Finished Excavation Levels’ ’means the levels of the completed

excavation after trimming, compacting and preparation of the surface of the
excavation as calculated from the levels shown on the Drawings, or the levels
(7) “Specified Finished Fill”means the levels of fills after trimming， compacting and
preparation of the surface of the fill(excluding top soiling) placed in accordance
with the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer's Representative.
Excavated material shall be classified by the Engineer's Representative as
suitable material, or unsuitable material.
Unsuitable material shall include the following；
(1) Material from swamps, marshes and bogs.

(2) Peat, logs, stumps, roots and other perishable or combustible material
(3) Topsoil and highly organic clay and silt.
(4) . Clay having a liquid limit exceeding 80% or plasticityindex exceeding 55.
(5) Highly micaceous materials.
Suitable material shall exclude the foregoing unsuitable materials and shall
comprise all other natural material acceptable for use in the Works, whether obtained
from within or without the Site.
Topsoil shall mean soil which can be seen to have been broken down by
agricultural cultivation and/or is seen to be capable of supporting vegetable growth. It
shall include turf.
Solid rock shall mean rock found in ledges or masses in its original position,
which can only be loosened by blasting or by pneumatic tools, or excavated by hand by
using wedges and sledgehammers. Rock, which is in a shattered condition and/or is
capable of being loosened by rippers or earthmoving plant, is excluded from the
definition of solid rock. Boulders or detached pieces ofrock each exceeding 2 cubic meter
sizes in trenches or 6 cubic meter size in general excavation, shall be regarded as solid
rock.
Where embankments are to be constructed on steeply sloping ground, including

the side slopes of existing embankments, existing sloping surfaces shall be excavated to
form benching as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer's Representative.
Materials for fillingshall comprise the following;
(1) General Fill:
General fill shall consist of suitable material as defined herein. Subject to the
requirements regarding the forming of embankments isolated boulders not exceeding 3
cubic metres in size may be included in general fill.
(2) Rock Fill:

Rock fillshall consist of sound igneous rock or other sound rock acceptable to the
Engineer's Representative or such strength that when compacted an excess of fines will
not be produced. It shall be free draining and reasonably well graded and shall have a
maximum size of 3 cubic metres. The percentage of material by weight passing a 5 m m
sie v e sh all not e x c e e d 30%. It shall b e free from silt, clay and organic m aterial. Such
material may be deposited below water without the associated use of compaction plant.
(3) Granular Fill:

Granular fill shall consist of an approved granular material of maximum size not
greater than 38mm, which is inert in water and which on analysis by sieving, complies
with the following requirements.
Sieve Size Percentage by Weight Passing
10 m m up to 1 0 0
5mm not more than 85
600 jim not more than 45
75(im not more than 5
(4) Special Granular Fill:

Special granular fill shall be hard and durable and shall consist of broken rock or
gravel. Itshall be well graded with a maximum size of 38mm. The percentage of material
by weight passing 75îm sieve shall not exceed 10. It shall be free from silt, clay and
organic material.
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (ROADS 八 ND BRIDGES)
(5) Granular Bedding：

Granular bedding shall consist of crushed rock or gravel having a smooth grading
curve within the limits specified for 19mni nominal size allin aggregate to Table 3 ofB.S.
882. The fraction passing the 425 fim sieve shall be non-plastic when tested in accordance
with B.S. 1377 (1975) Sections 2, 3 and 4 unless such fraction constitutes less than 2 per
cent ofthe whole by weight.
Earthworks shall be measured by super-imposing the specified finished formation

levels on initial cross sections taken by the Contractor at 30 meter intervals or closer if
necessary along the centre line. The levels of such cross sections shall be agreed by the
A maximum quantity of material excavated from cuttings shall be placed to fill

and the utmost advantage shall be taken to the natural moisture content of the soil in
placing such fillprovided the materials meet the qualities for use as such see clause 6102.
Fill shall be placed and compacted in layers of a compacted thickness 150mm or such
thickness that may be found necessary to achieve the required density over the full width
ofthe foimation. The Contractor shall route his earth-moving equipment in such a manner
over the full width of the filling as to achieve a uniform compaction over the entire width
by this method. All fill including sub-grade and vergers shall then be compacted to 100
per cent ofthe maximum dry density obtained in the British Standard Compaction Test. In
the case of extension to existing embankments benching will be required as indicated on
the drawings or as directed by the Engineer's Representative and such bending shall be
deemed to be included in the tendered rates for earthworks.
PAYMENT FOR 6123. Payment for earthworks shall be made once on the basis of the total quantity of
EARTHWORKS measured fill by the Contractors together with the quantity of unsuitable material and/or
of excess cut placed to spoil, all as determined from the cross sections referred to in clause
6122. The depth of unsuitable material, if any, to be placed to spoil shall be agi*eed
between the Contractor's Agent and the Engineer's Representative. Payment for this
material will be on the net volume as measured in situ.
The quantity of suitable excess cut placed to spoil shall be determined as follows:
(I) The net volume of suitable material excavated from cuttings or side drains shall be
determined by deducting the quantity of unsuitable material placed to spoil from
the total quantity of cut as determined from the cross-sections.
(ii) The total volume of filling placed in embankment shall be found from the cross-
sections.
(iii) The volume of suitable excess cut placed to spoil shall be taken as the volume
found in (i) above less the volume found in (ii)above with an adjustment made to
the latterto allow for compaction.
The adjustment which shall be made for compaction shall be based on the ratio of
the maximum dry density of the filling at 100% B.S. compaction to the in situ dry density
of the material in the cutting or side drain. Haulage rates will be assessed on the basis of
the use of the nearest acceptable road making materials to the section of work under
construction. Stripping of topsoil will not be measured as roadway excavation. The
quantity of stripping topsoil for which payment will be made will be the area stripped in
accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer, measured in units as
specified in the billofquantities.
m * (Sj
SELECTION OF 6124. Soils shall be obtained from areas of cut including ditching or from approved
SOIL FOR FILL borrow pits.All grass and vegetation shall be removed from the surface ofthe areas of cut
or borrow pits before excavation of the fill material is commenced and no such grass or
vegetation shall be included in the fill. In borrow pits the topsoil shall be carefully
removed and stockpiled.
Topsoil shall not be removed from any area until excavations or filling operations
are about to start in that area. Topsoil on the sites of cuttings and embankments shall be
excavated to the average depth directed by the Engineer's Representative or as specified
hereinafter.
The Contractor shall, at his own expense and to suit his own convenience, make
arrangements for and provide such temporary storage sites as may be required for heaps
oftopsoil.
If any materials suitable for sub-base, base or aggregates as specified herein are
encountered in material removed as roadway excavation, and the Contractor elects to use
such material for constructing items, payment forthe various items shallbe as follows:
Ifthe contractor elects to use materials removed from cuttings for constructing
items of sub-base, base or aggregates, payment will be made for such material excavated
under the appropriate roadway excavation item and for such material so placed under the
appropriate item of sub-base or base, provided that the Contractor furnishes and places
borrow excavation material, in embankment without cost, in an amount equal to the value
ofthe material used in the base, subbasc or as aggregate inplace prior to excavation.
The Contractor shall at his own expense, make arrangements for a provide such spoil
dumps as may be required for the disposal of excavated materials which are not to be
incorporated in the Works.
The spoil dumps shall be located and shaped in accordance with the Contractor's
proposals as and shall be finished with neatly trimmed slopes, adequately surface soiled,
allto the satisfaction ofthe Engineer's Representative.
During the course of the excavation from an area of cut or borrow pit or other
approved source of fill material, the Contractor shall provide adequate supervision to
ensure that only soil of a type approved by the Engineer's Representative is excavated.
Care shall be taken during such excavations to avoid any pockets of heavy clay,
vegetation or other unsuitable material and ifany such unsuitable material or soil of an
unapproved type is included in the fill itshall be dug out and made good with approved
material where directed by the ngineer's Representative and at the Contractor's own
expense.
Where a sandy soil is encountered in the excavation of a cut or borrow pit, the
Engineer's Representative shall have the power to instruct the Contractors to place this
sandy soil to the top layer of fill.
Any material, which in the opinion of the Engineer's Representative is not
suitable for fill,shall be tipped to spoil as and where directed.
After removal of fillmaterial from borrow pits, etc., the area shall be levelled and
topsoil replaced allto the satisfactionofthe Engineer's Representative.
The Contractors shall arrange and pay for any compensations and other payments
whatsoever required for their access to and occupation and use ofthe borrow areas for fill
material.
m JM !121
Payment for allarrangements, compensations and other costs, clearance, removal

and replacement oftopsoil, excavations and disposal ofunsuitable materials and allother
operations and requirements ofthis clause shall be deemed to be included in the tendered
rates and prices for earthworks.
COMPACTION 6125. Compaction shall be measured by expressing the dry density of the sample as a
percentage ofthe maximum dry density atoptimum moisture content.
Compaction of allmaterial shall be carried out at a moisture content optimum for

the compaction effort of the plant used. The Engineer's Representative may, however,
direct that the moisture content at compaction be further controlled in order to reduce as
far as possible any subsequent consolidation or swelling.
Where it is necessary to add water to the material to achieve the dry density
specified, the cost of obtaining, transporting or pumping, spraying and mixing sufficient
water must be allowed in the Contractor's prices for compaction. Water shall be added as
and where necessary by a water carrier fittedwith an approved sprinkler and the uniform
wetting of the layer to be compacted shall be achieved. Under no circumstances will
compaction solely by construction or other trafficbe adopted.
Fill materials shall be placed, spread and levelled in layers of loose depth not
exceeding 230mm of general fill,460mni of rock fill,2 3 0 m m of special and granular fill.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, where rock fillor granular fillisplaced below water level
there shallbe no restriction on the depth of layers.
The material of each layer, of whatever type, shall be uniform throughout the
layer. Except as otherwise necessary to conform to the zoning of the various types of
materials, each layer ofmaterial shall extend over the full width of the filling. No layer of
fill material shall be placed until the Engineer's Representative is satisfied that the
underlying layerisproperly compacted.
Rock fill (including solid rock..........cuttings) shall be placed, spread and

levelled by a track-laying tractor and large voids shall be filled with broken fragments
before compaction.
Isolated boulders and isolated large fragments of solid rock fonning part of
general fill shall be evenly distributed throughout each layer, but no stone exceeding
15 0 m m in size shall be placed within 3 0 0 m m of formation level.
During the construction of embankments the Contractor shall control and direct
construction traffic uniformly over the full width. Unless permitted by the Engineer's
Representative, fillmaterials shall not be stockpiled on embankments.
Embankments shall be constructed in such a maimer that the completed

formation is not damaged by construction traffic. The Contractor may elect to construct
embankments to such higher levels as may be necessary to protect the formation and in
such cases shall delay removal of the suiplus material until preparation of the formation
can immediately proceed. The provision, placing, compaction and subsequent removal
and disposal of such material shall be atthe Contractor's expense.
All road materials shall be incorporated in the works by an approved sequence of

operations namely the dumping of materials, spreading by grader, watering and mixing
as specified above and compacting by approved means. The Contractor shall keep the
delays between consecutive operations to a minimum.
All compaction equipment must operate over the whole area to ensure uniform
compaction by it. All filling including the sub-base course and base course shall be
compacted in layers of a compacted thickness of 15 0 m m or such other thickness as may
b e found n ecessary to a ch iev e the required density. L ongitudinal and transverse jo in ts in
any two successive layers shall be staggered to a minimum distance of 3 metres.
At the beginning of the Works and from time to time as may be necessary in the
opinion of the Engineer's Representative, the Contractor shall carry out, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative, jfieldtrials, supplemented by any necessary
laboratory investigations to detemiine types of compaction equipment, suitable layer
thickness and moisture contents all within the requirements of the specification for the
placing and compaction of the various materials to be used in the earthworks. The sites of
trials shall be agreed between the Contractor and the Engineer's Representative. If
compaction trialfillisplaced as part ofthe peraianent work, such fillshall conform to the
requirements ofthe specification and ifitdoes not itshall be removed or reworked until it
does conform. Extra work required either to rework or remove the trial section shall be at
the Contractor's expense.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer's Representative his proposals, based
on the rolling test result's for the compaction of each variety of material to be used in the
earthworks, including proposals in relation to types ofplant, numbers ofpasses and loose
depth of layers. Work (other than rolling test) shall not start on any particular variety of
material until the Engineer's Representative has signified in writing his agreement to the
Contractor's proposals for thatmaterial.
The Contractor shall not modify the agreed methods without the consent of the
Work in compaction of fillmaterials shall be carried out only when the moisture
content is within the range shown by the field or by laboratory tests whichever is
appropriate on that material to be suitable for the attainment of the densities specified
below.
(i) For material which iswithin 600mm Formation Level or in the filling adjacent to
structures (including backfilling), not less than 1 0 0 percent of the maximum dry density
for the material obtainable by B.S. standard compaction.
(ii) For all other material, not less than 95 percent ofthe m axim um dry density forthe
material obtainable by B.S. standard compaction. The foregoing compaction
requirements shall also apply to the sub-grade material, which is within 6 0 0 m m of
formation level in cuttings.
The Contractor and the Engineer's Representative shall from time to time agree
upon field compaction methods and relevant plant for the various materials such that by
correlation using the relative density and ISO C B R control tests, the need for the
extensive tests on the finished road section may be reduced.
The Contractor and the Engineer's Representative shall also agree on procedures
for determining the areas o ffillto which particular sets oftestresults should be deemed to
be applicable. Such areas shall include clay or peat deposit where consolidation testmay
be necessary.
All sections ofthe works shall be protected from damage by plants, rainstorms or
other cause. All such damage should itoccur, shall be made good by the Contractor athis
own expense.
EEf.123
In particular the exposed surface of each lift of fill or sub-base course or base
course material, after compaction, shall be protected by a cambered surface from
excessive moisture content changes due to rainstonns until the next liftis placed. Ifsuch
changes in moisture content do take place and the surface of the compacted layer softens,
the contractor shall, ifrequired by the Engineer's Representative, remove and replace the
material affected athis own expense. Should the material used for sub-base orbase course
be prone to drying from the surface the Contractor shall from time to time keep the
finished surface slightly dampened. This process will continue until another layer is
placed.
Should there be patches of unsound ground, excessive sand or clay, which are, in the
opinion of the Engineer's Representative unsatisfactory, then such areas shall be rectified
by admixture of suitable materials or by cutting out and replacement to ensure a
uniformly compacted formation.
Tests for the control of compaction shall be carried out at regular intervals as
directed by the Engineer's Representative. If any test result from a particular area falls
below the minimum specified, then the Contractor shall athis own expense scarify, water
and re-compact that area to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer's Representative, provided the
constituency of the material will not be adversely affected as double compaction may
increase percentage passing 75(am sieve to more than 35% thus reducing the strength of
the material.
The Contractor shall allow in his construction programme time for such tests and
forthe results to be made known, before the next stage ofthe works.
BORROW PITS 6126. The Contractor shall at his own expense clear bush, topsoil and other inferior
materials from the site of borrow pits. The Contractor shall also bear the cost of
compensation for borrow pits outside the area of the site. Borrow pits for road materials
shall be excavated only where the natural slope of the ground is away from the road,
except that where he considers it essential for the proper execution of the works the
Engineer's Representative may approve the excavation of borrow pits in ground above
road level.
Generally in rural areas the nearest edge of the pit shall be not less than 15 metres
from the ccntrc-line of the road. The Contractor shall so plan his method of execution of
the works that the haul of road materials from borrow pits is reduced to a minimum. The
Contractor may be allowed to form “ side-borrowtrencfies”for fillmaterial wherever itis
required providing such trenches are self draining, having a minimum fall along the line
of the road of 1 in 120. All other pits shall be properly drained to the satisfaction of the
Engineer's Representative by the construction ofturnouts or other approved methods.
In built-up areas, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, his proposals for
obtaining fill materials and shall furnish details regarding the locations, sizes and owner
o f all borrow areas, together w ith his p rop osed m ethod o f w orking and all m easures
proposed to eliminate damage or nuisance to persons or property. He shall be required to
submit his proposed method for the reinstating such borrow areas at the same time. The
Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's written approval for the above before commencing
work on any borrow area. In addition the Contractor shall comply with all other relevant
clauses ofthe conditions of contract and this specification.
N o borrow pit shall be abandoned until the area has been levelled, top soil
replaced and the sides battered to a slope of 1 in 1 V2 so that no animals may be trapped, all
to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative. The cost of all operations detailed
under this clause shall be deemed to be included in the tendered rate for earthworks.
Regulations under the mineral ordinance must be observed by the Contractor.

S A N D FILL 6127. Where sand fill, either hydraulic or otherwise, is specified, it shall be obtained
from a source or sources approved by the Engineer. Where such sources occur in waters or
areas under the jurisdiction of the Nigerian ports Authority or the inland waterway
department of the Federal Ministry of Transport or other appropriate authority, then the
Contractor shall first obtain written permission to remove material from the authority
concerned and shall comply, in all respects with all regulations laid down by such an
authority.
The quality of the material intended for use as sand fill shall be subject to the
approval ofthe Engineer. For hydraulic sand fill,the grading of the material shall be such
that not more than 15% passes the 75^xm sieve, and in no case will isolated pockets or
layers ofsilt,clay or other organic impurities be accepted.
The relative density ofhydraulics sand fillplaced in embankment shallbe as follows:
(A) Top 6 0 0mm 90%

(B) Next 600 m m 80%
(C) Below the Top 1200 m m 70%
Sand fill placed by any method other than the hydraulic shall be compacted in
layers by a method approved by the Engineer’
s Representative to a density ofnot less than
100% of the maximum dry density obtained in the British Standard Compaction Test.
Vibrative system ofcompaction isrecommended.
In the case of hydraulic sand fillthe Contractor shall construct all drains, ditches,
spillways, marginal bunds necessary for the proper protection of the works. Such drains,
marginal bunds, etc., shall be constructed sufficiently in advance of the deposit of the
sand fill,so as to effectively drain and retain the sand filland to prevent any ofthe material
from flowing into any harbours, creeks, canals, drains, etc., or from causing any damage
or nuisance to persons or property. The Contractor shall be responsible for any slip or
settlements that may occur during the construction of the sand fill or the bunds, drains,
etc., and shall also be responsible for same during the maintenance period. The
Contractor shall make good such slips and settlements to the satisfaction of the Engineer's
Representative. The Contractor shall be responsible for the full and efficient drainage of
water resulting from the hydraulic sand filloperation and shall construct such open drains
as may be necessary to drain all surface and rainwater, so as to avoid all ponding. The
Contractor shall make due allowance for settlement and drying-out of the sand-fill and for
the making good of same.
Before any hydraulic sand fillis commenced, the Contractor shall, in conjunction
with the Engineer's Representative, survey the site and mutually agree the surface levels,
and such agreement shall be recorded in writing by both parties. The levels shall be taken
on a grid with points at not exceeding 15 metre centres and the Contractor shall construct
concrete pilot-pillars to the Satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative to enable the
grid lines to be located during the filling operations. The Contactor shall construct
sufficient telltales, consisting of 5 0 m m x 5 0 m m x l 0 m m angle of adequate length with a
flange of 900mm in diameter fixed at one end, all in non-corrosive metal, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative, to enable any subsidence of the original
ground level to be measured. The method of measurement of hydraulic sand fill shall be
on the basis of the volume of material placed as detemiined from the area filled and the
depth of fill to the finished level from the original ground level or the subsided original
ground level, as applicable. Should any dispute arise as to the subsided original gi*ound
level, as indicated by the telltales, then the same shall be detemiined by the taking of
borings or by the digging of trial-pits. Payment for trialpits shall be from the appropriate
item, in the bills of quantities. Where no such item is included, payment will be from
appropriate provisional sum. Ifoption of trial pit is chosen shutting shall be provided to
check the collapse tendencies ofsand fill.
輕 125
Hydraulic sand fill shall be deposited in layers as directed by the Engineer, but in
any case the thickness of such layers shall not exceed the limits stipulated as follows:
(A) FirstLayer—not exceeding 4 5 0 m m inthickness
(B) Second Layer thickness - not exceeding 7 5 0 m m in
(C) All subsequent Layers - not exceeding 9 0 0 m m in thickness
The finished level shall be as shown on the drawings or as directed by the

Engineer, and shall be agreed as the result of a joint survey carried out by the Contractor
and the Engineer's Representative. Atolerance of 7 5 m m above or below the finished level
may be permitted during pumping operations, but the same shall be made good by
subsequent grading or dozing to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative and to
the tolerances stipulated for the sub-grade. Without limiting his commitments under the
terms of the contract, the Contractor shall not be required to make good any normal
expected settlement of the original ground levels after completion of the sand fill. The
Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all the foregoing provisions in his rates
and prices for sand filling. Should the Engineer so desire the Contractor shall place
stockpiles of material in quantities and areas as directed. Payment for these stockpiles
shall be made atthe tendered rates and prices forhydraulic sand fill.
EXCAVATION 6128. The Contractors shall keep all excavations free from water and shall attheir own
TO BE KEPT expense construct such temporary grips and ditches and provide and maintain pumps as
FREE F R O M may be found necessary for this purpose. Excavation free from water may be possible if
WATER underground design formation level isnot close to the water level.
SLIPS 6129. During the carrying out of excavations, the Contractors shall limit vertical and
other temporary faces to such heights as are suitable to the nature of the soil exposed Ifin
the course of the works, any slips, slides, or subsidence occur and such slips, slides or
subsidence extend beyond the lines and slopes and below the levels shown on the
drawings, the excess excavation will not be paid for and the Contractors shall attheir own
expenses carry away such materials and make good in a manner satisfactory to the
Engineer's Representative and without extra charge.
UNSUITABLE 6130. Where unsuitable ground or other unsuitable material is found below formation
MATERIALS level or below the slope of cuttings under areas offill,this shall be excavated and disposed
BELOW of as directed by the Engineer's Representative, and the space leftvoid shall be backfilled
FORMATION with selected fill and compacted to at least 100% of the M.D.D. achieved in the British
LEVEL
Standard compaction test.
Payment shall be made under this clause for any material removed as unsuitable
soil only on the written direction of the Engineer's Representative provided such
unsuitable material could not have been discovered during the tendering period.
Measurement for this item shall be on the compacted backfill only and payment
for this work will be atthe rates entered inthe billofquantities for earthworks.
SWAMP 6131. Certain existing swampy areas on the proposed line of reconstruction may have
AREAS been delineated on the drawings.
The attention of the Contractor is particularly drawn to the fact that, under the
provisions of this specification, he is responsible for the safe passing of traffic in such
areas and that the cost of any diversions which may be required for this purpose are
deemed to be included in the tendered rates and prices.
126
GENERAL SPFCIFICATIONS (ROADS AND BRIDGES)
The Contractor shall programme and execute his earthmoving operations such as
to complete the embankments in swamp areas prior to initiating work or other
embankments and to allow minimum settlement periods as specified in volume III, or as
agreed by the first, raising the embankments to the specified finished surface level in the
area or such other level as may be required and the start ofthe construction of any part of
the pavements, drainage or other permanent works in the area.
Prior to, during and subsequent to the settlement periods specified above the
Engineer's Representative will carry out investigations in filled sections of swamp areas
to collect information on which to base predictions of the magnitude and rate of
settlement which will occur after completion of the works. Such investigations will be
undertaken, to ascertain, inter alia, the strength, compressibility of ground beneath
embankment, ground water levels and vertical settlements and they will be made by
means of various measuring devices. The results of such tests shall be used by the
Engineer's Representative to predict the equitable surcharge to facilitate early maximum
settlement.
The measuring devices shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor using
methods approved by the Engineer. They shall be read by the Engineer's Representative.
The Contractor shall supply such skilled and unskilled assistance as the Engineer may
direct.
The Contractor shall take all practicable precautions to prevent damage or

disturbance to measuring devices. Should any damage or disturbance occur the
Contractor shallmake good same athis own expense to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for any reduction in the efficiency of his
operation and for any delays or stoppages caused thereto by the installation, testing and
reading of the various measuring devices and the avoidance of damage or disturbance
thereto.
As a result of the investigations described above, the Engineer may direct the
Contractor to take measures to reduce or to compensate for setllements that will occur in
filled sections of swamp areas after completion ofthe Works. Such measures shall consist
of:
(i) the surcharging of filled areas so as to accelerate the consolidation of foundation

materials and/or
(ii) providing settlement allowances in the finished levels ofthe pavements, drainage
and other permanent works constructed inthe filledsections of swamp areas.
Ifso ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall construct surcharge loads offill
in such locations and to such dimensions and levels as the Engineer directs. The
Contractor shall re-schedule his filling operations in other parts of the Site to compensate
for the fill materials so diverted and to provide for the incorporation in the works of fill
m aterial made availab le on subsequent removal ofthe surcharge loads.
Except as provided hereimder, surcharge loads shall remain in position for such
periods as the Engineer directs, after which the Contractor shall remove the surcharge
loads, incorporate the fill material in the works and make good to the satisfaction of the
Engineer's Representative the area on which the surcharge load was formed; provided
that in no case will the Engineer direct that surcharge load in any area should be left in
position for a period extending beyond the end of the settlement allowed forihat area in
accordance with Volume III.
：i GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (ROADS AND BRIDGES)
The Contractor shall incorporate such settlement allowances as the Engineer

considers necessary in the finished levels of the pavement, drainage works and other
permanent works in filled sections of swamp areas. Settlement allowances shall be
provided by the addition or removal of fillmaterial and not by varying the dimensions of
pavements, drainage works or otherpermanent works.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for any reduction in the
efficiency of his operations and for any delays, stoppages or inconveniences caused
thereto (directly or indirectly) by the operation ofthis Clause.
The Contractor will be required to lay a satisfactory running surface of gravel or

other approved material on the completed earthworks. Further construction shall not be
permitted until all settlement has effectively ceased to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Before further construction continues the road formation shallbe made up to the specified
levels. The extent of such areas shall be defined by the Engineer's Representative before
construction starts, and the measurement of earthworks within the area declared by the
Engineer's Representative to be a settlement area shall be the net cubic contents of the
voids formed by the removal of the material excavated in accordance with the
specification and drawings, no allowance being made forbulking. The rates entered inthe
Bill of Quantities under the various items for excavation shall include for the excavation
of material and the loading, transport, deposition and compaction as specified, as shown
on the drawings or as directedby the Engineer's Representative.
FORMATION 6132. The Formation level shall be the level of the embankment or cutting in its final
LEVEL shape, after completion of the Earthworks and before the superimposition of the subbase
course, base course, or hard shoulder and before the surface material isapplied.
PREPARATION 6133. All earthworks shall be graded to provide the required formation profile. The
OF F O R M A T I O N Contractor may elect to leave sufficient material above formation level to protect the
formation and to delay the excavation of this material until preparation of the formation
can follow immediately. The subsequent removal and disposal of such material shallbe at
the Contractor's expense. Cuttings other than those in rock shall not be excavated to
formation level in wet weather. Ifsuitable material below formation level is damaged by
any cause such material shallbe removed and replaced by properly compacted general fill
and such operations shallbe atthe expense ofthe Contractor.
Not less than 150 metres of completed sub-grade shall be maintained in advance
of the paving operations at all times. Failure to comply with the provisions of this
paragraph will be deemed sufficient cause for stopping the paving operations until this
provision ismet.
During the preparation of the formation, suitable motor graders shall be used and
shall be operated by highly experienced operators. Payment for work done under this
clause will be deemed to be included inthe tendered rates for earthworks.
T R I M M I N G O F 6134. All slopes of cuttings and embankments shall be trimmed to the baiters specified
SLOPES by the Engineer's Representative with a permissible tolerance of plus or minus 5 0 m m
measured at right angles to the batter. Payment shall be deemed to be included in the
tendered rates for earthwork.
EXCAVATION 6135. When solid rock is encountered in excavations, the Contractor shall excavate and
IN R O C K dispose of such material as directed by the Engineer's Representative. The Contractor
shall not use explosives for excavations in rock without the prior written approval of the
Engineer. Where such approval is given, the Contractor shall provide proper magazines
in suitable positions for the storage of explosives and take all necessary precautions to
prevent any unauthorized issue or improper use of any explosives, to the satisfaction of
the Engineer's Representative. The Contractor shall comply with any regulations
regarding the times for blasting, sizes of blasts, loading of shots, provision of blasting
nets, etc.,thatthe Engineer's Representative may prescribe.
Blasting may be prohibited if, in the opinion of the Engineer's Representative, it

will be dangerous to persons orproperty or to any finished or existing work.
“ Solid Rock”shall mean any material having a volume greater than 0.30 cubic
metres that, in the opinion of the Engineer's Representative, can only be removed by the
use of sledgehammers and wedges (if removed by hand) or explosives and pneumatic
tools (ifremoved mechanically). Soft or decomposed material or boulders in excess of
0.30 cubic metres which can be removed by dozing, pushing, rooting, ripping, scarifying
or by the use of othernormal earth-moving plant shall not be classified as “
Solid Rock”
.
Payment will be per cubic metre of “ Solid Rock”excavated and disposed of as

directed by the Engineer's Representative. Should any difference of opinion arise
between the Contractor and the Engineer's Representative the matter shall be referred to
the Engineer, whose decision shall be final and shall be obtained before the material is
disposed of or covered up. If the Contractor is still not satisfied, the matter may be
referred to an Arbitrator. Any material having a volume of less than 0.30 cubic metres or
material which, in the opinion of the Engineer's Representative, can be removed by
dozing, pushing, rooting, ripping, scarifying or by the use of other normal earthmoving
plan shall be classified as earthworks, and the cost of such operations shall be deemed to
be included inthe tendered rates and prices for earthworks.
BACKFILLING 6136. Existing borrow pits adjacent to the roadway shall be backfilled as and where
OF EXISTING directed by the Engineer's Representative.
B O R R O W PITS
Such areas shall be backfilled with approved soil which shall be thoroughly
compacted throughout by power rammers or other approved methods, to a density not
greater than in situ density of the soil to promote vegetation growth as obtained in the
British Standard Compaction Test.
Measurement for this item shall be on the compacted backfill only, based on
initial and final levels, and payment under the relevant items ofthe bill of quantities, shall
include for benching and providing, placing, watering and compacting the material to the
required density as specified herein.
E M B A N K M E N T 6137. The Contractor shall bring to the notice of the Engineer's Representative cases
IN B A D where embankments are required to be sited over swamp or unstable ground. Where such
GROUND conditions exist the Engineer's Representative may direct that the first liftof fillmaterial
before compaction can be increased to 450 m m in order to establish firm ground for the
compacting plant. This may not be done without the written approval of the Engineer's
Representative and even if such approval is given, the Contractor is not relieved of his
responsibility to provide a well compacted stable embankment of the same standard as
the rest ofthe works.
BACKFILLING 6138. N o backfilling shall be carried out until the Engineer's Representative has
inspected and passed the culverts and other structures, which will be covered up.
The excavation containing culverts will be backfilled in layers not exceeding

15 0 m m thickness with materials approved by the Engineer's Representative.
129
1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (ROADS AND BRIDGES)
When existing pipes and conduits have insufficient earth cover during
embankment construction, the Contractor shall protect them against damage by his
equipment and operations. The embankment above and for a distance of not less than
6 0 0mm each side of such facilities shall be compacted by such means as the contractor
may choose so as to prevent damage to such facilities. The Contractor shallrepair or make
good any damage to such facilities thatmay be caused by his operations.
Embankments constructed in the vicinity of bridges and culverts prior to the

completion of abutments and wing walls shall terminate temporarily on slopes 5:1 or
flatter which shall be located so as to allow ample space for construction of the structure
and for placing and compacting the backfill and remaining embankment adjacent hereto.
Embankment around and adjacent to abutments, culverts and piers shall be placed
simultaneously on both sides thereofto approximately the same elevation.
Any space over the culverts and between the sides of the culvert and the walls of
the excavations shall be filled with selected material in a damp state approximating to its
optimum moisture content. The material shallbe thoroughly compacted by hand or power
rammers to not less than the dry density specified in Clause 6125. The cost of all
backfilling as specified herein shall be deemed to be included in the tendered rates and
prices.
GRASSING OF 6139. On completion of the verges, margins, embankments, etc., or at such other times
EMBANKMENTS as may be approved for the purpose of planting, all areas specified to be grassed shall be
CUTTINGS. sown with broad-cast seed or individual planting at 225mm. The Contractor shall be
VERGES, ETC. responsible for watering and maintenance and for ensuring that the grass takes root,
spreads and forms a thick mat.
Except where otherwise directed, the Contractor shall keep grassed areas mowed
or cut until the commencement of the period of maintenance. The grass shall be cut three
times during the growing season, or as often as it may be necessary. The condition of
grassed areas will be assessed by the Engineer's Representative immediately after the
third cutting. Areas, which have not become established to his satisfaction for any reason
whatsoever shall be made good to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer's Representative.
R O ADSIDE 6140. Roadside drainage ditches shall be constructed to the lines, grades and levels
DRAINAGE shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer's Representative. Where ditches
DITCHING collect surface water along their length and ifhe considers itnecessary, the side at which
the water enters the ditch shall be protected by constructing a bund and by allowing the
water to enter the ditch only at specific points through the bund. Where the gradient ofthe
road is flatter than 1 in 1 2 0 the ditch shall be deepened to provide an adequate drainage
slope. All ditches with a gradient steeper than 1 in 120 shall be paved in the invert with
small stones embedded in the bottom of the ditch and for a height of 15 0 m m up the sides.
Pitching with small stones ifordered by the Engineer's Representative shall be paid for
separately. Payment for roadside drainage ditches is covered under earthworks and shall
include for all timing, shaping and bunding required. Spoil excavated from drains shall,
where suitable, be incorporated in the filling, and the quantity so used shall be deducted
from the quantity of fill.N o spoil shall be placed within 2 metres of the drain. Use shallbe
made ofsuitable roadside ditches atthe discretion ofthe Engineer's Representative.
CONCRETE 6141. Concrete drains shall be constructed to the lines and levels shown on the
DRAINS drawings, or as directed by the Engineer's Representative and shall comply in allrespects
with the requirements stipulated for mass and reinforced concrete. The grade of concrete
and quantity and size ofreinforcement to be used shall be as shown on the drawings or as
directed by the Engineer. The invert of drains shall be trowelled to a smooth finish and the
!130
inside face ofwalls sli?ilbe leftwith a fairfinish as obtained from wrot shuttering. Where
possible, spoil excavated for the construction of the drains, if suitable, shall be
incorporated in the filling and payment will be made, once only, under the appropriate
item for earthworks in the Bill of Quantities. Otherwise, the material excavated shall be
disposed of as directed by the Engineers Representative, and paid for under the
appropriate item inthe Bill of Quantities.
SUB-SOIL 6142. All water appearing on the formation as surface water held in depressions and
D R AINS potholes and sub-soil water which in any way affects the stability of the formation or
pavement shallbe carried to the side drains in rubble or stone filleddrains, to the approval
ofthe Engineer's Representative.
Graded stone filling shall be hard and durable and shall consist of broken rock or
gravel. Itshall be well graded with a maximum size of 7 5 m m and the percentage passing
a 3 8 m m sieve shall not exceed 5%. Graded stone filling shall be placed inlayers not
exceeding 2 2 5 m m loose depth and shall be well rammed as fillingproceeds. Stone filled
drains on side slopes shallbe constructed priorto any surface soiling and grassing.
Pipes for sub-soil drains shall be mainly slotted flexible P V C pipes or perforated
concrete pipes with ogee joints or perforated corrugated metal pipes. They shall be laid
with dry joints. The pipe trenches shall be filled with graded stone filling which shall be
carefully placed and packed in layers not exceeding 2 2 5 m m in loose depth.
Stone filled pipe drains on side slopes and margins shall be constructed prior to
any surface soiling and grassing. Payment for work done under this clause shall be at the
rate entered in the Bill ofQuantities.
CONSTRUCTION 6142 A. A sure way of avoiding drainage problems ofperched or spring water isto carry
IN PERCHED out a proper soil survey of the area concerned and modify or re-adjust either the vertical
WATER AREA or horizontal alignment or (both) to make the formation level far away as much as
possible from the perched water table or underground springs. Ifcircumstances make this
impossible, the following procedure may be useful:
Once the formation has been prepared water should be pumped out of the section
to allow perforated pipes to be laid across the section in close proximity to enable water
flow into itand get channelled out of the roadway. Thereafter the pipes are to be covered
with specially selected granular materials which will serve as weep holes over and above
the perched water level, before approved fill is laid and compacted to not less than 95%
M D D at a moisture not less than 2 % above O M C using sheepsfoot (Taper-foot) roller up
to a depth of 6 0 0 m m below formation level, thereafter 100% compaction at O M C of
compactive effort will apply. Compaction depth shall not be greater than 150mm per
layer.
In the alternative waterproof material of uniform thickness (gauge) polythene
sheets may be used to wrap the fill placed after the application of the weep pipes and
selected fill to prevent ingress of water into the pavement. This method may be necessary
particularly ifthe crown of the road is within one metre from the level of the perched
water table.
CUT-OFF 6143. Cut-off ditching, metre drains turn-outs and culvert, out falls including bunding
DITCHING as and where required by the Engineer's Representative shall be constructed where
shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer's Representative and will be paid
for under the appropriate items of the bill of quantities. Payment shall include for all
trimming, shaping and bunding.
EXCAVATION 6144. Excavation for drainage works shall be carried out to the lines, levels and depths
F O R CULVERTS shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer's Representative and in such a
manner that the stability of the sides and bottom of the excavation is ensured. Excavation
shall be kept from water until, in the opinion ofthe Engineer's Representative, concrete or
otherworks therein are sufficiently set and any fillinghas been completed.
Trenches shall be excavated through natural ground, or, where pipe culvert
structures are to be placed under embankment, the Contractor shall, unless otherwise
directed, complete the construction of the embankment to a minimum elevation of
3 0 0 m m above the elevation ofthe top ofpipe. The pipe trench shall then be excavated and
the pipe placed in the trench. The width of trenches at any point below the top of the pipe
shall not be greater than the outside diameter ofthe pipe atthe bell or bank plus 9 0 0 m m to
permit satisfactoryjointing and thorough tamping ofthe bedding material under the pipe.
Sheeting and bracing, where required, shall be placed within the trench width as
specified. Care shall be taken not to over excavate. Where trench widths are exceeded,
redesign with a resultant increase in cost of stronger pipe or special installation
procedui*es will be necessary. Cost of this redesign and increased cost of pipe or
installation shallbe borne by the Contractor.
The width of trench for structural concrete pipe culverts shall not exceed the
widths shown on the Drawings or as specified above, and these widths shall be
maintained to a height ofatleast 30 0 m m above the top ofthe barrels ofthe pipes.
to a height of atleast3 0 0 m m above the top ofthe barrels ofthepipes.
Where directed by the Engineer's Representative softmaterial below the required

levels of excavation shall be removed and filled to the required level with compacted
granular bedding material or concrete grade 15 N / m m 2 .
Where excavation is taken out to a greater depth than isnecessary or there isover
excavation at the sides of the trench, the Contractor shall fill in the excess excavation at
his own expense with 10N/mm2 concrete or with compacted granular bedding as directed
by the Engineer's Representative.
Rock encountered in trenches for pipes shall be excavated to the depths shown on
the Drawings. Where no depths are shown itshall be excavated to a depth 15 0 m m below
the intended level of the bottom of the pipes and replaced with granular bedding or
concrete grade 10N/mm2 as directed by the Engineer's Representative.
For measurement purposes, depths shall be measured from formation level in the
case of cuttings and from the original ground level where the new carriageway is on
embankments. The rate for excavation shall include for any extra width over the net
width, which the Contractor may consider to be necessary. The rtc for excavalion shall
also include for any timbering, shoring, strutting, or pumping ifrequired, backfilling and
compaction and for the disposal of surplus material as directed by the Engineer's
Representative to a distance not exceeding 1. 6 kilometres. Soft yielding material shall be
dug out and replaced with approved selected material compacted to 1 0 0 % of its
maximum dry density obtained in the West African Compaction Test. All backfilling shall
be compacted to 100% of its maximum dry density obtained in the West African
Compaction Test.
DEMOLITION 6145. The Contractor will be required to excavate and demolish existing culverts as and
O F EXISTING where directed by the Engineer's Representative. Materials from the demolition will be
CULVERTS disposed of as directed by the Engineer's Representative. Where the culvert has been
demolished, the area will be backfilled with suitable material as specified in the relevant
clause ofthe specification.
； GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (ROADS AND BRIDGES)
Payment will be made under the appropriate items in the Bill of Quantities, and shall
inclu d e for excavation , d em o litio n and disposal o f m aterials and b a ck fillin g, all as
specified herein.
N E W PIPE 6146. Where specified on the drawings, all pipe culverts will be bedded on and
CULVERTS haunched with a minimum of 15 0 m m thickness ofGrade 15 N / m m 2 Quality concrete, (a)
Unreinforced concrete pipes shall comply with B.S. 556. They shall be unreinforced
standard pipes and the following shall apply:
(1) Joints shallbe ogee type

(2) High alumina or sulphate resisting cement will not be required
(3) Samples ofaggregate will not be required
(4) Tests other than the manufacturer's quality control testswill not be required
(5) No variation will be allowed inthe time ofmaturing
(6 ) Certificates in accordance with Clause 8 ofAppendix A will be required
(7) Admixtures will be prohibited.
Un-reinforced concrete pipes shall be surrounded with concrete and the pipe
trenches shall be filledto natural subgrade level with special granular fill.
No concrete shall be placed around any length of pipe until the Engineer's
Representative has approved the laying andjointing ofsame.
Special granular fill shall be placed and thoroughly compacted in layers not
exceeding 2 5 0 m m loose depth.
(b) Structural concrete pipes shall comply with B.S. 556. They shall be reinforced
extra strength pipes of the Class specified on the Drawings and the following
shall apply:
(1) Joints shall be flexible spigot and socket type with rubber gaskets and
performance data will not be required.
(2) High alumina or sulphate resisting cement will not be required.
(3) Samples ofaggregate willnot be required.
(4) Tests other than the manufacturer's control tests will not be required.
(5) Certificates in accordance with Clause xx8 Appendix A will be required.
(6 ) Admixtures shall be prohibited.
Pipes shall be laid true to line and level and each pipe shall be separately boned
between sight rails. Immediately prior to laying, pipes shall be examined for defects and
no defective materials shall be incorporated in the Works. Where non-standard lengths of
unreinforced concrete pipe are required at catch pits, headwalls, outfalls and the like, the
pipes shall be cut and the ends made good. Where itisnecessary to cut structural concrete
pipes, they shall be sawn and the cut end shallbe cast into the manhole catch pitheadwall
etc. so that atleast 7 5 m m concrete cover isprovided.
Ogee joints shall be thoroughly cleaned before laying and 1 : 2 cement sand morlar
shall be evenly applied to the ends so as to completely fillthejoint. The pipes shallthen be
properly drawn together, the outside of the joint shall be neatly pointed and any surplus
mortar on the inside ofthejoint shallbe removed.
Structural concrete pipes shall be laid and joined in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and the methods recommended for flexible jointed
pipes inNational Building Studies Special Report 35 “
Pipe Laying Principles”
.
醒 ■ 齡誦删鼠棚爾画 - -
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
..
Care shall be taken to ensure that excess cement mortar and earth or other material
is thoroughly cleaned out of the pipes. Cleaning shall be carried out during the laying of
the pipes by drawing a timer badger through the pipes ata distance of2 pipes lengths from
the last made joint or by other means acceptable to the Engineer's Representative. The
timber badges shall be not less than 4 5 0 m m long and shall have a diameter 1 2 m m less
than the internal diameter of the pipe. The badger shall only be removed from the pipe in
the presence ofthe Engineer's Representative.
Iffor any reason, the invert level of a pipe culvert is such that the depth of cover at
the edge of the pavement is less than 6 0 0 m m or the diameter of the pipe, then, on the
instruction of the Engineer's Representative the culvert shall be given a complete
surround 150mm thiclmess, of Grade 15 N / m m 2 quality concrete in place of a concrete
haunch, and payment shall be made for same at the appropriate rates in the Bills of
Quantities.
The outlets of pipe culverts shall be pitched with stone to a minimum length of 2
metres from the face of the culvert or as directed, and the level of the pitching shall be at
lest 7 5 m m below the culvert invert. The width of pitching shall be decided on site by the
Engineer's Representative. The inlets of culverts shall be pitched only where directed by
the Engineer's Representative. In cases where pitching is unobtainable the Engineer's
Representative may order a 150mm thick apron of Grade 15 N / m m 2 concrete to be
constructed.
Where directed catch-pits ofthe required internal dimensions shallbe constructed

at the inlets of culverts. The inverts and walls shall be of Grade 15 N / m m 2 quality
concrete, reinforced ifdirected.
The backfilling shall be of approved material, compacted as specified in the
relevant clauses of this specification.
a. Backfilling trenches: After the bedding has been prepared and the pipe
installed, selected material from excavation or borrow pit, at a moisture content that will
facilitate compaction, shall be placed along both sides of the pipe in layers not exceeding
150mm in compacted depth. The backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the
pipe for itsfull length. Care shall be taken to ensure thorough compaction of the fillunder
the haunches of the pipe. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted with mechanical
tampers or rammers. This method of filling and compacting shall continue until the fill
has reached an elevation of atleast 3 0 0 m m above the top of the pipe. The remainder ofthe
trench shall be backfilled and compacted by spreading and rolling, or compacted by
mechanical rammers or tempers in compacted layers not exceeding 150mm. Tests for
density will be made as necessary and directed by the Engineer, at no expense to the
Contractor.
b. Backfilling pipe in fillsections:_____The fillmaterial shall be uniformly

spread in layers longitudinally on both sides of the pipe, not exceeding 150mm in
compacted layer and shall be compacted by rolling parallel with pipe or by mechanical
temping or ramming. Prior to commencing normal filling operations, the crown width of
the fill at a height of 3 0 0 m m above the top of the pipe shall extend a distance of not less
than twice the outside diameter on each side ofthe pipe, or 4 m whichever isless.After the
backfill has reached at least 3 0 0 m m above the top of the pipe, the remainder of the fill
shallbe placed and thoroughly compacted in layers not exceeding 150mm.
c. Construction Machinery: In compacting by rolling or operating
heavy equipment parallel with the pipe, displacement of or injury to the pipe shall be
avoided. Movement of construction machinery over a culvert or a storm drain at any
stage of the construction shall be atthe Contractor's risk.Any pipe damaged thereby shall
be repaired or replaced at the option of the Engineer's Representative and at the expense
ofthe Contractor.
FEDE1UL MINISTRY OF 134

EXTENSION OF 6147. Existing pipe culverts shall be extended to the lengths shown on the drawings or
EXISTING PIPE as directed by the Engineer's Representative. The extension shallbe of a similar diameter
CULVERTS to the existing culvert, and constructed in a like manner. Where existing headwalls occur
within the carriageway width they shall be removed to a minimum depth of 3 0 0 m m
below new road level and the new road constructed to the profile shown on the drawings.
The existing culvert and the new extensions shall be cleaned out and flushed as necessary
on completion to clear all dirt, cement mortar and other obstruction to allow the free
passage of water through its full internal area. Ifso directed by the Engineer, the existing
culverts which are to be retained and do not already have a complete surround or haunch
ofconcrete as required, shall be dug out and the surround or haunch completed by 15 0 m m
ofconcrete as specified fornew culverts.
ACCESS 6148. Access culverts shall, if sufficient cover is not available for pipe culverts, be
CULVERTS constructed in the form of a small slab or box culverts to the grade, sizes and dimensions
shown on the drawings or as directedby the Engineer's Representative. The roofand floor
slabs shall consist of grade 25 N / m m m 2 concrete reinforced as shown on the drawings.
The walls shall consist of grade 10 N / m m 2 mass concrete. Construction shall comply
with all relevant clauses of the specification or such modifications as the Engineer may
decide. The headwalls shall be constructed of pre-cast concrete blocks with a 6:1 sand
cement mix.
BOX 6149. Box culverts shall be constructed to the grades, sizes and dimensions shown on
CULVERTS the drawings, or as directed by the Engineer's Representative, and the finished surface
shall be smooth and regular free from flaws, air holes and excrescences and with a
constant grade. The grades of concrete and quantity and size of reinforcement to be used
shall be as shown on the drawings and shall comply in all respects with the requirements
stipulated for mass and reinforced concrete. Culvert construction shall comply in all
respects with the requirements of this specification or such modification thereof as the
Engineer may decide.
EXTENSIONS TO 6150. The Engineer shall provide the Contractor with additional drawings for the
EXISTING B O X construction of the extensions to the existing small section box culverts. Measurement of
CULVERTS the works incorporated in these extensions shall be as for new reinforced concrete box
culverts.
The existing culvert and the new extensions, shall be cleaned out and flushed as
necessary on completion to clear all dirt, cement mortar and other obstructions to allow
the freepassage ofwater through itsfull internal area.
CORRUGATED 6151. Where corrugated metal culverts are specified, they shall be of galvanized
METAL “A R M C O ”corrugated metal pipes or pipe arches of the “Armco”or other approved type， complying
C ULVERTS with the cross-section and gauge specified. The pipes orpipe arches shall be assembled in
convenient lengths in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions or as directed by
the Engineer's Representative. Before laying, care must be taken to ensure that the bottom
of the trench or iflaid under embankments, the prepared bed, is accurately graded and
compacted to provide a solid uniform bearing for the pipes or pipe arches and to ensure
this the Engineer's Representative may direct that a 3 0 0 m m thick compacted layer of
approved material be constructed. The width of the trench shall be such that a minimum
of300mm isleftbetween the pipe orpipe arch and the side ofthe trench. Back filling shall
be ofapproved material laid inuniform layers of 15 0 m m in depth and compacted to 1 0 0 %
ofitsmaximum diy density achieved in the West African Standard Compaction Test.
For multiple structures, the minimum clearance between each pipe or pipe arch
shallbe not less than halfofthe maximum cross-sectional width ofthe pipe or pipe arch.
The minimum depth of compacted cover (excluding the base course) over any pipe or
pipe arch shall be at lest 300mm. The maximum depth of fill over any pipe or pipe arch
shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommendation for the particular gauge of culvert
used.
135
Corrugated metal pipes culverts and channels shall comply with the materials
section Standard Specification for Corrugated Metal Culvert Pipe, Designation M36-60
oftheAmerican Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials except that:
(i) The pipes, culverts and channels shall be manufactured from steel
complying with B.S. 1449: Part Al, or Pat IB with copper content when
required at0.2 per cent minimum.
(ii) The pipes culverts and channels shall be coated with spelter complying
with B.S. 729; Part 1, alternatively the pipes may be manufactured from
steel sheet complying with B.S. 2989.
(iii) The pipes and culverts shall be bitumen coated in the course of
manufacture as specified herein below.
Where available, all culverts shall be factory coated with a double layer of
protective bitumen. Where the culverts are not factory coated, i.e. in the case of the large
diameter or multiple culverts, the Contractor shall apply two coats of approved bitumen,
as a protective measure, to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative, and the
Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for this in his tendered rates and prices. Iffor
any reason, such as the acidity of the sub-soil water, the Engineer considers any further
protective measures to be necessary, the Contractor shall carry out same as directed and
shall be paid atrates to be mutually agreed between the Engineer and the Contractor.
(1) Bitumen —Bitumen for coating shall have the following properties as in
Table VI-3 below:
T A B L E YI-3 Q U A L I T Y O F B I T U M E N C O A T I N G
TEST T Y P E LIMIT % TEST M E T H O D

Bitumen soluble in cold carbon tetrachloride,
not less than 99.5 A A S H T O T45
Loss in weight on heating to 163°C, not more than 1 A A S H T O T47
Penetration ofresidue afterheating compared with

penetration of same sample before testing for loss on
heating, not less than 85 A A S H T O T49
INLETS A N D 6152. The positions, lengths, dimensions and levels of all culverts including aprons shall
O U TLETS OF be as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer's Representative. The culvert
CULVERTS shall be cleaned out and flushed as necessaiy on completion to clear all dirt, and other
obstructions to allow the free flow ofwater through itsfoil internal cross-sectional area.
The outlets of all culverts shall be protected from erosion by stone pitching or
concrete to a minimum length of 2 metres from its face. The width of the pitching or
concrete shall be decided by the Engineer's Representative and a toe-wall 4 5 0 m m deep
shall be constructed at the edge of such pitching or concrete. The inlets to culvert shall be
similarly protected, only where directed by the Engineer.
Where the gradient of the roadside drainage ditch would be excessive ifthe ditch
were graded to the invert level of culverts, catchpits or balancing ponds shall be
constmcted as and where directed by the Engineer's Representative. The catchpits shall
be constructed of mass concrete to such dimensions as required by the Engineer's
Representative.
CLEARING 6153. Before any drain or culvert is brought into use the Con tractor shall ensure to the
DRAI N S A N D satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative that it is free from all extraneous material,
CULVERTS all such material being completely removed from the site. During the period of
maintenance the Contractor shall ensure that the drains and culverts shall be kept clear of
all obstructions and before the maintenance certificate is granted all drains and culverts
must be cleaned out to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer. All costs incurred shall be deemed
to be included inthe tendered rates and prices.
PITCHING 6154. Pitching will be provided where shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer's Representative. The stone used for pitching shall comply in all respects with
the requirements ofthis specification.
The pitching shall be either 15 0 m m or 2 2 5 m m thick as appropriate and ifdirected

or shown on the drawings shall be set in mortar comprising 1 part of cement to 4 parts of
sand. The ground on which the pitching is to be placed shall be shaped and compacted to
the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative before the pitching is laid. At the
extremities of the pitching, toe-walls shall be formed in the same construction and they
shallbe carried down to a depth of450mm, or to such greater depth as may be specified on
the drawings or by the Engineer. Pitching shall be measured per square metre of complete
pitching and payment will include for the supply of all materials, labour, etc., and the
construction of the completed pitching shall be as specified in this Clause. Catchpits
where required may also be constructedin pitching stone laid in cement mortar as directed
on site by the Engineer's Representative and measurement shall be per square metre of
wall. Payment for toe walls shall be based on the length of wall constmcled and shall
include for excavation and backfilling.
A P P R O V A L OF 6155. The Contractor shall not commence work on the sub-grade, sub-base course, base
METHOD course or surfacing until he has obtained the Engineer's Representative's approval of the
plant, materials and methods that he proposes for clearance, excavation, mixing,
transporting, heating, spreading, grading and compacting the same as appropriate
compaction tests will be required before such approval isgranted.
The foregoing provisions shall not prevent the Engineer from requiring the
Contractor to vary his plant, material or methods at any time during the execution of the
works, should he consider this essential for carrying out the contract. The contractor shall
not vaiy plant, material or methods which have been approved by the Engineer's
Representative without previously obtaining his approval of such variation.
The Engineer or his Representative's approval of any of the Contractor's plants,

material or methods shall not at any time imply responsibility for the execution of the
work involved and the Contractor shall at all times be solely responsible for constructing
the sub-grade, sub-base, base and pavem en t surfacing in accordance with the
specification and drawings.
PREVENTION 6156. The Contractor shall ensure that the passage of any vehicle or plant over the over
OF D A M A G E the partially completed pavement or over the sub-grade, sub-base or base docs not
TO C O M P L E T E D occasion any rutting or other damage or disturbance to the partially completed works, and
PAVEMENT
should such rutting or other damage or disturbance occur, the Contractor shall make the
same good as directed by the Engineer's Representative at his own expense. Vehicles and
plant passing repeatedly over the partially completed pavement or over the sub-grade,
sub-base or base shall not be allowed to travel in a single track, but such traffic shall be
spread out over as great a width as practicable. There shall be no storage or stockpiling of
materials on top ofpartially completed pavements or on the base, sub-base or sub-grade.
137
WATER FOR 6157. The Contractor shall provide all water necessary for the construction of the sub-
C ONSTRUCTION grade, sub-base, base and pavement surface. Such water shall be clean and free from
organic matters, waste matter or other harmful or deleterious substances, and shall be
obtained from an approved source.
為
The Contractor shall provide all plant necessary for conveying and distributing
water. Where itis necessary to increase the moisture content of materials comprising the
sub-grade, sub-base or base, the water shall be evenly sprinkled on the surface of the soil
by spraying machine of a type or types to be approved by the Engineer's Representative
such machines being capable of uniformly distributing the water at a known
predetermined and constant rate.
ROLLERS 6158. Smooth-wheeled, sheepsfoot and pneumatic-tyred rollers where employed for
compacting soils and pavement materials as detailed in subsequent clauses, shall be of a
type and compacting effort approved by the Engineer's Representative and shall be
capable of achieving the specified degree of compaction. The compactive effort shall be
designated as the weight per centimetre width of rolling wheel, for the smooth wheeled
and pneumatic type rollers. The compactive effort of the sheepsfoot roller shall be
expressed dividing the total load of the roller by the foot area (square centimetre) in
contact on hard ground.
The distribution of wheels on any roller shall be such that the whole of the ground
surface within the width ofthe roller isloaded during each pass ofthe roller.
VIBRATORY 6159. Where vibratory compactors or power rammers are used on the works they shall
COMPACTORS be of the type approved by the Engineer's Representative and shall be capable of
obtaining the specified degree ofcompaction approved.
TRENCH 6160. Where the existing carriageway is to be widened on its existing alignment, the
EXCAVATION Contractor shall excavate a trench with neat and vertical sides to each side of itto contain
F O R WIDENING the additional pavement construction required for the new carriageway width. Each edge
O F EXISTING ofthe existing surfacing shall be cut-back as directed by the Engineer's Representative on
PAVEMENT site, but such cut-back will be kept to the minimum compatible with the provision of a
straight and clean sharp edge to the surfacing on the inside edge ofthe trench. Payment for
the excavation of the trenches including for the trimming back of the existing surfacing
and the disposal of all excavated material shall be made per cubic metre of material
excavated under the appropriate item for earthworks in the Bills of Quantities.
Measurement shall be based on sections taken before and after excavation of the
trenches but payment shall not be made for excavation in excess of that specified and
required to receive the specified pavement.
The maximum amount of trench excavation shall be placed to fill and payment
shallbe made once only as decided above.
PREPARATION 6161. The sub-grade, whether in trench excavation or construction shall be graded and
OF SUB-GRADE compacted to such level as will peraiit the works to be constructed to the required
thickness and specified finished levels and tolerances.
Before it is compacted, the Engineer's Representative will inspect the sub-grade

and the Contractor shall notify the Engineer's Representative when each area of sub
grade is ready for inspection and shall allow reasonable time for the inspection to be
made. Wherever ordered by the Engineer's Representative, the Contractor shall excavate
any unsuitable material from below the sub-grade and shall deposit the same as and where
directed by the Engineer's Representative. The Contractor shall replace the void with fill
material approved by the Engineer's Representative. Payment will be made in accordance
with the relevant clause of this specification, excepting where the unsuitable material has
been imported by the Contractors.
All loose pieces of stone or other material exceeding 7 5 m m in size in any

dimension shall be removed from the surface of the sub-grade before compactions
commenced and disposed ofas directed by the Engineer's Representative. The Contractor
shall then compact the whole of the Sub-grade by the use of approved smooth wheeled,
sheepsfoot or pneumatic tyred rollers, static or vibratory type as approved by the
Final compaction shall be by smooth wheeled roller. The density required shall be
100 per cent of the maximum dry density obtained in the British Standard Compaction
Test.
Payment for compaction of sub-grade will be made once only either through
earthworks items, or other appropriate items in the Bills ofQuantities.
C O M P L E T I O N 6162. Immediately before the construction of the sub-base course, the upper surface of
A N D S H A PING the sub-grade shall be tested for smoothness and accuracy of formation and ifany areas
O F S U B - G R A D E are found to lack the required smoothness or accuracy, such areas shall be scarified,
reshaped, re-compacted as specified, or otherwise treated as the Engineer's
Representative may require until the required smoothness and accuracy isobtained.
The finished surface of the sub-grade shall be left as smooth as possible and the
accuracy of finish in the longitudinal direction shall not vary at any point by more than
1 2 m m from a 5-0 metre straight edge, placed in any position on the finished surface
parallel to the centre line. The transverse profile shall conform to the same accuracy using
a correctly shaped template instead of the straight edge. The level of any point on the
aforesaid surface shall not vary by more than 1 2 m m from the finished level of the
pavement less the specified thickness ofthe pavement construction. Payment for allofthe
work required by this clause shall be deemed to be included in the tendered rates and
prices. The requirements of this clause shall not be held to apply to the existing
bituminous surfacing scarified, shaped and re-compacted on lengths of strengthening of
the existing alignment. Payment for all of the operations required under this clause shall
be deemed to be included inthe tendered rates and prices.
C O M P L E T I O N 6163. O n completion of the carriageway and hard shoulders, the verges and medians
OF V E R G E S shall be brought to finished level, shaped to the cross-falls as shown on the drawings and
A N D M E D I A N S compacted so that the upper 150mm has a dry density of not less than 100% of the
maximum dry density as determined by the West African Standard Compaction Test.
Where the material forming the verges or medians is of such a nature that it is liable to
erosion, the Engineer may directthat the top 7 5 m m ofthe verges or medians be formed of
cohesive lateritic soil, or other approved material, and the 7 5 m m of fillingmaterial below
itshall be compacted in one operation to 100% ofthe maximum dry density as determined
by the West African compaction Test. The selected lateritic soil for the verges or medians
shall preferably a well-graded lateritic soil with a plasticity index of not less than 10 and
not more than 20. Payment forthis selected compacted 75mm of topping to the verges and
medians shall be made under the appropriate item in the Bill of Quantities. The verges or
medians shall be cleared of any windrows or heaps of material and shall be giaded evenly
as directed, so that water drains in the required manner. The verges and medians shall be
grassed, sealed or paved where directed by the Engineer.
STRIPPING 6164. Stripping topsoil shall apply only to those sections ofthe roadway to be realigned;
TOPSOIL that is, where the proposed road-works will not fall within the limits ofthe existing road
works. Only those areas of the new construction outside the existing road-works will be
stripped of topsoil. Before grading work is commenced, the vegetation and underlying
topsoil within excavation and embankment areas shall be stripped off to a depth of not
less than 100mm and not more than 150mm below the existing ground surface. Stripped
material, which is or may be made suitable for topsoiling，shall be stored and used
thereafter ifneeded. Stripped topsoil in excess ofthe quantity required for the Project top
soiling shall be stored at locations specified for future use of the Engineer. Topsoil shall
not be stored in areas where it will interfere with surface drainage or with the
conservation oftrees, slirubs and other vegetation that are to remain.
CATCHPITS 6165. Catchpits and cascades shall be constructed of in-situ concrete Grade 15N/mm2
AND as shown on the drawings. Un-shuttered exposed concrete surfaces shall be finished with
CASCADES a wooden float. The ends of pipes shall be properly built into the catchpits and un
reinforced concrete pipes shallbe cut offflush with the inner surface ofcatchpits.
Excavation not occupied by the catchpit cascade or by adjacent pipe drains shall
be backfilled with the excavated material, which shall be placed and compacted in layers
not exceeding 2 2 5 m m loose depth to a dry density equivalent to that of the surrounding
ground. Should the excavated material become unsuitable for backfilling due to any
cause, the Contractor shallprovide other suitable material for filling athis own expense.
TESTS
TESTS F O R T H E 6180. The following tests shallbe carried out on allmaterial propos-ed foruse as fill:
SELECTION
OF FILLING (I) PLASTICITYTESTS
MATERIAL (II) G R A D I N G TESTS
(III)D E N S I T Y / M O I S T U R E C O N T E N T C O M P A C T I O N TESTS
(IV) L A B O R A T O R Y C.B.R. TESTS
Unless otherwise stated to the contrary, these tests shall be carried out as
described in section 1 ofthis specification.
TESTS FOR THE 6181. The tests listed below will normally be required to be carried out for each 2
CLASSIFICATION kilometres of sub-grade or each, layer of fill. The numbers and types of tests listed
however, are given only as a guide to the Contractor for number and type of tests which
SUB-GRADE will be carried out during the construction of the works will be determined entirely at the
A N D FILLING
discretion ofthe Engineer.
(I) CLASSIFICATION TESTS

2
NO. LIQUID LIMIT TESTS

2 2
NO. PLASTIC LIMIT TESTS

NO. SIEVE ANALYSIS TESTS
4
NO. BRITISH C O M P A C T I O N TESTS S T A N D A R D

2
NO. L A B O R A T O R Y C.B.R. TESTS A T T H E SPECIFIED D E N S I T Y

A N D M O I S T U R E CONTENT.
(II) C O N T R O L TESTS
20 NO. IN-SITU D R Y D E N S I T Y T E S T S
Except where otherwise stated to the contrary, these tests shall be carried out as
described in section 1 of this specification, or where no such descriptions given in
accordance with the appropriate British Standard A A S H T O and A S T M Standards.
RK S^H O
The sieve analysis shall be carried out in accordance with the standards laid down
in the latest amended report ofthe “ Lagos materials testing Conference” ，a copy of which
shallbe made available to the Contractor on request, or as per the latestB.S. 1377.
TRIAL SECTIONS 6182. The Contractor's attention is particularly drawn to the necessity for carrying out
TO DETERMINE trial sections with each type of proposed filling material prior to the start of the main
TECHNIQUE construction for the particular type of material, to determine the most efficient technique,
the most suitable compacted thickness of each layer and the suitability of the proposed
materials and plant, allas described in the Clause 1052 ofthis specification.
PART (C) SUB-BASE COURSE, BASE COURSE ETC.
⑴ LATERITE
GENERAL 6200. In addition to any other clause of this specification, the following shall be deemed
to apply in particular to laterite sub-base course and base course work, and shall be read in
specification.
MATERIALS
MATERIALS FOR 6201. All materials for the sub-base course, base course and hard shoulders shall be
COMPACTED selected by the Contractor. Where a preliminary soil survey has been carried out by the
SUB-BASE Engineer, a copy ofthe report on the soil survey shall be made available to the Contractor.
COURSEAND Where no such soil survey has been carried out the Contractor shall make his own
BASE COURSE arrangement for the location of borrow pits and sources of materials, and the cost of any
survey shall be deemed to be included in the tendered rates and prices. The soil survey
report of the Engineer, when available, shall be used for guidance only, and shall not
relieve the Contractor ofhis responsibility for executing the works in accordance with the
Conditions of Contract and this Specification. All selected material shall be free of roots,
vegetable matter, and other deleterious material and shall be approved by the Engineer's
Representative before itsincorporation into the works.
Normally the minimum strength of such base course material shall not be less than
80% C.B.R. value being determined at maximum dry density and optimum moisture
content un-soaked with either East African or Modified A.A.S.H.T.O. compaction.
However, where the Engineer's Representative considers it necessary on account of
perched water-table or any other reasons, he may specify that a C.B.R. value of 80% be
obtained after at least 24 hours soaking. For construction on perched water area see
clauses 6142 and 6142A.
Base Course .
The requirements below in Clauses 6250,6251 and 6252 shall apply herein.
Sub-Base Course -Type 1
The sub-base material shall consist of pit-run laterite, sand, or screening, and soil
of other similar binding or filler material and shall be obtained from approved sources.
The maximum dimensions of any particle shall not be greater than two-thirds of the
compacted thickness of the layer in which it is to be placed. Oversize material shall be
removed by screens, grizzlies or by hand picking. The gradation and soil constants shall
comply to the requirements specified herein. The material shall be free from vegetable
matter and excessive amount of lumps of clay and other objectionable or foreign
substances.
^3990999595141
Table VI -4 Gradation of Sub-base Material:

Sieve Percent Passing bv Weight
75 m m 100
6 0 0 jim 2 5 -6 0
4 2 5 ).im 1 0 -4 0
7 5 )im 5 -2 0
The percent by weight passing the No-75|im sieve shall be less than but not greater
than 35%. The material passing the 425 |nm sieve shall have a liquid limit of not more than
35% and a plasticity index of not more than 12, as determined by American society for
Testing Materials methods, serial designation D 432-39 and 42439 respectively or as
determined by testNo 2 or 2A and testNos. 3 ofB.S. 1377 (1975). Priorto approval of the
sub-base material a test section shall be constructed to the thickness shown on the typical
pavement section and compacted to 100 percent of maximum density. When the test
section is compacted to 100 percent maximum density at optimum moisture content, the
sub-base material shall be of such quality that itshallhave the minimum C B R of3 0 % after
at least 24 hours soaking. Once established that the sub-base meets the C B R quality
requirement at 100 percent maximum density itshall be placed and compacted in the field
to that density.
The minimum strength of material for Sub-base Course Type 2 shall not be less
than 20% C.B.R. afteratleast 24 hours ofsoaking, for lighttraffic.
The C.B.R. values shall be assessed in the same manner as for base course, at the
optimum moisture content and maximum dry density of the West African Compaction
Test.
At the Engineer's Representative's discretion material with a liquid limit greater

than 35%, and a plasticity index greater than 12 may be disallowed for use as subbase
course or base course.
The use of Sub-standard Material for Sub-base
If the Engineer's Representative is satisfied that good materials for base or sub-base
course are not available, sub-standard materials may be used adopting the following
guidelines:
Class A Materials
I hese are materials rejected either due to too much fine, silt, Or clay content but slightly
fallshort of strength specified.
(i) The material may be used by compacting it to a dry density slightly less than
maximum atmoisture content slightly greater than O M C , to contain the tendency for such
material to swell or shrink due to cycle of weather. To make up for strength deficiency, a
ratio of strength proportion of the material to what is specified shall be worked out and the
depth ofthe sub-base/base course adequately increased to account forthe deficiency.
(ii) On the other hand, where sand is available at economical rate, mechanical
stabilization shall be used to reduce the fines content thus increasing the strength of the
material. It will be necessary to determine economic percentage of the sand required
before the method isput into use.
GENER 八 L SPECIFICATIONS (ROADS AND BRIDGES)
Sub-Base Course -All Types
The gravels as excavated from the pits may contain oversize material and such material
must be broken down so that allmaterial used in base course shall pass a 2 5 m m sieve; and
that used in sub-base shall ass a 5 0 m m sieve. The work of breaking down or disposal of
such oversize material shall be deemed to be included in the tendered rates and prices.
R O C K LATERITE 6202. Rock Laterite for base course shall be hard and durable and shall be from a source
FOR SUB-BASE approved by the Engineer's Representative. Samples ofthe stone shall be submitted to the
COURSE A N D Engineer's Representative for his approval and shall be tested by soaking the specimen in
A N D BASE water for 96 hours to ensure they do not disintegrate. The stone shall not be less that
COURSE 2 2 5 m m deep, and shall be not less than 230 sq.cm base area, v/here the thickness of the
course is 225mm. The percentage of wear shall not exceed 50% as determined by A S T M
C 131 -51 procedure.
Rock Laterite for blinding shall be clean crushed laterite aggregate graded from 5 m m to
dust from the same source as material forpitching, free from excessive clay or silt.
(CLAUSES 6203 -204 INCLUSIVE N O T USED)
WORKMANSHIP
S E QUENCE OF 6205. The pavement construction for the roadway shall consist of the following as
OPERATIONS specified herein and shown on the drawings:
(A) The scarifying ofthe sub-grade where no filling is applied
(B) The compacting ofthe sub-grade
(C) The laying and compacting ofthe sub-base course and base course
(D) The providing of prime and first coat bituminous surface dressing to the
base course ofthe carriageway ifapplicable.
B O R R O W PITS 6206. The Contractor shall arrange and pay for any compensations or other payments
F O R SUB-BASE, whatsoever required for access to and occupation and use ofthe borrow pits for course and
BASE C O U R S E selected shoulder materials. The Contractor shall clear sub-base, base the areas and
AND HARD remove and stockpile overburden to such depths as may be required by the Engineer's
SHOULDER Representative. Under no circumstances will payment be made for removal of
MATERIALS overburden. Materials used which may include the incorporation of suitable overburden
as directed shall be taken only from such areas and to such depths and in such a manner as
the Engineer's Representative shall direct. The Contractor shall at his own expense
remove and dispose of allunsuitable materials; the removal ofmaterials may require prior
rooting and scarification and the Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for this inthe
tendered rates and prices. The material as excavated may not fall within the required
limits of grading for the completed pavement and the Contractor shall be deemed to have
included in the tendered rates and prices for any additional work which may be required to
bring the material within the specified limits when laid and compacted inthe road bed.
Borrow pits shall be worked and drained so as to obtain the maximum quantities of
available suitable materials and shall be finally drained, levelled and topsoil replaced all
as specified and to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer's Representative.
Payment for all arrangements, compensation, operations and other requirements

ofthis clause shall be deemed to be included inthe tendered rates and prices.
The width of the sub-base course and base course shall be as shown on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The compacted thickness of the sub-base course
and base course is dependent on the C.B.R. values of the Sub-grade and that of the
material used, and shall be as shown on the drawings or as otherwise directed by the
Engineer's Representative in accordance with the following provisions:
^143
The specified combined thickness for the sub-base course and the base curse has
been derived from the pavement design diagram, curve E(RRL.RN/2503) based on an
anticipated minimum C.B.R. value (after at least 48 hours soaking) for the compacted
Sub-grade. Where a C.B.R. value in excess of the anticipated value is achieved, then
compacted thickness of the Sub-base course may be reduced at the discretion of the
Engineer's Representative and in accordance with curve E/RRL.RN/2803). Under no
circumstances shall the combined compacted thickness of the pavement be reduced to
less than 150mm.
Before compaction, the sub-base course and base course material shallbe brought
to the optimum moisture content for the compaction effort of the plant to achieve the
density specified. Where the existing moisture content of the material is higher than this,
the soil shall be allowed to dry out by aeration; where itis lower sufficient water shall be
added to the soil such that uniform wetting of the material to op6 timum moisture content
isachieved.
Compaction of the sub-base course and the base course shall be carried out
separately and shall begin immediately the soil has been brought to the required moisture
content and shall be carried out rapidly until completion. The compaction of the sub-base
course and base course shall be carried out to a dry density not less than 1 0 0 % of that
achieved in the West African Standard Compaction Test atoptimum moisture content, but
the compaction of the base course may be carried out to a dry density of not less than
100% of that achieved in the Modified A.A.S.H.O. Compaction Test at optimum
moisture content, ifso directed by the Engineer.
The base course shall be finished to camber or cross-fall as shown on the drawings
or as otherwise directed by the Engineer's Representative.
COMPLETION 6207. Immediately before the construction of the base course the sub-base course shall
OF SUB-BASE be tested for thickness, sur-COURSE face finish, and accuracy, and ifany areas arc found
COURSE to lack the required thickness, surface finish, or accuracy or specified density, such areas
shall be scarified, re-compacted to the specified density or otherwise treated as the
Engineer's Representative may require until the required thickness, smoothness,
accuracy or density isobtained.
The finished surface ofthe Sub-base course shall be leftas smooth as possible and
the accuracy offinish inthe longitudinal direction shall not vary atany point by more than
12 m m for a 5 metre straight edge, placed in any position on the finished surface parallel to
the centre line.
The transverse profile shall conform to the same accuracy using a correctly shaped
template instead of straight edge. The level of any point on the aforesaid surface shall not
vary by more than 1 2 m m from the finished level of the pavement less the specified
thickness ofthe base construction.
The thickness of the Sub-base course at any point shall not be less than the
specified thickness by more than 12mm. The Contractor shall include in his rates the
digging of trial holes and making good same, to the satisfaction of the Engineer's
Representative.
COMPLETION 6208. Immediately before the application ofthe surfacing the base course shall be tested
OF B A S E for thickness, smoothness and accuracy as specified below and ifany areas are found to
COURSE lack the required thickness, smoothness and accuracy or the specified density, such areas
shall be scarified, reshaped and re-compacted with additional approved material added
where necessary or otherwise treated as the Engineer's Representative may require, until
the required thickness, smoothness, accuracy or density isobtained.
■ ■ ■ ■ m i SSSSSSSS55SSSS^9SI95SB9BBSBBSSSS5S9SSSl4^
I GENERAL SPEdFICATIONS (ROADS AND BRIDGES)
The finished surface of the base shall be left as smooth as possible and the
accuracy of finish in the longitudinal direction shall not vary at any point by more than
5 m m from a 3.0 metre straight edge, placed in any position on the finished surface
parallel to the centre line. The transverse profile shall conform to the same accuracy using
a correctly shaped template instead of the straight edge. The level of any point on the
aforesaid surface shall not vary by more than 5 m m from the finished level of the
pavement. The thickness ofthe base course at any point shall not be less than the specified
thickness by more than 1 2 m m and the average thickness over a length of 0.4 kilometres
shall be equal to, or in excess of the specified thickness. The Contractor shall include in
his rates for digging necessary trialholes and making good same, to the satisfaction of the
In the process of completing the base course itmay be necessary to place material
to a greater thickness than that specified and to grade itto the specified finish. In so doing
excess material will be wasted. Payment for this and for all other operations required to
obtain the specified finish shallbe deemed to be included inthe tendered rates and prices.
ROCKL A T E R I T E 6209. The base course for the carriageway shall consist of approved rock laterite as
F O R BA S E specified, laid to the required total thickness after compaction. The lumps of rock laterite
COURSE shall be tightly wedged across the prepared formation and interstices shall be filled with
approved spalls from the same source as the rock laterite before thoroughly rolling.
Rolling shall be carried out with a roller weighing not less than 58 kilograms per
centimetre width of roll and any depression or surface irregularity which occurs during
rolling shall be corrected with approved crushed quarry fines as specified, watered and
again rolled with a rollerweighing not less than 58 kilograms per centimetre width ofroll.
No blinding shall be done until the rock laterite bottoming has been inspected and
approved by the Engineer's Representative. When completed the surface of the base
course shall be smooth and even, free from irregularities or loose material and true to
cross section, line and level as shown on the drawings.
If any clay or mud appears to the surface of the foundation, the Contractor shall
without additional charge dig out the affected areas of such depth as directed and make
good the foundation and finish in conformity with the adjacent surface.
SURFACING O F 6210. The base course of the carriageway shall, where applicable, be provided with a
B A S E C O U R S E prime coat and other surfacing as specified in the relevant clauses of this specification.
The surfacing shallbe laid as soon as possible afterthe construction ofthe base course.
PREPARATION OF 6211. Immediately before spraying of the prime coat, the surface of the base course
BASE COURSE shall be swept clean, and all loose dust, dirt and the like removed. The Engineer's
TO RECEIVE representative may also direct that any very smooth surface, to which the surfacing is
BITUMEN unlikelyto adhere, be roughened with wire brushes or other approved means.
If any weak areas are found they shall be cut out and refilled with base course
material and rolled to correct cross-section and gradient.
The surface shall be slightly damped before the application ofthe prime coat surface.
(CLAUSE 6112-6214 INCLUSIVE N O T USED)
TESTS
TESTS FOR THE 6215. The following tests shall be carried out on allmaterial proposed foruse as sub-base
SELECTION OF course and base course:
LATERITE SUB 1.PlasticityTest
BASE COURSE
A N D BASE 2. Grading Test
COURSE
MATERIALS 3. Density/Moisture Content Compaction Test
4. Laboratory C.B.R. Test
These tests shallbe carried out as described in Section Iofthis specification.
TEST FOR 6216. The tests listedbelow will normally require to be carried out for each 2 kilometres
CLASSIFICATION of sub-base course and base course. The numbers and types of tests listed are, however,
A N D C O NTROL given only as a guide to the Contractor fortender purposes and the actual number and type
OF COMPA C T E D of tests which will be carried out during the construction of the works will be entirely at
LATERITIC SUB the discretion ofthe Engineer's Representative.
BASE COURSE
A N D BASE (CLAUSES 6212-6214 INCLUSIVE N O T USED)
COURSE
CLASSIFICATION TESTS
2 No. Liquid limittests

2 No. Plastic limittests
2 No. Sieve Analysis Test
3 No. West African Standard compaction tests, or
4 No. M O D A.A.S.H.T.O. compaction.
C O N T R O L TESTS
4 No. Laboratory C.B.R. Tests atspecified conditions
20 No. In-situ dry density tests per 2 k m in an alternative maimer, i.e. Right, Centre, Left,
Centre, Right, etc.
Except where otherwise stated to the contrary, these tests shall be carried out as
described in Section I of this specification, or where no such description is given in
accordance with the appropriate B .S.
The sieve analysis shall be carried out in accordance with the standards laid down
in the report of the “
Material Testiiig Conference, February 1963” ，a copy of which shall
be made available to the Contractor on request.
6216A. INTRODUCTION OF ISO CBR
ISO C B R is introduced because of the known factors that our pavement elements
i.e. sub-grade, sub-base and base courses are usually compacted at a higher moisture
content than the plant optimum moisture content (OMC). The word ISO means equal. The
procedure for establishing the control datawith the working system isas follows:
1. B O R R O W PIT F O R FILL
When borrow pitisapproved for fillafterpassing allnecessary tests, as carried out

in the laboratory, three sets of moisture/density C B R tests shall be performed on the
specimen using the following levels of compactive efforts: (a) Sub-B.S., (b) B.S. and (c)
West African Standard. Each set of tests will have a minimum of five specimens. All
specimen shall be soaked ideally for 48 hours, however the following soaking periods are
recommended: for the southern part of the country 96 hours soaking whilst for the north
48 hours to 24 hours soaking.
NOTE: For Sub-B.S. compaction, the following shall apply: Use C B R mould,
number of layers shall be tliree using 2.5 kg rammer. Height of fall = 300mm. Number of
blows per layer shallbe 25.
146
After determination of the dry density, moisture and C B R of each set of tests,
relevant graph of density/moisture of each shall be plotted. Thereafter the values of C B R
for compacted specimen so obtained shall be plotted as indivdual points on the
compaction curve of each set of specimen using corresponding dry density points.
Typical method of plotting ISO graph is shown in Fig. VI-1 while the completed
specimen ofan ISO-CBR graph isshown inFig. VI. 1A.
2. S U B-BASE A N D B A S E C O U R S E
The above testwill be performed on the materials approved for use as either sub
base or base course using the following compactive efforts. .B.S., W A S and Modified
A.A.S.H.O. The results will be treated as above and relevant graphs with ISO C B R
plotted.
3. U S E O F ISO C B R F O R C O N T R O L
In our present day control system, we have no method of checking whether the
compacted layer meets the specified C B R criteria, we are only concerned with 100%
relative density and moisture content relative to the laboratory design moisture and
invariably the laboratory determined O M C do not often tallywith the plant O M C . W e are
aware that maximum C B R can only be obtained around O M C if this moisture is not
achieved on site the strength of the pavement will be les than specified, ifplant O M C is
less than laboratory O M C : meaning that the section is compacted to a moisture over and
above the plant O M C , thus producing a compacted pavement with weak strength. When
the density and moisture of compacted layer is determined, same isplotted on the control
graph and the field C B R is read from the ISO C B R line, this being the C B R value of the
pavement. This is a surer way of ascertaining that both the density, moisture and required
C B R are obtained on site.
TRIAL SECTIONS 6217. The Contractor shall carry out trial sections with the proposed materials prior to
OF LATHRJTE the start of the main construction to determine the most efficient compaction, A N D
SUB-BASE B A S E C O U R S E technique, layer thickness and suitability of the proposed materials and
COURSE A N D plants as described in the relevant clause of this specification. See clause 1052Afor a
BASE COURSE rolling testmethod.
(II) SOIL C E M E N T SPECIFICATION 水泥稳定土规范

DESCRIPTION 6220. Soil cement shall consist of a course or courses composed of soil stabilized with
Portland cement. Itshall be constructed on prepared and accepted sub-grade, sub-base or
existing pavement in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with the
lines, grades and typical cross sections as shown on the drawings and compacted to a
specified finished thickness to the satisfactionofthe Engineer.
MATERIALS FOR 6221. The materials used for soil-cement stabilization shall comply with the following
SOIL C E MENT specifications:
STABILIZATION
(A) CEMENT The cement used shall be ordinary Portland cement and shall
comply with B.S.12 or with the latest British Standard specification for the cement
specified, or NIS 11 ofl974orNIS 15 1980.
(B) WATER The water shallbe clean and free from harmful amounts of alkalis,
acids or organic matter. N o water shall be used for stabilization without the approval of
the Engineer's Representative. The Contractor may be required to collect samples of
water in an approved manner and to arrange for an analysis of the water by an approved
testing agency.
M — imu丨
■
iiimi<imii■
》 ■ ..... . ■
G E N E R A L SPECIFICATIONS (ROADS A N D BRIDGES)
二so
C O N S T R L 1 C T 5 N 01
s II s i
s as
Y 2{NSIiY>3 roizTS
> WAS
iMSCC>as!
5
js
vs
!mv mlN TY > N I r : H u . f m ±

imv L auuoizTS
rs
Nsirv >Nl>
US c ip A C T c N
i) 二
574 N§ft
RELATIVE DENSITY O R COM PACTION - RELATIVE TO B.SC.
ic * ' 713
am @ 0 c •
2:
i
fS 20 25
:
o
MCHSTCrmccm.iT %
HP VI
49
T Y P K A L SS1PLE OF ISO •C B R
i S A > ure o
CDlcat
'r ;
r l- - t•
il=
a,.
sr'
r-
(C) SOIL The soil shall be free from roots, vegetable matter or other deleterious
substances. Itshall be the nearest available approved material which when stabilized with
3 % -7% cement shall meet the design criteria specified in clause 6228 of this
specification.
APPROVAL 6222. Representative samples of all materials proposed for use in the soil-cement shall
be submitted to the Engineer by the Contractor atthe Contractor's expense. The Engineer
will testthe proposed materials and inform the Contractor ifthe tests indicate compliance
with the specifications. N o material shall be used until it has been approved by the
Engineer. Permission to use any material shall not be construed as approval of its source
nor any acceptance as continued acceptance.
GENERAL 6223. All materials to be tested shall be selected according to the method laid down in
M E T H O D OF the appropriate British Standard Specification and "Amended Decisions of Material
SAMPLING Testing Conference”or where there is no such standard by a method to be mutually
MATERIALS agreed between the Engineer and the Contractor.
SAMPLING OF 6224. Trial pits in a proposed bon'ow pit area shallbe dug from original ground level and
MATERIALS TO not from the bottom of any existing borrow pits. Trial pits shall be atleast 1.2 x 1.2 metres
BE STABILIZED in size and dug to such a depth that the fiill extent PITS of the material intended for
FROM BORROW incorporation in the works isexposed.
Materials for testing shall not be taken from the spoil of the trialpit, but shall be
made up of increments taken from each face of the pit after the overburden soil has been
removed.
The four increments shall be mixed three times and quartered or riffled down to the size
required fortesting.
SAMPLING OF 6235. The surface material of a stockpile shall be removed before sampling. At least
MATERIALS twelve samples shall be taken from different parts of the stockpile and the resulting large
FROM sample shall be thoroughly mixed by hand before being quartered for testing.
STOCKPILES
SAMPLES OF 6226. Soil samples shall be taken by digging trenches across the full width of the
snN^MÊRIAI ProPosed pavement to the depth of processing so that soil sampled shall be the soil that
ALREADY IN PLACE will be actually used in soil-cement constructions.
TESTS FOR THE 6227. The following tests shall be carried out on all materials proposed for soil-cement
SELECTION OF stabilization:
SOIL TO BE
STABILIZED (i) Liquid Limit Test 液塑限
(ii) PlasticityTest 塑性指数
(iii) Grading Test 等级试验
(iv) Density/Moisture Content CompactionTest 击实试验确定最大干密度及最佳含水量
(iv) Laboratory C.B.R. Test 试验室CBR试验
(v) Unconflned Compression Test
U.C.S--无侧限试验
The tests are to be performed in accordance with the relevant B.S. as modified by
the latest“amended decisions ofMaterials Testing Conference” .
DESIGN 6228. The stabilized soil shall meet the following specification for C.B.R. test results.
CRITERIA The specimens shall be cured with a wax cover for 6 days and soaked for 24 hours before
testing, afterallowing the specimen to drain for 15 minutes.
TABLE VI-5 DESIG N CBR VALUES FOR SO IL CEM ENT

M IX-IN-PLACE OR PLANT M IX
M ETH O D OF C O N STR U C TIO N

D ESC R IPTIO N O F TE ST
M IX IN PLACE PLANT M IX
L A B O R A T O R Y TEST O N M A T E R I A L
180% 160%
M I X E D IN T H E L A B O R A T O R Y
L A B O R A T O R Y C O N T R O L TE S T O N
M A T E R I A L M I X E D E A C H D A Y IN
THE FIELD OR ON CORED 1 0 0 % 1 0 0 %
S P E C I M E N S F R O M C O M P L E T E SOIL-
C E M E N T P A V E M E N T (AVERAGE)
L A B O R A T O R Y C O N T R O L TEST O N
M A T E R I A L M I X E D IN T H E FIELD O R
ON CORED SPECIMENS FROM 80% 80% *
C O M P L E T E D SOIL-CEMENT P A V E
M E N T (MINIMUM)
PROCEDURE FOR 6229.

ESTIMATION OF (A) Classify the soil according to U.S. public road Administration system.
CEMENT
CONTENT (B) The estimated range of cement content isdetermined using theA.A.S.H.O. soil group
(shown in tableVI - 6 below).
(C) Material requiring high cement content should be rejected as unsuitable.
(D) Perform B.S. compaction on the material to establish M.D.D. and O.M.C. using the
middle cement content e.g. (4.5)% cement forA.2 as shown in table VI - 6 etc.. The C.B.R.
andU.C.S. specimens shallbe moulded to this density and moisture content.
(E) Establish the relationship between cement content vs. C.B.R. and U.C.S. (unconfmed
compression shear strength) for soaked and un-soaked specimens.
(i) Moulding 3 C.B.R. specimens and 6 U.C.S. at each cement content, with a
minimum of three contents, e.g. forA-2 3%, 4.5% and 6 %
(ii) W a x and cure all specimens for 6 days (Except 3U.C.S. specimens at each
cement content which should be cured for 7 days and tested without
soaking).
(iii) Testing all C.B.R. Specimen and the 3 U.C.S. specimens at each cement
content after 24 hours soaking by complete inunersion in water and
a llo w ed to drain for 15 m inutes.
(iv) Plot graphs of Cement contents vs. C.B.R. (soaked). Cement contents vs.
U.C.S. (soaked and unsoaked). Established the required cement content
at 180% C.B.R. for site mix or 160% for plant mix and the corresponding
U.C.S. values soaked and unsoaked for quality control in the field.
用于测定干土重量的
按土壤重量计算的水 TABLE Vl-6 MODIFIED CEM ENT CONTENT 水密度的水泥的估计
泥需要量的通常范围 REQ U IREM EN TS OF A.A.S.H.O. SO IL GROUPS 百分比
用干土重量法测
EST IM A T ED PER C EN TA G E
定水泥含量
USUAL RANGE PER C EN T OF CE M E N T
AiMENDED
IN C E M E N T C E M E N T USED CO N TE N T BY
AA SH O CEM EN T
R E Q U IR E M E N T IN M O ISTU R E W EIG H T OF
SOIL C O N TEN T BY 按干土重量计
PER C EN T D EN SITY DRY SO IL
GRO U P W EIG H T OF 算的模压试样
B Y W EIG H T D E T E R M IN A T IO N FO R
OF SO IL
DRY SOIL
BY W E IG H T OF M O U LD ED 的水泥含量百
D R Y SO IL SPECIM EN 分比
A - 1-4 4-6 2-4 3.0 2-3-4

A -l-B 4-7 2-5 3.5 2-3.5-5
A-2 5-8 3-6 4.5 2-4.S-6
A-3 6-9 4-7 5.5 4-5-6
A-4 7-11 5-9 7.0 5-7-9
A-5 8-12 6-10 8.0 6-8-10
A-6 9-13 7-11 9.0 6-9-12
A-7 10-14 8-12 10.0 8-10-12
Note: Heavy clay soils ranging from a-5 toA-7 should be avoided where practicable.
CONSTRUCTION 6230. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval his method of
stabilization, which may be based on cither the mix-in place or plant mix principle.
Whichever method of mixing is used the maximum period between mixing of

cement and final roll off of stabilized material shall be 2 hours. The lengths of the treated
sections shall be regulated to ensure that the 2 hours time limit isnot exceeded.
MULTIPASS 6231.
MIX-IN-PLACE (A) Level pegs shall be set at 30 metre intervals and the base course material to be
METHOD stabilized imported from borrow pits, spread and shaped to the required cross-section and
longitudinal gradient. Itmay be necessary to compact the base course material to obtain a
fairestimate to correct grade and cross-section. Ifthe material ofthe existing roadbed isto
be used, the surface shall be graded to required cross-section and longitudinal gradient.
The cross-section and grade shall be checked by the Engineer's Representative before
construction starts.
(B) The material to be treated shall be scarified to the required depth and thoroughly
pulverized (including pre-wetting the soil ifnecessaiy to aid pulverization).
Precaution shall be taken to obtain a uniform condition of the material for the full depth
and width to be treated. A pulverization of 80% (i.e. ratio of the weight of soil mixture
passing the 5 m m sieve to the weight of the total representative sample taken exclusive of
the gravel retained on the 5 m m sieve shallbe achieved before the cement isspread.
© Cement shall be spread unifomily over the pulverized soil. Cement may be
supplied in bags or in bulk. If bags of cement are used, the bags shall be placed at
calculated intervals along the verge, the bags opened and the cement spread evenly un Ihe
pulverized soil by shovels and rakes.
If the cement is supplied in bulk, it shall be spread by an approved mechanical

cement spreader and each batch in the spreading equipment shall be weighed so that the
average rate of spread can be determined by the Engineer. The rate of spread per linear
metre shall not vary more than 1 0 % from the approved rate.
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (ROADS A N D BRIDGES)
(D) Wet Mixing ispreferred to avoid

(i) Loss of cement due to formation of clouds of cement dust during dry
mixing.
(ii) Loss of time in excessive adjustment of moisture content due to rapid
evaporation
(iii) Variation in cement content due to segregation caused by prolonged
mixing.
The road mixing plant shall have provision for introducing water at the time of
mixing, through a metering device or by other approved method. The water shall be
applied by means of controls that will supply the correct quantity of water to produce a
complete mixture with a uniform moisture content. Leakage of water from equipment
will not be permitted and care shall be exercised to avoid the addition of an excessive
amount ofwater.
TRAVELLING 6232. The procedure for construction with either windrout type or flat-type travelling
MIXING MACHINE mixing plant shall be as directed by the Engineer.
METHOD
COMPACTION 6233. Compaction shall commence as soon as an intimate mixture has been obtained
and the specified degree of pulverization has been achieved. It is essential that the
moisture content atthe time of rolling shall be at the optimum of the compaction plant in
use.
GENERAL 6234. The mixing equipment shall be batch type mixing plant, using revolving blade, or
REQUIREMENT rotating drum mixers or continuous type at the option of the Contractor. The soil, water
FOR PLANT MIX and cement may be proportioned eitherby weight or by volume.
PROCESS
In allplants cement shall be added in such a manner that itisuniformly distributed
throughout the soil during the m ix in g operation; the charge in a batch m ixer, or the rate of
feed to a continuous mixer, shall not exceed that which will permit complete mixing ofthe
material. Dead areas in the mixer, in which the material does not move or is not
sufficiently agitated shall be corrected either by a reduction in the volume of material or
by other adjustments.
The weights or rates of feeds of soil and water shall be within 5 % of the amount
specified by the Engineer and the weights or rates of feed of cement shall be such that the
cement content in samples taken from any part of a mixed batch or from different batches
or from time to time from the product of continuous mixers or from mixtures spread on
the roadbed, shall not vary more than 0.4% above or below the designed cement content
by weight ofdry soil.
B A T C H MIXING 6235. The mixer shall be equipped with a sufficient number of paddles of a type and
arrangement to produce a uniformly mixed batch. The mixer platform shall be of ample
s iz e to p r o v id e s a f e a n d c o n v e n ie n t a c c e s s to tlie m ix e r a n d o t h e r e q u ip m e n t. M ix e r a n d
batch box housing shall be provided with hinged gates of ample size to perniit ready
sampling from each ofthe plant bins and ofthe mixture from each end ofthe mixer.
The mixer shall be equipped with a timing device, which will indicate by a
definite audible or visual signal the expiration of the mixing period. The device shall be
accurate to within 2 seconds. 丁he plant shall be equipped with a suitable automatic device
for counting the number of batches. The time of mixing a batch shall beîn after all
ingredients are in the mixer and shall end when the mixer is half emptied. Mixing shall
continue until a homogeneous mixture of uniformly distributed cement is produced. In
general, the time of mixing shall not e less than 30 seconds, except that the time may be
reduced when tests indicate that the requirement for the variation of cement content
(±.4%) isbeing consistently compiled with.
WEIGHT 6236. When weight proportioning isused the discharge gate on the weight box shall be
PROPORTIONING so arranged as to blend the different sizes of the soil as they enter the mixer. Cement shall
be weighed on scales, separate and distinct from the soilbatching scales.
VOLUMETRIC 6237. Where volumetric proportioning is used for batch mixing, the volumetric
PROPORTIONING proportioning device for the soil shall be equipped with separate bins, adjustable in size,
for the various sizes of soil. Each bin shall have an accurately controlled gate or other
device so designed that each bin shall be completely filled and accurately stmek-off in
measuring the volume of soil to be used in the mix. Means shall be provided for
accurately calibratingthe amount of material in each measuring bin.
CONTINUOUS 6238. In addition to the General requirements, as provided in section 15, continuous
MIXING mixing of the material shall conform to the following requirements. The correct
proportions ofeach soil size introduced into the mixer shallbe drawn in from storage bins
by a continuous feeder, which will supply the correct amount of aggregate in proportion
to the cement, and so arranged that the proportion of each soil size can be separately
adjusted. The bins shall be equipped with a vibrating unit, which will effectively vibrate
the sidewalls of the bins to prevent any “ H A N G U P ”of material while the plant is
operating.
A positive signal system shall be provided to indicate the level of the material in
each bin and as the level of the material in any one bin approaches the strike-offcapacity
of the feed gate, the device will automatically close down the plan instantly. The plant
shall not be pemiitted to operate unless this automatic signal system is in good working
order. The drive shaft on the soil feeder shall be equipped with a revolution counter
reading to 1 / 1 0 0 of a revolution and of sufficient capacity to register the total number of
revolutions in a day's run. The continuous feeder for the soil may be mechanically or
electrically driven.
The continuous mixing plant shall be equipped with a hopper of at least 0.6 cubic
metre capacity which is divided into as many compartments as there are sizes of soil
being proportioned. The hopper shall be suspended under the soil feeders on a scale frame
in such a manner that the discharge from each soil feeder may be diverted into separate
compartments in the hopper when the feeders are in full operation. The weight of a loaded
hopper shall be indicated on a springless dial scale of2,278 kilograms maximum capacity
with 2 kilogram graduations. Each compartment of the hopper shall be equipped with a
gate so that each size may be withdrawn separately on a conveyor below the hopper in
order that the total weight of each size of soil may be dcteimined and representative
samples obtained. The material so over withdrawn may be returned to storage.
SPREADING 6239. Side forms shall be set to the lines and grade as shown on the drawings. Forms
shall be of steel or stout timber and shall be of sufficient strength to resist springing out
of shape during placing of soil cement.
The mixed material shall be protected by covers against moisture loss while being
transported to the spreading site and each layer shall be spread in one o p e r a tio n w ith o u t
s e g r e g a tio n (n o t m o r e t h a n 3 0 minutes shall elapse between mixing and spreading).
Immediately prior to spreading, the area to be covered shall be moistened and kept moist,
but not excessively wet.
The mixture shall be simultaneously deposited and spread with a self-propelled

mechanical spreader ready for compaction without further shaping. The spreader shall be
provided with a screed that strikes-olf and distributes the material to be required width
and thickness within 5 % of the pre-determined rate. The screed shall be adjustable to the
required cross section.
Screed action includes any cutting, crowding, or other practical motion that
produces a finished texture of uniforai appearance. If the spreader leaves ridges,
indentations or other objectionable marks in the surface that cannot be eliminated by
rolling, or prevented by adjustments in operation, itsuse shall be discontinued.
154
GENERAL SPFX： IFICATIONS (ROADS AND BRIDGES)
The use of motor grader, except for final trimming after compaction, will not be
permitted. The mixed material shall be spread for the full planned width, either by one
spreader or by several spreaders operating in a staggered pattern across the sub-grade or
sub-base course, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer or if traffic conditions
require part width construction. Should permission be granted or part width construction
be required for the use of one spreader operating alternately on continuous lanes, not
more than 30 minutes shall elapse between the time of placing material in adjacent lanes
at any location. If longitudinal construction joints are necessary they shall fall on lane
lines.
Where the required compacted thickness is 15 0 m m or less,the soil cement may be
spread and compacted in one layer. Where the compacted thickness is more than 15 0 m m
the soil cement shall be spread and compacted in 2 layers of approximately equal
thickness and the maximum compacted thickness of any one layer shall not exceed
15 0 m m or as directed. Work on each layer shall be performed in a similar manner and the
surface of the compacted material shall be kept moist or prevented from drying out by a
method approved by the Engineer until covered with the next layer, either by using damp
sand or sacks.
Soil cement base course placed in inaccessible areas may be spread by approved methods
in one course. After spreading the material shall be thoroughly compacted to the required
lines and grades by means of pneumatic tampers or with other compacting equipment,
which consistently obtains equal or better compaction than that, specified. Soil-cement
shall not be mixed or placed during rain.
COMPACTION 6240. (A) All rolling equipment shall be self-propelled and reversible and shall
produce the required compaction within the operation time, e.g. from mixing, wetting,
spreading and compaction.
(B) Initial rolling may be performed with smooth wheel steel-tyred rollers
weighing not less than 1 0 , 8 8 6 kilograms with a compression on the rear wheels ofnot less
than 58 kilograms of the tyre width, or with other compacting equipment which
consistently obtain equal or better compaction that that specified. Pneumatic tyred rollers
shall be the oscillating type and having a width of not less than 1 . 2 metres and equipped
with pneumatic tyres of equal size and diameter. Wobble wheel rollers will not be
permitted. The tyres shall be inflated to 6.3 kg per sq.cm, or such lower pressure as the
Engineer may direct and maintained so that the air pressure will not vary more than 0.35
kg per sq. cm. from the designated pressure. Pneumatic-tyred rollers shall be so
constructed that the total weight ofthe roller can be varied toproduce an operating weight
per tyre of not less than 907 kilograms. The total operation weight of the roller shall be
varied as directedby the Engineer.
压实度控制要求
(C) Rolling tests shall be carried out to establish the plant maximum dry
density (MDD) itsoptimum moisture content (OMC) and the number of economic passes
to achieve the M D D . See Table 1-4 for guidance on perfomiance of different plants
relating O M C of different types of soil, to M D D and
(D) Rolling shall be perfomied in such a manner that bumps and irregularities
are eliminated and the finished surface shall be true to the required grade and cross section
within the tolerances specified. Rolling shall commence from the outer edge of the verge
to the centre of the roadway except on super-elevated curves where rolling shall begin on
the low side and progress to the high side.
(E) Areas inaccessible to rollers shall be compacted to the specified density by

other means, approved by the Engineer. (F) All compaction planes shall be removed. The
f in is h e d su riface s h a ll b e s m o o th , d e n s e a n d fr e e o f r id g e s o r c r a c k s . T h e s u r f a c e s h a ll b e
kept moist at alltimes until the curing seal is applied.
:155
FINISHINGS 6241 The finished surface shall not deviate at any point in a longitudinal direction by
more than 5 m m from 3 metre straight edge laid in any position on the finished surface
parallel to the centre line. The transverse profile shall confomi to the same accuracy when
tested using a correctly shaped template. The thickness shall not vary more than ± 1 2 m m
from the design thickness of base at any point. Ifthe finished surface exceeds the above
tolerance, the excess material shall be trimmed with the least possible disturbance of the
material to remain in place. The excess material shall be removed and disposed of
immediately after trimming and no loose material shall be left on the base and the area
shall be rolled again. Filling low spots in the cement treated base will not be pennitted.
CONSTRUCTION 6242. (A) T R A N S V E R S E JOINTS

JOINTS
At the end of each day's work or first thing in the morning, a transverse vertical
construction joint shall be formed by cutting back 6 0 0 m m into the compacted soil-
cement and disposing of the material. Additional mixture shall not be placed until the
construction joint is placed. When starting the work the 9 0 0 m m section adjacent to the
joint shall be thoroughly hand mixed. (B) Longitudinal joints shall be constructed by
cutting back vertically into the existing stabilized material for approximately 7 5 m m and
the material cut away may be disposed of in the adjacent lane to be constructed. The face
ofthe cutjoints shall be moistened in advance of constructing the adjacent section.
CURING 6243. The completed soil-cement shall be cured by cither damp sand cover or
bituminous curing seal as directed by the Engineer.
(A) D A M P SAND
Immediately after compaction the soil cement shall be cured for a period of7 days
by a 5 0 m m layer of damp sand spread evenly over the surface. The Contractor shall keep
the sand damp and shall close the stabilized soil to alltraffic during the curing period.
(B) BITUMINOUS CURING SEAL
The curing seal shall consist of liquid bitumen MC-O, or MC-T unless otherwise
specified. The curing seal shall be applied at a rate between 0.68 - 1.13 litres per square
metre of surface and shall provide a continuous membrane over the soil-cement
pavement. The curing seal shall be applied as soon as possible, but not later than 8 hours
after the completion of final rolling. The surface shall be kept moist until the seal is
applied. N o traffic or equipment shall be permitted on the scaled base during the first 6
days afterthe application ofthe curing seal, unless otherwise pennitted by the Engineer.
FIELD 6244. In order to ensure adequate cement content, proper moisture content, adequate
CONTROL compaction, adequate pulverization, intimate mixing and adequate strength, the
TESTS following field quality control tests shallbe carried out during construction.
(I) M O I S T U R E C O N T R O L TEST
In each stretch, the moisture content shall be checked and adjusted to optimum
moisture content of the plant in use before compaction commences. “ Speedy”moisture
tester of any type may be approved by the engineer for use; the speedy tester should be
calibrated first before being put into use (for calibrating procedure see clause 2003(6)).
(II) TEST F O R A D E Q U A T E PULVERIZATION
Before the addition of cement 80% pulverization shall be achieved and this shall
be checked for each stretch. For procedure see Clause 6231 (B).
-•••' •••： -- 156

(III) TEST F O R INTIMATE M I X I N G
Intimate mixing shall be checked by examining the colour of exposed material

from a series of holes to the full depth of mixed soil-cement made at regular intervals.
Uniform colour ofthe exposed material indicates thorough mixing.
(IV) STRENGTH
Samples of mixed soil-cement shall be taken in the field prior to compaction. The
samples shall be compacted into C B R and/or U C S mould to B.S. or field density and
sealed with wax. In particular U C S specimens shall be statically compacted, to the same
densities as those offieldcompacted C B R specimens. The specimens shallbe cured inthe
laboratory and tested after7 days ( 6 days curing and 24 hours soaking).
The frequency ofthese tests shall be one test for every 400 square metres and part
thereofofmaterial laid in each layer.
(V) IN SITU D R Y D E N S I T Y TESTS

These tests shall be carried out immediately upon the completion of compaction of each
section. At least one dry density test shall be carried out for each 350 square metres of
material laid in each layer, using the sand bottle or other in-situ density testing equipment
or the nuclear gauge testing equipment approved by the Engineer. These tests may be
located where samples for C B R and/or U C S have been taken.
(VI) T HICKNESS O F P R O C E S S E D L A Y E R
The thickness of the Soil-cement layer shall be measured using the in-situ dry
density holes, the thickness of cored specimens from hardened soil-cement and any
additional holes atthe discretion ofthe Engineer.
(VII) D E T E R M I N A T I O N O F C E M E N T C O N T E N T
The Contractor shall provide the necessary equipment and reagents to enable cement
extraction tests to be carried out by the Engineer. For procedure refer to B.S. 1924 (1975)
testNo. 6 .
(VIII) C B R & U C S TESTS O N C O R E D SPECIMENS
无侧限
C B R A N D U C S tests shall be carried out on cored specimens taken from
hardened soil-cement. The frequency of these tests shall be at least one test for each 400
square metres and part thereof of material laid in each layer. Sampling shall be in
staggered pattern.
TEST 6245. The results of all the tests mentioned in this section of the specification shall be
RECORDS carefully recorded in a manner approved by the Engineer. The test results shall be
recorded in triplicate, one copy to be retained by the Contractor and the other two copies
to be handed to the Engineer's Representative.
ADDITIONAL 6246. In addition to these records required under the provision of clause 6245 above, the
CONST R U C T I O N Contractor shall keep a record for each individual section of soil-cement construction
RECORDS giving the following details:
(I) Location, length and width ofthe section位置、长度和宽度及截面积
(II) In situmoisture content on scarification 原地含水量对划痕的影响
(HI) Moisture content prior to addition ofcement水泥加入前的含水率
(IV) No. ofbags ofcement used 不，水泥袋的使用
(V) Time the cement was spread 水泥初凝时间
(VI) Complete mixing time 拌和时间
(VII) Moisture content prior to compaction
压实前的含水量
(VIII) Compaction and Grading time 压实和分级时间

(IX) Total operation time from cement spreading to completion ofcompaction.
(X) Location ofborrow pitused. 从水泥摊铺到压实完成的总作业时间。
土场使用位置
This record shall be prepared in triplicate, one copy to be retained by the
Contractor and two copies to be handed to the Engineer's Representative.
SUPERVISION 6247 The attention of the Contractor is drawn to the fact that he must provide adequate
experienced supervisory staffduring allthe stages of soil-cement construction.
(CLAUSE 6248 - 6249 INCLUSIVE N O T USED)
(III) C R U S H E D S T O N E
GENERAL 6250. In addition to any other clause of this specification the following shall be deemed
to apply inparticularto crushed stone base course, and shallbe read in conjunction with all
other relevant clauses ofthe Conditions ofContract and this specification.
MATERIALS 6251. M A T E R I A L S C O U R S E F O R C R U S H E D S T O N E B A S E
Base course aggregate shall consist ofcrushed Stone.
(A) PHYS I C A L PROPERTIES O F A G G R E G A T E
Materials for use as Stone base shall be classified under two categories i.e. Coarse
aggregate and Fine aggregate.
1. C O A R S E A G G R E G A T E
Coarse aggregate shall be granite crushed stone sourced from approved Quarry by the
Engineer's R ep resen tative and shall h ave sizes ranging from 5 0 m m and retained on 5 m m
sieve. The aggregate shall be free from clay or silty materials, and when subjected to 10%
fine test or aggregate crushing value, the value of the results shall range from 7.5% to
12.5% for 10% fine and not more than 35% for aggregate crushing value. It shall also
comply with other under clause 2005 (1) and (2). requirements
2. FTNE A G G R E G A T E
Fine aggregate known as binder materials shall be materials passing sieve 5 m m
and retained on 75fim sieve. Itmay be sourced from river bed at location approved by the
Engineer's Representative or be fines from crushed stone. It shall be free from vegetation
or other objectionable matter. Fine aggregate shall be clean without any clay content,
strong and sharp.
It shall be of such grading characteristic that when combined with coarse aggregate, the
composite material shall conform to the gradation and other requirements specified in
clause 2004 (1-3).
3. Liquid limit and Plasticity Index requirements stated herein shall apply to any
aggregate component that is blended to meet the required gradation and also to the
aggregate in the com pacted base course. The portion o f fine aggregate passing the 75|imi
sieve shall be either non-plastic or shall have a liquid Limit not greater than 30% and
Plasticity Index not greater than 6 .This index test will only be applicable to materials for
wet laying.
4. COMBINATION PROCEDURE
It is easier to handle gradation size b y use of tw o categories o f m aterials:-Firstly,
grade the coarse aggregate and plot on the stone base design envelope, next, grade the fine
aggregate and plot in the design envelope. By simple proportion and physical
examination ofthe two graphs, guided by experience, two to tliree combination trials may
produce the required satisfactory grading thatwill fall into the envelope, otherwise simple
calculation may be used to achieve the required combination proportion.
158
NOTE: Once an acceptable combination is produced frequent grading checks on

both specimens must be carried out to ensure that deviation in gradation isnot allowed to
occur. The results of such grading test will enable adjustment to be made on the
combination proportion.
5. C O M B I N A T I O N OF DIFFERENT SIZES O F A G G R E G A T E
Coarse aggregate of different sizes and the fine aggregate shall be placed in
different Bins. Each aggregate size and the fines shall be sieved and plotted on
appropriate log chart. Simple arithmetic calculation may be used to detennine the
combination proportion. Alternatively, careful study of the graphs, coupled with
experience will enable user to guess the proportion by trial and error. Once a suitable mix
proportion isestablished, the grading of each size of aggregate shall be checked from time
to time, to ensure thatthere isno deviation or variation.
6 . ESTABLISHING M I X C O N T R O L CRITERIA
When a mix proportion has been established, representative sample of each

material shall be combined and quartered to make six number of C B R mould specimens,
moisturized to 5 % of dry weight of sample and kept in air tight* container for 18 hours.
Before the samples are compacted, the moisture shall be checked using calibrated
S P E E D Y TESTER. If the moisture is lower than 5 % more water to attain this moisture
shall be added. When the material is mixed thoroughly it shall be compacted using
Modified A A S H O compactive effort or using a vibrating kango hammer. Whichever
compactive effort is used (not B.S.), it shall be in five layers and the thickness of
compacted specimen shall not be less than 125mm or more than 130mm, otherwise it
shall be discarded. The loose material on the specimen aftercompaction shall be removed
carefully, and with a straight edge placed across the mould, in a minimum of two
directions, the depth of the compacted specimen surface from the top shall be determined
in three places along each direction of the straight edge. The mean of six readings shall be
used to determine the depth ofthe specimen and thereafteritsvolume.
Unless directed to the contrary the six specimens will be tested for Dry Density
only. Alternatively 3 specimens may be soaked for 24 hours (complete immersion in
water with 2 5 m m water head above the specimen) tested for C B R after the specimen is
allowed to drain for 15 minutes. The remaining specimens shall be tested for C B R
(strength) unsoaked. The average of two close result shall be the C B R or dry Density of
the specimen. If C B R of over 100% is obtained the dry density established with
corresponding moisture content shall be the design criteria and control for the works.
G R A D I N G OF 6252. The grading of crushed stone for use in crushed stone base couise shall be as
CRUSHED follows:
STONE
(I) D R Y PROCESS
(A) 7 5 m m to 1 2 m m or 5 0 m m referred to as coarse stone.—1 2 m m hereinafter

(B) 12 m m to dust hereinafter referred to as screening
(II) W E T PROCESS
Gradation: The composite mixture of coarse aggregate and binder material, processed as
hereinafter specified, shall confonn to one of the applicable gradations shown in Table
VI-7 and shall not vary from the low limit on one sieve to the high limit on adjacent sieve
or vice versa, but shallbe uniformly graded from coarse to fine.
IIIiHiliilFliiilili Ini i1WII I III III II|i i|nh1III - — — — — —

Gradation requirement specified herein shall apply to the completed base course
after undergoing the mixing, placing, compacting and other operations. The portion ofthe
aggregate passing No 75|im sieve shall not be greater than one-third oi the portion
passing the No. 425 sieve. The aggregates shall continuously be well graded within
the limits of Gradation A, B, C, D or E, as specified below. The methods of test used will
be A S T M Standards C117, C127, C128, C136 andD422. Sieves shall conforaito A S T M
Standard E.l 1 orB.S. sieve.
TABLE VI-7 GRADING ENVELOPE FOR STONE BASE COURSE WET METHOD
PERCENTAGE BY WEIGHT PASSING SQUARE MESH SIEVE

SIEVE
DESIGNATION GRADING GRADING GRADING GRADING GRADING GRADING
A 5 D F a
75mm 100 100 100 100 50mm 100
50mm 85- 100 85 - 1 0 0 90-100 90 - 1 0 0 37.5 mm 95 - 100
25 mm 60-95 65-95 75 - 100 8 0- 100 10mm 60-80
10mm 30-65 40-75 50-85 60-100 10mm 40-60
5 mm 25-55 30-60 35-65 50-85 5min 25-40
2mm 15- 40 20-45 25-50 40-70 2.36 mm 15- 30
425 |im 8-20 13- 30 15- 30 25-45 600fj.m 8-22
75|im 2 -8 5-10 5-10 5 - 15 75 (.im 6-12
Note:-The table is based on aggregate of uniform specific gravity, and the

percentages passing the various sieves may require appropriate correction by the
Engineer when aggregates ofvarying specific gravities are used.
WORKMANSHIP
PREPARATION 6253. The sub-grade shall be prepared and compacted in accordance with terms as
OF SUB-GRADE contained in Section VI Clause 6161 ofthis specification.
N o te :-N o su b -g ra d e sh a ll b e c o n s id e re d as a w o rk in g platfoiTQ fo r th e sto n e b a se

as th is w ill p ro m o te th e e a rly c o lla p se o f th e p a v e m e n t. T h is is d u e to th e fa c t th a t th e
e la s tic p ro p e iiy o f the su b -g ra d e ( o f w h ic h stra in is a p art) w ill n o t b e ab le to su sta in the
w h e e l lo ad fro m th e c ru s h e d sto n e b a s e to th e su b -g ra d e w ith o u t an y in te rm e d ia te
s u p e rio r layer.
Where the sub-grade or sub-base is formed of material liable to be forced up into

the crushed stone during com p actin g operations, the E ngineer's Representative may
direct that a 50mm thick blanket layer of approved material shall be superimposed upon
the sub-grade priorto the laying ofcrushed stone. See clause 6133.
FORMS 6254. Where kerb or concrete haunches are not specified, the Contractor shall ensure
that the edges of crushed stone base course, laid by either the wet or dry process, are true
to line and level and properly compacted to the same standard as the test of the Base
course by the use of forms, hunching stones or other methods approved by the Engineer's
Representative.
CRUSHED STONE 6255. Crushed stone Base course laid by either the wet or dry method shall be laid in
TO BE LAID A N D layers of not less than 150mm compacted thickness to the satisfaction of the Engineer's
COMPACTED IN Representative.
LAYERS
L A Y I N G A N D 6256 When crushed stone Base course is to be laid by the dry process the method of
C O M P A C T I N G laying and compacting shallbe as follows:
CRUSHED
STONE D R Y (I) The coarse stone 7 5 m m to 12mm or 5 0 m m to 1 2 m m shall be spread in a
PROCESS manner approved by the Engineer's Representative to an even depth which, after
compaction will produce the specified thickness oflayer.
(II) The coarse stone shall then be regulated and compacted by not less than
three passes of an approved roller.
(III) Successive uniform layers of screening 12 m m to dust shall then be applied

over the surface and shall be vibrated into the interstices ofthe coarse stone by means ofan
approved vibrating plate compactor or other approved means. Screenings may be spread
by hand shovel using a sweeping motion or by approved tailboard spreaders attached to
lorries. In no case shall screenings be dumped on the surface in piles and spread there
from. Great care shall be taken to ensure that screenings are not applied either so quickly
or so thickly as to “
C A K E ”or bridge on the surface in a manner which prevents the filling
of the interstices or causes the vibrating or compacting equipment from bearing directly
on the coarse stone. The addition of screenings and vibrating into the interstices of the
coarse stone shall continue until allthe voids are filledin.
(IV) The surface of the crushed stone shajll then be checked transversely and
longitudinally for level and camber and any indicated variations adjusted. The surface
shall then be sprinkled with water from a water bowser and rolled with a smooth wheel
roller having a weight of roll of not less than 58 kilograms per centimetre. Voids in the
Base-course, which occur during this process, shall be filledby sweeping screenings into
them.
The sprinkling, sweeping and rolling shall continue until all voids are filledwith grout to
the satisfaction ofthe Engineer's Representative.
(V) The final surface shall be smooth and even, free from irregularities or loose material
and true to line and level having regard to the tolerances for base course finish specified
elsewhere herein.
CRUSHED 6257. When crushed stone Base course isto be laid by the dry or wet process, the method
STONE BASE oflaying and compaction shall be as follows:
COURSE LAID
BY THE WET (I) The approved crushed stone, graded as specified shall be mixed with
PROCESS between 3 % and 5 % of water as directed in a mixer of a type approved by the Engineer's
Representative.
(II) The mixed material shall be protected from the rays of the sun during
transitfrom the mixer to the site in order to prevent loss ofmoisture due to evaporation and
shall be laid by a self-propelled asphalt finisher or other approved plant in layers of not
less than 7 5 m m or more than 150mm thickness after compaction. During this operation,
care shall be taken to avoid segregation.
(III) Water can only be added to any wet laid stone base ifitwas discovered that
evaporation had taken place during rolling. The finished rolled stone base shall not have
moisture less than 3 % or more than 5 % by weight of di*yaggregate.
Should any patchiness appear during compaction, areas deficient in fines shall be blinded
with screenings, watered and rolled and areas showing an excess of fines shall be removed
reconstructed with graded material to satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative, and
the
(IV) The final surface shall be smooth and even，free from irregularities or loose
material, and true to line and level, having regard to the tolerances for Base-course finish
specified elsewhere herein.
FEDER A L MINISTRY OF V ：161
PREPARATION OF 6258. Crushed stone Base-course, laid by either the dry or wet process shall be prepared
CRUSHED STONE for the addition of bituminous surfacing as specified under the relevant parts of this
BASE COURSE TO section ofthe specification.
RECEIVE BITUMI
NOUS SURFACING
COMPACTION 6259. Compaction of crushed stone Base-course shall be to the satisfaction of the
Engineer^ Representative.
(IV) CONCRETE CARRIAGEWAY CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL 6260. In addition to any other clauses of this specification, the following shall be
deemed to apply in particular to concrete carriageway construction. And shall be read in
specification.
MATERIALS
CEMENT 6261. In addition to any other clauses ofthis specification the following shall be deemed
to apply in particular to concrete carriageway construction. And shall be read in
specification.
AGGREGATE 6262. Fine and coarse aggregate for use in the manufacture of concrete for construction
of concrete carriageways shall comply with the requirements of all relevant clauses of
this specification regarding aggregates for use in concrete work.
REINFORCING 6263. Steel reinforcement for use in the construction of concrete camageways shall,
STEEL where used, comply with the requirement of all relevant clauses of this specification
regarding M.S. reinforced concrete work.
D O W E L B A R S 6264. Dowel bars and tie bar shall consist ofmild steel complying with the requirements
A N D TIE B A R S ofBritish Standard 15, free from oil,paint, dirtand loose mst.
Dowel bars for transverse joints shall be straight, free from burred edges or other
irregularities and shall have their sliding ends sawn, not sheered, unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer. The length and diameter of dowel bars and tie bars shall be as
shown on the drawings or directed by the Engineer.
SIDE F O R M S 6265. Side Forms shall be of steel and of a design to be approved by the Engineer.
Curved forms of appropriate radius shall be used for all curves of 30metres radius or less.
The width of the form shall be not less than the pavement thickness, up to a maximum of
2 5 0 m m and flange branches shall extend outward on the base not less than two-thirds the
height of the fonn. All forms shall be free from warp, twists and kinks, and where the top
surface of the forms detemiines the finished level of the concrete; itshall be accurate in
manufacture to within a tolerance of ± 2 m m in 3 metres measured in a vertical .plane.
Repaired forms shall not be used until inspected and approved by the Engineer's
Representative.
Forms to support rails on which the machine is to run shall be sufficiently robust
to support the weight of allplant mnning on them without deformation.
RAILS FOR MAC 6266. Rails shall be of steel and of approved design enabling them to be properly
HINE FINISHED supported on the side forms or on other approved mountings. All rails shall be sufficiently
CONCRETE robust to support the weight of allplant running on them without deformation. They shall
CARRIAGEWAYS
be free from warp, twists and kinks and accurate in manufacture to within a tolerance of土
2 m m in 3 metres measured in a vertical plane.
PR EFO R M ED 6267. Preformed joint filler shall be of the thickness shown on the drawings or directed
FILLER JOINT by the Engineer within a tolerance of 土2mm. It shall be 2 5 m m less in depth than the
tHickness of the slab，within a tolerance of ± 3 m m and of the foil width between road
forms. Holes to accommodate dowel bars shallbe accurately bored or punched out.
The material comprising joint filler shall be of approved quality, such that the
fillercan be satisfactorily installed in position atthejoint.
JOINT PRIMER 6268. Joint priming compound shall consist of a suitable bitumen based compound
approved by the Engineer.
JOINT SEALING 6269. joint sealing material shall consist of an approved rubber-bitumen compound,
COMPOUND complying with the requirements ofBritish Standard 2499; testto assess the properties of
hot applied joint sealing compounds for concrete pavements, and shall be grade-1 .Class
B or C. The joint sealing compound shall have the following qualities:
(a) Capable ofadhering to concrete under allweather conditions.

(b) It should be ductile particularly in fairly cold weather as to cover the
widening of joint without cracking, and be able to withstand the
continuous cycle of expansion and contraction for a long time without a
break up or disintegration.
(c) Itmust be durable, etc.
WORKMANSHIP
6270. Concrete carriageways shall be constructed in one or more slab widths as

indicated inthe drawings.
Where a concrete carriageway is constructed more than one slab wide, the first
slab or alternate slabs shall be constructed between two forms and the adjacent or
intermediate slabs shall be constructed by replacing the flanged wheels on one or both
sides of the machine with flangeless wheels, which can travel on the surface of the
concrete already completed, or on rails fixed to longitudinal timber laid on the completed
concrete to support the flanged wheels. Concrete slabs shall be at least ten das old before
they are subjected to the weight of the finishing machine, but, in suitable weather, the
Engineer's Representative may permit a shorter period provided that adequate provisions
made for protecting the surface of the slab on which the wheels of the finishing machine
run and provided that the wheels do not run nearer to the edge ofthe slab than 15 0 m m and
provided further that the contractor gives an undertaking inwriting to be fully responsible
for any damage that may occur and to repair same at his own expense to the satisfaction of
6271. The thickness at any point shall be not more than 6 m m thinner nor more than
THICKNESS OF 1 2 m m thicker than that shown on the drawings.
SLAB
6272. Unless hand spreading has been sanctioned in writing by the Engineer'
CONCRETE Representative, all concrete to be compacted by finishing machines shall be distributed
DISTRIBUTOR with a hopper type spreader of approved design. Where vibratory screeds instead of
finishing machines are used for compaction, the arrangements for placing concrete shall
be to the approval of the Engineer. Spreaders shall be capable of striking off concrete at
the correct level for the placing ofreinforcement and forproducing a uniform surface.
To minimize pre-compaction, hand spreading will be permitted only where the

concrete is deposited in loads each not exceeding one cubic metre size, and from height
not exceeding 750mm.
C O M P A C TING 6273. Compacting and finishing machines shall be appro\ cd h\ the Engineer and shall
A N D FINISHING compact and finish the concrete either by the action of ubration or by mechanical
MACHINE tamping.
The machine shall be addition have a strike-off blade or paddle-roller to control the
surcharge and a reartransverse oscillating screed.
1 0 3
W A T E R P R O O F 6274. Where shown on the drawings or directed by the Engineer's Representative,

UNDERLAY waterproof paper as specified or other approved underlay, shall be used and where more
than one sheet is used for the construction of any one slab, the overlaps shall be at least
150mm. The waterproof underlay must not be tom or damaged and water shall not be
allowed to collect upon itbefore the concrete is laid.
SETTING, 6275, A L L SIDE F O R M S SHALL:

CHE C K I N G A N D
STRIKING OF (I) Be so supported that times, they remain rigid at all They shall be set in
SIDE F O R M S position at leas 20 hours before concrete is placed between them unless the Engineer's
Representative agrees to a shorter period. Forms shall be cleaned and oiled each time
before they are used.
(II) Be bedded on a layer, about 5 0 m m thick and for only the width ofthe form
base, of cement mortar or concrete ofthe same grade as the slab on a firm foundation so as
to ensure the necessary complete rigidity and stability. The base on the line of the forms
shallbe thoroughly compacted before the forms are set.
(III) Be as specified in Clause 6265 set to line and level and secured by using
not less than three pins for each 3 metre section, one pin being placed ateach side of every
joint or as otherwise approved by the Engineer's Representative. Form sections shall be
tightlyjoined together by a lockedjoint free from play or movement in any direction, so as
to prevent the extrusion ofconcrete.
For machine laid concrete the fomi joints shallbe made without any discontinuity
in the top surface of the forms and the levels at the joints between the forms shall, where
form and rail are not integral, be setwithin a tolerance of士 3 m m ofthe levels shown on the
drawings.
The wheels of finishing machines shall not be run directly oilthe top surface ofthe
side fonns, but on rails as indicated in clause 6266 or on the finished concrete as provided
in clause 6270.
For concrete to be compacted by vibrating screeds the setting ofthe forms shall be
such as to provide the accuracy of finish specified in the relevant clauses of this
specification.
If corrections are necessary as a result of checking for conformity with the

alignments and levels shown on the drawings, such correction shall be made before any
concrete is placed between them. Where any form has been disturbed itshall be reset and
rechecked. Side forms shall be removed not less than 12 hours after completion of the
construction ofthe concrete road slabs.
Care shall be taken that the concrete and any projecting rods are not damaged in any way
during the removal of the forms. The concrete or mortar bed used at the longitudinaljoint
in partial-width construction shall be removed at the same time ifapplicable and the sub
grade and sub-base made good to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer's Representative.
SETTING 6276. The Engineer's Representative may require any or all concreting operations to
CHECKING AND cease ifat any time, the forms or rails are not set in position sufficiently far in advance of
STRIKING OF
the concreting to enable him to be satisfied as to their compliance with the relevant
RAILS FOR
MACHINE LAID
requirements ofthis specification.
CONCRETE
A L L RAILS SHALL:
要 164
(A) Be integral with the forms so that they remain rigidly fixed at all times, or
where independent, be mounted so that they remain rigidly fixed to the approved
mounting during the passage of the spreading and finishing machines. The surface of
rails shall be kept clean atalltimes.
(B) Be firmly supported along the length in such a manner that the finishing
machine can travel along the line ofthe carriageway atthe correct level.
(C) Where the width of slab iscontinuously varying, itshall be firmly supported
throughout its length on cement mortar or concrete as specified each about 5 0 m m thick
so as to ensure the necessary rigidity and accuracy oflevels. The sub-grade or sub-base or
base course beneath the rail shall be thoroughly compacted before any concrete or mortar
islaid.
(D) Be so set as to ensure accuracy of level of the surface of the concrete within a
tolerance of士3m m in 3 metres.
(E) Be so set that the screed of the finishing machine operates in relation to
the rail,not the form.
Where on checking itis found that any rail or the form on which itrests has been
disturbed or is incorrectly set, the rail shall be reset, and rechecked before placing of the
concrete between the forms isbegun.
Rails may be removed in advance of removal of the forms on which they rest
provided that the latterare not disturbed by so doing.
QUANTITY AND 6277. The quantity and distribution ofreinforcement shall be as shown on the drawings,
DISTRIBUTION w ith such modification as may be necessary and approved by the Engineer's
OF STEEL Representative to suit manholes and surface boxes, junctions or slabs of different width
REINFORCEMENT or length; or as are directed by the Engineer's Representative. No loose rods or small
pieces of fabric other than as provided for in the specification shall be permitted in any
portion ofthe work.
PLACING OF 6278. Steel fabric reinforcement for carriageways shall be as specified in B.S. 1221 .All
STEEL REINFO R- reinforcement shall be so placed that after compaction of the concrete itis in the position
CEMENT FOR shown on the drawings and shall temiinate 4 0 m m from the edges of all joints in the
CARRIAGEWAYS concrete unless otherwise specified.
TREATMENT 6279. Manholes shall be housed in separate small slabs, which shall be the size of the
AT M A N H O L E S exterior of the shaft and shall be formed by casting the main slab against boxes of this
size, made from formwork and accurately placed vertically above the exterior of the
shaft. This formwork shall be removed atthe same time as the remainder ofthe fonnwork
for the slab. Expansion joint filler 10 m m wide shall be placed against the exposed edges
of the slab, and reinforcing bars if shown on the drawings or specified shall be placed
accurately in position so as to give the required final cover, concrete being placed by hand
in the space intervening between the slab and the manhole frame. This concrete shall then
be compacted to the same density as that of the adjoining slab.
A sealing groove shall be formed and filled at the top of the joints with the sun ounding
slab: in accordance with Clause 6283, the top anises of both slabs being rounded to a
radius of 6 mm.
JOINTS IN 6280. Alljoints shall be constructed by methods to be approved by the Engineer, and with
CONCRETE vertical faces. Grooves in the surface ofthe concrete overjoints shall be sawn, except that
CARRIAGEWAYS alternative methods of forming the grooves may be submitted and may be considered by
GENERAL the Engineer in lieu of sawn groves, provided that the contractor demonstrates to the
REQUIREMENTS Engineer's satisfaction that the surface finish so obtainable is within the appropriate
tolerance permitted.
•....." ^ 0^
TRANSVERSE 6281. Expansion joints shall comprise an approved preformed joint as specified and
JOINTS dowel bars. The joint filler, together with the sawn groove, shall provide complete
separation of adjacent slabs. The dowel bars as specified shall be provided atmid depth of
the slab, parallel to the finished surface and to the centre line of the road within a tolerance
of ± 2 m m in 300nim. Provision shall be made for ensuring that the dowel bars and joint
fillerarc held securely inposition during spreading and compacting ofthe concrete.
Dowel bars shall be provided at one end with a closely fitting sleeve 100mm long,
consisting of cardboard or other approved material. A loose plug equal in thickness to the
width of the expansion joint, and consisting of cotton waste or a disc of expansion joint
filler, shall be inserted within the sleeve at the end of the dowel bar. The free half of each
dowel shall be greased or painted with joint priming compound as specified or directed.
The method ofassembling and securingjoints shallbe approved by the Engineer.
Where contraction joints are required, these shall be formed by a groove sawn in
the surface of the hardened concrete and a timber filletcast into the base of the slab, allas
shown on the drawings. The sawn groove shall be located vertically above the timber
fillet to within a tolerance of 土 12mm. Dowel bars shall be provided as for expansion
joints. Construction joints shall be installed only under the conditions detailed in Clause
6287. They shall be formed by means of a drilled and split cross-fonn which shall allow
tiebars to be inserted and which shall permit the reinforcement to project through thejoint
for a distance of at least 400mm. On recommencing work, the cross-form shall be
removed and the vertical face of the concrete roughened. The next reinforcing mat shall
completely overlap the projecting reinforcement.
Joints shall be formed in a straight line at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the
carriageway, except where this cannot be achieved, as at road junctions and roundabouts
and corresponding joints on either side of a longitudinal joint shall be in line with each
other. Where possible, alltransversejoints shall be staggered.
L O N G I T U D I N A L 6282. When slabs are constructed to multi-lane widths, the additional reinforcement as
JOINTS shown on the drawings shall be bars or provided as specified in clause 6264. The
longitudinaljoints shall be placed symmetrically about the middle of the slab in the form
of a dum m y joint, as shown on the drawings, or as directed.
For slabs of single lane width, tiebars shall be provided as above and as shown on
the drawings. Provision shall be made for maintaining the tie bars accurately in position
during spreading and compacting ofthe concrete. When the adjoining slab is constructed,
a groove shall be sawn or formed by other approved means to the requirements of clause
6283.
SAWING 6283. Except when an alternative method isapproved by the Engineer, a groove shall be
AT JOINTS sawn inthe concrete immediately over the position ofthejoint. Sawing shall lake place by
a method to be approved by the Engineer as soon as possible but not before the concrete
has hardened sufficiently to ensure clean faces to the groove.
In considerating the type of constructionjoints to be adopted, causes precipitating

thejoint must be considered and the instruments available. In addition to the above, these
other methods may be found useful:
(a) Stepping method (vertical)

(b) Tongue method
(c) Grooving method
The depth of grooves shall be 40mm. Groove over expansion joints shall be 6 m m
wider than the width of the preformed joint filler and shall be accurately located over the
joint filler. Grooves forming longitudinal or contractionjoints shall be ofthe width shown
on the drawings, or as directed by the Engineer.
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (HOADS AND BRIDGES)
SEALING OF 6284. All dust or grit shall be removed from the grooves, which shall first be dried, if
JOINTS necessary, for this purpose. Unless an alternative method of sealing is approved by the
Engineer, the dried joints shall then be coated with priming compound, complying with
clause 6268 and an approved sealing compound heated to a temperature not exceeding
180°C, shall be poured in so as to fill the grooves completely. When filling grooves in
expansion joints, allowance shall be made for normal variations of ground temperature in
the locality, so as to avoid the extrusion ofthe sealing compound with an expected increase
in ground temperature.
C O M P R E S S I V E 6285. During the whole progress of concreting, test cubes shall be made in the manner
S T R E N G T H OF described for concrete work. Not more than 1 per cent of cubes tested at28 days shall show
CONCRETE a strength ofless than specified.
Ifrapid-hardening cement is used, reference in this clause to 28 days, which isthe
period for ordinary Portland cement, shall be the period between concreting and opening
to traffic.
Cubes shall be made each day in sets at interval and locations as decided by the Engineer's
Representative. At the start of the work, and until such time as the Engineer's
Representative may order a reduction in the number of cubes required, six sets shall be
made during each day's work, halfofeach set fortesting at28 days for determination ofthe
minimum permissible crushing strength and the other halffor testing at seven days for the
information of the Engineer’ s Representative as to quality of the mix. When the results of
the firstthirty sets are available and for so long as the Engineer's Representative is satisfied
with the quality ofthe mix, he may reduce the number ofcubes required to two sets per day.
Ifthe minimum specified crushing strength is not so attained the Contractor may
without expense to the Employer, cut cores from locations selected by the Engineer's
Representative. Where this is done, the strength of cores when tested in accordance with
British Standard 1881 methods of testing concrete will be accepted as taking precedence
over the cubes strengths in determining the strength of the concrete and a core strength of
not less than 75 per cent ofthe specified crushing strength at28 days (tested vertically) will
be accepted for a core having a height/diameter ratio of 2. The method which shall be
adopted for correcting the strength of cubes and cores for age shall be as directed by the
Engineer. In order to check the depth of concrete laid, the state of compaction and the
position ofthe reinforcement, the Engineer's Representative may order cores to be cut, and
the Contractor shall caixy out same, and repair all holes so formed at his own expense and
to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer's Representative.
The unit prices to be inserted by the Contractor in the billofquantities shall include
for preparing, cutting, packing, and transporting and testing cubes and cores required by
the Engineer or his Representative. In addition, for cores the price shall include for all
costs incurred in connection with drilling and making good to the satisfaction of the
T R IA L M IX E S 6286. T he Contractor shall m ake trial m ix es u sin g the aggregates proposed for the w ork
AND TRIAL to ensure that the concrete mix is sufficiently workable and that segregation of the
SLABS mix during transportation and placing does not occur. The composition of the trial mixes
shall comply with the requirements ofthe specification m allrespects.
The Contractor shall construct a trial slab of the same thickness as that to be laid in the
work, to the full width of the finishing machine, and at least 30 metres long. The slab shall
be constructed with the approved mix to be used in the work and in a position as shown on
the drawings or directed by the Engineer's Representative. Construction of the trial slab
shall be commenced sufficiently in advance of the main construction to enable cores to be
cut from the trial slab. Six cores shall be cut there from and shall be tested at 7 days, to
ensure that the mix as designed and the equipment proposed lo be used are both suitable to
achieve a sully compacted concrete of the specified strength, workability and surface
finish.
PLACING 6287. When concreting of a slab has commenced no cessation of the work will be
CONCRETE allowed until concreting of the slab is completed. In the event of mechanical break down
or adverse weather, however, the Engineer's Representative may permit the use of a
construction joint and the Contractor shall carry out any additional precautionary
measures stipulated athis own expense. Any ofthe followingjoints may be considered by
the Contractor:
(i) Constructionjoint
(iii) Expansionjoint
(iv) Warping joint
(v) Contractionjoint
The placing, compacting and finishing of the concrete shall be carried out as
rapidly as possible and operations shall be so arranged that in any vertical section, the
concrete shall be fully compacted throughout the whole depth and finished within 1 hour
from the time ofthe completion ofthe mixing ofthe firstbatch of concrete inthat section.
SPREADING AND 6288 For concrete slabs of200mm thickness or less the concrete may either:
COMPACTION (a) be spread and compacted in one layer, or
WITH A FINISHING
(b) be spread in two layers which shallbe compacted as one
MACHINE OF
REINFORCED
CONCRETE
When the concrete is spread in one layer a travellingjig or a type approved by the
ROAD SLABS Engineer's Representative shall be used to hold the reinforcement in position while the
concrete is being placed so after compaction the top cover to the reinforcement is as
specified. When the concrete isspread in two layers the firstlayer shallbe spread to such a
level that after subsequent compaction, itwill support the reinforcement at a level which
will ensure the specified top cover. The layer of reinforcement shall then be placed in
position and covered with concrete.
Whichever method of spreading is adopted, the concrete shall be struck offat the
appropriate surcharge and compacted true to line and level by one or more traverses ofthe
machine to give the slab the final thickness required. The compaction and surface finish
shallbe to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer's Representative.
For concrete slabs exceeding 2 0 0 m m in thickness, the concrete may either:
(a) be compacted in two layers, or
(b) be compacted in one layer, if it can be shown to the satisfaction of the
Engineer's
Representative that, with the plant and methods to be used, full compaction can be
achieved through out the fulldepth ofthe slab.
Ifthe concrete isto be compacted intwo layers, a layer ofconcrete shallbe spread,
struck off at the appropriate surcharge and compacted to a level that will ensure the
specified top cover to the reinforcement. The layer of reinforcement shall then be placed
in position and covered with concrete, which shall be struck off at the appropriate
surcharge and compacted true to line and level by one or more traverses ofthe machine to
give the slab the final thickness required. The compaction and surface finish shall be to
the satisfaction ofthe Engineer's Representative. Ifthe concrete isto be compacted in one
layer, the concrete shall be spread and the reinforcement placed in position by one of the
methods specified for slabs of2 0 0 m m thickness or less.
SPREADING AND 6289. A layer of concrete shall be spread, struck off at the appropriate surcharge and
COMPACTION compacted to a level that will ensure the specified top cover to the reinforcement. The
WITH A VIBRAT layer of reinforcement shall then be placed in position by hand, or by mechanical means
ING SCREED OF approved by the Engineer's Representative and shall be covered with concrete, which
REINFORCED shall be struck off at the appropriate surcharge and compacted true to line and level by
CONCRETE
ROAD SLABS
means ofa vibrating steel or hardwood screed. The compaction and surface finish shall be
to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer's Representative.
G E N E R A L S P E C IF IC A T IO N S (R O A D S A N D B R ID G E S )
SPREADINGAND COM
PACTION WITH A FIN- 6290. In exceptional circumstances where reinforced concrete slabs or haunches are
ISHING iMACHINE OR used as road bases, the concrete shall be spread, struck off at the appropriate surcharge
VIBRATING SCREED and compacted in a single layer by machine or by a vibratory steel or hardwood screed
ON CONCRETE SLABS and finished true to line and level to the required thickness. The compaction and surface
OR HAUNCMES USED finish shall be to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer's Representative.
AS ROAD BASES
CURING 6291. Immediately after completion of the finishing process, C O N C R E T E all exposed
CONCRETE surfaces of the concrete shall be protected from the sun an drying winds by frames
covered by canvas or other approved material until the concrete is sufficiently hard to
bear the weight of other protective material without the surface becoming marked. The
sides and ends ofthe frames shallbe covered to exclude drying currents ofair.
Thereafter all exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be protected and kept damp
by covering with suitable matting, sand or other approved material; ifsand isto be laid a
minimum depth of 50mm, will be required. The curing material shall be kept wet for a
period of at least seven days or longer as directed by the Engineer's Representative.
Alternatively, waterproof paper in accordance with the relevant clause of this
specification, or other approved sheeting may be used, and this shall be laid dry and kept
in contact with the surface of the concrete for at least seven days. The sheets shall be
lapped by at least 2 3 0 m m and shall be weighted down and well fastened along the edges
to prevent the wind blowing beneath.
As an alternative method of curing the surfaces may be protected, where

approved by the Engineer by treating with an approved resinous curing compound,
mechanically sprayed on to the surface ofthe finished concrete at a rate of4,5 - 6 litres/sq.
m as soon as itispossible to produce a membrane ofuniform thickness. Unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer, the compound shall be applied as soon as practicable after
completion of the laying and finishing of the concrete. Any groove over a point shall be
protected from the entry of curing liquid.
ACCURACY OF 6292. The concrete surface shall not show a departure from the true surface greater than
CONCRETE 3 m m when tested with a 3meter straightedge or template in the manner described for
SURFACE USING checking Base course finish.
FINISHING OR
VIBRATING Ifat any point tested the tolerance isoutside these limits, the Contractor may make
SCREED
not more than two additional passes of the vibrating beam of the finishing machine and
one furtherpass ofthe oscillating screed. The surface shall again be tested in the specified
manner whereupon if the irregularity so measured still exceeds 3 m m in 3 metres, the
Engineer's Representative shall direct that the concrete be removed to the level of the top
surface ofthe reinforcement or for un-reinforced concrete to a depth of 50mm. The area to
be removed shall be that represented by the length of the straight edge in the position of
measurement across the full width of the screed. The concrete so removed, shall not be
reused. Where the point of measurement in default is less than 5 metres jGrom a transverse
expansion joint, the whole area up to thejoint shallbe removed to the required depth.
Fresh concrete of specified quality shall be placed to the appropriate surcharge. It
shall then be compacted and finished in the normal manner and shall again be subject to
testfor accuracy offinish.
Although the concrete may be removed immediately following measurement of

the irregularity and while it is still wetv this^ shall not absolve the Contractor from
complying with the requirements of this.clause'if for any reason the concrete to be
removed has hardened.
The removal of concrete under this clause and itsreplacement shall be carried out
as directed by the Engineer's Representative to his approval and without extra charge. The
accuracy of surface required by this clause shall apply.also to the surface across any joint
whether formed initially or as a result of replacement of concrete arising out of the
requirements ofthis clause.
DERAL MINISTRY
In exceptional circumstances, where concrete road slabs are to be surfaced with

asphalt, coated macadam or dense tar surfacing, the requirements as to the finished
surface ofthe concrete shallbe those inthis clause except thatthe specifiedtolerance shall
be 6 m m in 3 metres instead of3nun in 3 metres.
TRAFFIC O V E R 6293. No vehicular traffic shall be allowed on the finished surface within 20 days of its
FINISHED W O R K completion where ordinary Portland cement is used or 10 days where rapid-hardening
cement is used and until the joints have been sealed unless otherwise authorized by the
Engineer.
TEST
SELECTION 6294. The selection and control tests to be carried out under this section of this
A N D C O N T R O L Specification shall be those specified to be carried out for concrete and reinforced
TESTS concrete work and shall be conducted in the manner stipulated in all relevant clauses of
this specification. In addition to the making, curing and testing of concrete test cubes as
control tests on concrete carriageways, the Engineer's Representative may order cores to
be cut from the finished work so as to check the state of compaction, the thickness of the
concrete and the position ofthe reinforcement. These cores shall be drilled and tested in
TRIAL 6295. (I) 6300. accordance with the provisions of B.S. 1881, or any amendment thereto
SECTIONS as directed by the Engineer. The contractor's attention is particularly drawn to the
necessity for carrying out trial sections with the proposed materials and plant prior to the
start of the main construction to determine the most efficient construction technique and
the suitability of the proposed materials and plant, as described by the relevant clause of
this specification.
P A R T (D) - S U R F A C I N G
(1) T W O C O A T BITUMINOUS SURFACE DRESSING
GENERAL 6300. In addition to all other relevant clauses of the conditions of contract and this
specification, the following shall be deemed to refer more particularly to two coat
bituminous surface dressing work, and shall be read in conjunction with same.
MATERIALS
MATERIALS 6301. Materials used in surface dressing are to be:
FOR SURFACE
DRES S I N G (I) C U T - B A C K B I T U M E N F O R P R I M E COAT:
Either a cut-back bitumen known as M.C-O, having a viscosity of75/150 seconds

at 25°C as measured by the furol visosimeter, or a cut-back bitumen known as M.C-1
having a viscosity of75/100 seconds at50°C as measured by the furol viscosimeter.
(ii) CUT-BACK COAT:BITUMEN F O R W E A R I N G

(For firstwearing coat: Either a cut-back bitumen having a viscosity of 100/150 seconds
at 40°C as measured by the standard tar viscometer, or a cutback bitumen having a
viscosity of 300/400 seconds viscosity at 40°C as measured by the standard tar
viscometer.
(iii) S T R A I G H T R U N B I T U M E N F O R W E A R I N G COAT:
Straight run bitumen for first wearing Coat shall have a penetration grade of 80/100 at
25 °C and a flashpoint (open) of 107°C (Minimum).
(iv) B L I N D I N G MATERIALS:
_ 論观 1漏 ttjjMMMtiiliKMteiiiiioiiiiTOOiriii — 丨丨丨
Sand for blinding prime coat surface shall consist of clean sharp sand of 6 m m maximum
size with not more than 2 0 % passing 600 [im sieve and shall be approved by the ngineer's
Representative. Alternatively grit arising from the crushing of the rock may be used
provided itis approved by the Engineer's Representative and the grading complies with
the specification for sand earlier discussed.
(v) M A T E R I A L S F O R S U R F A C E DRESSING:
Material for blinding the first wearing coat surface dressing on the carriageway,
shall consist of clean crushed rock or clean crushed or uncrushed gravel from an approved
source, as specified, graded into single sizes as defined in B.S. 63 latest edition or any
amendment thereto; “ Single Size Road Stone and Chippings” ，or in B.S. 1984 latest
edition —“ Single Size Gravel Aggregate for Roads”as appropriate. Two single sizes
19 m m and 1 2 m m shallbe used forblinding
on the carriageways, while 1 0 m m single size material may be allowed for non-trafficked
surfaces (like verges) but only with the written approval ofthe Engineer's Representative.
The grading of the material shall be carried out by means of an approved

mechanically operated screening plant, fitted with screens having square perforations
corresponding to the B.S. sieve size ofthe material itis intended to produce. Screens with
• circular perforations will be permitted, provided the diameter of the perforations is
increased so as to be equivalent to the corresponding B.S. sieve size.
The different sizes of materials shall be stored in separate stockpiles and shall not
be mixed. If the Engineer's Representative considers it necessary the blinding material
shall be washed before use. The aim of the Contractor shall be to obtain the maximum
production of 19 m m and 1 2 m m single sized material from the plant and either size may be
used in blinding a continuous section of surface dressing of not less than 2 kilometres in
length.
The crushing aggregate value of all material used for surface dressing shall not
exceed 30% and its abrasion testresult not more than 25%. All samples shall be tested as
described in B.S. 882. Sample of all blinding materials to be used in the works shall be
submitted to the Engineer's Representative for approval priorto being used.
Prior to the commencement of surface treatment works the Contractor will carry
out tests under the direction of the Engineer for the purpose of assessing the adhesive
qualities of the materials, which are to be used in the works. As a result of these tests the
Engineer may decide that it is necessary to use an additive to the bitumen for the
prevention of strippings of the stone surfacing, and the Contractor shall comply with the
directions ofthe Engineer inthisrespect. Strip testisrecommended.
BITUMINOUS 6302. Bitumen emulsion shall contain 30% of bitumen and shall comply in all other
EMULSION respects with B.S. 434 (latest edition and amendment thereto) except that the basic
bitumen used in the manufacture may have a penetration of 80/100. Bitumen emulsion
containing 30% of bitumen may be made by mixing thoroughly together in the correct
proportions emulsion complying with B.S. 434 (amendment thereto) with clean soft
water.

WORKMANSHIP
HEATING OF 6310. The cut-back bitumen shall be heated in a bitumen heater or complying with B.S.
CUT B A C K 167, which shall have a capacity commensurate with the output required. The heater shall
BITUMEN be so operated that the temperature of the bitumen applied to the road shall be within the
specified range. Accurate thermometers shall be incorporated in the heater to give a clear
indication of the bitumen temperature. Should the temperature be in excess of that
specified, the Engineer's Representative may direct that this overheated bitumen be
disposed of atthe Contractor's expense.
171
CUT-BACK 6311. The prime coat shall be of a medium curing cut-back bitumen of either
BITUMEN M.C.O.Grade or M.C.l Grade as specified. The actual grade to be used shall be
PRIME C O A T determined by the Engineer after carrying out site tests to determine the penetration of
each grade.
The bitumen shall be applied strictly in accordance with the provisions of the
relevant clauses of this specification on an approved Base course free from all dust and
loose material and slightly damped prior to applying the bitumen.
After spraying the surface shall be left for a minimum of three hours before
blinding is applied, or longer ifconsidered necessary by the Engineer's Representative to
effect the maximum penetration. Blinding consisting of sand or grit complying with the
provisions of the relevant clauses of this specification shall be applied so that a uniform
covering ofsufficientthickness isobtained to ensure thatno bare or fatpatches ofbitumen
are showing. The blinding shall then be rolled inwith not more than two passes of a roller.
S P RAYING OF 6312. The prime coat as specified shall be evenly applied to the prepared Base course by
CUT-BACK means of an approved pressure feed mobile distributor and complying with the
BITUMEN requirements of B.S. 1707: “ Binder Distributers” .In addition to the special requirements
PRIME C O A T detailed in section three of B.S. 1707. This test shall be carried out prior to using the
spraying plant for the first time on the contract, and subsequently at the discretion of the
Engineer's Representative. In the event of the quantity of bitumen in any trough or
troughs being found to lie outside the prescribed tolerance from the average, the faultyjet
shall be located and cleaned or replaced.
The bitumen shall be applied at a temperature in accordance with the Table given
below, and at a rate of spray of between 0 . 8 and 1 . 2 litres per square metre depending on
the texture ofthe surface. From the calibration charts and tests made on the distributor, the
spraying speed shall be determined to give the required rate of spray.
OR
A ltern atively rate o f spray m a y b e ch eck ed as fo llow s:
Check the initial and final quantity of cutback and record. The difference between
initial and final readings divided by the area sprayed can be used to check compliance
with approved rate ofspraying.
Note: Initialand final reading shalltake place atsame position.

TABLE VI-8 SEALING COATS TEMPERATURE OF APPLICATION
BITUMEN TEMPERATURE
GRADE O F APPLICATION
MIN MAX
M.C.O. 38°C 6 6 °C
M.C.l 54°C 79°C
The Contractor shall carry out trial sections, as directed by the Engineer's Representative
to determine the most suitable grade and rate of application ofbitumen.
Immediately before any spraying run is begun, the spray bar shall be tested by
allowing all the jet to discharge simultaneously for about half a minute with a slotted
metal tray placed beneath the spray bar whilst a visual inspection is made. Any jet which
is seen not delivering a uniform spray cone shall be cleaned or replaced. After testing the
spray bar, the distributor shall proceed with the spraying run without delay. N o spraying
shall be carried out when rain appears imminent, during rain, or after rain, until the
1=172
surface has dried. The contractor shall ensure that joints between spraying strips are
straight and without excess or deficiency of bitumen, which would cause either fattening
up or scabbing along thejoint.
The Contractor will be required to re-spray at his own expense any section which
shows deficiency of binder, or to b u m off and re-spray at his own expense any sections
which show an excess ofbinder and which subsequently fatup.
FIRST C O A T 6313. The wearing course of the surface dressing shall not be laid until at least 10 days
SURFACE after the application of the prime coat. During this period additional blinding sand shall be
DRES S I N G added if directed and brushed over the surface to prevent damage. After such period all
damaged or weak spots shall be cut out, refilled, re-compacted flush with the existing
surface, sealed and blinded as specified and re-rolled to the satisfaction of the Engineer's
Representative. After all repair work has been allowed sufficient time to harden, the
surface shall be swept clean of all loose material immediately prior to the application of
the wearing coat. Before spraying isbegun the surface shallbe dry.
Bitumen for the wearing coat of the surface dressing shall be an approved cutback
bitumen or straight run bitumen, as specified in the relevant clauses of this specification.
The bitumen as specified shall be evenly sprayed on the surface by means of an approved
mechanical spraying machine as specified. The temperature of the bitumen at the time of
spraying shall be in accordance with the table given below. The grade of bitumen to be
used shallbe determined by the Engineer.
T A B L E VI-9: B I T U M E N VISCOSITY A N D T E M P E R A T U R E O F APPLICATION

BITUM EN TEM PERATURE OF
VISC O SITY APPLICATION
S T V at 40°C MIN MAX
100/150 SECS. 132°C 160°C
300/400 SECS I49°C 177°C
The rate of spray of the bitumen shall be determined according to the type ofbase,
type and size ofchippings which are to be used as detailed in the table given below, and the
Contractor shall carry out trial sections, as directed by the Engineer's Representative to
determine the most appropriate rate ofapplication ofbitumen.
T A B L E VI-10: SIZE O F CHIPPING A N D R A T E O F S P R A Y O F B I T U M E N
NOMINAL
SIZE OF RATE OF SPRAY OF
CHIPPINGS BITUMEN LITRE/SQ.M
10mm 0.60-0.90
12mm. 0.75 - 1.20
20mm 1. 20- 1. 50
Immediately after spraying the surface shall be blinded with approved single size
chippings as specified. The chippings shall be distributed on the sprayed surface by means
of mechanical spreaders or tailboard gritters so that a single layer of closely packed
chippings is obtained. Any bare or lean areas shall be made good by a follow-on gang
using hand blinding.
Rolling shall be carried out immediately after the chippings have been spread with an
approved rollerweighing not less than 3,629 kilograms or more than 5,443 kilograms. The
minimum number of passes of the roller shall be used to press the chippings into the film
of bitumen. Two passes of the roller should generally be sufficient. Pneumatic tyred
rollers are preferable to smooth wheeled rollers.
Prior to the commencement of spraying a section of the road for the first coat, a 2 metres
wide paper strip shall be laid over the end of the previous section. The bitumen sprayer
shallthen commence itsrun from over thispaper strip.
FINAL 6314. The finished surface ofthe carriageway shall be left as O F smooth as possible and
SURFACE OF the accuracy of finish inthe C A R R I A G E W A Y longitudinal direction shallnot vary atany
CARRIAGEWAY P 〇int by more than 6 m m from a 3-metre straight edge, placed in any position on the
finished surface parallel to the centre line. The transverse profile shall conform to the
same accuracy, using a correctly shaped template instead ofthe straight edge. The surface
shall be evenly textured and show no lean or fat areas and shall not have any low or flat
spots where water will collect.
WET 6 3 1 5 . N o surfacin g w ork shall be don e in w e t w eather or w h en rain is im m inent. O nly
WEATHER dry chippings shallbe used.
REGULATION 6316. After laying the prime coat surfacing, barriers shall be erected to keep the area
OF TRAFFIC surfaced free from traffic. It shall remain free from traffic for such a period as the
O V E R PRIME Engineer's Representative may direct after which itshall be opened to traffic for not less
COATAND than 3 days and for not more than 7 days. During this period additional blinding material
SURFACE shall be added and all damage by traflEicmade good. After the application ofthe first coat
DRESSING surfacing, the area surfaced shall be kept free from traffic foratleast 24 hours.
The section shall then be opened to traffic and suitable traffic notices and barriers
shall be erected for a period of one week restricting traffic speeds to 25 KJPH. During this
period empty bitumen drums or other obstacles, which shall be well lighted, or
alternatively removed during the hours of darkness, shallbe placed on the newly surfaced
areas for the purpose of limiting the speed of traffic, and shall be moved to different
positions from day to day in such a way that the whole width ofthe surface receives equal
wear and compaction from the wheels ofvehicles.
TESTS
TESTS F O R 6320. The Contractor shall produce manufacturer's test certificate if requested,
otherwise the Engineer may require the Contractor to carry out the following tests as
BITUMEN described in “ standard methods for testing petroleum and itsproducts”published by the
Institute ofPetroleum, 26 Portland Place, London W. 1.
Penetration ofbitumen IP.49/56
Soluble bitumen content: bitumen and asphalt IP.47/55
Flash-point by means ofthe Cleveland apparatus IP.36/55
Specific gravity IP.59/57. Method C.
Specific method gravity ofliquids or solids - pycnometer method
Specific gravity of liquids or solids- Method F.
The determination of viscosity by the standard viscosimeter or the furol
viscosimeter may also required by the Engineer.
The cost of carrying out these tests ifrequired by the Engineer shall be deemed to
be included in the tendered ratesand prices.
TESTS FOR 6321. In determining the suitability of aggregates for use as road surfacing material the
AGGREG A T E S Engineer may require the Contractor to carry out any of the test specified in B.S. 812 -
ROADSTONE Mineral aggre-gates sand and fillers; B.S.882, 201 - Concrete aggregates from natural
A N D CHIPPINGS sources» B.S. 1881 - Methods of testing concrete; B.S. 1200 - Building sands from
* natural sources; B .S.63 - S in g le-sized roadstones and ch ip p in g s .The co st of carrying out
these tests ifrequired by the Engineer shall be deemed to be included in the tendered rates
and prices.
TESTS F O R 6322. The Contractor shall provide a set of 5 0 m m wide trough as described inAppendix
BINDER A of B.S. 1707 and shall carry out depot tray test A in the presence of the Engineer's
DISTRIBUTORS Representative to demonstrate that the lateral distribution is in accordance with B.S.
1707.
This test shall be carried out prior to using the spraying plant for the first time on
the contract and subsequently at the discretion of the Engineer's Representative. In the
event of the quantity of bitumen in any trough or troughs being found to lie outside the
prescribed tolerance from the average, the faultyjet shall be located, cleaned or replaced
and a farthertestcarried out ifrequired by the Engineer's Representative.
TESTS F O R 6323. The Contractor shall test the rate of application of bitumen at regular intervals, as
RATE OF directed by the Engineer’
s Representative by means of the “ tray test”as described in Road
APPLICATION Note No. 11: ''Binder distributors for surface dressing55, issued by the Road Research
Laboratory,
England.

(II) BITUMINOUS M A C A D A M SURFACINGS
GENERAL 6330. In addition to all other relevant clauses of the conditions of contract and this
specification, the following shall be deemed to refer more particularly to bituminous
macadam surfacing work and shall be read in conjunction with same.
MATERIALS
BITUMEN 6331. The manufacture an grading of the bitumen macadam shall be in accordance with
MACADAM B.S. 1621 t£bitumen Macadam with crushed rock or slag aggregate except where stated
GENERAL otherwise inthese specifications.
BITUMEN 6332. (A) A G G R E G A T E Coarse aggregate shall be hard clean and durable crushed
MACADAM igneous rock from a source to be approved by the Engineer and in accordance with
MATERIALS B.S.812. •
Fine aggregate shall be quarry fines produced from the crushing ofigneous rock in
a secondary plant. They are to consist of hard non-absorbent moderately sharp particles
and to be free from clay, loam, and other foreign matter.
Iffillerisused itshall consist of finely ground particles ofhydrated lime, Portland
cement or crushed rock and at least 75% ofthe fillershallpass 75 jim sieve.
(B) B I N D E R The binder shall be a straight-run bitumen with penetration ranging

from 40/50,60/70,80/100 at25°C.
BITUMEN MACA- 6 3 3 3 .R ep resen tative samples of all materials proposed for u se Under these
D A M APPROVAL specifications shall be submitted to the Engineer by the Contractor at the Contractor's
OF MATERIALS expense for test and for preparation of trial mixes to determine job-mix formula. The
Engineer shall make tests of the proposed materials and inform the Contractor ifthe tests
indicate compliance with the specification.
BITUMEN MACA- 6334. The grading of the combined aggregate to be used in the respective mix for each
D A M COMPOSI- course shall be within the limits stated below and when plotted graphically with the
TION OF MIXES particle size to a logarithmic scale shall lie on a smooth curve within the envelope ofthese
limits.
*175
T A B L E VI-11: G R A D I N G E N V E L O P E F O R B I T U M I N O U S B I N D E R C O U R S E
5 5 M M BINDER COURSE
SIEVE SIZE % PASSING

38mm 1 0 0
25mm 50-100
12.5mm 26-50
6 m m 18-30
2 .8 m m 1 2 - 2 2
1.25mm 8-17
600^m 7-14
300îm 4-11
150pm 2-8
75}xm 0-5
BITUMEN 4 - 5.5% B Y WT. O F A G G R E G A T E O R A S P E R DE S I G N
TABI.E VI-12: G R A D I N G E N V E L O P E F O R B I T U M I N O U S W E A R I N G C O U R S E
4 0 M M WEARING COURSE
SIEVE SIZE % PASSING

25mm 100
19mm 95-100
12.5mm 70-90
9.5mm 55 -75
6.4mm 40-60
3.2mm 25-40
1.25mm 15-30
60〇n m 12-24
300p.m 8-18
150jim 5 -12
75|iim 3-6
BITUMEN 4 - 7 % BYWT. OF A G G R E G A T E O R A S PERDESIGN
The exact job-mix formulae will depend on the nature and grading of the
aggregate and the type ofbitumen. The exactjob-mix formulae for the respective courses
will be determined by the Engineer.
WORKMANSHIP
BITUMEN 6340. The materials shall be mixed in an approved mixer of batch or continuous type
MACADAM from which mixed materials can be delivered and laidhot.
MIXING PLANT
The mixing plant shall be maintained in good working condition and shall be
subject to inspection by the Engineer's Representative. The weighing，measuring and
recording apparatus shall be checked at frequent intervals and maintained in perfect
adjustment throughout the contract.
BITUMEN 6341. The aggregate and binder shall be heated separately, aggregate to a temperature
MACADAM range of 121 °C —149°C and the binder to 135°C —163°C. The respective temperatures of
MIXING the aggregate and the binder are to be within 14°C on each other atthe time ofmixing.
176
Prolonged and excessive heating of the materials is to be avoided and particular

care isto be taken with binders. A dry mixing period of at least 10 seconds - shall precede
the addition ofbitumen to the mix. Wet mixing shall only continue as long as isnecessary
to obtain a thorough blend.
Aggregates, including fillers, ifany shall be thoroughly dry immediately before

mixing. When moisture is detected in the mixed materials all aggregates in the hot bins
are to be removed and replaced intheirrespective stock piles.
BITUMEN M A C 6342. The mixed materials shall be transported from mixing plant to site in clean metal
ADAM lined vehicles. Every precaution is to be taken to avoid segregation of mixed materials
TRANSPORTING and to ensure thatthey do not become contaminated with dust or foreign matter.
MIXED MATERIAL
Should any load be wetted excessively by rain, they will be rejected by the
BITUMEN M A C 6343. Before the macadam is laid on the newly constructed base course, the surface will
ADAM be inspected by the Engineer's Representative and testing using an Engineer's level 3
PREPARATION metre straight edge or any other means to ensure that the surface conforms with the
OF SURFACE requirements of this specification. Any irregularities in the surface shall be corrected to
PRIOR TO LAYING the satisfaction ofthe Engineer's Representative before surfacing work will be allowed to
proceed.
BITUMEN 6344. After mixing the material must not be reheated other than by the means provided
MACADAM in or on the spreading machine.
LAYING
Material must not be laid when the surface on which it is to be placed is wet or
when rain appears imminent.
Immediately prior to laying the bitumen macadam, the surface of the Base course
shall be swept clean of all loose and caked dirt. The macadam as specified shall be laid by
approved means to be compacted thickness of 5 0 m m binder course and 6 5 m m wearing
course, subject to design.
Itis essential that the material be laid at a temperature not less than 107°C and not
more than 149°C. The Contractor is to provide at each spreader and finisher a suitable
thermometer for testing the temperature of the material as itisbeing spread and isto take
such temperature reading continually and record them hourly throughout each day's
laying. This record shall be available for inspection by the Engineer or his Representative
who will himselfmake such additional temperature checks, as he considers desirable.
BITUMEN 6345. The materials shall be laid by approved mechanical spreaders and finishers. The
MACADAM spreader and finisher shall be in good mechanical condition and shall be capable of laying
SPREADER O R to the required width and profile without causing segregation, dragging, burning,
FINISHER irregularities or other surface defects and itshall be capable of being operated at a speed
consistent with the character of the mixture and the thickness of the course being laid, so
as to produce a surface having a uniform density and surface texture. When not operated-
on side forais the spreader will employ equalizing runner evener arams or other automatic
compensating devices to adjust the profile and confine the edges of the course to true
lines.
The mixer capacity and the operating speed ofthe spreader shall be so adjusted as
to ensure continuous laying and to avoid intermittent stopping of the spread as far as is
practicable.
HA N D SPREADING 6346. Hand spreading will not be permitted for general work, but will only be allowed
NOT A L L O W E D for filling localized depressions, or as directedby the Engineer or his Representative.
lEwXVe 31 — Wl— — M m H W M W — — MM— — 177
■
丨
酬 - .
...
....
..
...
...
...
...
...
..._
丨丨 — i/
Where hand spreading and tamping is permitted the mixed material is to be

dumped on delivery upon an existing hard clean surface or on approved metal sheets
outside the area where itisto be spread and shall be distributed in to place immediately by
hot shovels. It shall be spread with hot rakes in a uniformly loose layer to the full depth
required.
BITUMEN 6347. As soon after laying as conditions permit and when the material is still at a
MACADAM temperature of not less than 95°C, the materials will be uniformly compacted with 3
ROLLING wheeled smooth rollers by rolling in a longitudinal direction, progressing gradually from
side to centre of work and so lapping the rolling as to obliterate all roller marks on
completion. A sufficient number of rollers shall be employed to ensure that the entire
surfacing as laidiscompacted atthe correct temperature.
At least two rollers are to be provided, one isto be three-wheeled and isto have a
weight per centximetre width of rear wheel ofbetween 44 and 63 kilograms. The second
roller shall preferably be a pneumatic-tyred roller and shall be ofmultiple-axle, multiple-
wheel type with smooth-tread pneumatic tyres of equal size staggered on the axles atsuch
spacings and overlaps as will provide uniform compactive pressure for the fall
compacting width of the roller when operating. Oscillation of the wheels, ifprovided,
shall be in vertical plane only. The pneumatic tyre roller shall be capable (A) of being
ballasted sufficiently to bring itsloaded weight to at least 2lA times its own weight. Gross
weight to be preferably 18-21 Tonne and (B) of exerting compactive ground pressures of
at least 5.6 kilograms per square centimetre (5.6 - 8.4 Kg/sq.cm). For the pneumatic
rollers compaction should be done within 65°C - 80°C range.
All roller wheels are to be kept slightly moist by the use of water tanks and spray
bars attached to the machines to prevent the material being picked up or disturbed.
Rollers must not be left standing on the new surface while there is any risk of it being
damaged thereby.
The sequence ofrolling operation shall be:
(a) roller; breakdown rollingwith the 3-wheeled smooth

(b) intermediate rollingwith the high pressure tyred pneumatic roller; and
(C) the final rollin g w ith a steel w h eeled tandem roller.
Rolling will continue until the specified density is obtained. This can be checked
by using non-destructive method i.e.Nuclear gauge apparatus.
FIELD DENSITY 6348. Density tests of the bitumen macadam surfacing after compaction shall be taken
OF COMPACTED from the trial area and later at intervals throughout the course of the work and compared
BITUMEN with the density of control specimens taken from the same material before laying, all in
MACADAM accordance with the following procedure:
(A) A sample of mixed material will be taken from a lorry before the material
is delivered to the spreader, and three control specimens shall be made and their density
measured by the Engineer's Representative by the marshall method.
The average of two close results from the specimens taken as the control density
ofthatparticularbatch.
(B) The pavement will be marked with the batch numbers to show where the
lorry load of material (from which the sample was taken) is laid, so that field density
samples can be taken for comparison with the control specimens.
(C) After completion of rolling, two samples are to be cut from each area so
marked inpositions indicated by the Engineer's Representative.
(D) The samples shall be taken in accordance with part 1 section 3 of B.S. 598
and the density calculated by weighing in air and weighing in water in accordance with
part 6 of B.S. 598. The average of two close results will be taken as the density of the
compacted material inthat area.
(E) The field density will not be less than 100% of the control density determined as
above.
When an approved rolling procedure has been established, each course will be
sampled in accordance with the above atthe rate ofone sample area for each 1670 sq.m or
one sample area every four hours (whichever is the more frequent). Material which does
not achieve the required density will either be cut out and replaced or be further
compacted untilthe required density isobtained.
TRIAL A R E A S 6349. The first 30 metres of the approved bituminous macadam, which is laid by the
spreader, shall be regarded as a trial area in order to establish a rolling procedure, which
will produce the required field density.
At least four samples ofthe material afterrolling will be taken in accordance with
part 1 section 3 of B.S. 598 (1958), when the work is at least 12 hours old in order to
determine the degree ofcompaction.
If the required specified density determined in accordance with the foregoing

clause is not obtained, the field rolling procedure will be changed so as to achieve the
desired field density and the trialarea will be cut out and replaced to the satisfaction ofthe
Engineer orhis Representative.
BITUMEN MACA- 6350. (A) The surfacing will be finished to the required levels shown on the
D A M FINISHED drawings. The finished surface shall be of such smoothness that when tested with a 3
LEVELS metre straight edge placed anywhere in a longitudinal direction on the surface, there shall
not be a gap greater than 5 m m between the bottom of the straight edge and the surface of
the pavement anywhere along the pavement. Any deviation exceeding 5 m m will be
corrected atthe Contractor's expense by scarifying, cutting out and removing allloosened
materials, adding new materials as required, re-shaping and rolling. No materials
loosened by scarifying and cutting out will be left in position or otherwise re-used. The
surface shall be similarly tested and corrected ifnecessary in a transverse direction using
a correctly shaped template instead ofa straight edge.
(B) It is essential that the surface of the road is free from waves, any
depression which retain water on the surface are immediately to be corrected as described
above to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer's Representative.
bitumen m a c a - 6351. All joints shall be vertical, properly formed to the correct line and level; if
D A M JOINTS necessary, they shall be cut back to achieve this. The exposed edges of the bitumen
macadam already laid shall be coated thinly with bitumen emulsion containing 30% to
50% bitumen before laying adjoining work. All joints on completion shall present the
same texture, density and smoothness as other sections ofthe surface.
Surfaces and projections which the new paving will abut shall be thoroughly
cleaned and coated with bitumen emulsion containing 3 0 % -50% bitumen. The new
paving shall then be tamped around and against the projection to such a depth that, on
completion of compaction the finished surface ofthe wearing course is level with the top
ofthe projection.
BITUMEN MACA- 6352. Should the new bitumen macadam be dragged, churned up, become soft, show
D A M D A M A G E D signs of segregation, show that stripping ofthe binder from the aggregate has occun'ed, or
WORK suffer other damage during or afterbeing laid,the Contractor will remove the damaged or
faulty work athis own expense and replace with fresh material, laid and compacted to the
correct level to the approval ofthe Engineer's Representative.
(CLAUSES 6353-6359 INCLUSIVE NOTUSED)

TESTS
BITUMEN 6360. The Contractor shall provide equipment, labour and such trained staffas may be
MACADAM required by the Engineer's Representative for carrying out the following tests on
TESTS materials to be used in the manufacture of bitumen macadam in accordance with the
following standards:
(A) Grading tests on aggregates in accordance with B.S. 812: “

sampling and
testing ofmineral - aggregates and fillers”
.
(B) Determination of binder content materials in accordance with hot of mixed

extraction method B T 1 described in B.S. 598: -“ Sampling and Examination of
Bituminous Road Mixtures” .
The Contractor isrequired to comply to the requirements of B.S. 598.
FREQUENCY OF 6361. Aggregates shall be sampled and tested at source, on delivery to the mixing plant
TESTS: BITUMEN and after each extraction testand the result ofeach test shallbe submitted to the Engineer's
MACADAM Representative within 24 hours of the sample being taken. The number of such tests shall
be adequate for proper control of the materials and shall not be limited to those made on
specific instructions of the Engineer's Representative. Samples of mixed materials shall
be taken and tested during the first day's mixing and throughout the work to confirm that
the grading and binder contents are as specified.
Such samples shall be taken either atthe place and time ofmixing or atthe place of
laying both may be necessary as the results will complement one another as directed by
the Engineer's Representative. Samples for testing shall also be cut from the surfacing as
laidwhen directed by the Engineer's Representative.
The frequency of sampling mixed materials shall be at least once per day or once
for each 90 tonne of material mixed which ever is the more frequent. The result of each
test on mixed materials shall be submitted to the Engineer's Representative within 24
hours of the sampling and any adjustments shown to be necessary shall be made
immediately. Until such adjustments have been made and until a certificate to the effect
has been forwarded to the Engineer's Representative no further batches ofmixed material
shallbe made.
I N D E P E N D E N T 6362. Independent sampling and testing may be carried out by the Engineer's
TESTS：BITUMEN Representative throughout the contract period and for this purpose the Contractor shall
MACADAM grant free access to the mixing plant and storage depots, supply materials and provide
every facilityforthe Engineer's Representative to take samples whenever required.
In particular, throughout the contract, the Engineer's Representative will carry out
control tests on the plant mix as he requires.
The Engineer's Representative shall be supplied with all necessary equipment,
labour and materials to perform any additional testshe may wish to carry out.
MANUFACTURER'S 6363. A certificate is to be obtained from the suppliers with each consignment of
CERTIFICATE FOR bitumen delivered, stating the grade of material being supplied, and these certificates are
BITUMEN tobe handed tothe Engineer's Representative.
..... ■■丨晒 ..... ......
CONTRACTOR TO 6364. Notwithstanding the production of any manufacturer's test certificates if the
TEST MATERIALS: Engineer so requires, the ConContractor shall arrange for the testing in an approved
BITUMEN manner of all materials used throughout the contract to ensure that they are up to the
MACADAM
standard specified, i.e. Aggregates, bitumen and such other materials as specified or
decided by the Engineer. The Contractor shall arrange for the testing of materials
incorporated in the works to ensure that they have been manufactured or supplied as
specified, or as ordered by the Engineer.
NOTICE OF 6365. Whenever the Contractor intends to carry out any of the above tests, he shall give
TESTS: BITUMEN the Engineer's Representative sufficient notice to enable him, should he so wish, to be
MACADAM present during the test. The Engineer's Representative shall be given the results in writing
of all tests, as soon as they are available, and in any case not later than 24 hours after
samples have been taken.
SAMPLES TO BE 6366. Whenever the Contractor takes samples for testing, and where so directed he isto
IN DUPLICATE take duplicate samples and hand them to the Engineer's Representative. Such samples are
to be properly packed and labelled as directed.
CO S T OF TESTS: 6367. The cost of these tests including the provision of samples will be deemed to have
BITUMEN been included inthe unitprice for bitumen macadam.
MACADAM
(III) ASPHA L T I C C O N C R E T E
GENERAL 6370. This item consists of hot mixed, hot laid asphaltic concrete composed of mineral
aggregate and asphalt cement thoroughly mixed in an approved plant until all aggregate
particles are uniformly coated with asphalt.
The asphaltic concrete shall be laid in two courses - surface and binder courses,
with or without wedge or levelling course or any combination of these as shovm on the
drawings. Unless specified in volume III or on the drawings, the compacted thickness of
each course shall not be less than 6 0 m m for the binder and 4 0 m m for the surface course,
the compacted thickness of any single constructed course shall not exceed 7 5 m m for
binder or levelling course or 6 0 m m for surface course.
Priming of untreated base and application of tack coat to existing paved surfaces
shallbe done as follows:
For Priming Base:

M C - 0 or M C - 1 shallbe used atthe rate of 1.0 - 2.0 Litres/sq.m
For Applying Bitumen emulsion,
Tack Coat: quick breaking type applied at the rate of 0.25 - 0.70 Litres/sq.m
Tack coat shall be applied in all areas to take the binder course ifwarranted by surface
conditions and directedby the Engineer's Representative.
All materials and method of preparation and construction shall conform with the
requirements of these specifications. The finished pavement shall conform in allrespects
with the lines, grades, dimensions and cross sections shown on the drawings or as may be
otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer.
MATERIAL 6371. The materials used shall be those prescribed for the several parts which constitute
the finished work and shall conform with allthe requirements for such materials as set out
herein.
r --:.::P B 3 |L . . . . . . . . . 曜涵 … :::為s 181

(A) AGGREGATE
(I) Coarse aggregate shall be the portion of the aggregate retained on the No. 5 m m
opening sieve and shall be hard, clean and durable crushed igneous rock from a source to
be approved by the Engineer. The crushed stone shall be free from dirt or other
objectionable matter.
The coarse aggregate when testedby the methods described in B.S. 812 shall have
properties not exceeding the following values on Table VI-13.
T A B L E VI-13: A G G R E G A T E SPECIFICATION F O R D E N S E B I T U M E N
M A C A D A M , ASPHALTIC B A S E A N D W E A R I N G C O U R S E S
Pavem ent A ggregate A b sorp tion

C rushing Flakiness
C ourse Value Index F actor
Dense Bitumen
30 35 1.5
M a c a d a m Base
Dense Bitumen
Macadam
30 35 0.5
Wearing-
Course
Asphaltic
Concrete Base- 30 35 0.5
Course
Asphaltic
Concrete
30 35 0.5
Wearing
Course
(II) Fine aggregate shall be the portion of the aggregate passing the No. 5 m m
opening sieve and shall be quarry fines produced from the sieve and shall be quarry fines
produced from the crushing of igneous rock. They shall be composed of clean, tough,
rough surfaced and angular particles, free from lumps, or ball of clay, loam and other
deleterious substances,
(II) Mineral filler shall consist of finely ground particles of hydrated lime,
Portland cement or other non-plastic mineral matter approved by the Engineer.
Itshall be free from foreign or other objectionable material, and shall meet the following
grading requirements.
TABLE VI-14: SPECIFICATION F O R M I N E R A L FILLER
SIEVE % B Y W E I G H T PASSING
300jim 100
2(%m 95-100
75 fitn 85-100
(B) B I T U M I N O U S M A T E R I A L
T A B L E VI-15: Q U A L I T Y O F ASPHALTIC C E M E N T
PROPERTY ASPHALT C E M E N T
80-100 60-70
PEN PEN
1.01 -
Specific gravity @ 25°C 1.00-1.05
1.06
Softening point R and B (°C) 45 - 52 48 - 56
Penetration @ 25oC---0- 1 m m 80- 1 0 0 60-70
Ductility @ 25 °C---c m
1 0 0 1 0 0
minimum
M i n i m u m loss on heating for 5
hours at 163 0C % by weight--- 0.5 0.2
max
Solubility in C S 2 % by
wt...min 99 99
Drop in penetration after
2 0 2 0
heating % original —max.
Flash point (open cut) °C min 225 250
Ash. % by wt. m a x 0.5 0.5
(III) Bitumen emulsion for track coat shall be emulsion - quick breaking type
containing 30% 50% bitumen.
(IV) Cutback bitumen forpriming shallbe M C - 0 or M C - 1.
A P P R O V A L O F 6372. Representative samples of all materials proposed for use under these
MATERIALS specifications shall be submitted to the engineering by the Contractor at the Contractor's
expense for test and for the preparation of trial mixes to determine the job mix formula.
The Engineer shall make tests of the proposed materials and inform the Contractor ifthe
tests indicate compliance with the specifications.
Suitable sizes of aggregate shall be stored in bins at each point where bituminous
materials are mixed. The bins shall be in such numbers and of such capacities as to ensure
that an uninterrupted supply of all the necessary sizes of aggregates is available at the
mixer.
If aggregates are stockpiled prior to their transference to the bins, the stockpiles
shall be formed on concrete floors laid to falls sufficient to permit drainage at the base of
the stockpiles. Aggregates shall be handled to and from the stockpiles in a manner such
thatthey are not contaminated by the ground or by extraneous matter and also in a manner
such that segregation is prevented. In as much as possible the bins shall be covered to
prevent dampness ofaggregate by rain.
Coarse and fine aggregates and aggregates from different sources shall be
stockpiled separately and ifaggregates of different grading or from different sources are
stockpiled in close proximity, the stockpiles shall be separated by partitioning. All
aggregates produced or handled by hydraulic methods and allwashed aggregates shall be
stockpiled under cover for draining for at least24 hours before use. Material used as filler
shall be stored in dry conditions to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative. N o
material shall be used until it has been approved by the Engineer. Permission to use
material shall not be construed as an approval of its source nor any acceptance as
continued acceptance.
SAMPLING 6373. (1) The Contractor shall provide equipment, labour and such trained staffas
may be required by the Engineer for carrying out the following tests on material to be used
inthe manufacture ofhot asphaltic concrete in accordance with the following standards:
!: G E N E R A L S P E C IF IC A T IO N S (R O A D S A N D B R T D G E S )
(A) Grading tests on aggregates in accordance with the latest B.S. 812 -
“Sampling and testing ofmineral aggregate and fillers”
(B) Determination of binder content of mixed materials in accordance with

either
(I) Hot extraction method BT1 described in B.S.598 (1974) - ''Sampling and
examination of bituminous road mixtures” . The Contractor is to comply witf the
requirements ofB. S. 598 and to the need ofproviding results in duplicate.
OR
(II)By reflux extractor method -
(2) Aggregates shall be sampled and tested on delivery to the mixing plant and after
each extraction test and the result of each test shall be submitted to the Engineer or his
Representative within 24 hours ofthe sample being taken.
The num ber of such tests shall be adequate for proper control of the materials and
shall not be limited to those made on specific instructions of the Engineer or his
Representative. Samples ofmixed materials shallbe taken and tested during the firstday's
mixing and throughout the work to confirm that the gradings and binder contents are as
specified. Such samples shall be taken either atthe place and time ofmixing or atthe place
of laying as directed by the Engineer or his Representative. Samples for testing shall also
be cut from the surfacing as laid when directed by the Engineer or his Representative.
The frequency of sampling mixed materials shall be at least once per day or once
for each 90 tonne ofmaterial mixed whichever isthe more frequent. The result of each test
on mixed materials shall be submitted to the Engineer or his Representative within 24
hours of the sampling and any adjustments shown to be necessary shall be made
immediately. Until such adjustments have been made and until a certificate to the effect
has been forwarded to the Engineer or his Representative no further batches or mixed
material shallbe made.
(3) Independent sampling and testing may be carried out by the Engineer
throughout the contract period and for this purpose the Contractor shall grant free access
to the mixing plant and storage depots, supply materials and provide very facility for the
Engineer or his Representative to take samples whenever required. In particular,
throughout the contract, the Engineer will carry out control tests on the plant mix material
using the marshall test apparatus.
(4) A certificate is to be obtained from the suppliers with each consignment of

bitumen delivered, stating the grade of material being supplied, and these certificates are
tobe handed to the Engineer's Representative.
(5) Ifthe Engineer so requires, the Contractor shall arrange for the testing in
an approved manner of all materials used throughout the contract to ensure that they are
Up to the S tan d ard s p e c ifie d , i.e. Aggregates, bitumen and such other materials as
s p e c ifie d or d e c id e d by the Engineer. The Contractor shall arrange for ihc testing of
materials ：incorporated in the works; to ensure that they have been manufactured as
sp ecified , or as ordered by the Engineer.
(6 ) Whenever the Contractor intends to carry out any of the above tests, he
shall give the Engineer's Representative sufficient notice to enable him, should he so
wish, to be present during the test.
(7) Wlienever the Contractor takes samples for testing, and where so directed,
he is to take duplicate samples and hand them to the Engineer's Representative. Such
samples are to be properly packed and labelled as directed.
FED1RALMINISTRY OF POW ER,ÔRKS & HOUSING .
...
...
...
.- rl84
I oi c o n ie ；
rtn u i\j> (KUADS AND BRIDGES)
(8 ) The Engineer's Representative shall be given the results in writing of all

tests, as soon as they are available, and in any case not later than 24 hours after samples
have been taken.
(9) The Engineer shall be supplied with all necessary equipment, material
and labour to perform any additional tests he may wish to carry out himself.
(10) The cost of these tests including the provision of samples, will be deemed
to have been included in the bill of quantities under the a p p ro p ria te item .
C O M P O S I T I O N 6374. Asphaltic concrete prepared under these specifications shall be composed of

O F MIX E S graded aggregates arid asphalt cement within the limits set forth below. When plotted
graphically, the aggregate grading shall lieon a smooth curve within the envelope.
T A B L E VI-16: G R A D I N G E N V E L O P E F O R B I N D E R A N D W E A R I N G C O U R S E S
% BY W EIG HT PASSING
SIEVE SIZE 40m m —65mm 40m m —65mm
BINDER-COURSE W EA RIN G -CO UR SE
3 1.8m m 100 100

25 m m 90 - 100 100
1 9 .0 m m 70-90 100
12.5 m m 55 - 80 85 - 100
9.5 m m 4 7 -7 0 75 -9 2
6 .4 m m 40 -6 0 65 - 82
2 .8 m m 2 7 -45 5 0-65
1.2 5 m m 20-3 4 36-51
600am 14 -2 7 26 -4 0
300am 8 - 20 18 - 30
150am 5 - 15 13-24
75 a m 2 -7 7 - 14
B itu m e n C o n te n t % b y
5 -8 .0
w e ig h t o f a g g r e g a te
Asphaltic concrete mixes designed by the Contractor prior to the selection of Job-
Mixes (see below) shall have combined aggregate gradings approximating as closely as
possible to the plotted averages of the respective limits of grading specified above and
shall comply with the following requirements.
T A B L E VI-17：PROPERTIES O F C O M P A C T E D ASHPALTIC CONCRETE

Property Base-course Wearing-course
O ptim um Bitumen Content 4.5 % -6.5 % 5.0& -8.0%
Stability, not less than 3.5KN 3.5KN
Flow 2m m - 6mm 2m m -4m m
Voids in total mixture 3% -8% 3 % -5%
Voids filled with bitumen 65% -72% 7 5 % -82%
The exactjob-mix formula will depend on the nature and grading ofthe aggregate
and the grade of bitumen and will be determined by the Engineer using the marshall
method of mix design. For this purpose the Contractor shall supply to the Engineer
without charge adequate samples (in separate containers) of coarse and fine aggregates
and bitumen, which he intends to use. The Engineer will, after testing, furnish the
Contractor with the exactjob-mix formula, which will be within the specified limits.
Before any asphaltic concrete is laid, the Contractor shall produce sufficient dry
mixes in the plant and carry out sieve analysis to ensure that the correct grading isbeing
obtained. In addition he shall produce a number of trial mixes to which the specified
quality of bitumen has been added. He will then cany out extraction tests on this material
and further sieve analysis on the aggregate in accordance with clause 6373 of the
specification. The results of these tests on both the dry and wet mixes shall be approved
by the Engineer before any surfacing islaidinthe permanent works.
JOB MIXFORTvIULADEFINED:
The job-mix formula is the single definite percentage of aggregate passing each
required sieve size, a single definite bitumen content to be added to the aggregate, a
single definite temperature at which the mixture is to be emptied from the mixer and a
single definite temperature at which the mixture is to be delivered on the road. Unless
specifically changed in writing by the Engineer, the maximum permissible variation
from thejob-mix formula shall be as follows:
T A B L E VI-18: PERMISSIBLE VARIATION P E R C E N T B Y W E I G H T O F T O T A L

MIX
PERMISSIBLE
VARIATION%
B Y W E I G H T OF
TOTAL MIX
Passing sieve 9.5mm and layer 士5%
Passing sieve 9.5mm -600p m 士4 %
Passing sieve 600p. m -150(.im 土3 %
Passing sieve 150|im-75|im 士 0 .1 %
Bitumen c o n te n t 土 0.3%
Notes:
Temperature ofMixture when emptied from mixer 145°C 士 50C
Temperature ofMixture
on delivery on the road 130oC ± 5 ° C
The job-mix fomiula is liable to alteration by the Engineer throughout the

progress of the work but at all times it will be within the specified limits.
PREP A R A T I O N 6375. (1) P R E P A R A T I O N O F A G G R E G A T E S
The coarse and fine aggregate shall be separately fed by feeders to the cold
elevator or elevators in their proper proportions and at a rate to perniit correct and
uniform temperature control ofthe heating and drying operation.
The aggregate shall be heated before entering the mixer to a temperature range of
120°C - 149°C. All aggregates in the bins of a temperature that will produce a mix
outside the limits stated above or that contain moisture or expanding gases to cause
“Foaming”in the mixture， shallbe removed and replaced intheirrespective stockpiles.
^3186
All aggregates that have been overheated shall be cooled before being deposited
in the feeder. All unsuitable aggregates that may be in the weigh box or that become
combined inthe process of'Tulling55 the bins shallbe discarded.
The screening efficiency shall be maintained within the limits set forth in Clause
6383. When these limits are exceeded, the material shall be discarded and the cause for
such condition shallbe corrected.
(2) PREPARATION OF ASPHALT C E M E N T
The asphalt cement shall be delivered to the asphalt bucket at a temperature

between 135°C and 163°C. All asphalt cement heated beyond 177°C at the plant before
mixing or heated beyond 1630C during the mixing shall rejected. N o asphalt shall be
used while “foaming”.
(3) PREPARATION OF M I X TURES
The exact proportions within the limits specified for each mix shall be regulated
so as to produce a satisfactory mixture with allparticles uniformly coated with bitumen.
Wh e n batch mixing is used, the aggregate at the temperature specified, shall be

mixed dry for a minimum of 15 seconds; the asphalt cement shall then be added in an
evenly spread sheet over the full length of the mixer. The mixing shall be continued for a
minimum of 30 to 45 seconds for allmixtures.
The “ initial time of mixing”shall be the interval of time between the opening of
the weigh box and the opening of the mixer gate. The number of batches produced in one
hour from the mixer shallnot exceed 60.
Whe n continuous mixing is used the dry aggregates shall be thoroughly mixed
before the addition of the asphalt cement. The asphalt cement shall then be added in an
evenly spread sheet over the full width of the mixer by means of spray bars. The mixing
shall be continued for a period of not less than 30 seconds. The “ total time for mixing”
shall be the ratio of the “
dead load”in the mixer to the kilograms per minute delivered.
The kilograms per minute delivered shall be determined by timing and weighing a load of
mixed material. The “ dead load”shall be determined by weighing the “ mixer-full”of
material. The dry mixing shall be the product of the ratio of dry mixer length to the total
mixer length and total mixing time. The Engineer may vary the length of the dry and wet
mixing periods, but under no circumstances shall the total mixing time be less than 45
seconds.
The mixture shall be loaded into trucks in such a manner that segregation will not
occur.
The temperature ofthe mixture on arrival atthe project site shallbe as determined
by the Engineer in keeping with the temperature range set for the mix design and heat
losses intransit.
TRANSPORTING 6376. The mixed materials shall be transported from mixing plant to site in clean metal
MIXED lined vehicles. Every precaution is to be taken to avoid segregation of mixed materials
MATERIALS and to ensure that they do not become contaminated with dust or foreign matter. Covers
such as waterproofcanvas and other insulation shallbe provided when directed.
PREPARATION 6377. The area to be paved shall be true to line and grade, having a dry and properly
O F A R E A T O BE prepared surface prior to the start ofpaving operations. The area to be paved shall be free
PAVED from allscreenings, and other loose or foreign material.
Where a base is rough or uneven, a levelling course shall be placed by use of a
motor grader or spreader and shall be properly compacted before the placing of
subsequent paving courses.
When a levelling course is not required, all depressions and other irregularities
shall be patched or corrected in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. All fatty and
unsuitable patches, excess crack orjoint fillerand allsurplus bituminous material shallbe
removed from the area to be paved. Blotting of excessive deposits ofasphalt with sand or
stone shall not be permitted.
Where the area to be paved is an untreated soil or aggregate, it shall be primed.
The prime coat shall consist of an application of the asphaltic material indicated, and at
the rate specified in clause 6370. The prime coat shall be allowed to cure properly before
any further operations are permitted on the primed area.
A tack coat shall be applied when the surface to be paved is an existing Portland
Cement concrete, or dry asphaltpavement. When a tack coat isrequired, itshall consist of
an application ofthe asphaltic material indicated, and atthe rate specified in clause 6370.
In all cases, the emulsion shall be allowed to break before laying. Prior to
application of the tack coat, all loose or objectionable material will be removed from the
surface by brooming or other approved method. After cleaning, the surface shall be
inspected by the Engineer before the tack coat is applied. The tack coat will be applied
evenly and by mechanical sprayer of approved type which isto comply with B.S. 1707.
Where the time between the completion of one surface course and the laying of
the subsequent surface course exceed 72 hours, a tack coat shall be applied to the
preceding course as above, but at a rate of spread of 4 - 4.5 square metres per litre. Such
tack coat shall be at the Contractor's expense unless compliance with the 72 hours limit
was impracticable.
Tack coats shall be applied 24 hours in advance of bituminous surfacing work, or

such longer period as is necessary to ensure complete breaking of the bitumen emulsion
before bituminous surfacing are laid thereon. Traffic shall not be allowed on the tack coat
before surfacing workbegins. ‘
Concrete kerbs, channels and similar objects shall be adequately masked and protected
during the application oftack coats.
The surface of curbs, gutters, vertical faces of existing pavements and all
structure in actual contact with asphalt mixes shall be painted with a thin uniform coating
of asphalt material to provide a closely bonded water-tightjoint.
TRIAL A R E A S 6378. The first 30 metres of the approved bituminous mixture, which is laid by each
spreader shall be regarded as a trial area in order to establish a rolling procedure which
willproduce the required field density.
At least four samples ofthe material after rolling will be taken in accordance with
part 1 section 3 ol'B.S. 598: when the work is at least 1 2 hours old in order to determine
the degree ofcompaction.
If the required density determined in accordance with clause 6381 is not obtained, the
field rolling procedure will be changed so as to achieve the desired field density and the
trialarea willbe cut out and replaced to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer.
After mixing, the material must not be reheated other than by the means provided
in or on the spreading machine.
Materials tnust not be laid when the surface on which it is to be placed is wet or
when rain appears imminent.
• GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (ROADS AND BRIDGES)
Itis essential that the material be laid at a temperature not less than 121 °C and not
more than 163°C. The Contractor is to provide at each spreader and finisher a suitable
thermometer for testing the temperature of the material as ilisbeing spread and is to take
such temperature readings continually and record them hourly throughout each day's
laying. This record shall be available for inspection by the Engineer who will himself
make such additional temperature checks, as he considers desirable.
The materials shall be laid by approved mechanical paver in accordance with
clause 6384. The spreader paver shall be in good mechanical condition and shall be
capable oflaying to the required width and profile without causing segregation, dragging,
burning, irregularities or other surface defects. When not operated on side forms, the
paver will employ equalizing runners, cvcner arams or other automatic compensating
devices to adjust theprofile and confine the edges ofthe course to true lines.
As soon as the first load of material has been spread, the texture of the unrolled
surface shall be checked to determine its uniformity. The adjuslment of the screed,
tamping bars, feed screws, hopper feed, etc., shall be checked frequently to ensure
uniform spreading of the mix to proper line and grade and adequate initial compaction.
Segregation of materials shall not be permitted. If segregation occurs, the spreading
operation shall be immediately suspended untilthe cause isdetermined and corrected.
Any irregularities in alignment left by the paver shall be corrected by trimming

directly behind the machine. Immediately after trimming, the edges of the course shall be
thoroughly compacted by tamping. Distortion ofthe pavement during this operation shall
be avoided.
Edges against which additional pavement isto be placed shallbe vertically formed to true
line.A rake shall be used immediately behind the finisher, when required, to obtain a true
line and vertical edge. Any irregularities in the surface of the pavement course shall be
corrected directly behind the paver. Excess material fonning high spots shall be removed
by a shovel. Indented areas shall be filled with hot mix and smoothed with the back of a
shovel being pulled over the surface. Fanning of materials over such areas shall not be
permitted.
The mixer capacity and the operating speed of the spreader shall be so adjusted as
to ensure continuous laying and to avoid intermittent stopping of the spreader as far as is
practicable.
Hand spreading will not be permitted for general work, but will only be allowed for filling
localized depressions, or as directed by the Engineer.
Hand laying of any bituminous material will only be permitted in the following
circumstances:
(i) for laying regulating courses of irregular shape and varying thickness
(ii) in confined spaces where itis impracticable for a paver to operate.
(iii) for footways
(iv) at the approaches to expansion joints at bridges or viaducts
When a paver laying base material approaches an expansion joint at a bridge or

viaduct itshall be taken out of use as soon as there is a danger of the material being laid
fouling the joint. In laying the remainder of the pavement up to the joint and the
corresponding area beyond it by hand, the joint or joint cavity shall not be fouled with
surface material.
Hand-raking of wearing course material which has been laid by a paver and the
addition of such material by hand-spreading to the paved a r e a for adjustment of level will
only be permitted atthe edges ofthe layers ofmaterials or where otherwise directed by the
Engineer.
Where hand spreading and tamping is permitted, the mixed material is to be

dumped on delivery upon existing hard clean surface or on approved metal sheets outside
the area where itisto be spread and shallbe distributed in to place immediately by means
of hot shovels. It shall be spread with hot rakes in a uniformly loose layer to the depth
required.
Materials are to be laidto the depths necessary to give the required thickness after
compaction and they are to be finished true to profile.
The Contractor shall break out and remove at his own expense any asphaltic
concrete laid in trial areas if such asphaltic concrete fails to meet the specified
requirements for asphaltic concrete surfacing.
Iffor any reason the quality, grading or supply source ofaggregates or the quality
or source of bitumen is changed, or at any time the cause of variations outside the
permissible limits cannot be corrected for reasons beyond the contractor's control, the
engineer may require the contractor to carry out additional laboratory tests and/or the
construction of additional trialareas depending on the extent ofthe change or variation.
COMPACTION 6379. After spreading, the mix shallbe thoroughly andunifomily compacted by rolling
The initial “breakdown”rolling shall be done with three wheel smooth roller,
followed by intermediate rolling with high-pressure tyred pneumatic roller. The final
rolling shall be with a tandem roller. During rolling, the roller wheels shall be kept moist
with only sufficientwater to avoid picking up material.
Heavy equipment or rollers shall not be permitted to stand on finished surface
until it has thoroughly cooled. In the initial rolling the three-wheel smooth roller shall
proceed on to the fresh material with the rear or driven wheels leading. The rolling shall
start as soon after laying as conditions permit and when the material is still at a
. temperature of not less than 99°C. The weight per unit width of the rear wheel shall be
b e tw e e n 45 —65 K g p e r c e n tim e tr e width.
After the longitudinal joints and edges have been compacted, rolling shall start
longitudinally at the sides and gradually progress towards the centre of the pavement,
except on super-elevated, curves where rolling shall begin on the low side and progress to
the high side. Each pass of the roller shall overlap the preceding one by about one half
width of the rear wheel. The roller should move at a slow but unifomi speed not
exceeding 8 kilometres per hour. The roller shall be in good condition, and capable of
being reversed without backlash, and the line of rolling shall not be suddenly changed or
the direction of rolling suddenly reversed, thereby displacing the mix. Ifrolling causes
displacement of the material, the affected areas shall be loosened at once with shovels or
rakes and restoredto the original grade ofloose material before being re-rolled.
The intermediate rolling shall be done with a pneumatic roller exerting
compactive ground pressures between 5-6 - 8.4 kilograms per sq.cm. The Contractor
s h a ll f u r n is h to th e E n g in e e r c h a r ts o r ta b u la tio n s s h o w in g th e c o n ta c t a r e a s a n d c o n tr a c t
pressures for the full range of tyre inflation pressures and for the M l range of tyre
loadings for each type and size compactor tyre fumished. The inlemiediate rolling shall
follow the breakdown rolling as closely as possible and while the mix is still at a
tei邱 erature of 70°C - 850C. Rolling shall be continuous until the mix is thoroughly
compacted and the density specified in Clause 6381 is achieved. Turning of pneumatic
rollers on the hot mix, which causes undue displacement, shallnot be permitted.
The final rolling shall be accomplished with two-wheel tandem roller while the
material isstillwarm enough forthe removal ofrollermarks.
JOINTS 6380. All joints shall be vertical, properly formed to the correct line and level; if
necessary they shall be cut back to adbdeve tliis.A template made to the shape of the true
............... … . . . .190
line and width may be placed at each end of the construction joint line and width may be
placed at each end of tne construction joint to create vertical straight finish. Joints in the
surface course should be staggered with those in the binder course and must be kept
straight, when the abutting lane is not placed the same day or ifthe edge of the first strip
has been distorted by traffic, the joint shall be cut back to an even line and then be coated
with bitumen before laying the adjoining strip. Alljoints on completion are to present the
same texture, density and smoothness as other sections ofthe course.
FIELD DENSITY 6381. Density tests ofthe asphalt surfacing aftercompaction shallbe taken from the trial
OF R O L L E D area and later at intervals throughout the course of the work and compared with the
ASPHALT density of control specimens taken from the same material before laying, all in
accordance with the following procedure:
(a) A sample of mixed material will be taken from a lorry before the material
isdelivered to the spreader, and three specimens shall be made and their density measured
by the Engineer by the immersion method.
The average of the two close specimens will be taken as the control density ofthat
particularbatch.
(b) The pavement will be marked to show where the lorry load of material
(from which the sample was taken) is laid, so that field density samples can be taken for
comparison with the control specimen.
(c) After completion of rolling, three samples arc to be cut from each area so
marked inpositions indicated by the Engineer.
(d) The samples shall be taken in accordance with part 1 section 3 of B.S. 598
(1974) and the density calculated by weighing in air and weighing in water in accordance
with part 6 of B.S. 598 (1974). The average of two close results of the samples will be
taken as the density ofthe compacted material inthat area.
(e) This density will not be less than 100% of the control density determined
as above. When an approved rolling procedure has been established, each course will be
sam p led in accordance with the above at the rate of one sample area for each 84 square
metres placed or one sample area every 2 hours (whichever is more frequent). Material
which does not achieve the required density will either be cut out and replaced or be
further compacted until the required density isobtained.
F IN IS H E D 6382. The surfacing will be finished to the required levels shown on the drawings. A ny
LEVELS deviation exceeding 5 m m from these levels will be corrected at the Contractor's expense
by scarifying, cutting out and removing all loosened materials, adding new materials, as
required, reshaping and rolling. N o materials loosened by scarifying or cutting out, will
be leftin position or otherwise reused.
Except across the crown of a camber, the finished surface shall be of such
smoothness that when tested ith a 3 metre straight edge placed anywhere and in any
d ire c tio n on the surface, there shall not be a gap greater than 3 m m between the bottom of
the straight edge and the surface o f the pavement a n y w h e re along the S traight edge.
Should the new asphalt surface be dragged, churned up, become soft, show signs
of segregation, show that stripping of the binder from the aggregate has occurred or suffer
other damage during or afterbeing laid, the Contractor will remove the damaged or faulty
work at his own expense and replace with fresh material, laid and compacted to the
correct level and density to the approval ofthe Engineer.
ASPHALTIC 6383. (1) GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENT

CONCRETE
MIXI N G P L A N T All equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be of approved design and shall
be maintained in its best mechanical condition. Equipment shall be serviced and
.… ’，
•
： /外
lubricated away from the paving site; units that drip fuel, oil and grease shall be removed
from the project until such leakage is corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer. This is
necessary because fuel leakage can be injurious to newly laidasphaltic concrete.
(2) ASPHALTIC PLANT SITE
The plant site shall have sufficient storage space for separate stock piles; bins or
stalls for each size of aggregate, and the different aggregate sizes shall be kept separately
until they have been delivered by the feeder or feeders to the boot of the cold elevator or
elevators in meat and orderly condition and the separate stock pile shall be readily
accessible for sampling. Samples from each bin shall be graded from time to time for
conformity to design size otherwise adjustment may be necessary.
(3) T H E ASPHALTIC C O N C R E T E P L A N T
The plant shall be either the batch mixing type or the continuous mixing type meeting the
following requirements.
(A) REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PLANTS
(I) UNIFORMITY: The plants shall be so designed, co-ordinated and

operated to produce a mix uniformly within thejob-mix tolerances as specified in Clause
6374, Table VI-18 Paragraph 5.
(II) E Q U I P M E N T F O R PREPARATION OF ASPHALT
Tanks for storage ofasphalt shall be provided with a device for controlled heating
ofthe material to temperature requirements set forth in the specification. Heating shall be
accomplished by steam or oil coils, electricity or other means such that no flame shall
come in contact with the heating tank. All lines shall be checked periodically under full
pressure for leakage. All line valves shall have clear and permanent markings to indicate
all openable and closable positions. A circulating system for the asphalt of adequate size
to ensure proper and continuous circulation between storage tank and mixer during the
entire operating period shall be provided. All pipe lines and fittings shall be properly
insulated and heated. The discharge end of the circulating pipeline shall be maintained
below the surface of the asphalt in the tank while the pump is in operation. Storage tank
capacity shall be sufficientfor atleast one day's run.
(III) C OLD AGGREGATE FEEDER
The plant shall be provided with an accurate mechanical means for uniformly
feeding the mineral aggregate into the drier to secure a uniform production and a uniform
temperature. The feeder or feeders shall be capable of delivering the maximum weight of
aggregate sizes required in their proper proportion. The feeder shall provide for
adjustment of total and proportional feed and be capable of being locked in any position.
Wlien more than one cold elevator is used each shall be fed as a separate unit and the
individual controls shallbe integrated with a totalmaster control.
(IV) D R I E R
The plant shall include a rotary drum drier that will continuously agitate the
mineral aggregates during the heating and drying process. It shall be capable of heating
and drying all aggregates specified in the necessary quantities to supply the mixing unit
continuously at its operating capacity and at the temperature and maximum bitumen
content specified.
GHNRR.AI. SPECIFICATIONS (ROADS AND BRIDGES)
(V) SCREENS
The plant shall have screens of the shaker or vibrating type and be capable of
screening all aggregates to the sizes required for proportioning. The screens shall have
normal capacity slightly in excess of the full capacity of the mixer Or the drier. The plant
screens shallhave an efficiency such tKat when m e a s u r e d by weight there will be not more
than 5 % of oversize material in bin n. 1 (fine aggregate), not more than 15% undersize
and/or 1 0 % oversize in bin n. 2 and not more than 2 0 % undersize and/or 5 % oversize in
bin n. 3, and not more than 20% undersize and/or 0 % oversize in bin n. 4. The Contractor
shall expose the screens for inspection at the request of the Engineer. These screen
tolerances are for general guidance and shall not invalidate the specific job-mix
tolerances.
(VI) BINS
Bins shall be divided into at least three compartments for any mix composition
other than a base (binder) composition, and at least four comportments for a wearing
course. They shall be arranged to ensure separate storage of the appropriate fractions of
aggregate. The bin sizes shall be adequate for continuous operation of the plant at rated
capacity. Adequate additional dry storage shall be provided for mineral filler when
required and provision made forproportioning itinto the mix.
Each compartment shall be provided with an overflow pipe that shall be of such
size and location as to prevent any backing up ofmaterial into other compartments or bins
or against the screens. The overflow material shall be wasted.
(VII) A S P H A L T C O N T R O L UNIT
Satisfactory means, either by weighing, metering or volumetric measurements,

shall be provided to obtain the required amount of asphalt in the mix within the tolerances
specified. Where the quantity of asphalt is controlled by metering, provision shall be
made whereby the amount of asphalt delivered though the meter may be readily checked
by weight. Suitable steam jacketing or other insulation for maintaining the specified
temperature of asphalt in pipe lines, metres, weigh buckets, spray bars, flow lines or other
containers shallbe provided.
(VIII) T H E R M O M E T R I C E Q U I P M E N T
A n armoured thermometer reading from 90oC to 205oC shall be fixed in the

asphalt feed line at a suitable location near the discharge valve at the mixer unit. The plant
shall be further equipped with an approved dial-scale, mercury-actuated thermometer, a
recording electric pyrometer or other approved thermometric instrument having an
accuracy of ± 2°C and a sensitivity which will provide an indication of temperature
change at the rate of not less than 5°C per minute. It shall be so placed at the discharge
chute of the drisr to register autom atically or indicate the tcmpsr&turc of the heated
aggregate. The Engineer shall have the right to test the efficiency of thermometric
instruments for better control of asphalt, aggregate and mix temperatures. The Engineer
shall direct the immediate repair or replacement of any instrument yielding inaccurate or
inconsistent readings.
(IX) DUST COLLECTOR
The plant shall be provided with a dust collector, designed to waste, or return
uniformly to the hot elevator, all or part of the material collected as directed by the
Engineer. Prior to permitting the return of such collected dust, the Engineer shall examine
•itscharacteristics in relation to the mix requirements and shall designate the quantity to be
returned. Wh e n dust is permitted to be returned to the hot elevator, it shall be
accomplished by mechanical means in a constant and uniform flow. All plants shall have
■ 1...........I ::丽 F n r n r i T ^ 7 ~ W 7 r i r
mixer covers and such additional housing as may be necessary to ensure the proper
collection ofdust.
(X) SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Adequate and safe stairways to the mixer platform and guarded ladders to other
plant units shall be provided. All gears, pulleys, chains, sprockets and other dangerous
moving parts shall be well guarded and protected. Ample and unobstructed space shall be
provided on the mixing platform. A clear and unobstructed passage shall be maintained at
all times in and around the track loading space. This space shall be free from dripping
from the mixing platforms. A ladder, or platform, shall be so located at the truck loading
space to permit easy and safe inspection or sampling of the mix as itis delivered into the
truck. Adequate overhead protection should be provided where necessary. It is the
Contractor's responsibility to ensuie the plant or the plant site shall be free from fire
hazard.
(XI) M I X I N G TIME
All plants shall be equipped with a positive means to govern the time ofmixing.
(B) SPECIAL R E Q U I R E M E N T S F O R B A T C H T Y P E P L A N T S
(I) PLANT SCALE

Scales for any weigh-box or hopper may be of either the beam or springless dial type and
shall be ofa standard make and design, accurate to 0.005 ofthe indicated load.
When scales are of the beam type, there shall be tare beam for balancing the
hopper and a separate beam shall be provided which shall be capable of functioning when
the load being applied iswithin 45 kilograms ofthe weight desired. Each beam shall have
a locking device designed and so located that the beam can easily be suspended or thrown
into action.
Dial scales shall be springless and of a standard make. They shall be designed,
constructed and installed in such a manner. They shall also be of such size that the
numerical figures on the dial can be read at a distance of 3 metres. All dials shall be so
located as to be plainly visible to the operator at all times. The end of the pointer shall be
set close to the face ofthe dial and shall be free from excessive parallax. The scale shallbe
provided with adjustable pointers for marking the weight of each material to be weighted
into the batch, which shall automatically cut offfeeder system when the required weight is
attained. ^
Scales forthe weighing of asphalt shall conform to the requirements for aggregate
scales, except that beam scales shall consist of a full capacity beam and a tare beam. The
minimum graduation shall not be greater than 1 kilogram and there shall be attached a tell
tale device which will startto function when the load being applied iswithin 1 0 kilograms
ofthe weight desired. Dial scales for weighing the asphalt shall read to the nearest 450 gr.
All scales for weighing the asphalt shall have a capacity of not more than 15% of
the normal capacity ofthe mixer.
Scales shall be satisfactory to the Engineer and shall be tested and sealed as often
as the Engineer may deem itnecessaiy to ensure their accuracy. All weighing equipment
shall be substantially constructed and of a design which will permit easy realignment and
adjustment. Weighing equipment that easily gets out ofadjustment shallbe replaced when
so ordered. The Contractor shall provide and have at hand at least ten 25 kilogram
standard weights for frequent testing of all scales. For each scale, a suitable cradle, or
platform, shall be provided for applying the test load so that the load is uniformly
distributed. The testweights shallbe kept clean and stored near the scales.
Volumetric proportioning of heated and screened aggregates shall be permissible

provided the volumetric system is standard equipment furnished with the plant when first
sold by the manufacturer. Convenient and accurate scales and facilities shall be provided
for checking the measuring devices by weight.
(II) BINS
In addition to the requirements stated in clause 6383 (3A) each compartment shall be
provided with its individual outlet gate, designed and constructed so that when closed
there shall be no leakage into the weigh box. The gates shall be cut offquickly, completely
and easily and prevent excessive overdrawn.
(III) WEIGH B O X O R HOPPER
Equipment shall include a means for accurately weighing each bin size of
aggregate in a weigh box or hopper suspended on scales ample in size to hold a full batch
without hand raking or miming over. The weigh box or hopper shall be supported on a
fulemm with knife edges and shall be so constructed that they will not easily be thrown
out ofalignment. Gates on hopper shall be so constructed as to prevent leakage when they
are closed. Proportioning of aggregates and charging ofmixer shall be performed so as to
blend the aggregates thoroughly and prevent segregation in the mixer.
(IV) ASPHALT MEAS U R I N G EQUIPMENT
Asphalt measuring equipment provided on the plant shall be capable of accurately

measuring into each batch the required amount of asphalt within a tolerance of士0.3%.
When an asphalt bucket isused, itshall be a non-tilting type provided with a loose
sheet-metal cover. The capacity of the asphalt bucket shall be at least 10 % in excess ofthe
weight of asphalt required for a one-batch mix. The plant shall have a steam-jacketed
quick-closing, non-diipping, charging valve. The length of the discharge opening or
spray bar shall not be less than three-fourths of the length of the mixer and it shall
discharge directly into the mixer. The discharge system shall be designed and arranged to
deliver the asphalt the full length of the mixer in a thin, uniform sheet or in multiple
streams or sprays except in the case of a rotary mixer where the asphalt issprayed.
When a volumetric meter is used, the meter shall be designed and constructed so
that itwill automatically meter the asphalt into each batch. The dial to indicate the amount
of asphalt shall have a capacity of at least 1 0 % in excess of the weight of asphalt required
in one batch. The meter shall be constructed so that itmay be locket at any dial setting and
will automatically reset to this reading after the addition of asphalt to each batch. The dial
shall be in fall view of the mixer operator. The flow of asphalt shall be automatically
controlled so that itshall begin when the dry mixing period is over and all of the asphalt
required for one batch shall be discharged in not more than 15 seconds after the flow has
started. The size and spacing ofthe spray bar openings shallprovide a uniform application
of asphalt the full length of the mixer. The section of the asphalt flow line between the
charging valve and the spray bar shall be provided with a valve and outlet for checking
and testing the accuracy ofthe meter.
(V) MIXER
The plant shall have a mixer of approved type such as standard twin pug-mill
batch type, steam-jacketed and a batch capacity of not less than 1000 kilograms. It shall
be capable of producing a uniform mix within the job-mix tolerances established by the
Engineer. Deviation in size of batches will be permitted to provide for mixing batches
2 0 % below or 15% above the rated capacity of the mixer, provided the quality of the mix
isnot impaired. The paddles shall be set in such a manner to ensure a completely uniform
mix. Ifnot enclosed, the mixer box shall be equipped with a dust hood to prevent loss of
dust. The mixer shall be so constructed as to prevent leakage of contents until the batch is
to be discharged.
(VI) TIME L O C K A N D B A T C H C O U N T E R
The mixer shall have an accurate time lock to control the operation of a complete
mixing cycle by locking the weight box gate after the charging of the mixer3 until the
closing of the mixer gate at the completion of the cycle. The time lock shall also lock the
asphalt bucket throughout the dry mixing period and shall lock the mixer gate throughout
the dry and wet mixing periods. The dry mixing period is the interval of the time between
the opening of the weigh box gate and the application of asphalt. The wet mixing period is
normally the interval of time between the application of all asphalt and the opening of the
mixer gate for discharge. When asphalt is applied by a spray system, the wet mixing time
shall begin with the startofasphalt spray.
The Engineer shall, after tests of a few trialmixes, designate the length ofboth dry
and wet mixing periods to ensure a uniform and completely coated mix. Excessive wet
mixing shall be avoided. Control of the timing shall be flexible, permitting timed intervals
of not less than five seconds throughout cycles up to three minutes. A mechanical batch
counter, designed to register only completely mixed batches shall be installed.
(C) SPECIAL R E Q U I R E M E N T S F O R C O N T I N U O U S M I X I N G P L A N T S
(I) BINS
In addition to the requirements stated in clause 6383 (3A), each compartment shall
have sufficient capacity to ensure the minimum depth of aggregate necessary for the
proper cut-offaction of the bin outlet and to compensate for normal variation in depth due
to aggregate grading. The bin partitions shall extend close enough to the apron or vibrating
plate to prevent cross-flow ofthe unstrucked material.
(II) G R A D A T I O N C O N T R O L UNIT
The plant shall include a means for accurately proportioning each bin size of
aggregate either by weight or by volumetric measurement. When gradation control is by
volume, the unit shall include a feeder mounted under the compartment bins. Each bin
shall have an accurately controlled individual gate to form an orifice for volumetrically
measuring the material drawn from each respective bin compartment. The orifice shall be
rectangle, with one dimension, adjustable by positive mechanical adjuster and provided
with a lock. Indicators shall be provided on each gate to show the gate opening in
millilitres. Mineral filler, if specified, shall be proportioned separately from a suitable
hopper equipped with an adjustable feed which may be accurately and conveniently
calibrated and which shall be interlocked with the aggregate and asphalt feeds. The feeder
equipment for the mineral fillershall meet the approval ofthe Engineer.
(III) CALIBRATION A N D SAMPLING
The Contractor shall provide qualified personnel to calibrate the plant so that it
will produce the specific composition of mixture within the accuracy and uniformity
tolerances specified.
The plant shall be calibrated atthe beginning of each project and whenever there is
any change in source, size or unit weight of aggregate. The plant shall be re-calibratcd
whenever the actual weigh of bituminous concrete varies from its theoretical weight by
more than the specified limit or when the tolerance set forth in ^formula forjob-mix,5 for
the specified item are exceeded.
The plant shallbe equipped so thatbin samples weighing approximately 4.5 kg can
be conveniently obtained without intermingling or segregation of the aggregate.
(IV) SYNCHRONIZATION OF A G G R E G A T E A N D ASPHALT FEED

Satisfactory means shall be provided to afford positive interlocking control

between the flow of aggregate from the bins and the flow of asphalt form the meter or
other proportioning device. This control shall be accomplished by interlocking
mechanical means or by any positive method approved by the Engineer capable ofbeing
controlled by the operator. The aggregate bins shall be provided with automatic controls
and signal devices which will warn of low levels and which will automatically stop the
flow of all aggregate and asphalt to the mixer when the aggregate in any one bin isso low
thatthe feeder will not operate atset capacity.
The asphalt storage system shall be provided with automatic controls and signal
devices which will warn of low levels of asphalt and which will automatically stop the
entire plant operation when the asphalt storage level is to the point of exposing the feed
end ofthe asphalt suction line.
(V) MIXER
The plant shall have a steam-jacketed, twin-pugmill, continuous type mixer of

not less than 700 kilograms per minute rated capacity. The mixer shall be in first class
condition equipped with a sufficient number of blades of paddles and operated at such a
speed as to produce a properly and uniformly mixed composition within the job-mix
tolerance specified. The paddles shall be of a type adjustable for angular position on the
shafts and reversible by remote control to retard the flow of the mix. The mixer shall
carry a manufacturer's plate giving the net volumetric contents ofthe mixer atthe several
heights inscribed on the permanent gauge. The mixer shall have a cut off gate at its
discharge and adequately sealed against leakage between truck loads. The determination
ofmixing time shall be by a weigh method under the following method unless otherwise
required:
Mixing time in seconds =
Pugmill dead capacity inkilograms

Pugmill output inkilograms per second
The weights shallbe determined for thejob from the testsmade by the Engineer.
(VI) T R U C K S C ALES
The Contractor shall provide conveniently accessible platform trucks scales at

the plant site foruse in obtaining the net weight ofeach load offinished mix.
ASPHALTIC 6384. Bituminous concrete pavers shall be self-powered machines capable of

CONCRETE spreading and finishing the mixtures true to the line, grade and crown with or without the
PAVERS use of forms or side supports. For two-lane construction, pavers shall be capable of
laying to halfwidths plus or minus 150 mm. The screed assembly shall be such that itwill
be capable of laying courses from a minimum of 2.5 metres in width in steps of 150 m m
to a maximum of3.85 metres inwidth.
Pavers shall employ mechanical devices such as equalizing mnners, straight

edge runners, evener arms or other compensating devices that will adjust the grade and
confine the edge of the courses to true lines. Pavers shall be equipped with hoppers and
distributing screws of the reversing type to evenly place the mixtures in front of the
screeds.
The screed shall be a strike-off device operated by cutting, crowding or other

practical action which is effective on the mixtures without tearing, shoving or gouging
and which produces a finished surface without segregation. The screed shall be
adjustable as to level and shallhave an indicating level attached thereto in fullview ofthe
operator.
(R O A D S A N D B R I D G E S )
GEne^ lspecificati0NS -vices for

.ievellnag devices f〇 r
- e^îth blending 〇rJ^neiit stripeS 〇f surface
T加 p汉jvetfi au
awCi :产<气似
co u rse
, n l3 e capable of being opened at vanable ioâtd ^
conslS^ . deyiceandshallbecapable
The paver shallbe equipped with an efficient steering
oftravellingbothforwardandmrevêrse.
ROLLERS
or a
R 〇Uing e ^ e n t s.all — of - W h e e l and pne— ty， r〇Ue,
c mb
〇 i Sfbothdescnbedasfoll ws:
〇〇偏
(A) S T E E L - W H E E L R O L L E R S M a y be ^ ^ ^ ^ 2 tonne inweight

RollersoOOto l2t0^ e % w ^ ght^ 2^ '6 ^ weight These rollers shall be
and Three-Axle Tandem Rollers 0 fl2 0 ^ t〇 inders and under working conditions
Rollers shall be in good working condition and be freeh^ s^
from sticking to the rolls. Rollers shall also be free of flat areas, openings or projections,
which will mar the surface of the pavement.
The Three Axle Tandem Rollers shall be SO constructed that, when locked in
position for alltreads to be in one plane, th e r o lle r wheels are held with such rigidity that,
ife ith e r f r o n t o r will not vary from the plane by more than 6 mm.
(B) The pneumatic-tyre rollers shall be self-propelled, multiple-axle

multiple-wheel type with smooth-tread pneumatic tyres of equal size and diameter. T he
tyres shall be staggered on the axles at such spacings and overlaps as will provide
uniform compactive pressure for the full compacting width of the roller, when operating.
O scilla tio n o f the wheels, ifprovided, shall be in vertical plane only. The pneumatic têd
roller shall be capable of:
(I) being ballasted sufficiently to bring its loaded weight to at least 2V2times
itsown weight
(II) exerting compactive ground pressures at least 5.6 kilograms per square
centimetre 5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm2 preferred Vehicles used for the transportation o f hot-mix
a s p h a lt fo r m th e p l a n t to th e s ite o f w o r k s h a ll h a v e tig h t m e ta l b o tto m s a n d s h a ll b e fr e e
rrom dust, screenings, petroleum oils, volatiles or other mineral spirits which may affect
t e mix being hauled. The truck beds shall be painted or sprayed with a lime-water or
,Sh^n ®nce a ^ as often as required. After this operation the truck bed
shall be elevated and thoroughly drained, no excess solution shall be permitted.
When ordered by the Engineer, trucks shall be suitably insulated and oroviHeH
with covers of canvas or other material of sufficient size and weight to proteetthe load
from adverse weather conditions. When variations in size, speed and corSition of trucks
S ~ and C〇ntmU〇US 0perat10^ the E « r m a y order
INSPECTION 6385 ( 1) GENERAL SPbUFICATIONS (ROADS AND BRIDGES)
AND CONTROL For v . r • GENERAL PR 〇 V r s i 〇 N 〇
« 〇 f matenals and
materials of constructing
aena s a 丨丨beunderthec〇n_
Tanddirecti_
il" ^
f= n ^ = =
aild
(2) JOB-MIX FORMULA
the completed mix to^tceiSin 〇f,thC h〇tag^ ate and 〇 f

tolerances ofthejob-mix formula and ；
he ：rc witWn me
jr mix tolerances, or outside of the

— echangesX^^^ rrim tkc K〇t bins aftd
(3) SAMplingajnd t e s t i n g
n shallbe performed and combined analyses computed at least twi e . d^y 〇Aiw^ m the 〇
torenoon and onco in ^ fto n x w u n . a combined gradation and analyses shall be
f i! i0ar d at least twlce a day. If mate_ d0 not 麵 unif 麵，贿 e freq 職 1 咖
When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide representative

samples from each of the hot bins from convenient doors in the side of each bin, or by
drawing aggregate from each bin thi'ough the mixing chamber (without asphalt) into a
trunk or other receptacle. At least one sample shall be taken form each 250 tonne ofthe
mix being produced. S am p les shall be used to determine compliance with general and
specialrequirements.
PLANT TESTING LABORATORY
T he b itu m in ou s p lant testin g sha11 b e

square metres, with a ceilmg height of no^tlessen 2.3 ^ t〇
. w
fonn〇ne ：f S ^ —
T h eb x tu m in o u sp la n tte stin g la b o ra to ry sh a llh a v e :
⑴ - number and capacity for operate the

n\
required testing equipment and for drying samples

(3) fireextinguishers approved by the Engineer's Representative
(4) work benches for testing with dimensions not less than 0.75 metres by 3
metres
(5) a desk or table and atleasttwo chairs
(6) sanitary facilities convenient to the testing laboratory
(7) exhaust fan to outside air, with minimum blade diameter of 300 m m to
adequately handle laboratory dust and fumes
(8) telephone
(9) 4-drawer legal size filecabinet
(10) a sink with running water and attached drain-board and drain capable of
handling elutriable material
(11) a metal stand to hold sieves used inwashing elutriable material
(12) a 2-element hot plate or other comparable heating device, with suitable
dial type thermostatically controlled to adjust the heat, for drying
aggregates
(13) mechanical shaker and appropriate sieves conforming to
requirements of current B.S. 812 or A S T M designation E-II for
determining the gradation of coarse and fine aggregates in accordance
w i t h A S T M C 136orAASHTOT27.
(14) testing equipment meeting the requirements of current B.S. 598 (1974 or
A S T M D 2172 Method A for the extraction of bitumen from bituminous
paving mixtures)
(15) apparatus to perform the Marshall procedures as specifiedin B.S. 812 and
A S T M C 127 and C 128
(16) an oven of suitable size to contain enough bituminous paving mixture to
prepare 3 Marshall specimens
(17) other necessary small hand tools required for proper sampling and testing
ofmaterials
(18) library containing allBritish Standards referenced herein, A S T M Parts 10
and 11 and A A S H T O Tests, Part II. Approval of the bituminous plant and testing
laboratory by the Engineer will require all the above facilities and equipment in good
working order, during allperiods ofmix production, sampling and testing; and whenever
materials subject to the provisions of these specifications are being supplied or tested.
Failure to provide any of the above shall be sufficient cause for disapproving the
bituminous plant operations.
(CLAUSE 6386-6399 INCLUSIVE N O T USED)
SECTION VI - R O A D W O R K
PART (E) M I S C E L L A N E O U S •
KILOMETRE 6400. Where directed by the Engineer, new precast reinforced concrete kilometre posts
POSTS shall be provided to indicate distance in kilometres along the road. The kilometre posts
shall conform with the accepted standards of the Federal Ministry ofworks for kilometre
posts on Trunk ''A" Roads, as shown on Federal Ministry of Works Drawing No. 28016,
or such modification thereof as the Engineer may direct. Normally the new kilometre
posts shall be constructed of Grade 15 N / m m 2 concrete, be approximately 2.0 metres in
length and shall have a roughly triangular cross-section the back face being 300 m m wide
with two 5 0 m m perpendicular offsets and the two side surfaces being 4 0 0 m m wide with
the apex truncated to give a 50 m m flat surface. The kilometre posts shall be reinforced
longitudinally with three 16.0 m m diameter mild steel rods having 6 m m mild steel
stirrups at2 5 0 m m centres.
The kilometre posts shall be erected with the apex facing the road and shall be
located on the right hand side of the road (when looking towards the higher distance in
kilometres). They shall be set in a 600 m m x 750 m m x 380 m m (deep) block of grade 15
N / m m 2 concrete and shall project 9 0 0 m m above the ground level. The distance between
the nearest edge of the kilometre post and the edge of the ultimate carriageway shall not
be less than 3 metres.
All kilometre posts shall be twice painted with a white (non-reflective) paint and
have the letters and numbers stencilled on in green reflective paint. The lettering and
distance in kilometre and origin shall be approved by the Engineer.
Where existing kilometre posts are in good condition, the Engineer may direct
that these be taken down, painted and treated as for new kilometre posts and re-erectcd at
the correct chainages.
CULVERT 6401. Where directed by the Engineer, culverts shall be pro-provided with two precast
BEACONS concrete beacons located diagonally near the ends of the culvert as directed by the
Engineer. The beacons shall be cast of grade 15N/mm2 concrete and shall be 230 mm,
15 0 m m thick and 9 0 0 m m long and shall project 4 5 m m above the ground level.
They shall be set at the left hand side of the road with the broad face facing the
traffic and on this face shall be stencilled, in two coats of black oil paint figuring 2 0 m m
high on a two coat white painting background the appropriate mileage and culvert
number as directed by the Engineer.
The beacons shall be located in a readily visible position fiom the carriageway
and as near as possible to the ends of the culverts, but in no case shall they be nearer than
3.0 metres from the edge of the ultimate carriageway. All markings of culvert beacons
shall be completed before the issue of the completion certificate for the section of road in
question.
Where directed by the Engineer, the appropriate reference marks may be painted
on any flateasily visible and accessible surface ofthe culvert, such as on the head-walls of
box culverts, in lieu of culvert beacons. In such cases the figuring shall be stencilled as
described above on a white painted rectangular background as directedby the Engineer.
ROAD 6402. Where directed by the Engineer, road warning signs shall be provided by the
WARNING Contractor atapproaches to alldangerous curves, narrow bridges, railway level crossings
SIGNS etc. Warning signs shall be of approved standard design complying with the accepted
standards of the Federal Ministry of Works for use of Trunk Roads. They shall be
constructed ofplain single-sided pressed aluminium shall be suitably braced at the back
and shall be painted in the regulation maimer. They shall be mounted on 7 6 m m diameter
tabular steel posts when supported from the ground or, where such a support may not
cause an obstruction. They may be suspended as hown on the drawings or as may be
directed by the Engineer. ^
The signs shall be erected in such locations and in such numbers as shown on the
drawings or directed by the Engineer. They shall be erected, painted and completed in
every way prior to the issue of the completion certificate for the section of the works in
question.
Payment for road warning signs shall be made under the appropriate item in the
bill ofquantities or where no such item isincluded from the appropriate provisional sum.
ADVANCE 6403. The Contractor shall provide and erect advance direction signs in such numbers
DIRECTION and in such locations as directed by the Engineer. The signs shall be of approved design
SIGNS complying in allrespect with the accepted standards of the Federal Ministry of Works for
use on trunk A roads. Generally they shall consist of plain single-sided pressed
aluminium suitably braced at the back and painted in the regulation manner. The
Engineer shall supply to the Contractor a more detailed specification and drawings for all
advance direction signs required, showing their locations, sizes, structural details, type of
support etc. The signs shall be erected, painted and completed in every way prior to the
issue of the completion certificate for the section of the works in question. Payment for
advance direction signs shall be from the appropriate item in the bill of quantities of
where no such item isincluded, form the appropriate provisional sum.
C A R R I A G E W A Y 6404. O n completion of the surfacing of the carriageways etc. the Contractor shall
MARKINGS construct such carriageway markings as are shown on the drawings or that may be
directed by the Engineer.
For smooth dense textured road surfacing the markings shall consist of an approved ready
coated self-adhering thermoplastic material. Ifshall be suitably reflcctorised, be durable
and long-wearing containing adequate anti-skidproperties and the adhesive shall provide
sufficient bond between the markings and the road surface as to prevent any undue
movement either due to trafficaction or due to temperature variations.
For coarse-textured road surfacing such as surface dressing, the markings shall
consist of an approved quick-setting thermoplastic composition applied hot by an
approved “ line laying”machine. The composition shall be suitably reflectorised， have a
setting time of not exceeding 60 seconds, be durable, long-wearing and have adequate
anti-skid properties. When set the markings shall be sufficiently rigid and provide
sufficient bond with the road surface as to prevent any undue distortion or movement due
to traffic action or temperature variation.
The type and colour of markings to be used shall be decided by the Engineer for
the various kinds of usage and road surface and all markings shall be completed prior to
the issue of the completion certificate for the section of works in question. Payment for
carriageway markings shall be made per linear metres of marking from the appropriate
item in the bill of quantities or, where no such item is included, from the appropriate
provisional sum.
PRECAST 6405. All precast concrete kerbs shallbe in accordance with B.S. 340 and shall be ofthe
CONCRETE sizes and dimension shown on the drawings or directed by the Engineer. The kerbs shall
KERBS be manufactured using grade 20N/mm2 quality concrete and shall be cast in steel moulds
and adequately vibrated or pressed. The kerbs shall pass the tests for transverse strength
and the absorption ofwater tests as described inthe appropriate B.S. 340.
After casting they shall be lightly rubbed over with a carborundum stone and later
to a smooth finish,but shall not be slurried over with cement.
The kerbs shall be cured for a period of 14 days by protection from the direct rays
of the sun or from drying winds and for the first 7 days after manufacture they shall be
thoroughly saturated with water. Kerbs shall not be incorporated into the works until they
are atleast28 days old.
The vertical joints shall be filled in with grade M l mortar and flush pointed.
Where expansion joints occur in the carriageway, such jointing shall be extended in the
same plane through the kerbing and kerb base and ducking when provided.
Kerbs for radius work shall be puiposely made to the required internal and
external radii. For radii less than 6 metre, they shall be 5 0 0 m m long. All kerbs for radii
work in excess of 15 metres radius may be straight kerbs and shall be 5 0 0 m m long for
radii up to 30 metres. Otherwise than above, allkerbs shall be 10 0 0 m m long.
Where shown on the drawings, or directed by the Engineer's Representative,

precast concrete kerbs shall be laid on a grade 15N/mm2 concrete bed and haunched at
the back as directed. All kerbs shall be bedded on a layer of grade M 3 quality mortar and
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (ROADS .AND BRIDGES)
shall be laid true 1o line and level as shown on the drawings to the satisfaction of the
Engineer's Representative. Payment shallbe per linearmetre ofkerb from the appropriate
item inthe bill ofquantities.
PRE-CAST 6406. Where pre-cast concrete edging blocks are specified such as edging to footpaths,
CONCRETE they shall be of the sizes and di-mensions shown on the drawings or directed by the
EDGING Engineer, shall be in accordance with B.S. 340 and generally shall comply with the
BLOCKS provisions of the preceding clause for N/mm2 grade quality concrete and shall be laid as
directed true to line and level to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative.
Payment shall be made per linear metre of edging under the appropriate item in the bill of
quantities.
PRE-CAST 6407. Pre-cast concrete paving slab shall comply with B.S.368 etPrecast Concrete
CONCRETE Flags55.Except where otherwise stated to the contrary, or directed by the Engineer, S L A B
PAVING SLABS the slabs shall be 5 0 m m thick, and except where cutting is necessary, be of a uniform
width of450mm and a uniform length of 600mm. The paving slabs shall be adequately
vibrated or pressed and shall have a smooth hard-wearing non-skid finish.
The paving slabs shall be laid and bedded on approved compacted sand filling to
the correct level, grade and cross-fall, so that when tested with a 3 metre straight edge
placed in any position on the paving, the maximum deviation shall not exceed 6mm.
Joints between the paving slabs shall be filled in with a slurry of cement mortar grade
“M l ”brushed over the paving in a circular motion until all the joint cavities are
completely filledinto the satisfaction ofthe Engineer's Representative. Any excess slurry
shall be removed and as soon as the joints have sufficiently hardened the whole of the
paving shall be washed so as to leave the completed paving in a neat and workmanlike
manner.
The price for paving shall include all cutting, whether straight or cui-ved, laying,
bedding, jointing, etc., and payment shall be made per square m of completed paving
e t r e
from the appropriate item inthe billof quantities.
GULLEY 6408. As shown on the drawings, or as directed by the Engineer, precast concrete gulley
KERBS kerbs shallbe inserted atintervals in the kerbing to ensure a quick and complete nin-offof
surface rainwater from the carriageway. Gulley kerbs shall be constructed to the
dimensions shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer and shall comply in all
respects with the provisions of the relevant clause for precast concrete kerbs. The
Contractor's attention is drawn to the necessity for accurate gradients of the kerbs and the
edge of the carriageway, especially for flat gradients, to ensure that no surface water
ponds on the carriageway. Payment shall be per number of gulley kerbs placed from the
appropriate item in the bill ofquantities.
GULLEY 6409. Gulley pipes shall be inserted into all gulley outlet kerbs to convey the surface
PIPES water to the side drain or otherwise. The gulley pipes shall consist of approved P V C pipes
or Class B asbestos cement pipe (150mm) in diameter, but the Engineer may direct that
cast iron pipes be used where the pipe is under an access road etc. Where the depth of
cover is less than 3 0 0 m m on footpaths, or less than 9 0 0 m m m on carriageways, the gulley
pipe shall be bedded on a 300ram by 150mm concrete bed and given a 7 6 m m thick
concrete surround in giade l5N/mm2 concrete. Where a concrete bed or surround is not
used, the gulley pipe shall be adequately supported and anchored in position at the kerb
and at its outlet by a bed and surround of grade 15 N/m m 2 concrete at last 3 0 0mm long.
V^/hen completed, all gulley pipes shall be flushed with water so as to leave the full
internal of the pipe free from any mortar, concrete or other debris. Payment for gulley
pipes shall be per linear metre of pipe and shall include all anchoring, fixing and.
necessaryjoining, but shall not include the provisions ofa concrete bed and surround.
PRE-CAST 6410. Wliere the outlet of gulley pipes is over an embankment, or where the existing
CONCRETE ground is liable to erosion or otherwise as directed by the Engineer's Representative,
CHANNELS precast concrete half-round channels of225mm diameter or as directed， shall be laid to
form a water course leading from the outlets ofthe 15 0 m m diameter gulley pipes.
The channels shall be cast in 600 m m lengths of grade 15 N / m m 2 concrete and

shall be accurately laid on a prepared bed, true to line and level and jointed with Grade
M.3 mortar to the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative. Both extremities of the
channel shall be securely anchored and set in a bed of Grade 15 N / m m 2 concrete
approximately at least 7 5 m m wider than the external width of the channel and 150mm
thick. Prior to the laying of the channels, the soil bed shall be properly shaped and
compacted toprovide an even bed forthe channels throughout the whole oftheirlength.
Payment shall be per linear metre of channel laid, including all necessary
bedding, jointing and anchoring, from the appropriate item inthe billofquantities.
CAT'S E Y E S 6411. If shown on the drawings or directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
provide and fix in position approved standard-type reflecting road studs known as 4tcat's
eyes55.Payment shall be per number of cat's eyes provided and fixed. And shall include
for all cutting out of the road surface and making good as necessary to the satisfaction of
S T REET 6412. Wliere provision for street lighting is included in the bill of quantities forming
LIGHTING part of the main contract, the Engineer shall issue to the Contractor a separate street
lighting specification and drawings for each individual project. The street lighting
system shall be of the electrical type and generally shall comply with the relevant
provision of the British standard code of practice, <CC.P. 1004 parts 1 and 2 - Street
lighting", or such other provisions specified by the Engineer. The types of cables,
controls, lanterns and mountings to be employed shall be specified by the Engineer and
the source and manufacturers of same, shall be approved by the Engineer. The actual
electrical installation shall be carried out by a competent electrical sub-Contxactor to be
approved by the Engineer.
Payment for street lighting shall be made from the appropriate items in the bill of
quantities, or, where no such items are included, from the appropriate provisional sum.
The street lighting shall be completed and tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer's
Representative prior to the issue of the completion certificate for the section of work in
question.
TRAFFIC 6413. Where provision for traffic control lights are included in the bill of quantities
LIGHTS forming part of the main contract, the Engineer shall issue to the Contractor a separate
traffic lipht specification and drawings for each individual set employed. The traffic
control lights shall be electrically operated and the types of cables, controls, lanterns and
mountings shall be specified by the Engineer, and their source and manufacturers shall
be approved by the Engineer. The actual electrical installation shall be carried out by a
competent electrical sub-Contractor, to be approved by the Engineer.
Payment for traffic lights shall be made from the appropriate items in the bill of
quantities or, where no such items are included, from the appropriate provisional sum.
The traffic control lights shall be completed and tested to the satisfaction of the
Engineer's Representative prior to the issue of the completion certificate for the section
ofwork in question.
ILLUMINATED 6414. Wliere illuminated guard posts, such as t4keep right55signs at roundabouts, etc.,
G U A R D POSTS are to be provide, they shall be of the electrically operated, internally illuminated type
having a pressed steel fluted type body with a vitreous enamel finish and rust proofed
steel lantern with a stove enamel finish. For roundabouts, etc., the guard post shall be
fittedwith a single aspect lantern having one 6 0 0 m m x 3 0 0 m m "keep righf,glasspanel.
204
The Engineer shall issue to the Contractor a comprehensive specification and

drawings for each individual type of guard post, indicating the types of cables, controls,
lanterns and mountings to be employed and the source and manufacturers ofsame shall be
subject to his approval. The actual electrical installation shall be carried out by an
approved competent electrical sub-Contractor.
Payment for guard posts shall be made from the appropriate items in the bill of
quantities or, where no such items are included, from the appropriate provisional sum.
The guard posts shall be completed and tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer's
Representative prior to the issue of the completion certificate for the section of work in
question.
G U A R D RAILS 6415. A. Scope

DRAWINGS
The work covered by this Clause consists of the construction of beam guard rails
mounted on concrete or steel posts as shown on the or as ordered by the Engineer's
Representative.
B. Material
1• Steel rail elements shall conform to the D R A W I N G and shall be ofArmco

Flex-Beam Guardrail of 12 gauge, non-galvanized or equivalent. The minimum tensile
strength-when tested in. conjunction with splices and end connections shall be 40,000
kg/cm2, and the bolts attaching the rail element to posts shall be 15 m m in diameter.
Splices and end connections shall be as shown on the D R A W I N G S and the

minimum tensile strength of the splice and end connection assembly shall be 40,000
kg/cm2.
2. Concrete posts shall conform to the design shown on the D R A W I N G S .

The concrete shall be of 20 N / m m 2 and shall conform to the applicable requirements of
SECTION II - C O N C R E T E : M A S S A N D R E I N F O R C E D of the G E N E R A L
SPECIFICATION; “ PART 8 - W O R K M A N S H I P ”Reinforcing steel shall be as shown
on the D R A W I N G S and shall conform to the applicable requirements of SECTION II -
C O N C R E T E : M A S S A N D R E I N F O R C E D of the G E N E R A L SPECIFICATION; PART
WORKMANSHIP
3. Steel posts shall conform to the design shown on the D R A W I N G S and

shall conform to the applicable requirements of SECTION II - C O N C R E T E : M A S S
A N D R E I N F O R C E D ofthe G E N E R A L SPECIFICATION.
4. White paint shall conform to the requirements of the applicable British

Standards and the painting clauses set forth in Section V Clause 5049.
C. Method ofConstruction
The concrete posts shall be set in excavated holes and the backfill shall be fmnly
tamped in layers not more than 150mm thick in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer's
Representative.
All posts shall be plumb, properly spaced and to the prescribed line and grade.
Post holes shall be excavated to such depth that backfill below the posts will be kept to the
minimum and, if any such back fill shall be thoroughly compacted before setting the
posts. •
=205
The railelements shall be erectedto the required grade and line with the top edge in
a straight line or smooth curve, parallel to or concentric with the roadway. Where a vertical
transition is required, the top edge of rail elements shall form the chords of a smooth
vertical curve. At each end post, a single terminal section of rail element shall be erected
and lapped in the direction oftraffic.
The Contractor's attention is directed to the details of guardrail transition at the

approach end ofthe guard railing as shown on the D R A W I N G S .
No punching, drilling, reaming, cutting .orwelding of the rail elements or terminal

sections will be permitted in the field unless provided for on the D R A W I N G S or
specifically approved by the Engineer.
All bolts and nuts attaching the rail element to the posts shall be hot-dip galvanized
inaccordance with the currentA S T M Designation 153.
All metal parts that are not galvanized shall be thoroughly cleaned and shop-
painted with one coat of rust-inhibitive primer. Any metal surfaces from which the shop
coat of rust-inhibitive primer has worn off, or on which the primer has become defective
otherwise, shall be given a brush coat of the above-specified rust-inhibitive primer before
tlie fir s t c o a t o f w h ile p a in i is a p p lie d . All e x p o s e d parts of the guardrail shall be given two
field coats of white paint. Paint shall not be applied over a previous coat, which is not
thoroughly dry.
D. Measurement
The quantity ofbeam guard railfor which payment will be made will be the sum of
the overall lengths of all sections of new beam guard rail constructed in accordance with
the D R A W I N G S and Specifications or as directed by the Engineer's Representative,
measured along the face of the guard rail, including the terminal sections of the rail
element.
E. Payment
Payment for beam guard rail shall be made at the unit rate shown in the Bill of
Quantities which price shall include furnishing and erecting the guard rail complete,
including excavation, backfilling, furnishing and setting posts, priming, painting,
preservation treatment, the furnishing of all materials, labour and equipment, and all else
necessary therefore and incidental hereto.
D E L I N E A T O R S 6416. The Contractor shall furnish and erect delineators of hermetically scaled acrylic
plastic prismatic reflector housed in embossed aluminium and provided with a single
grommeted mounting hole, mounted on galvanized “ U ”section channel post as shown on
the D R A W I N G S or as directed by the Engineer's Representative.
1. Materials
a. Prismatic Reflectors
The housing shall be 0.50mm aluminium formed to approximately 8 5 m m in

diameter and 6 m m in depth to retain the acrylic reflector. Housing shall be provided with
embossed reinforcement ribs.
A corrosion resistant metal grommet with 5 m m inside diameter shall be expanded
within the reflectormounting hole. The reflector shallbe acrylic plastic and the Contractor
shall specify the manufacturer of the raw material and the identification number of the
particularmoulding compound to be furnished.
Acceptable formulations:
T A B L E VI-19: A C C E P T A B L E F O R M U L A T I O N S F O R T Y P E O F M O U L D I N G
COMPOUND
TRADE TYPE OF
MANUFACTURER NAME MOULDING
COMPOUND
E.I. D U P O N T
DENEMOURS AND LUCITE MH-140
CO. INC.
R O H M AND HAAS
CO. O R FLEXIGLASS V
EQUIVALENT
The reflector shall consist of a clear and transparent plastic face with 45.0 sq.cm
of relecting area, herein referred to as the lens with a heat resistant plastic coated iDack
fused to the lens under heat and pressure around the entire perimeters of the lens and
control mounting hole to form a unit permanently sealed against dust, water and water
vapour. The reflector shallbe colourless.
The lens shall consist of a smooth front surface free from projection or indentation
other than a central mounting hole and identification with a rear surface bearing, a
prismatic configuration, such that it will reflect total internal reflection of light. The
manufacturer's trade mark shallbe moulded legibly into the face ofthe lens.
b. Galvanized Steel Posts
Galvanized Steel posts for delineators shall be “ U ”section channel posts as

shown O N D R A W I N G S and weigh not less than 1.0 kg/m nor more than 2.75 kg/metre as
approved by the Engineer's Representative. The channel posts shall be drilled or punched
as shown on the D R A W I N G S . All holes shall be provided before galvanizing. Oversize
holes shallbe backed up with rectangular washers as stated hereinafter.
All steel posts shall be mild steel No. 1 quality entirely in accordance with the
requirements ofB.S. 15.All sections shall conform to British Standard dimensions.
All steel posts shall be entirely galvanized after fabrication, including cutting and
punching or drilling, in accordance with Clause 5063 of the G E N E R A L
SPECIFICATION.
c. Hardware
Bolts for connecting centre-mounted reflectors to the posts shall be Phillips

round-headed bolts of aluminium alloy 2024-T4 or equivalent with 8-32 or 10-24 thread,
and with square or hexagon aluminium nuts. Ifpost mounting holes are larger than 6 m m
diameter, provide rectangular aluminium backing washers, 1.0mm thick, minimum, with
holes 5.0mm to 6.00mm diameter and large enough to provide satisfactory area of
bearing against the post. Reflectors may also be fastened to theirrespective posts by blind
rivets or bolts, provided aluminium washers are used at oversize holes; rivets and riveting
or tightening device and technique may be used if only they are approved by the
Bolts shall be of such length that in no case shall the exposed threaded length of a bolt
extend beyond the tightened bolt more than 1Oram.
2. Methods of Construction
All delineators shall be located and erected in conformance with the D R A W I N G S or as
directed by the Engineer's Representative and all delineator pots and reflector mountings
shall be plumb. The top of posts shall have substantially the same cross sectional
dimensions as the body of the posts; no battered heads will be permitted. A suitable
driving cap shall be used whenever posts are driven. Ifposts are set in earth, post holes
shall be backfilled with suitable material placed in layers not more than 150mm in depth
and each layer shall be thoroughly compacted.
All posts shall be in the finalposition before attaching reflectors
Topmost centre mounted reflectors shall be mounted on posts through holes

having an edge distance from the top of post of not less than 1 0 m m or more than 25mm.
Centre to centre spacing of delineators shall be 100mm. All fasteners shall securely grip
their respective reflectors. Reflectors shall show no sign of damage after being mounted.
Rectangular washers described herein above shall be used under nuts whenever
mounting holes exceed 6.0mm diameter.
The Contractor, at his own expense, shall replace or repair to the satisfaction of
the Engineer's Representative any delineators, removed or damaged in any way prior to
the acceptance ofthis work.
3. Quantity and Payment
The quantity of delineators for which payment will be made shall be the number
of delineators actually furnished in accordance with the D R A W I N G S , the Specification,
and as directed by the Engineer's Representative.
Payment for the delineators shall be made for the quantities as above determined,
atthe unit price shown in the Bill of Quantities, which price shall include the cost ofposts,
mounting plates, plastic reflectors, hardware, galvanizing, driving or setting of posts, all
excavation and backfilling, drilling in rock and grouting, allmaterial, equipment, labour,
and allelse necessary thereofand incidental thereto.
TELEPHONE 6417. The Contractor shall furnish and install telephone poles where and as shown on
POLES the D R A W I N G S or as directed by the Engineer's Representative.
All work under this Clause affecting the property, right-of-way and facilities of
the Posts and Telegraphs Department, Ministry of Communication (hereinafter called as
Owners) shall be carried out under joint supervision ofthe Engineer's Representative and
the said Owners in a manner satisfactory to both. The Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer's Representative detailed working drawings and written description of the
intended construction methods and shall obtain approval from the Engineer's
Representative.
After approval of the working drawings and/or working plans, the Contractor
shall furnish the said owners, through the Engineer's Representative, with as many
numbers ofprints of such drawings as required by the said owners. N o work affecting the
safety, operation or maintenance of the utilities shall be commenced or prosecuted until
written approval of the owners has been obtained. This provision must be complied with
before the Contractor begins actual construction work.
Payment shall be made at the unit price for this item tendered in the Bill of
Quantities. Payment shall include all costs for furnishing materials, equipment and
labour, and for all costs for coordination of all construction activities with the owners.
■ 208
The installation shall be completed and tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer's
Representative and of the owners prior to the issue of the completion certificate for the
work in question.
A N N E X U R E T O T H E G E N E R A L SPECIFICATION
( R O A D A N D BRIDGES)
P E N E T R A T I O N (GROUTED) M A C A D A M
GENERAL 6500. Penetration macadam shall consist of a compacted wearing course of coarse
crushed rock aggregate laid upon a prepared base and grouted with straight run bitumen.
For keying the penetration layer 1 9 m m and 1 0 m m crushed rock chippings shall be used.
Surface sealing shall be carried out using either a straight run or cut back bitumen as
specified and 1 2 m m crushed rock chippings.
MATERIALS 6501. The materials to be used in penetration macadam shall comply with the
following:(
a) The coarse aggregate for the wearing course shall consist ofclean crushed rock dry and
free from dust. The aggregate crushing value shall not exceed 23%. The aggregate shall
be graded as shown inthe table below.
T A B L E VI-20 C O A R S E A G G R E G A T E GRADING ENVELOPES FOR

PENETRATION M A C A D A M
Percent Passing
Sieve 80mm thick 50mm thick
base base
63.5m m 100 -
50.8m m 90- 100 100
38.1mm 30-80 80-100
25.4mm 0- 15 30-80
19.0m m - 0- 15
(b) The 1 9 m m aggregate for keying the penetration layer of coarse aggregate
shall comply with B.S. 63—“ Single sized Road Stone and Chippings”，
(c) the 1 0 m m aggregate for keying the penetration layer of coarse aggregate
shall c o m p ly w ith the grading sh ow n in the table below :
T A B L E VI-21:G R A D I N G E N V E L O P E F O R K E Y I N G T H E P E N E T R A T I O N L A Y E R
OF PENETRATION M A C A D A M
Sieve Percentage Passing
12 m m 100
9.5mm 90-100
6.4mm 5-20
600am 0-10
(d) T h e 12 m m a g g re g a te fo r th e se al c o a t sh a ll c o m p ly w ith
B .S . 63 “ S in g le s iz e d ro a d S to n e an d C h ip p in g s” .
(e) The bitumen for grouting the penetration macadam shall

be a straightrun bitumen as specified in Clause 6301 (iii).
(f) The bitumen for the seal coat shall be either a straight run or cut back
bitumen as specified in Clause 6301 (ii)or Clause 6301 (iii).
(g) A n approved anti-stripping additive shall be incorporated in the bitumen
when this isdirected by the Engineer. The additive shall be mixed with the bitumen by the
supplier during manufacture so as to ensure a uniform dispersion ofthe additive.
(h) The specification for the various grades of aggregate required is devised
so that the lull range of crushed stone produced will be used except for the fines passing a
5 m m screen. Aggregate in the 63.5mm to 19.0mm range will be used in the base layer.
Aggregate in the 19.0mm to 12mm and 1 0 m m to 5 m m range shall be used as keystone.
Aggregate in the 1 2 m m to 1 0 m m range shall be used as chippings in the seal coat. The
above will apply provided always that the efficiency of the screening arrangements is
such that the gradings ofeach range ofaggregate comply with the specifications.
W O R K M A N S H I P 6502. (1) The coarse aggregate shall be spread by mechanical means on the
prepared base in a uniform loose layer so hat after itis fully compacted itshall be of the
specified thickness. The layer of coarse aggregate shall be rolled to the correct shape
longitudinally and transversely by a three-wheel, steel-tyred, roller weighing not less
than 9 tonne or by a vibratory rollerof same capacity and having a minimum weight of 54
kilograms per centimetre width of rear wheel. Any irregularities shall be corrected by
loosening the surface and removing or adding aggregate as required and re-compact.
Rolling shall be continued until thorough interlocking is obtained and there is no
movement under the action of the roller. Rolling shall be stopped ifthe aggregate begins
to crack or crush. The finished surface shall show uniform voids and when tested with a 3
metre straight edge placed parallel to the centre line of the road shall not show any
variation greater than 12mm. The transverse profiles shall conform to the same accuracy
using a correctly shaped rigid fabricated metal template instead of a straight edge. The
length ofthis template shallnot be less than the width ofthe base.
(2) Straight run bitumen shall then be sprayed as specified in Clause 6313 on
the shaped and compacted layer of coarse aggregate at the rte of 0.71 to 0.89 litres per
sq.m per centimetre of compacted thickness. The actual rate of application shall be
deteraiined by the Engineer's Representative after tests have been carried out on site, as
described in Clause 6503.
(3) Immediately following the applications of the bitumen and while itis still
warm , the key-stone shallbe spread evenly over the surface so as to key the surface voids.
The key-stone shall be applied in successive layers. The firstlayer shall be 19.0mm. Key
stone applied in just sufficient quantity to prevent the roller wheels sticking. As rolling
continues further 19.0mm and 1 0 m m keystone shall be spread and lightly broomed over
the surface and rolled until all the voids in the coarse aggregate have been filled but
without having an excess of loose key stone on the surface. Rolling shall continue until
the key-stone is thoroughly embedded and the stone layer shows no movement under the
roller. The proportions of 19.0mm and 10 m m key-stone to be used and the order in which
• they shall be used shall be determined after trial sections have been constructed as
described in Clause 6503.
(4) When the spreading and rolling of the key-stone have been completed to
the satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative, the road shall be opened to traffic as
specified inClause 6316.
ii ................................................... ...
(5) The seal coatshallnotbe applieduntilatleast 10 days afterthe completion

of the wearing course. During this period additional tey-StOWt fcedpA
and brushed into any m u y uppcax uuaci ait; aciion ot the traffic. After such
period any irregularities or areas of failure due to workmanship shall be cut out and made
good to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer's Representative. After allremedial work has been
allowed sufficienttime to harden and settle under the action of traffic, the surface shall be
swept clean of all loose material and the seal coat shall be applied as described for the
wearing coat in Clause 6313 except that the bitumen will be sprayed at the rate of 1.30 to
1.50 litresper sq.m.
(6) On completion of the seal coat the road shall be opened to traffic and
speeds shall be restricted to a maximum speed of 25 km/h for one day following the
opening.
TRIAL 6503. The Contractor shall constmct trial sections at least 90 metres long to determine
SECTIONS the most efficient construction technique and the suitability of the materials and plant to
be used. If the trial sections are satisfactory they shall be incorporated in the finished
work.
TESTS 6504. (1) The rate of application of the bitumen shall be checked as specified in Clause
6223. When tests are carried out on the rate of application ofthe bitumen used in grouting,
the test trays shall be provided with lips of sufficient depth to prevent loss of bitumen
through overflowing.
(2) Holes 30 0 m m square shall be cut in the stone layer to the full depth where
directed by the Engineer's Representative who shall determine by visual inspection the
degree of penetration of the bitumen. The Engineer's Representative may order such
variation in the rite of spread or application temperature of the bitumen as he may
consider necessary to obtain the most uniform penetration of the bitumen throughout the
fulldepth ofthe stone layer.
PiPiMMiWiPMW— — — —

General Specification Road and Bridges Rv-2016

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

General Specification Road and Bridges Rv-2016

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GOVERNMENT OF THE FEDERAL REPUBLIC OF NIGERIA

THE DIRECTOR OF FEDERAL HIGHWAYS

SECTION VI: ROADW ORKS

. PART (B) - EARTHW ORKS, DRAINAGE, ETC.

(II) W ORKM ANSHIP

BACKFILLING 0 F B ^ S T 0 ^ B€^R(>W P i m :……：,................ :••二............ ..... ...............—

6147 EXTENSION OF EXISTING PIPE CULVERS......................... .........................................................135

PART (C) - SUB-BASE, BASE COURSE, ETC.

6200 GENERAL ...... ....... ...... ...............................................................一. . ........— —.141

(II) SOIL CEMENT SPECIFICATION

(III) CRUSHED STONE

6256 LAYING A N D COMPACTING CRUSHED STONE-DRY PROCESS...................................................161

(H 〇 CONCRETE CARRIAGEWAY CONSTRUCTION

6290 SPREADING A N D COMPACTION WITH A FINISHING MACHINE OR

PART (D): SURFACING

(II) BITUMINOUS MACADAM SURFACINGS

(in) ASPHALTIC CONCRETE

6372 APPROVAL OF M A T E R I A L S :...........................................................，“. . . . ...............,..--183

6375 PREPARATION … .......-•••…..."•••••":•

PART (E): MISCELLANEOUS

ANNEXURE TO THE GENERAL SPECIFICATION

FEDERAL MINISTRY OF POWER^ WORKS & HOUSING

CLAUSES: INDEX.................................................................................................... i - xvi

SECTION II CONCRETE: MASS AND REINFORCED.......................... 2 3 -5 3

SECTION m PRESTRESSED CONCRETE................................................ 5 4 - 7 0

SECTION V BRIDGEWORKS..................................................................... 85 - 108

SECTION VI ROADWORKS........................................................................ 109-211

PART (B) - MATERIALS AND TESTING

1051 UNSATISFACTORY TEST RESULTS........................................................................................................18

PART (C) - MISCELLANEOUS

PART (B) - WORKMANSHIP

PART (C) - PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS

PART (D) - CEMENT MORTARS AND GROUTS

PART (A) - MATERIALS

PART (B) - WORKMANSHIP

PART (B) - T E ST D R IV IN G A N D T E ST L O A D IN G O F PILES

PART (C) - P R E C A ST R EIN FO R C E D C O N C R E T E BEA R IN G

PART (D) - CAST-IN-PLACE REINFORCED CONCRETE

4060 CAST-IN-PLACE REINFORCED CONCRETE PILES TYPE “ B” ................................................ 78

PART (E) - C A ST-IN -PLA C E R E IN FO R C E D C O N C R ETE PILES TYPE “D ”

PART (F) - PR E ST R E SSE D C O N C R E T E C Y L IN D E R PILES TY PE “E ”

PART (G) - PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES OF TYPE “E”

PART (H) - STEEL SHEET PILES

PART (A) - PRELIMINARIES, EXCAVATIONS, FOUNDATIONS,

PART (B) - STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

FEDERA1 riNISTOY OF POWER, WORKS & HOUSING

The drawings and specifications are intended to complement and supplement

On the drawings, figured dimensions shall govern in case of discrepancy between

Where applicable the abbreviations used in the Specification and Bill of

“A.A.S.H.T.O.” or “A.A.S.I.T.O..” refer to the Specifications used by the

“A. S.T.M.” refer to the American Society of Testing Materials.

“DOE” refer to Department of Environment, United Kingdom

“F.M.W.” refer to The Federal Ministry of Works of the Government of the

“NIS” refer to the Nigerian Industrial Standards

“SON” refer to the Standard Organization ofNigeria

^WAS-C.55refer to the West African Standard Compaction.

Two copies of each drawing shall be submitted to the Engineer's Representative in

SETTING-OUT The attention of the Contractor is directed to Clause 17 of the Conditions of

To enable the Engineers Representative to check the accuracy of the Contractor's

NOTICE OF No important operation and, in particular, no blocking or cutting of any road,

(1) Date photograph was taken.

(C) Before the commencement of the period of maintenance the Contractor

TRAFFICROUTES 1028. There shall be no unnecessary obstruction of roads, railways, footpaths,

Where directed by the Engineer, temporary single or double tracks shall be